diff options
Diffstat (limited to 'FreeRTOS/Demo/CORTEX_MPU_M3_NUCLEO_L152RE_GCC/ST_Code/Drivers/STM32L1xx_HAL_Driver/Src')
14 files changed, 18047 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/FreeRTOS/Demo/CORTEX_MPU_M3_NUCLEO_L152RE_GCC/ST_Code/Drivers/STM32L1xx_HAL_Driver/Src/stm32l1xx_hal.c b/FreeRTOS/Demo/CORTEX_MPU_M3_NUCLEO_L152RE_GCC/ST_Code/Drivers/STM32L1xx_HAL_Driver/Src/stm32l1xx_hal.c new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1e4b51b77 --- /dev/null +++ b/FreeRTOS/Demo/CORTEX_MPU_M3_NUCLEO_L152RE_GCC/ST_Code/Drivers/STM32L1xx_HAL_Driver/Src/stm32l1xx_hal.c @@ -0,0 +1,559 @@ +/**
+ ******************************************************************************
+ * @file stm32l1xx_hal.c
+ * @author MCD Application Team
+ * @brief HAL module driver.
+ * This is the common part of the HAL initialization
+ *
+ @verbatim
+ ==============================================================================
+ ##### How to use this driver #####
+ ==============================================================================
+ [..]
+ The common HAL driver contains a set of generic and common APIs that can be
+ used by the PPP peripheral drivers and the user to start using the HAL.
+ [..]
+ The HAL contains two APIs categories:
+ (+) Common HAL APIs
+ (+) Services HAL APIs
+
+ @endverbatim
+ ******************************************************************************
+ * @attention
+ *
+ * <h2><center>© Copyright (c) 2017 STMicroelectronics.
+ * All rights reserved.</center></h2>
+ *
+ * This software component is licensed by ST under BSD 3-Clause license,
+ * the "License"; You may not use this file except in compliance with the
+ * License. You may obtain a copy of the License at:
+ * opensource.org/licenses/BSD-3-Clause
+ *
+ ******************************************************************************
+ */
+
+/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#include "stm32l1xx_hal.h"
+
+/** @addtogroup STM32L1xx_HAL_Driver
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup HAL HAL
+ * @brief HAL module driver.
+ * @{
+ */
+
+#ifdef HAL_MODULE_ENABLED
+
+/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+/** @defgroup HAL_Private_Defines HAL Private Defines
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief STM32L1xx HAL Driver version number
+ */
+#define __STM32L1xx_HAL_VERSION_MAIN (0x01) /*!< [31:24] main version */
+#define __STM32L1xx_HAL_VERSION_SUB1 (0x04) /*!< [23:16] sub1 version */
+#define __STM32L1xx_HAL_VERSION_SUB2 (0x00) /*!< [15:8] sub2 version */
+#define __STM32L1xx_HAL_VERSION_RC (0x00) /*!< [7:0] release candidate */
+#define __STM32L1xx_HAL_VERSION ((__STM32L1xx_HAL_VERSION_MAIN << 24)\
+ |(__STM32L1xx_HAL_VERSION_SUB1 << 16)\
+ |(__STM32L1xx_HAL_VERSION_SUB2 << 8 )\
+ |(__STM32L1xx_HAL_VERSION_RC))
+
+#define IDCODE_DEVID_MASK (0x00000FFFU)
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+/* Exported variables --------------------------------------------------------*/
+/** @addtogroup HAL_Exported_Variables
+ * @{
+ */
+__IO uint32_t uwTick;
+uint32_t uwTickPrio = (1UL << __NVIC_PRIO_BITS); /* Invalid priority */
+uint32_t uwTickFreq = HAL_TICK_FREQ_DEFAULT; /* 1KHz */
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/* Exported functions --------------------------------------------------------*/
+/** @defgroup HAL_Exported_Functions HAL Exported Functions
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup HAL_Exported_Functions_Group1 Initialization and de-initialization Functions
+ * @brief Initialization and de-initialization functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ===============================================================================
+ ##### Initialization and de-initialization functions #####
+ ===============================================================================
+ [..] This section provides functions allowing to:
+ (+) Initialize the Flash interface, the NVIC allocation and initial clock
+ configuration. It initializes the source of time base also when timeout
+ is needed and the backup domain when enabled.
+ (+) De-initialize common part of the HAL.
+ (+) Configure the time base source to have 1ms time base with a dedicated
+ Tick interrupt priority.
+ (++) SysTick timer is used by default as source of time base, but user
+ can eventually implement his proper time base source (a general purpose
+ timer for example or other time source), keeping in mind that Time base
+ duration should be kept 1ms since PPP_TIMEOUT_VALUEs are defined and
+ handled in milliseconds basis.
+ (++) Time base configuration function (HAL_InitTick ()) is called automatically
+ at the beginning of the program after reset by HAL_Init() or at any time
+ when clock is configured, by HAL_RCC_ClockConfig().
+ (++) Source of time base is configured to generate interrupts at regular
+ time intervals. Care must be taken if HAL_Delay() is called from a
+ peripheral ISR process, the Tick interrupt line must have higher priority
+ (numerically lower) than the peripheral interrupt. Otherwise the caller
+ ISR process will be blocked.
+ (++) functions affecting time base configurations are declared as __weak
+ to make override possible in case of other implementations in user file.
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief This function configures the Flash prefetch,
+ * configures time base source, NVIC and Low level hardware
+ * @note This function is called at the beginning of program after reset and before
+ * the clock configuration
+ * @note The time base configuration is based on MSI clock when exiting from Reset.
+ * Once done, time base tick start incrementing.
+ * In the default implementation,Systick is used as source of time base.
+ * the tick variable is incremented each 1ms in its ISR.
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_Init(void)
+{
+ HAL_StatusTypeDef status = HAL_OK;
+
+ /* Configure Flash prefetch */
+#if (PREFETCH_ENABLE != 0)
+ __HAL_FLASH_PREFETCH_BUFFER_ENABLE();
+#endif /* PREFETCH_ENABLE */
+
+ /* Set Interrupt Group Priority */
+ HAL_NVIC_SetPriorityGrouping(NVIC_PRIORITYGROUP_4);
+
+ /* Use systick as time base source and configure 1ms tick (default clock after Reset is MSI) */
+ if (HAL_InitTick(TICK_INT_PRIORITY) != HAL_OK)
+ {
+ status = HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Init the low level hardware */
+ HAL_MspInit();
+ }
+
+ /* Return function status */
+ return status;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief This function de-initializes common part of the HAL and stops the source
+ * of time base.
+ * @note This function is optional.
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_DeInit(void)
+{
+ /* Reset of all peripherals */
+ __HAL_RCC_APB1_FORCE_RESET();
+ __HAL_RCC_APB1_RELEASE_RESET();
+
+ __HAL_RCC_APB2_FORCE_RESET();
+ __HAL_RCC_APB2_RELEASE_RESET();
+
+ __HAL_RCC_AHB_FORCE_RESET();
+ __HAL_RCC_AHB_RELEASE_RESET();
+
+ /* De-Init the low level hardware */
+ HAL_MspDeInit();
+
+ /* Return function status */
+ return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Initialize the MSP.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+__weak void HAL_MspInit(void)
+{
+ /* NOTE : This function should not be modified, when the callback is needed,
+ the HAL_MspInit could be implemented in the user file
+ */
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief DeInitialize the MSP.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+__weak void HAL_MspDeInit(void)
+{
+ /* NOTE : This function should not be modified, when the callback is needed,
+ the HAL_MspDeInit could be implemented in the user file
+ */
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief This function configures the source of the time base:
+ * The time source is configured to have 1ms time base with a dedicated
+ * Tick interrupt priority.
+ * @note This function is called automatically at the beginning of program after
+ * reset by HAL_Init() or at any time when clock is reconfigured by HAL_RCC_ClockConfig().
+ * @note In the default implementation, SysTick timer is the source of time base.
+ * It is used to generate interrupts at regular time intervals.
+ * Care must be taken if HAL_Delay() is called from a peripheral ISR process,
+ * The SysTick interrupt must have higher priority (numerically lower)
+ * than the peripheral interrupt. Otherwise the caller ISR process will be blocked.
+ * The function is declared as __weak to be overwritten in case of other
+ * implementation in user file.
+ * @param TickPriority Tick interrupt priority.
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+__weak HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_InitTick(uint32_t TickPriority)
+{
+ HAL_StatusTypeDef status = HAL_OK;
+
+ if (uwTickFreq != 0U)
+ {
+ /*Configure the SysTick to have interrupt in 1ms time basis*/
+ if (HAL_SYSTICK_Config(SystemCoreClock / (1000U / uwTickFreq)) == 0U)
+ {
+ /* Configure the SysTick IRQ priority */
+ if (TickPriority < (1UL << __NVIC_PRIO_BITS))
+ {
+ HAL_NVIC_SetPriority(SysTick_IRQn, TickPriority, 0U);
+ uwTickPrio = TickPriority;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ status = HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ status = HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ status = HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+
+ /* Return function status */
+ return status;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup HAL_Exported_Functions_Group2 HAL Control functions
+ * @brief HAL Control functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ===============================================================================
+ ##### HAL Control functions #####
+ ===============================================================================
+ [..] This section provides functions allowing to:
+ (+) Provide a tick value in millisecond
+ (+) Provide a blocking delay in millisecond
+ (+) Suspend the time base source interrupt
+ (+) Resume the time base source interrupt
+ (+) Get the HAL API driver version
+ (+) Get the device identifier
+ (+) Get the device revision identifier
+ (+) Get the unique device identifier
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief This function is called to increment a global variable "uwTick"
+ * used as application time base.
+ * @note In the default implementation, this variable is incremented each 1ms
+ * in SysTick ISR.
+ * @note This function is declared as __weak to be overwritten in case of other
+ * implementations in user file.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+__weak void HAL_IncTick(void)
+{
+ uwTick += uwTickFreq;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Provide a tick value in millisecond.
+ * @note This function is declared as __weak to be overwritten in case of other
+ * implementations in user file.
+ * @retval tick value
+ */
+__weak uint32_t HAL_GetTick(void)
+{
+ return uwTick;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief This function returns a tick priority.
+ * @retval tick priority
+ */
+uint32_t HAL_GetTickPrio(void)
+{
+ return uwTickPrio;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Set new tick Freq.
+ * @param Freq tick frequency
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_SetTickFreq(uint32_t Freq)
+{
+ HAL_StatusTypeDef status = HAL_OK;
+ assert_param(IS_TICKFREQ(Freq));
+
+ if (uwTickFreq != Freq)
+ {
+ /* Apply the new tick Freq */
+ status = HAL_InitTick(uwTickPrio);
+ if (status == HAL_OK)
+ {
+ uwTickFreq = Freq;
+ }
+ }
+
+ return status;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Return tick frequency.
+ * @retval tick period in Hz
+ */
+uint32_t HAL_GetTickFreq(void)
+{
+ return uwTickFreq;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief This function provides minimum delay (in milliseconds) based
+ * on variable incremented.
+ * @note In the default implementation , SysTick timer is the source of time base.
+ * It is used to generate interrupts at regular time intervals where uwTick
+ * is incremented.
+ * @note This function is declared as __weak to be overwritten in case of other
+ * implementations in user file.
+ * @param Delay specifies the delay time length, in milliseconds.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+__weak void HAL_Delay(uint32_t Delay)
+{
+ uint32_t tickstart = HAL_GetTick();
+ uint32_t wait = Delay;
+
+ /* Add a period to guaranty minimum wait */
+ if (wait < HAL_MAX_DELAY)
+ {
+ wait += (uint32_t)(uwTickFreq);
+ }
+
+ while((HAL_GetTick() - tickstart) < wait)
+ {
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Suspend the Tick increment.
+ * @note In the default implementation , SysTick timer is the source of time base. It is
+ * used to generate interrupts at regular time intervals. Once HAL_SuspendTick()
+ * is called, the SysTick interrupt will be disabled and so Tick increment
+ * is suspended.
+ * @note This function is declared as __weak to be overwritten in case of other
+ * implementations in user file.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+__weak void HAL_SuspendTick(void)
+{
+ /* Disable SysTick Interrupt */
+ CLEAR_BIT(SysTick->CTRL,SysTick_CTRL_TICKINT_Msk);
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Resume the Tick increment.
+ * @note In the default implementation , SysTick timer is the source of time base. It is
+ * used to generate interrupts at regular time intervals. Once HAL_ResumeTick()
+ * is called, the SysTick interrupt will be enabled and so Tick increment
+ * is resumed.
+ * @note This function is declared as __weak to be overwritten in case of other
+ * implementations in user file.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+__weak void HAL_ResumeTick(void)
+{
+ /* Enable SysTick Interrupt */
+ SET_BIT(SysTick->CTRL,SysTick_CTRL_TICKINT_Msk);
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Return the HAL revision
+ * @retval version: 0xXYZR (8bits for each decimal, R for RC)
+ */
+uint32_t HAL_GetHalVersion(void)
+{
+ return __STM32L1xx_HAL_VERSION;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Return the device revision identifier.
+ * @retval Device revision identifier
+ */
+uint32_t HAL_GetREVID(void)
+{
+ return((DBGMCU->IDCODE) >> 16U);
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Return the device identifier.
+ * @retval Device identifier
+ */
+uint32_t HAL_GetDEVID(void)
+{
+ return((DBGMCU->IDCODE) & IDCODE_DEVID_MASK);
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Return the first word of the unique device identifier (UID based on 96 bits)
+ * @retval Device identifier 31:0 bits
+ */
+uint32_t HAL_GetUIDw0(void)
+{
+ return(READ_REG(*((uint32_t *)UID_BASE)));
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Return the second word of the unique device identifier (UID based on 96 bits)
+ * @retval Device identifier 63:32 bits
+ */
+uint32_t HAL_GetUIDw1(void)
+{
+ return(READ_REG(*((uint32_t *)(UID_BASE + 0x4U))));
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Return the third word of the unique device identifier (UID based on 96 bits)
+ * @retval Device identifier 95:64 bits
+ */
+uint32_t HAL_GetUIDw2(void)
+{
+ return(READ_REG(*((uint32_t *)(UID_BASE + 0x14U))));
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup HAL_Exported_Functions_Group3 DBGMCU Peripheral Control functions
+ * @brief DBGMCU Peripheral Control functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ===============================================================================
+ ##### DBGMCU Peripheral Control functions #####
+ ===============================================================================
+ [..] This section provides functions allowing to:
+ (+) Enable/Disable Debug module during SLEEP mode
+ (+) Enable/Disable Debug module during STOP mode
+ (+) Enable/Disable Debug module during STANDBY mode
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enable the Debug Module during SLEEP mode
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void HAL_DBGMCU_EnableDBGSleepMode(void)
+{
+ SET_BIT(DBGMCU->CR, DBGMCU_CR_DBG_SLEEP);
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Disable the Debug Module during SLEEP mode
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void HAL_DBGMCU_DisableDBGSleepMode(void)
+{
+ CLEAR_BIT(DBGMCU->CR, DBGMCU_CR_DBG_SLEEP);
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enable the Debug Module during STOP mode
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void HAL_DBGMCU_EnableDBGStopMode(void)
+{
+ SET_BIT(DBGMCU->CR, DBGMCU_CR_DBG_STOP);
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Disable the Debug Module during STOP mode
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void HAL_DBGMCU_DisableDBGStopMode(void)
+{
+ CLEAR_BIT(DBGMCU->CR, DBGMCU_CR_DBG_STOP);
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enable the Debug Module during STANDBY mode
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void HAL_DBGMCU_EnableDBGStandbyMode(void)
+{
+ SET_BIT(DBGMCU->CR, DBGMCU_CR_DBG_STANDBY);
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Disable the Debug Module during STANDBY mode
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void HAL_DBGMCU_DisableDBGStandbyMode(void)
+{
+ CLEAR_BIT(DBGMCU->CR, DBGMCU_CR_DBG_STANDBY);
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif /* HAL_MODULE_ENABLED */
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
diff --git a/FreeRTOS/Demo/CORTEX_MPU_M3_NUCLEO_L152RE_GCC/ST_Code/Drivers/STM32L1xx_HAL_Driver/Src/stm32l1xx_hal_cortex.c b/FreeRTOS/Demo/CORTEX_MPU_M3_NUCLEO_L152RE_GCC/ST_Code/Drivers/STM32L1xx_HAL_Driver/Src/stm32l1xx_hal_cortex.c new file mode 100644 index 000000000..954fc6116 --- /dev/null +++ b/FreeRTOS/Demo/CORTEX_MPU_M3_NUCLEO_L152RE_GCC/ST_Code/Drivers/STM32L1xx_HAL_Driver/Src/stm32l1xx_hal_cortex.c @@ -0,0 +1,513 @@ +/**
+ ******************************************************************************
+ * @file stm32l1xx_hal_cortex.c
+ * @author MCD Application Team
+ * @brief CORTEX HAL module driver.
+ *
+ * This file provides firmware functions to manage the following
+ * functionalities of the CORTEX:
+ * + Initialization and de-initialization functions
+ * + Peripheral Control functions
+ *
+ * @verbatim
+ ==============================================================================
+ ##### How to use this driver #####
+ ==============================================================================
+
+ [..]
+ *** How to configure Interrupts using Cortex HAL driver ***
+ ===========================================================
+ [..]
+ This section provide functions allowing to configure the NVIC interrupts (IRQ).
+ The Cortex-M3 exceptions are managed by CMSIS functions.
+
+ (#) Configure the NVIC Priority Grouping using HAL_NVIC_SetPriorityGrouping() function
+
+ (#) Configure the priority of the selected IRQ Channels using HAL_NVIC_SetPriority()
+
+ (#) Enable the selected IRQ Channels using HAL_NVIC_EnableIRQ()
+
+
+ -@- When the NVIC_PRIORITYGROUP_0 is selected, IRQ pre-emption is no more possible.
+ The pending IRQ priority will be managed only by the sub priority.
+
+ -@- IRQ priority order (sorted by highest to lowest priority):
+ (+@) Lowest pre-emption priority
+ (+@) Lowest sub priority
+ (+@) Lowest hardware priority (IRQ number)
+
+ [..]
+ *** How to configure Systick using Cortex HAL driver ***
+ ========================================================
+ [..]
+ Setup SysTick Timer for 1 msec interrupts.
+
+ (+) The HAL_SYSTICK_Config()function calls the SysTick_Config() function which
+ is a CMSIS function that:
+ (++) Configures the SysTick Reload register with value passed as function parameter.
+ (++) Configures the SysTick IRQ priority to the lowest value (0x0F).
+ (++) Resets the SysTick Counter register.
+ (++) Configures the SysTick Counter clock source to be Core Clock Source (HCLK).
+ (++) Enables the SysTick Interrupt.
+ (++) Starts the SysTick Counter.
+
+ (+) You can change the SysTick Clock source to be HCLK_Div8 by calling the macro
+ __HAL_CORTEX_SYSTICKCLK_CONFIG(SYSTICK_CLKSOURCE_HCLK_DIV8) just after the
+ HAL_SYSTICK_Config() function call. The __HAL_CORTEX_SYSTICKCLK_CONFIG() macro is defined
+ inside the stm32l1xx_hal_cortex.h file.
+
+ (+) You can change the SysTick IRQ priority by calling the
+ HAL_NVIC_SetPriority(SysTick_IRQn,...) function just after the HAL_SYSTICK_Config() function
+ call. The HAL_NVIC_SetPriority() call the NVIC_SetPriority() function which is a CMSIS function.
+
+ (+) To adjust the SysTick time base, use the following formula:
+
+ Reload Value = SysTick Counter Clock (Hz) x Desired Time base (s)
+ (++) Reload Value is the parameter to be passed for HAL_SYSTICK_Config() function
+ (++) Reload Value should not exceed 0xFFFFFF
+
+ @endverbatim
+ ******************************************************************************
+ * @attention
+ *
+ * <h2><center>© Copyright (c) 2017 STMicroelectronics.
+ * All rights reserved.</center></h2>
+ *
+ * This software component is licensed by ST under BSD 3-Clause license,
+ * the "License"; You may not use this file except in compliance with the
+ * License. You may obtain a copy of the License at:
+ * opensource.org/licenses/BSD-3-Clause
+ *
+ ******************************************************************************
+ */
+
+/*
+ Additional Tables: CORTEX_NVIC_Priority_Table
+ The table below gives the allowed values of the pre-emption priority and subpriority according
+ to the Priority Grouping configuration performed by HAL_NVIC_SetPriorityGrouping() function.
+ ==========================================================================================================================
+ NVIC_PriorityGroup | NVIC_IRQChannelPreemptionPriority | NVIC_IRQChannelSubPriority | Description
+ ==========================================================================================================================
+ NVIC_PRIORITYGROUP_0 | 0 | 0-15 | 0 bits for pre-emption priority
+ | | | 4 bits for subpriority
+ --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ NVIC_PRIORITYGROUP_1 | 0-1 | 0-7 | 1 bits for pre-emption priority
+ | | | 3 bits for subpriority
+ --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ NVIC_PRIORITYGROUP_2 | 0-3 | 0-3 | 2 bits for pre-emption priority
+ | | | 2 bits for subpriority
+ --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ NVIC_PRIORITYGROUP_3 | 0-7 | 0-1 | 3 bits for pre-emption priority
+ | | | 1 bits for subpriority
+ --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ NVIC_PRIORITYGROUP_4 | 0-15 | 0 | 4 bits for pre-emption priority
+ | | | 0 bits for subpriority
+ ==========================================================================================================================
+*/
+
+/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#include "stm32l1xx_hal.h"
+
+/** @addtogroup STM32L1xx_HAL_Driver
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup CORTEX CORTEX
+ * @brief CORTEX HAL module driver
+ * @{
+ */
+
+#ifdef HAL_CORTEX_MODULE_ENABLED
+
+/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+/** @defgroup CORTEX_Exported_Functions CORTEX Exported Functions
+ * @{
+ */
+
+
+/** @defgroup CORTEX_Exported_Functions_Group1 Initialization and de-initialization functions
+ * @brief Initialization and Configuration functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ==============================================================================
+ ##### Initialization and de-initialization functions #####
+ ==============================================================================
+ [..]
+ This section provide the Cortex HAL driver functions allowing to configure Interrupts
+ Systick functionalities
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+
+/**
+ * @brief Sets the priority grouping field (pre-emption priority and subpriority)
+ * using the required unlock sequence.
+ * @param PriorityGroup The priority grouping bits length.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg NVIC_PRIORITYGROUP_0: 0 bits for pre-emption priority
+ * 4 bits for subpriority
+ * @arg NVIC_PRIORITYGROUP_1: 1 bits for pre-emption priority
+ * 3 bits for subpriority
+ * @arg NVIC_PRIORITYGROUP_2: 2 bits for pre-emption priority
+ * 2 bits for subpriority
+ * @arg NVIC_PRIORITYGROUP_3: 3 bits for pre-emption priority
+ * 1 bits for subpriority
+ * @arg NVIC_PRIORITYGROUP_4: 4 bits for pre-emption priority
+ * 0 bits for subpriority
+ * @note When the NVIC_PriorityGroup_0 is selected, IRQ pre-emption is no more possible.
+ * The pending IRQ priority will be managed only by the subpriority.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void HAL_NVIC_SetPriorityGrouping(uint32_t PriorityGroup)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_NVIC_PRIORITY_GROUP(PriorityGroup));
+
+ /* Set the PRIGROUP[10:8] bits according to the PriorityGroup parameter value */
+ NVIC_SetPriorityGrouping(PriorityGroup);
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Sets the priority of an interrupt.
+ * @param IRQn External interrupt number
+ * This parameter can be an enumerator of IRQn_Type enumeration
+ * (For the complete STM32 Devices IRQ Channels list, please refer to the appropriate CMSIS device file (stm32l1xx.h))
+ * @param PreemptPriority The pre-emption priority for the IRQn channel.
+ * This parameter can be a value between 0 and 15
+ * A lower priority value indicates a higher priority
+ * @param SubPriority the subpriority level for the IRQ channel.
+ * This parameter can be a value between 0 and 15
+ * A lower priority value indicates a higher priority.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void HAL_NVIC_SetPriority(IRQn_Type IRQn, uint32_t PreemptPriority, uint32_t SubPriority)
+{
+ uint32_t prioritygroup = 0x00;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_NVIC_SUB_PRIORITY(SubPriority));
+ assert_param(IS_NVIC_PREEMPTION_PRIORITY(PreemptPriority));
+
+ prioritygroup = NVIC_GetPriorityGrouping();
+
+ NVIC_SetPriority(IRQn, NVIC_EncodePriority(prioritygroup, PreemptPriority, SubPriority));
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables a device specific interrupt in the NVIC interrupt controller.
+ * @note To configure interrupts priority correctly, the NVIC_PriorityGroupConfig()
+ * function should be called before.
+ * @param IRQn External interrupt number
+ * This parameter can be an enumerator of IRQn_Type enumeration
+ * (For the complete STM32 Devices IRQ Channels list, please refer to the appropriate CMSIS device file (stm32l1xx.h))
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void HAL_NVIC_EnableIRQ(IRQn_Type IRQn)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_NVIC_DEVICE_IRQ(IRQn));
+
+ /* Enable interrupt */
+ NVIC_EnableIRQ(IRQn);
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Disables a device specific interrupt in the NVIC interrupt controller.
+ * @param IRQn External interrupt number
+ * This parameter can be an enumerator of IRQn_Type enumeration
+ * (For the complete STM32 Devices IRQ Channels list, please refer to the appropriate CMSIS device file (stm32l1xxxx.h))
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void HAL_NVIC_DisableIRQ(IRQn_Type IRQn)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_NVIC_DEVICE_IRQ(IRQn));
+
+ /* Disable interrupt */
+ NVIC_DisableIRQ(IRQn);
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Initiates a system reset request to reset the MCU.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void HAL_NVIC_SystemReset(void)
+{
+ /* System Reset */
+ NVIC_SystemReset();
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Initializes the System Timer and its interrupt, and starts the System Tick Timer.
+ * Counter is in free running mode to generate periodic interrupts.
+ * @param TicksNumb Specifies the ticks Number of ticks between two interrupts.
+ * @retval status: - 0 Function succeeded.
+ * - 1 Function failed.
+ */
+uint32_t HAL_SYSTICK_Config(uint32_t TicksNumb)
+{
+ return SysTick_Config(TicksNumb);
+}
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup CORTEX_Exported_Functions_Group2 Peripheral Control functions
+ * @brief Cortex control functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ==============================================================================
+ ##### Peripheral Control functions #####
+ ==============================================================================
+ [..]
+ This subsection provides a set of functions allowing to control the CORTEX
+ (NVIC, SYSTICK, MPU) functionalities.
+
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+#if (__MPU_PRESENT == 1)
+/**
+ * @brief Enable the MPU.
+ * @param MPU_Control Specifies the control mode of the MPU during hard fault,
+ * NMI, FAULTMASK and privileged accessto the default memory
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg MPU_HFNMI_PRIVDEF_NONE
+ * @arg MPU_HARDFAULT_NMI
+ * @arg MPU_PRIVILEGED_DEFAULT
+ * @arg MPU_HFNMI_PRIVDEF
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void HAL_MPU_Enable(uint32_t MPU_Control)
+{
+ /* Enable the MPU */
+ MPU->CTRL = (MPU_Control | MPU_CTRL_ENABLE_Msk);
+
+ /* Ensure MPU setting take effects */
+ __DSB();
+ __ISB();
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Disable the MPU.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void HAL_MPU_Disable(void)
+{
+ /* Make sure outstanding transfers are done */
+ __DMB();
+
+ /* Disable the MPU and clear the control register*/
+ MPU->CTRL = 0;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Initializes and configures the Region and the memory to be protected.
+ * @param MPU_Init Pointer to a MPU_Region_InitTypeDef structure that contains
+ * the initialization and configuration information.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void HAL_MPU_ConfigRegion(MPU_Region_InitTypeDef *MPU_Init)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_MPU_REGION_NUMBER(MPU_Init->Number));
+ assert_param(IS_MPU_REGION_ENABLE(MPU_Init->Enable));
+
+ /* Set the Region number */
+ MPU->RNR = MPU_Init->Number;
+
+ if ((MPU_Init->Enable) != RESET)
+ {
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_MPU_INSTRUCTION_ACCESS(MPU_Init->DisableExec));
+ assert_param(IS_MPU_REGION_PERMISSION_ATTRIBUTE(MPU_Init->AccessPermission));
+ assert_param(IS_MPU_TEX_LEVEL(MPU_Init->TypeExtField));
+ assert_param(IS_MPU_ACCESS_SHAREABLE(MPU_Init->IsShareable));
+ assert_param(IS_MPU_ACCESS_CACHEABLE(MPU_Init->IsCacheable));
+ assert_param(IS_MPU_ACCESS_BUFFERABLE(MPU_Init->IsBufferable));
+ assert_param(IS_MPU_SUB_REGION_DISABLE(MPU_Init->SubRegionDisable));
+ assert_param(IS_MPU_REGION_SIZE(MPU_Init->Size));
+
+ MPU->RBAR = MPU_Init->BaseAddress;
+ MPU->RASR = ((uint32_t)MPU_Init->DisableExec << MPU_RASR_XN_Pos) |
+ ((uint32_t)MPU_Init->AccessPermission << MPU_RASR_AP_Pos) |
+ ((uint32_t)MPU_Init->TypeExtField << MPU_RASR_TEX_Pos) |
+ ((uint32_t)MPU_Init->IsShareable << MPU_RASR_S_Pos) |
+ ((uint32_t)MPU_Init->IsCacheable << MPU_RASR_C_Pos) |
+ ((uint32_t)MPU_Init->IsBufferable << MPU_RASR_B_Pos) |
+ ((uint32_t)MPU_Init->SubRegionDisable << MPU_RASR_SRD_Pos) |
+ ((uint32_t)MPU_Init->Size << MPU_RASR_SIZE_Pos) |
+ ((uint32_t)MPU_Init->Enable << MPU_RASR_ENABLE_Pos);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ MPU->RBAR = 0x00;
+ MPU->RASR = 0x00;
+ }
+}
+#endif /* __MPU_PRESENT */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Gets the priority grouping field from the NVIC Interrupt Controller.
+ * @retval Priority grouping field (SCB->AIRCR [10:8] PRIGROUP field)
+ */
+uint32_t HAL_NVIC_GetPriorityGrouping(void)
+{
+ /* Get the PRIGROUP[10:8] field value */
+ return NVIC_GetPriorityGrouping();
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Gets the priority of an interrupt.
+ * @param IRQn External interrupt number
+ * This parameter can be an enumerator of IRQn_Type enumeration
+ * (For the complete STM32 Devices IRQ Channels list, please refer to the appropriate CMSIS device file (stm32l1xxxx.h))
+ * @param PriorityGroup the priority grouping bits length.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg NVIC_PRIORITYGROUP_0: 0 bits for pre-emption priority
+ * 4 bits for subpriority
+ * @arg NVIC_PRIORITYGROUP_1: 1 bits for pre-emption priority
+ * 3 bits for subpriority
+ * @arg NVIC_PRIORITYGROUP_2: 2 bits for pre-emption priority
+ * 2 bits for subpriority
+ * @arg NVIC_PRIORITYGROUP_3: 3 bits for pre-emption priority
+ * 1 bits for subpriority
+ * @arg NVIC_PRIORITYGROUP_4: 4 bits for pre-emption priority
+ * 0 bits for subpriority
+ * @param pPreemptPriority Pointer on the Preemptive priority value (starting from 0).
+ * @param pSubPriority Pointer on the Subpriority value (starting from 0).
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void HAL_NVIC_GetPriority(IRQn_Type IRQn, uint32_t PriorityGroup, uint32_t* pPreemptPriority, uint32_t* pSubPriority)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_NVIC_PRIORITY_GROUP(PriorityGroup));
+ /* Get priority for Cortex-M system or device specific interrupts */
+ NVIC_DecodePriority(NVIC_GetPriority(IRQn), PriorityGroup, pPreemptPriority, pSubPriority);
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Sets Pending bit of an external interrupt.
+ * @param IRQn External interrupt number
+ * This parameter can be an enumerator of IRQn_Type enumeration
+ * (For the complete STM32 Devices IRQ Channels list, please refer to the appropriate CMSIS device file (stm32l1xxxx.h))
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void HAL_NVIC_SetPendingIRQ(IRQn_Type IRQn)
+{
+ /* Set interrupt pending */
+ NVIC_SetPendingIRQ(IRQn);
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Gets Pending Interrupt (reads the pending register in the NVIC
+ * and returns the pending bit for the specified interrupt).
+ * @param IRQn External interrupt number
+ * This parameter can be an enumerator of IRQn_Type enumeration
+ * (For the complete STM32 Devices IRQ Channels list, please refer to the appropriate CMSIS device file (stm32l1xxxx.h))
+ * @retval status: - 0 Interrupt status is not pending.
+ * - 1 Interrupt status is pending.
+ */
+uint32_t HAL_NVIC_GetPendingIRQ(IRQn_Type IRQn)
+{
+ /* Return 1 if pending else 0 */
+ return NVIC_GetPendingIRQ(IRQn);
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Clears the pending bit of an external interrupt.
+ * @param IRQn External interrupt number
+ * This parameter can be an enumerator of IRQn_Type enumeration
+ * (For the complete STM32 Devices IRQ Channels list, please refer to the appropriate CMSIS device file (stm32l1xxxx.h))
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void HAL_NVIC_ClearPendingIRQ(IRQn_Type IRQn)
+{
+ /* Clear pending interrupt */
+ NVIC_ClearPendingIRQ(IRQn);
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Gets active interrupt ( reads the active register in NVIC and returns the active bit).
+ * @param IRQn External interrupt number
+ * This parameter can be an enumerator of IRQn_Type enumeration
+ * (For the complete STM32 Devices IRQ Channels list, please refer to the appropriate CMSIS device file (stm32l1xxxx.h))
+ * @retval status: - 0 Interrupt status is not pending.
+ * - 1 Interrupt status is pending.
+ */
+uint32_t HAL_NVIC_GetActive(IRQn_Type IRQn)
+{
+ /* Return 1 if active else 0 */
+ return NVIC_GetActive(IRQn);
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Configures the SysTick clock source.
+ * @param CLKSource specifies the SysTick clock source.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg SYSTICK_CLKSOURCE_HCLK_DIV8: AHB clock divided by 8 selected as SysTick clock source.
+ * @arg SYSTICK_CLKSOURCE_HCLK: AHB clock selected as SysTick clock source.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void HAL_SYSTICK_CLKSourceConfig(uint32_t CLKSource)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_SYSTICK_CLK_SOURCE(CLKSource));
+ if (CLKSource == SYSTICK_CLKSOURCE_HCLK)
+ {
+ SysTick->CTRL |= SYSTICK_CLKSOURCE_HCLK;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ SysTick->CTRL &= ~SYSTICK_CLKSOURCE_HCLK;
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief This function handles SYSTICK interrupt request.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void HAL_SYSTICK_IRQHandler(void)
+{
+ HAL_SYSTICK_Callback();
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief SYSTICK callback.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+__weak void HAL_SYSTICK_Callback(void)
+{
+ /* NOTE : This function Should not be modified, when the callback is needed,
+ the HAL_SYSTICK_Callback could be implemented in the user file
+ */
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif /* HAL_CORTEX_MODULE_ENABLED */
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
diff --git a/FreeRTOS/Demo/CORTEX_MPU_M3_NUCLEO_L152RE_GCC/ST_Code/Drivers/STM32L1xx_HAL_Driver/Src/stm32l1xx_hal_dma.c b/FreeRTOS/Demo/CORTEX_MPU_M3_NUCLEO_L152RE_GCC/ST_Code/Drivers/STM32L1xx_HAL_Driver/Src/stm32l1xx_hal_dma.c new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2a7ffa44e --- /dev/null +++ b/FreeRTOS/Demo/CORTEX_MPU_M3_NUCLEO_L152RE_GCC/ST_Code/Drivers/STM32L1xx_HAL_Driver/Src/stm32l1xx_hal_dma.c @@ -0,0 +1,908 @@ +/**
+ ******************************************************************************
+ * @file stm32l1xx_hal_dma.c
+ * @author MCD Application Team
+ * @brief DMA HAL module driver.
+ * This file provides firmware functions to manage the following
+ * functionalities of the Direct Memory Access (DMA) peripheral:
+ * + Initialization and de-initialization functions
+ * + IO operation functions
+ * + Peripheral State and errors functions
+ @verbatim
+ ==============================================================================
+ ##### How to use this driver #####
+ ==============================================================================
+ [..]
+ (#) Enable and configure the peripheral to be connected to the DMA Channel
+ (except for internal SRAM / FLASH memories: no initialization is
+ necessary). Please refer to the Reference manual for connection between peripherals
+ and DMA requests.
+
+ (#) For a given Channel, program the required configuration through the following parameters:
+ Channel request, Transfer Direction, Source and Destination data formats,
+ Circular or Normal mode, Channel Priority level, Source and Destination Increment mode
+ using HAL_DMA_Init() function.
+
+ (#) Use HAL_DMA_GetState() function to return the DMA state and HAL_DMA_GetError() in case of error
+ detection.
+
+ (#) Use HAL_DMA_Abort() function to abort the current transfer
+
+ -@- In Memory-to-Memory transfer mode, Circular mode is not allowed.
+ *** Polling mode IO operation ***
+ =================================
+ [..]
+ (+) Use HAL_DMA_Start() to start DMA transfer after the configuration of Source
+ address and destination address and the Length of data to be transferred
+ (+) Use HAL_DMA_PollForTransfer() to poll for the end of current transfer, in this
+ case a fixed Timeout can be configured by User depending from his application.
+
+ *** Interrupt mode IO operation ***
+ ===================================
+ [..]
+ (+) Configure the DMA interrupt priority using HAL_NVIC_SetPriority()
+ (+) Enable the DMA IRQ handler using HAL_NVIC_EnableIRQ()
+ (+) Use HAL_DMA_Start_IT() to start DMA transfer after the configuration of
+ Source address and destination address and the Length of data to be transferred.
+ In this case the DMA interrupt is configured
+ (+) Use HAL_DMA_IRQHandler() called under DMA_IRQHandler() Interrupt subroutine
+ (+) At the end of data transfer HAL_DMA_IRQHandler() function is executed and user can
+ add his own function to register callbacks with HAL_DMA_RegisterCallback().
+
+ *** DMA HAL driver macros list ***
+ =============================================
+ [..]
+ Below the list of macros in DMA HAL driver.
+
+ (+) __HAL_DMA_ENABLE: Enable the specified DMA Channel.
+ (+) __HAL_DMA_DISABLE: Disable the specified DMA Channel.
+ (+) __HAL_DMA_GET_FLAG: Get the DMA Channel pending flags.
+ (+) __HAL_DMA_CLEAR_FLAG: Clear the DMA Channel pending flags.
+ (+) __HAL_DMA_ENABLE_IT: Enable the specified DMA Channel interrupts.
+ (+) __HAL_DMA_DISABLE_IT: Disable the specified DMA Channel interrupts.
+ (+) __HAL_DMA_GET_IT_SOURCE: Check whether the specified DMA Channel interrupt is enabled or not.
+
+ [..]
+ (@) You can refer to the DMA HAL driver header file for more useful macros
+
+ @endverbatim
+ ******************************************************************************
+ * @attention
+ *
+ * <h2><center>© Copyright (c) 2017 STMicroelectronics.
+ * All rights reserved.</center></h2>
+ *
+ * This software component is licensed by ST under BSD 3-Clause license,
+ * the "License"; You may not use this file except in compliance with the
+ * License. You may obtain a copy of the License at:
+ * opensource.org/licenses/BSD-3-Clause
+ *
+ ******************************************************************************
+ */
+
+/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#include "stm32l1xx_hal.h"
+
+/** @addtogroup STM32L1xx_HAL_Driver
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup DMA DMA
+ * @brief DMA HAL module driver
+ * @{
+ */
+
+#ifdef HAL_DMA_MODULE_ENABLED
+
+/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/
+/** @defgroup DMA_Private_Functions DMA Private Functions
+ * @{
+ */
+
+static void DMA_SetConfig(DMA_HandleTypeDef *hdma, uint32_t SrcAddress, uint32_t DstAddress, uint32_t DataLength);
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/* Exported functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+/** @defgroup DMA_Exported_Functions DMA Exported Functions
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup DMA_Exported_Functions_Group1 Initialization and de-initialization functions
+ * @brief Initialization and de-initialization functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ===============================================================================
+ ##### Initialization and de-initialization functions #####
+ ===============================================================================
+ [..]
+ This section provides functions allowing to initialize the DMA Channel source
+ and destination addresses, incrementation and data sizes, transfer direction,
+ circular/normal mode selection, memory-to-memory mode selection and Channel priority value.
+ [..]
+ The HAL_DMA_Init() function follows the DMA configuration procedures as described in
+ reference manual.
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Initialize the DMA according to the specified
+ * parameters in the DMA_InitTypeDef and initialize the associated handle.
+ * @param hdma Pointer to a DMA_HandleTypeDef structure that contains
+ * the configuration information for the specified DMA Channel.
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_DMA_Init(DMA_HandleTypeDef *hdma)
+{
+ uint32_t tmp;
+
+ /* Check the DMA handle allocation */
+ if(hdma == NULL)
+ {
+ return HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_DMA_ALL_INSTANCE(hdma->Instance));
+ assert_param(IS_DMA_DIRECTION(hdma->Init.Direction));
+ assert_param(IS_DMA_PERIPHERAL_INC_STATE(hdma->Init.PeriphInc));
+ assert_param(IS_DMA_MEMORY_INC_STATE(hdma->Init.MemInc));
+ assert_param(IS_DMA_PERIPHERAL_DATA_SIZE(hdma->Init.PeriphDataAlignment));
+ assert_param(IS_DMA_MEMORY_DATA_SIZE(hdma->Init.MemDataAlignment));
+ assert_param(IS_DMA_MODE(hdma->Init.Mode));
+ assert_param(IS_DMA_PRIORITY(hdma->Init.Priority));
+
+#if defined (DMA2)
+ /* Compute the channel index */
+ if ((uint32_t)(hdma->Instance) < (uint32_t)(DMA2_Channel1))
+ {
+ /* DMA1 */
+ hdma->ChannelIndex = (((uint32_t)hdma->Instance - (uint32_t)DMA1_Channel1) / ((uint32_t)DMA1_Channel2 - (uint32_t)DMA1_Channel1)) << 2U;
+ hdma->DmaBaseAddress = DMA1;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* DMA2 */
+ hdma->ChannelIndex = (((uint32_t)hdma->Instance - (uint32_t)DMA2_Channel1) / ((uint32_t)DMA2_Channel2 - (uint32_t)DMA2_Channel1)) << 2U;
+ hdma->DmaBaseAddress = DMA2;
+ }
+#else
+ /* calculation of the channel index */
+ /* DMA1 */
+ hdma->ChannelIndex = (((uint32_t)hdma->Instance - (uint32_t)DMA1_Channel1) / ((uint32_t)DMA1_Channel2 - (uint32_t)DMA1_Channel1)) << 2U;
+ hdma->DmaBaseAddress = DMA1;
+#endif
+
+ /* Change DMA peripheral state */
+ hdma->State = HAL_DMA_STATE_BUSY;
+
+ /* Get the CR register value */
+ tmp = hdma->Instance->CCR;
+
+ /* Clear PL, MSIZE, PSIZE, MINC, PINC, CIRC, DIR and MEM2MEM bits */
+ tmp &= ((uint32_t)~(DMA_CCR_PL | DMA_CCR_MSIZE | DMA_CCR_PSIZE |
+ DMA_CCR_MINC | DMA_CCR_PINC | DMA_CCR_CIRC |
+ DMA_CCR_DIR | DMA_CCR_MEM2MEM));
+
+ /* Prepare the DMA Channel configuration */
+ tmp |= hdma->Init.Direction |
+ hdma->Init.PeriphInc | hdma->Init.MemInc |
+ hdma->Init.PeriphDataAlignment | hdma->Init.MemDataAlignment |
+ hdma->Init.Mode | hdma->Init.Priority;
+
+ /* Write to DMA Channel CR register */
+ hdma->Instance->CCR = tmp;
+
+ /* Initialise the error code */
+ hdma->ErrorCode = HAL_DMA_ERROR_NONE;
+
+ /* Initialize the DMA state*/
+ hdma->State = HAL_DMA_STATE_READY;
+
+ /* Allocate lock resource and initialize it */
+ hdma->Lock = HAL_UNLOCKED;
+
+ return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief DeInitialize the DMA peripheral.
+ * @param hdma pointer to a DMA_HandleTypeDef structure that contains
+ * the configuration information for the specified DMA Channel.
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_DMA_DeInit(DMA_HandleTypeDef *hdma)
+{
+
+ /* Check the DMA handle allocation */
+ if (NULL == hdma )
+ {
+ return HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_DMA_ALL_INSTANCE(hdma->Instance));
+
+ /* Disable the selected DMA Channelx */
+ __HAL_DMA_DISABLE(hdma);
+
+#if defined (DMA2)
+ /* Compute the channel index */
+ if ((uint32_t)(hdma->Instance) < (uint32_t)(DMA2_Channel1))
+ {
+ /* DMA1 */
+ hdma->ChannelIndex = (((uint32_t)hdma->Instance - (uint32_t)DMA1_Channel1) / ((uint32_t)DMA1_Channel2 - (uint32_t)DMA1_Channel1)) << 2U;
+ hdma->DmaBaseAddress = DMA1;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* DMA2 */
+ hdma->ChannelIndex = (((uint32_t)hdma->Instance - (uint32_t)DMA2_Channel1) / ((uint32_t)DMA2_Channel2 - (uint32_t)DMA2_Channel1)) << 2U;
+ hdma->DmaBaseAddress = DMA2;
+ }
+#else
+ /* calculation of the channel index */
+ /* DMA1 */
+ hdma->ChannelIndex = (((uint32_t)hdma->Instance - (uint32_t)DMA1_Channel1) / ((uint32_t)DMA1_Channel2 - (uint32_t)DMA1_Channel1)) << 2U;
+ hdma->DmaBaseAddress = DMA1;
+#endif
+
+ /* Reset DMA Channel CR register */
+ hdma->Instance->CCR = 0U;
+
+ /* Clear all flags */
+ hdma->DmaBaseAddress->IFCR = (DMA_ISR_GIF1 << (hdma->ChannelIndex & 0x1CU));
+
+ /* Clean callbacks */
+ hdma->XferCpltCallback = NULL;
+ hdma->XferHalfCpltCallback = NULL;
+ hdma->XferErrorCallback = NULL;
+ hdma->XferAbortCallback = NULL;
+
+ /* Initialise the error code */
+ hdma->ErrorCode = HAL_DMA_ERROR_NONE;
+
+ /* Initialize the DMA state */
+ hdma->State = HAL_DMA_STATE_RESET;
+
+ /* Release Lock */
+ __HAL_UNLOCK(hdma);
+
+ return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup DMA_Exported_Functions_Group2 Input and Output operation functions
+ * @brief Input and Output operation functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ===============================================================================
+ ##### IO operation functions #####
+ ===============================================================================
+ [..] This section provides functions allowing to:
+ (+) Configure the source, destination address and data length and Start DMA transfer
+ (+) Configure the source, destination address and data length and
+ Start DMA transfer with interrupt
+ (+) Abort DMA transfer
+ (+) Poll for transfer complete
+ (+) Handle DMA interrupt request
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Start the DMA Transfer.
+ * @param hdma pointer to a DMA_HandleTypeDef structure that contains
+ * the configuration information for the specified DMA Channel.
+ * @param SrcAddress The source memory Buffer address
+ * @param DstAddress The destination memory Buffer address
+ * @param DataLength The length of data to be transferred from source to destination
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_DMA_Start(DMA_HandleTypeDef *hdma, uint32_t SrcAddress, uint32_t DstAddress, uint32_t DataLength)
+{
+ HAL_StatusTypeDef status = HAL_OK;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_DMA_BUFFER_SIZE(DataLength));
+
+ /* Process locked */
+ __HAL_LOCK(hdma);
+
+ if(HAL_DMA_STATE_READY == hdma->State)
+ {
+ /* Change DMA peripheral state */
+ hdma->State = HAL_DMA_STATE_BUSY;
+ hdma->ErrorCode = HAL_DMA_ERROR_NONE;
+
+ /* Disable the peripheral */
+ __HAL_DMA_DISABLE(hdma);
+
+ /* Configure the source, destination address and the data length & clear flags*/
+ DMA_SetConfig(hdma, SrcAddress, DstAddress, DataLength);
+
+ /* Enable the Peripheral */
+ __HAL_DMA_ENABLE(hdma);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Process Unlocked */
+ __HAL_UNLOCK(hdma);
+ status = HAL_BUSY;
+ }
+ return status;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Start the DMA Transfer with interrupt enabled.
+ * @param hdma pointer to a DMA_HandleTypeDef structure that contains
+ * the configuration information for the specified DMA Channel.
+ * @param SrcAddress The source memory Buffer address
+ * @param DstAddress The destination memory Buffer address
+ * @param DataLength The length of data to be transferred from source to destination
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_DMA_Start_IT(DMA_HandleTypeDef *hdma, uint32_t SrcAddress, uint32_t DstAddress, uint32_t DataLength)
+{
+ HAL_StatusTypeDef status = HAL_OK;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_DMA_BUFFER_SIZE(DataLength));
+
+ /* Process locked */
+ __HAL_LOCK(hdma);
+
+ if(HAL_DMA_STATE_READY == hdma->State)
+ {
+ /* Change DMA peripheral state */
+ hdma->State = HAL_DMA_STATE_BUSY;
+ hdma->ErrorCode = HAL_DMA_ERROR_NONE;
+
+ /* Disable the peripheral */
+ __HAL_DMA_DISABLE(hdma);
+
+ /* Configure the source, destination address and the data length & clear flags*/
+ DMA_SetConfig(hdma, SrcAddress, DstAddress, DataLength);
+
+ /* Enable the transfer complete interrupt */
+ /* Enable the transfer Error interrupt */
+ if(NULL != hdma->XferHalfCpltCallback )
+ {
+ /* Enable the Half transfer complete interrupt as well */
+ __HAL_DMA_ENABLE_IT(hdma, (DMA_IT_TC | DMA_IT_HT | DMA_IT_TE));
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ __HAL_DMA_DISABLE_IT(hdma, DMA_IT_HT);
+ __HAL_DMA_ENABLE_IT(hdma, (DMA_IT_TC | DMA_IT_TE));
+ }
+
+ /* Enable the Peripheral */
+ __HAL_DMA_ENABLE(hdma);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Process Unlocked */
+ __HAL_UNLOCK(hdma);
+
+ /* Remain BUSY */
+ status = HAL_BUSY;
+ }
+ return status;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Abort the DMA Transfer.
+ * @param hdma pointer to a DMA_HandleTypeDef structure that contains
+ * the configuration information for the specified DMA Channel.
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_DMA_Abort(DMA_HandleTypeDef *hdma)
+{
+ HAL_StatusTypeDef status = HAL_OK;
+
+ /* Check the DMA peripheral state */
+ if(hdma->State != HAL_DMA_STATE_BUSY)
+ {
+ hdma->ErrorCode = HAL_DMA_ERROR_NO_XFER;
+
+ /* Process Unlocked */
+ __HAL_UNLOCK(hdma);
+
+ return HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable DMA IT */
+ __HAL_DMA_DISABLE_IT(hdma, (DMA_IT_TC | DMA_IT_HT | DMA_IT_TE));
+
+ /* Disable the channel */
+ __HAL_DMA_DISABLE(hdma);
+
+ /* Clear all flags */
+ hdma->DmaBaseAddress->IFCR = (DMA_ISR_GIF1 << (hdma->ChannelIndex & 0x1CU));
+
+ /* Change the DMA state */
+ hdma->State = HAL_DMA_STATE_READY;
+
+ /* Process Unlocked */
+ __HAL_UNLOCK(hdma);
+
+ return status;
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Aborts the DMA Transfer in Interrupt mode.
+ * @param hdma pointer to a DMA_HandleTypeDef structure that contains
+ * the configuration information for the specified DMA Channel.
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_DMA_Abort_IT(DMA_HandleTypeDef *hdma)
+{
+ HAL_StatusTypeDef status = HAL_OK;
+
+ if(HAL_DMA_STATE_BUSY != hdma->State)
+ {
+ /* no transfer ongoing */
+ hdma->ErrorCode = HAL_DMA_ERROR_NO_XFER;
+
+ status = HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable DMA IT */
+ __HAL_DMA_DISABLE_IT(hdma, (DMA_IT_TC | DMA_IT_HT | DMA_IT_TE));
+
+ /* Disable the channel */
+ __HAL_DMA_DISABLE(hdma);
+
+ /* Clear all flags */
+ hdma->DmaBaseAddress->IFCR = (DMA_ISR_GIF1 << (hdma->ChannelIndex & 0x1CU));
+
+ /* Change the DMA state */
+ hdma->State = HAL_DMA_STATE_READY;
+
+ /* Process Unlocked */
+ __HAL_UNLOCK(hdma);
+
+ /* Call User Abort callback */
+ if(hdma->XferAbortCallback != NULL)
+ {
+ hdma->XferAbortCallback(hdma);
+ }
+ }
+ return status;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Polling for transfer complete.
+ * @param hdma pointer to a DMA_HandleTypeDef structure that contains
+ * the configuration information for the specified DMA Channel.
+ * @param CompleteLevel Specifies the DMA level complete.
+ * @param Timeout Timeout duration.
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_DMA_PollForTransfer(DMA_HandleTypeDef *hdma, HAL_DMA_LevelCompleteTypeDef CompleteLevel, uint32_t Timeout)
+{
+ uint32_t temp;
+ uint32_t tickstart;
+
+ if(HAL_DMA_STATE_BUSY != hdma->State)
+ {
+ /* no transfer ongoing */
+ hdma->ErrorCode = HAL_DMA_ERROR_NO_XFER;
+ __HAL_UNLOCK(hdma);
+ return HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+
+ /* Polling mode not supported in circular mode */
+ if ((hdma->Instance->CCR & DMA_CCR_CIRC) != 0U)
+ {
+ hdma->ErrorCode = HAL_DMA_ERROR_NOT_SUPPORTED;
+ return HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+
+ /* Get the level transfer complete flag */
+ if (HAL_DMA_FULL_TRANSFER == CompleteLevel)
+ {
+ /* Transfer Complete flag */
+ temp = DMA_FLAG_TC1 << (hdma->ChannelIndex & 0x1CU);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Half Transfer Complete flag */
+ temp = DMA_FLAG_HT1 << (hdma->ChannelIndex & 0x1CU);
+ }
+
+ /* Get tick */
+ tickstart = HAL_GetTick();
+
+ while((hdma->DmaBaseAddress->ISR & temp) == 0U)
+ {
+ if((hdma->DmaBaseAddress->ISR & (DMA_FLAG_TE1 << (hdma->ChannelIndex& 0x1CU))) != 0U)
+ {
+ /* When a DMA transfer error occurs */
+ /* A hardware clear of its EN bits is performed */
+ /* Clear all flags */
+ hdma->DmaBaseAddress->IFCR = (DMA_ISR_GIF1 << (hdma->ChannelIndex & 0x1CU));
+
+ /* Update error code */
+ hdma->ErrorCode = HAL_DMA_ERROR_TE;
+
+ /* Change the DMA state */
+ hdma->State= HAL_DMA_STATE_READY;
+
+ /* Process Unlocked */
+ __HAL_UNLOCK(hdma);
+
+ return HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+ /* Check for the Timeout */
+ if(Timeout != HAL_MAX_DELAY)
+ {
+ if(((HAL_GetTick() - tickstart) > Timeout) || (Timeout == 0U))
+ {
+ /* Update error code */
+ hdma->ErrorCode = HAL_DMA_ERROR_TIMEOUT;
+
+ /* Change the DMA state */
+ hdma->State = HAL_DMA_STATE_READY;
+
+ /* Process Unlocked */
+ __HAL_UNLOCK(hdma);
+
+ return HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+ }
+ }
+
+ if(HAL_DMA_FULL_TRANSFER == CompleteLevel)
+ {
+ /* Clear the transfer complete flag */
+ hdma->DmaBaseAddress->IFCR = (DMA_FLAG_TC1 << (hdma->ChannelIndex& 0x1CU));
+
+ /* The selected Channelx EN bit is cleared (DMA is disabled and
+ all transfers are complete) */
+ hdma->State = HAL_DMA_STATE_READY;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Clear the half transfer complete flag */
+ hdma->DmaBaseAddress->IFCR = (DMA_FLAG_HT1 << (hdma->ChannelIndex & 0x1CU));
+ }
+
+ /* Process unlocked */
+ __HAL_UNLOCK(hdma);
+
+ return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Handle DMA interrupt request.
+ * @param hdma pointer to a DMA_HandleTypeDef structure that contains
+ * the configuration information for the specified DMA Channel.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void HAL_DMA_IRQHandler(DMA_HandleTypeDef *hdma)
+{
+ uint32_t flag_it = hdma->DmaBaseAddress->ISR;
+ uint32_t source_it = hdma->Instance->CCR;
+
+ /* Half Transfer Complete Interrupt management ******************************/
+ if (((flag_it & (DMA_FLAG_HT1 << (hdma->ChannelIndex & 0x1CU))) != 0U) && ((source_it & DMA_IT_HT) != 0U))
+ {
+ /* Disable the half transfer interrupt if the DMA mode is not CIRCULAR */
+ if((hdma->Instance->CCR & DMA_CCR_CIRC) == 0U)
+ {
+ /* Disable the half transfer interrupt */
+ __HAL_DMA_DISABLE_IT(hdma, DMA_IT_HT);
+ }
+ /* Clear the half transfer complete flag */
+ hdma->DmaBaseAddress->IFCR = DMA_ISR_HTIF1 << (hdma->ChannelIndex & 0x1CU);
+
+ /* DMA peripheral state is not updated in Half Transfer */
+ /* but in Transfer Complete case */
+
+ if(hdma->XferHalfCpltCallback != NULL)
+ {
+ /* Half transfer callback */
+ hdma->XferHalfCpltCallback(hdma);
+ }
+ }
+
+ /* Transfer Complete Interrupt management ***********************************/
+ else if (((flag_it & (DMA_FLAG_TC1 << (hdma->ChannelIndex & 0x1CU))) != 0U) && ((source_it & DMA_IT_TC) != 0U))
+ {
+
+ if((hdma->Instance->CCR & DMA_CCR_CIRC) == 0U)
+ {
+ /* Disable the transfer complete interrupt if the DMA mode is not CIRCULAR */
+ /* Disable the transfer complete and error interrupt */
+ /* if the DMA mode is not CIRCULAR */
+ __HAL_DMA_DISABLE_IT(hdma, DMA_IT_TE | DMA_IT_TC);
+
+ /* Change the DMA state */
+ hdma->State = HAL_DMA_STATE_READY;
+ }
+ /* Clear the transfer complete flag */
+ hdma->DmaBaseAddress->IFCR = (DMA_ISR_TCIF1 << (hdma->ChannelIndex & 0x1CU));
+
+ /* Process Unlocked */
+ __HAL_UNLOCK(hdma);
+
+ if(hdma->XferCpltCallback != NULL)
+ {
+ /* Transfer complete callback */
+ hdma->XferCpltCallback(hdma);
+ }
+ }
+
+ /* Transfer Error Interrupt management **************************************/
+ else if (((flag_it & (DMA_FLAG_TE1 << (hdma->ChannelIndex & 0x1CU))) != 0U) && ((source_it & DMA_IT_TE) != 0U))
+ {
+ /* When a DMA transfer error occurs */
+ /* A hardware clear of its EN bits is performed */
+ /* Disable ALL DMA IT */
+ __HAL_DMA_DISABLE_IT(hdma, (DMA_IT_TC | DMA_IT_HT | DMA_IT_TE));
+
+ /* Clear all flags */
+ hdma->DmaBaseAddress->IFCR = (DMA_ISR_GIF1 << (hdma->ChannelIndex & 0x1CU));
+
+ /* Update error code */
+ hdma->ErrorCode = HAL_DMA_ERROR_TE;
+
+ /* Change the DMA state */
+ hdma->State = HAL_DMA_STATE_READY;
+
+ /* Process Unlocked */
+ __HAL_UNLOCK(hdma);
+
+ if (hdma->XferErrorCallback != NULL)
+ {
+ /* Transfer error callback */
+ hdma->XferErrorCallback(hdma);
+ }
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Nothing To Do */
+ }
+ return;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Register callbacks
+ * @param hdma pointer to a DMA_HandleTypeDef structure that contains
+ * the configuration information for the specified DMA Channel.
+ * @param CallbackID User Callback identifer
+ * a HAL_DMA_CallbackIDTypeDef ENUM as parameter.
+ * @param pCallback pointer to private callbacsk function which has pointer to
+ * a DMA_HandleTypeDef structure as parameter.
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_DMA_RegisterCallback(DMA_HandleTypeDef *hdma, HAL_DMA_CallbackIDTypeDef CallbackID, void (* pCallback)( DMA_HandleTypeDef * _hdma))
+{
+ HAL_StatusTypeDef status = HAL_OK;
+
+ /* Process locked */
+ __HAL_LOCK(hdma);
+
+ if(HAL_DMA_STATE_READY == hdma->State)
+ {
+ switch (CallbackID)
+ {
+ case HAL_DMA_XFER_CPLT_CB_ID:
+ hdma->XferCpltCallback = pCallback;
+ break;
+
+ case HAL_DMA_XFER_HALFCPLT_CB_ID:
+ hdma->XferHalfCpltCallback = pCallback;
+ break;
+
+ case HAL_DMA_XFER_ERROR_CB_ID:
+ hdma->XferErrorCallback = pCallback;
+ break;
+
+ case HAL_DMA_XFER_ABORT_CB_ID:
+ hdma->XferAbortCallback = pCallback;
+ break;
+
+ default:
+ status = HAL_ERROR;
+ break;
+ }
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ status = HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+
+ /* Release Lock */
+ __HAL_UNLOCK(hdma);
+
+ return status;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief UnRegister callbacks
+ * @param hdma pointer to a DMA_HandleTypeDef structure that contains
+ * the configuration information for the specified DMA Channel.
+ * @param CallbackID User Callback identifer
+ * a HAL_DMA_CallbackIDTypeDef ENUM as parameter.
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_DMA_UnRegisterCallback(DMA_HandleTypeDef *hdma, HAL_DMA_CallbackIDTypeDef CallbackID)
+{
+ HAL_StatusTypeDef status = HAL_OK;
+
+ /* Process locked */
+ __HAL_LOCK(hdma);
+
+ if(HAL_DMA_STATE_READY == hdma->State)
+ {
+ switch (CallbackID)
+ {
+ case HAL_DMA_XFER_CPLT_CB_ID:
+ hdma->XferCpltCallback = NULL;
+ break;
+
+ case HAL_DMA_XFER_HALFCPLT_CB_ID:
+ hdma->XferHalfCpltCallback = NULL;
+ break;
+
+ case HAL_DMA_XFER_ERROR_CB_ID:
+ hdma->XferErrorCallback = NULL;
+ break;
+
+ case HAL_DMA_XFER_ABORT_CB_ID:
+ hdma->XferAbortCallback = NULL;
+ break;
+
+ case HAL_DMA_XFER_ALL_CB_ID:
+ hdma->XferCpltCallback = NULL;
+ hdma->XferHalfCpltCallback = NULL;
+ hdma->XferErrorCallback = NULL;
+ hdma->XferAbortCallback = NULL;
+ break;
+
+ default:
+ status = HAL_ERROR;
+ break;
+ }
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ status = HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+
+ /* Release Lock */
+ __HAL_UNLOCK(hdma);
+
+ return status;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+
+
+/** @defgroup DMA_Exported_Functions_Group3 Peripheral State and Errors functions
+ * @brief Peripheral State and Errors functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ===============================================================================
+ ##### Peripheral State and Errors functions #####
+ ===============================================================================
+ [..]
+ This subsection provides functions allowing to
+ (+) Check the DMA state
+ (+) Get error code
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Return the DMA handle state.
+ * @param hdma pointer to a DMA_HandleTypeDef structure that contains
+ * the configuration information for the specified DMA Channel.
+ * @retval HAL state
+ */
+HAL_DMA_StateTypeDef HAL_DMA_GetState(DMA_HandleTypeDef *hdma)
+{
+ /* Return DMA handle state */
+ return hdma->State;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Return the DMA error code.
+ * @param hdma pointer to a DMA_HandleTypeDef structure that contains
+ * the configuration information for the specified DMA Channel.
+ * @retval DMA Error Code
+ */
+uint32_t HAL_DMA_GetError(DMA_HandleTypeDef *hdma)
+{
+ return hdma->ErrorCode;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/** @addtogroup DMA_Private_Functions
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Sets the DMA Transfer parameter.
+ * @param hdma pointer to a DMA_HandleTypeDef structure that contains
+ * the configuration information for the specified DMA Channel.
+ * @param SrcAddress The source memory Buffer address
+ * @param DstAddress The destination memory Buffer address
+ * @param DataLength The length of data to be transferred from source to destination
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+static void DMA_SetConfig(DMA_HandleTypeDef *hdma, uint32_t SrcAddress, uint32_t DstAddress, uint32_t DataLength)
+{
+ /* Clear all flags */
+ hdma->DmaBaseAddress->IFCR = (DMA_ISR_GIF1 << (hdma->ChannelIndex & 0x1CU));
+
+ /* Configure DMA Channel data length */
+ hdma->Instance->CNDTR = DataLength;
+
+ /* Memory to Peripheral */
+ if((hdma->Init.Direction) == DMA_MEMORY_TO_PERIPH)
+ {
+ /* Configure DMA Channel destination address */
+ hdma->Instance->CPAR = DstAddress;
+
+ /* Configure DMA Channel source address */
+ hdma->Instance->CMAR = SrcAddress;
+ }
+ /* Peripheral to Memory */
+ else
+ {
+ /* Configure DMA Channel source address */
+ hdma->Instance->CPAR = SrcAddress;
+
+ /* Configure DMA Channel destination address */
+ hdma->Instance->CMAR = DstAddress;
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif /* HAL_DMA_MODULE_ENABLED */
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
diff --git a/FreeRTOS/Demo/CORTEX_MPU_M3_NUCLEO_L152RE_GCC/ST_Code/Drivers/STM32L1xx_HAL_Driver/Src/stm32l1xx_hal_flash.c b/FreeRTOS/Demo/CORTEX_MPU_M3_NUCLEO_L152RE_GCC/ST_Code/Drivers/STM32L1xx_HAL_Driver/Src/stm32l1xx_hal_flash.c new file mode 100644 index 000000000..aab574984 --- /dev/null +++ b/FreeRTOS/Demo/CORTEX_MPU_M3_NUCLEO_L152RE_GCC/ST_Code/Drivers/STM32L1xx_HAL_Driver/Src/stm32l1xx_hal_flash.c @@ -0,0 +1,721 @@ +/**
+ ******************************************************************************
+ * @file stm32l1xx_hal_flash.c
+ * @author MCD Application Team
+ * @brief FLASH HAL module driver.
+ * This file provides firmware functions to manage the following
+ * functionalities of the internal FLASH memory:
+ * + Program operations functions
+ * + Memory Control functions
+ * + Peripheral State functions
+ *
+ @verbatim
+ ==============================================================================
+ ##### FLASH peripheral features #####
+ ==============================================================================
+ [..] The Flash memory interface manages CPU AHB I-Code and D-Code accesses
+ to the Flash memory. It implements the erase and program Flash memory operations
+ and the read and write protection mechanisms.
+
+ [..] The Flash memory interface accelerates code execution with a system of instruction
+ prefetch.
+
+ [..] The FLASH main features are:
+ (+) Flash memory read operations
+ (+) Flash memory program/erase operations
+ (+) Read / write protections
+ (+) Prefetch on I-Code
+ (+) Option Bytes programming
+
+
+ ##### How to use this driver #####
+ ==============================================================================
+ [..]
+ This driver provides functions and macros to configure and program the FLASH
+ memory of all STM32L1xx devices.
+
+ (#) FLASH Memory I/O Programming functions: this group includes all needed
+ functions to erase and program the main memory:
+ (++) Lock and Unlock the FLASH interface
+ (++) Erase function: Erase page
+ (++) Program functions: Fast Word and Half Page(should be
+ executed from internal SRAM).
+
+ (#) DATA EEPROM Programming functions: this group includes all
+ needed functions to erase and program the DATA EEPROM memory:
+ (++) Lock and Unlock the DATA EEPROM interface.
+ (++) Erase function: Erase Byte, erase HalfWord, erase Word, erase
+ Double Word (should be executed from internal SRAM).
+ (++) Program functions: Fast Program Byte, Fast Program Half-Word,
+ FastProgramWord, Program Byte, Program Half-Word,
+ Program Word and Program Double-Word (should be executed
+ from internal SRAM).
+
+ (#) FLASH Option Bytes Programming functions: this group includes all needed
+ functions to manage the Option Bytes:
+ (++) Lock and Unlock the Option Bytes
+ (++) Set/Reset the write protection
+ (++) Set the Read protection Level
+ (++) Program the user Option Bytes
+ (++) Launch the Option Bytes loader
+ (++) Set/Get the Read protection Level.
+ (++) Set/Get the BOR level.
+ (++) Get the Write protection.
+ (++) Get the user option bytes.
+
+ (#) Interrupts and flags management functions : this group
+ includes all needed functions to:
+ (++) Handle FLASH interrupts
+ (++) Wait for last FLASH operation according to its status
+ (++) Get error flag status
+
+ (#) FLASH Interface configuration functions: this group includes
+ the management of following features:
+ (++) Enable/Disable the RUN PowerDown mode.
+ (++) Enable/Disable the SLEEP PowerDown mode.
+
+ (#) FLASH Peripheral State methods: this group includes
+ the management of following features:
+ (++) Wait for the FLASH operation
+ (++) Get the specific FLASH error flag
+
+ [..] In addition to these function, this driver includes a set of macros allowing
+ to handle the following operations:
+
+ (+) Set/Get the latency
+ (+) Enable/Disable the prefetch buffer
+ (+) Enable/Disable the 64 bit Read Access.
+ (+) Enable/Disable the Flash power-down
+ (+) Enable/Disable the FLASH interrupts
+ (+) Monitor the FLASH flags status
+
+ ##### Programming operation functions #####
+ ===============================================================================
+ [..]
+ This subsection provides a set of functions allowing to manage the FLASH
+ program operations.
+
+ [..] The FLASH Memory Programming functions, includes the following functions:
+ (+) HAL_FLASH_Unlock(void);
+ (+) HAL_FLASH_Lock(void);
+ (+) HAL_FLASH_Program(uint32_t TypeProgram, uint32_t Address, uint32_t Data)
+ (+) HAL_FLASH_Program_IT(uint32_t TypeProgram, uint32_t Address, uint32_t Data)
+
+ [..] Any operation of erase or program should follow these steps:
+ (#) Call the HAL_FLASH_Unlock() function to enable the flash control register and
+ program memory access.
+ (#) Call the desired function to erase page or program data.
+ (#) Call the HAL_FLASH_Lock() to disable the flash program memory access
+ (recommended to protect the FLASH memory against possible unwanted operation).
+
+ ##### Option Bytes Programming functions #####
+ ==============================================================================
+
+ [..] The FLASH_Option Bytes Programming_functions, includes the following functions:
+ (+) HAL_FLASH_OB_Unlock(void);
+ (+) HAL_FLASH_OB_Lock(void);
+ (+) HAL_FLASH_OB_Launch(void);
+ (+) HAL_FLASHEx_OBProgram(FLASH_OBProgramInitTypeDef *pOBInit);
+ (+) HAL_FLASHEx_OBGetConfig(FLASH_OBProgramInitTypeDef *pOBInit);
+
+ [..] Any operation of erase or program should follow these steps:
+ (#) Call the HAL_FLASH_OB_Unlock() function to enable the Flash option control
+ register access.
+ (#) Call the following functions to program the desired option bytes.
+ (++) HAL_FLASHEx_OBProgram(FLASH_OBProgramInitTypeDef *pOBInit);
+ (#) Once all needed option bytes to be programmed are correctly written, call the
+ HAL_FLASH_OB_Launch(void) function to launch the Option Bytes programming process.
+ (#) Call the HAL_FLASH_OB_Lock() to disable the Flash option control register access (recommended
+ to protect the option Bytes against possible unwanted operations).
+
+ [..] Proprietary code Read Out Protection (PcROP):
+ (#) The PcROP sector is selected by using the same option bytes as the Write
+ protection. As a result, these 2 options are exclusive each other.
+ (#) To activate PCROP mode for Flash sectors(s), you need to follow the sequence below:
+ (++) Use this function HAL_FLASHEx_AdvOBProgram with PCROPState = OB_PCROP_STATE_ENABLE.
+
+ @endverbatim
+ ******************************************************************************
+ * @attention
+ *
+ * <h2><center>© Copyright (c) 2017 STMicroelectronics.
+ * All rights reserved.</center></h2>
+ *
+ * This software component is licensed by ST under BSD 3-Clause license,
+ * the "License"; You may not use this file except in compliance with the
+ * License. You may obtain a copy of the License at:
+ * opensource.org/licenses/BSD-3-Clause
+ *
+ ******************************************************************************
+ */
+
+/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#include "stm32l1xx_hal.h"
+
+/** @addtogroup STM32L1xx_HAL_Driver
+ * @{
+ */
+
+#ifdef HAL_FLASH_MODULE_ENABLED
+
+/** @defgroup FLASH FLASH
+ * @brief FLASH HAL module driver
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/** @defgroup FLASH_Private_Constants FLASH Private Constants
+ * @{
+ */
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/* Private macro ---------------------------- ---------------------------------*/
+/** @defgroup FLASH_Private_Macros FLASH Private Macros
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+/** @defgroup FLASH_Private_Variables FLASH Private Variables
+ * @{
+ */
+/* Variables used for Erase pages under interruption*/
+FLASH_ProcessTypeDef pFlash;
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/
+/** @defgroup FLASH_Private_Functions FLASH Private Functions
+ * @{
+ */
+static void FLASH_SetErrorCode(void);
+extern void FLASH_PageErase(uint32_t PageAddress);
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/* Exported functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+/** @defgroup FLASH_Exported_Functions FLASH Exported Functions
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup FLASH_Exported_Functions_Group1 Programming operation functions
+ * @brief Programming operation functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Program word at a specified address
+ * @note To correctly run this function, the HAL_FLASH_Unlock() function
+ * must be called before.
+ * Call the HAL_FLASH_Lock() to disable the flash memory access
+ * (recommended to protect the FLASH memory against possible unwanted operation).
+ *
+ * @param TypeProgram Indicate the way to program at a specified address.
+ * This parameter can be a value of @ref FLASH_Type_Program
+ * @param Address Specifie the address to be programmed.
+ * @param Data Specifie the data to be programmed
+ *
+ * @retval HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL Status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_FLASH_Program(uint32_t TypeProgram, uint32_t Address, uint32_t Data)
+{
+ HAL_StatusTypeDef status = HAL_ERROR;
+
+ /* Process Locked */
+ __HAL_LOCK(&pFlash);
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_FLASH_TYPEPROGRAM(TypeProgram));
+ assert_param(IS_FLASH_PROGRAM_ADDRESS(Address));
+
+ /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+ status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_TIMEOUT_VALUE);
+
+ if(status == HAL_OK)
+ {
+ /* Clean the error context */
+ pFlash.ErrorCode = HAL_FLASH_ERROR_NONE;
+
+ /*Program word (32-bit) at a specified address.*/
+ *(__IO uint32_t *)Address = Data;
+
+ /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+ status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_TIMEOUT_VALUE);
+ }
+
+ /* Process Unlocked */
+ __HAL_UNLOCK(&pFlash);
+
+ return status;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Program word at a specified address with interrupt enabled.
+ *
+ * @param TypeProgram Indicate the way to program at a specified address.
+ * This parameter can be a value of @ref FLASH_Type_Program
+ * @param Address Specifie the address to be programmed.
+ * @param Data Specifie the data to be programmed
+ *
+ * @retval HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL Status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_FLASH_Program_IT(uint32_t TypeProgram, uint32_t Address, uint32_t Data)
+{
+ HAL_StatusTypeDef status = HAL_OK;
+
+ /* Process Locked */
+ __HAL_LOCK(&pFlash);
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_FLASH_TYPEPROGRAM(TypeProgram));
+ assert_param(IS_FLASH_PROGRAM_ADDRESS(Address));
+
+ /* Enable End of FLASH Operation and Error source interrupts */
+ __HAL_FLASH_ENABLE_IT(FLASH_IT_EOP | FLASH_IT_ERR);
+
+ pFlash.Address = Address;
+ pFlash.ProcedureOnGoing = FLASH_PROC_PROGRAM;
+ /* Clean the error context */
+ pFlash.ErrorCode = HAL_FLASH_ERROR_NONE;
+
+ if(TypeProgram == FLASH_TYPEPROGRAM_WORD)
+ {
+ /* Program word (32-bit) at a specified address. */
+ *(__IO uint32_t *)Address = Data;
+ }
+ return status;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief This function handles FLASH interrupt request.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void HAL_FLASH_IRQHandler(void)
+{
+ uint32_t addresstmp = 0U;
+
+ /* Check FLASH operation error flags */
+ if( __HAL_FLASH_GET_FLAG(FLASH_FLAG_WRPERR) ||
+ __HAL_FLASH_GET_FLAG(FLASH_FLAG_PGAERR) ||
+ __HAL_FLASH_GET_FLAG(FLASH_FLAG_SIZERR) ||
+#if defined(FLASH_SR_RDERR)
+ __HAL_FLASH_GET_FLAG(FLASH_FLAG_RDERR) ||
+#endif /* FLASH_SR_RDERR */
+#if defined(FLASH_SR_OPTVERRUSR)
+ __HAL_FLASH_GET_FLAG(FLASH_FLAG_OPTVERRUSR) ||
+#endif /* FLASH_SR_OPTVERRUSR */
+ __HAL_FLASH_GET_FLAG(FLASH_FLAG_OPTVERR) )
+ {
+ if(pFlash.ProcedureOnGoing == FLASH_PROC_PAGEERASE)
+ {
+ /* Return the faulty sector */
+ addresstmp = pFlash.Page;
+ pFlash.Page = 0xFFFFFFFFU;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Return the faulty address */
+ addresstmp = pFlash.Address;
+ }
+ /* Save the Error code */
+ FLASH_SetErrorCode();
+
+ /* FLASH error interrupt user callback */
+ HAL_FLASH_OperationErrorCallback(addresstmp);
+
+ /* Stop the procedure ongoing */
+ pFlash.ProcedureOnGoing = FLASH_PROC_NONE;
+ }
+
+ /* Check FLASH End of Operation flag */
+ if(__HAL_FLASH_GET_FLAG(FLASH_FLAG_EOP))
+ {
+ /* Clear FLASH End of Operation pending bit */
+ __HAL_FLASH_CLEAR_FLAG(FLASH_FLAG_EOP);
+
+ /* Process can continue only if no error detected */
+ if(pFlash.ProcedureOnGoing != FLASH_PROC_NONE)
+ {
+ if(pFlash.ProcedureOnGoing == FLASH_PROC_PAGEERASE)
+ {
+ /* Nb of pages to erased can be decreased */
+ pFlash.NbPagesToErase--;
+
+ /* Check if there are still pages to erase */
+ if(pFlash.NbPagesToErase != 0U)
+ {
+ addresstmp = pFlash.Page;
+ /*Indicate user which sector has been erased */
+ HAL_FLASH_EndOfOperationCallback(addresstmp);
+
+ /*Increment sector number*/
+ addresstmp = pFlash.Page + FLASH_PAGE_SIZE;
+ pFlash.Page = addresstmp;
+
+ /* If the erase operation is completed, disable the ERASE Bit */
+ CLEAR_BIT(FLASH->PECR, FLASH_PECR_ERASE);
+
+ FLASH_PageErase(addresstmp);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* No more pages to Erase, user callback can be called. */
+ /* Reset Sector and stop Erase pages procedure */
+ pFlash.Page = addresstmp = 0xFFFFFFFFU;
+ pFlash.ProcedureOnGoing = FLASH_PROC_NONE;
+ /* FLASH EOP interrupt user callback */
+ HAL_FLASH_EndOfOperationCallback(addresstmp);
+ }
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* If the program operation is completed, disable the PROG Bit */
+ CLEAR_BIT(FLASH->PECR, FLASH_PECR_PROG);
+
+ /* Program ended. Return the selected address */
+ /* FLASH EOP interrupt user callback */
+ HAL_FLASH_EndOfOperationCallback(pFlash.Address);
+
+ /* Reset Address and stop Program procedure */
+ pFlash.Address = 0xFFFFFFFFU;
+ pFlash.ProcedureOnGoing = FLASH_PROC_NONE;
+ }
+ }
+ }
+
+
+ if(pFlash.ProcedureOnGoing == FLASH_PROC_NONE)
+ {
+ /* Operation is completed, disable the PROG and ERASE */
+ CLEAR_BIT(FLASH->PECR, (FLASH_PECR_ERASE | FLASH_PECR_PROG));
+
+ /* Disable End of FLASH Operation and Error source interrupts */
+ __HAL_FLASH_DISABLE_IT(FLASH_IT_EOP | FLASH_IT_ERR);
+
+ /* Process Unlocked */
+ __HAL_UNLOCK(&pFlash);
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief FLASH end of operation interrupt callback
+ * @param ReturnValue The value saved in this parameter depends on the ongoing procedure
+ * - Pages Erase: Address of the page which has been erased
+ * (if 0xFFFFFFFF, it means that all the selected pages have been erased)
+ * - Program: Address which was selected for data program
+ * @retval none
+ */
+__weak void HAL_FLASH_EndOfOperationCallback(uint32_t ReturnValue)
+{
+ /* Prevent unused argument(s) compilation warning */
+ UNUSED(ReturnValue);
+
+ /* NOTE : This function Should not be modified, when the callback is needed,
+ the HAL_FLASH_EndOfOperationCallback could be implemented in the user file
+ */
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief FLASH operation error interrupt callback
+ * @param ReturnValue The value saved in this parameter depends on the ongoing procedure
+ * - Pages Erase: Address of the page which returned an error
+ * - Program: Address which was selected for data program
+ * @retval none
+ */
+__weak void HAL_FLASH_OperationErrorCallback(uint32_t ReturnValue)
+{
+ /* Prevent unused argument(s) compilation warning */
+ UNUSED(ReturnValue);
+
+ /* NOTE : This function Should not be modified, when the callback is needed,
+ the HAL_FLASH_OperationErrorCallback could be implemented in the user file
+ */
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup FLASH_Exported_Functions_Group2 Peripheral Control functions
+ * @brief management functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ===============================================================================
+ ##### Peripheral Control functions #####
+ ===============================================================================
+ [..]
+ This subsection provides a set of functions allowing to control the FLASH
+ memory operations.
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Unlock the FLASH control register access
+ * @retval HAL Status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_FLASH_Unlock(void)
+{
+ if (HAL_IS_BIT_SET(FLASH->PECR, FLASH_PECR_PRGLOCK))
+ {
+ /* Unlocking FLASH_PECR register access*/
+ if(HAL_IS_BIT_SET(FLASH->PECR, FLASH_PECR_PELOCK))
+ {
+ WRITE_REG(FLASH->PEKEYR, FLASH_PEKEY1);
+ WRITE_REG(FLASH->PEKEYR, FLASH_PEKEY2);
+
+ /* Verify that PELOCK is unlocked */
+ if(HAL_IS_BIT_SET(FLASH->PECR, FLASH_PECR_PELOCK))
+ {
+ return HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+ }
+
+ /* Unlocking the program memory access */
+ WRITE_REG(FLASH->PRGKEYR, FLASH_PRGKEY1);
+ WRITE_REG(FLASH->PRGKEYR, FLASH_PRGKEY2);
+
+ /* Verify that PRGLOCK is unlocked */
+ if (HAL_IS_BIT_SET(FLASH->PECR, FLASH_PECR_PRGLOCK))
+ {
+ return HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+ }
+
+ return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Locks the FLASH control register access
+ * @retval HAL Status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_FLASH_Lock(void)
+{
+ /* Set the PRGLOCK Bit to lock the FLASH Registers access */
+ SET_BIT(FLASH->PECR, FLASH_PECR_PRGLOCK);
+
+ return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Unlock the FLASH Option Control Registers access.
+ * @retval HAL Status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_FLASH_OB_Unlock(void)
+{
+ if(HAL_IS_BIT_SET(FLASH->PECR, FLASH_PECR_OPTLOCK))
+ {
+ /* Unlocking FLASH_PECR register access*/
+ if(HAL_IS_BIT_SET(FLASH->PECR, FLASH_PECR_PELOCK))
+ {
+ /* Unlocking FLASH_PECR register access*/
+ WRITE_REG(FLASH->PEKEYR, FLASH_PEKEY1);
+ WRITE_REG(FLASH->PEKEYR, FLASH_PEKEY2);
+
+ /* Verify that PELOCK is unlocked */
+ if(HAL_IS_BIT_SET(FLASH->PECR, FLASH_PECR_PELOCK))
+ {
+ return HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+ }
+
+ /* Unlocking the option bytes block access */
+ WRITE_REG(FLASH->OPTKEYR, FLASH_OPTKEY1);
+ WRITE_REG(FLASH->OPTKEYR, FLASH_OPTKEY2);
+
+ /* Verify that OPTLOCK is unlocked */
+ if (HAL_IS_BIT_SET(FLASH->PECR, FLASH_PECR_OPTLOCK))
+ {
+ return HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+ }
+
+ return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Lock the FLASH Option Control Registers access.
+ * @retval HAL Status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_FLASH_OB_Lock(void)
+{
+ /* Set the OPTLOCK Bit to lock the option bytes block access */
+ SET_BIT(FLASH->PECR, FLASH_PECR_OPTLOCK);
+
+ return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Launch the option byte loading.
+ * @note This function will reset automatically the MCU.
+ * @retval HAL Status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_FLASH_OB_Launch(void)
+{
+ /* Set the OBL_Launch bit to launch the option byte loading */
+ SET_BIT(FLASH->PECR, FLASH_PECR_OBL_LAUNCH);
+
+ /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+ return(FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_TIMEOUT_VALUE));
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup FLASH_Exported_Functions_Group3 Peripheral errors functions
+ * @brief Peripheral errors functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ===============================================================================
+ ##### Peripheral Errors functions #####
+ ===============================================================================
+ [..]
+ This subsection permit to get in run-time errors of the FLASH peripheral.
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Get the specific FLASH error flag.
+ * @retval FLASH_ErrorCode The returned value can be:
+ * @ref FLASH_Error_Codes
+ */
+uint32_t HAL_FLASH_GetError(void)
+{
+ return pFlash.ErrorCode;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/** @addtogroup FLASH_Private_Functions
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Wait for a FLASH operation to complete.
+ * @param Timeout maximum flash operation timeout
+ * @retval HAL Status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(uint32_t Timeout)
+{
+ /* Wait for the FLASH operation to complete by polling on BUSY flag to be reset.
+ Even if the FLASH operation fails, the BUSY flag will be reset and an error
+ flag will be set */
+
+ uint32_t tickstart = HAL_GetTick();
+
+ while(__HAL_FLASH_GET_FLAG(FLASH_FLAG_BSY))
+ {
+ if (Timeout != HAL_MAX_DELAY)
+ {
+ if((Timeout == 0U) || ((HAL_GetTick()-tickstart) > Timeout))
+ {
+ return HAL_TIMEOUT;
+ }
+ }
+ }
+
+ /* Check FLASH End of Operation flag */
+ if (__HAL_FLASH_GET_FLAG(FLASH_FLAG_EOP))
+ {
+ /* Clear FLASH End of Operation pending bit */
+ __HAL_FLASH_CLEAR_FLAG(FLASH_FLAG_EOP);
+ }
+
+ if(__HAL_FLASH_GET_FLAG(FLASH_FLAG_WRPERR) ||
+ __HAL_FLASH_GET_FLAG(FLASH_FLAG_OPTVERR) ||
+#if defined(FLASH_SR_RDERR)
+ __HAL_FLASH_GET_FLAG(FLASH_FLAG_RDERR) ||
+#endif /* FLASH_SR_RDERR */
+#if defined(FLASH_SR_OPTVERRUSR)
+ __HAL_FLASH_GET_FLAG(FLASH_FLAG_OPTVERRUSR) ||
+#endif /* FLASH_SR_OPTVERRUSR */
+ __HAL_FLASH_GET_FLAG(FLASH_FLAG_PGAERR))
+ {
+ /*Save the error code*/
+ FLASH_SetErrorCode();
+ return HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+
+ /* There is no error flag set */
+ return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+
+/**
+ * @brief Set the specific FLASH error flag.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+static void FLASH_SetErrorCode(void)
+{
+ uint32_t flags = 0U;
+
+ if(__HAL_FLASH_GET_FLAG(FLASH_FLAG_WRPERR))
+ {
+ pFlash.ErrorCode |= HAL_FLASH_ERROR_WRP;
+ flags |= FLASH_FLAG_WRPERR;
+ }
+ if(__HAL_FLASH_GET_FLAG(FLASH_FLAG_PGAERR))
+ {
+ pFlash.ErrorCode |= HAL_FLASH_ERROR_PGA;
+ flags |= FLASH_FLAG_PGAERR;
+ }
+ if(__HAL_FLASH_GET_FLAG(FLASH_FLAG_OPTVERR))
+ {
+ pFlash.ErrorCode |= HAL_FLASH_ERROR_OPTV;
+ flags |= FLASH_FLAG_OPTVERR;
+ }
+
+#if defined(FLASH_SR_RDERR)
+ if(__HAL_FLASH_GET_FLAG(FLASH_FLAG_RDERR))
+ {
+ pFlash.ErrorCode |= HAL_FLASH_ERROR_RD;
+ flags |= FLASH_FLAG_RDERR;
+ }
+#endif /* FLASH_SR_RDERR */
+#if defined(FLASH_SR_OPTVERRUSR)
+ if(__HAL_FLASH_GET_FLAG(FLASH_FLAG_OPTVERRUSR))
+ {
+ pFlash.ErrorCode |= HAL_FLASH_ERROR_OPTVUSR;
+ flags |= FLASH_FLAG_OPTVERRUSR;
+ }
+#endif /* FLASH_SR_OPTVERRUSR */
+
+ /* Clear FLASH error pending bits */
+ __HAL_FLASH_CLEAR_FLAG(flags);
+}
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif /* HAL_FLASH_MODULE_ENABLED */
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
diff --git a/FreeRTOS/Demo/CORTEX_MPU_M3_NUCLEO_L152RE_GCC/ST_Code/Drivers/STM32L1xx_HAL_Driver/Src/stm32l1xx_hal_flash_ex.c b/FreeRTOS/Demo/CORTEX_MPU_M3_NUCLEO_L152RE_GCC/ST_Code/Drivers/STM32L1xx_HAL_Driver/Src/stm32l1xx_hal_flash_ex.c new file mode 100644 index 000000000..03c00a6d9 --- /dev/null +++ b/FreeRTOS/Demo/CORTEX_MPU_M3_NUCLEO_L152RE_GCC/ST_Code/Drivers/STM32L1xx_HAL_Driver/Src/stm32l1xx_hal_flash_ex.c @@ -0,0 +1,1873 @@ +/**
+ ******************************************************************************
+ * @file stm32l1xx_hal_flash_ex.c
+ * @author MCD Application Team
+ * @brief Extended FLASH HAL module driver.
+ *
+ * This file provides firmware functions to manage the following
+ * functionalities of the internal FLASH memory:
+ * + FLASH Interface configuration
+ * + FLASH Memory Erasing
+ * + DATA EEPROM Programming/Erasing
+ * + Option Bytes Programming
+ * + Interrupts management
+ *
+ @verbatim
+ ==============================================================================
+ ##### Flash peripheral Extended features #####
+ ==============================================================================
+
+ [..] Comparing to other products, the FLASH interface for STM32L1xx
+ devices contains the following additional features
+ (+) Erase functions
+ (+) DATA_EEPROM memory management
+ (+) BOOT option bit configuration
+ (+) PCROP protection for all sectors
+
+ ##### How to use this driver #####
+ ==============================================================================
+ [..] This driver provides functions to configure and program the FLASH memory
+ of all STM32L1xx. It includes:
+ (+) Full DATA_EEPROM erase and program management
+ (+) Boot activation
+ (+) PCROP protection configuration and control for all pages
+
+ @endverbatim
+ ******************************************************************************
+ * @attention
+ *
+ * <h2><center>© Copyright (c) 2017 STMicroelectronics.
+ * All rights reserved.</center></h2>
+ *
+ * This software component is licensed by ST under BSD 3-Clause license,
+ * the "License"; You may not use this file except in compliance with the
+ * License. You may obtain a copy of the License at:
+ * opensource.org/licenses/BSD-3-Clause
+ *
+ ******************************************************************************
+ */
+
+/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#include "stm32l1xx_hal.h"
+
+/** @addtogroup STM32L1xx_HAL_Driver
+ * @{
+ */
+#ifdef HAL_FLASH_MODULE_ENABLED
+
+/** @addtogroup FLASH
+ * @{
+ */
+/** @addtogroup FLASH_Private_Variables
+ * @{
+ */
+/* Variables used for Erase pages under interruption*/
+extern FLASH_ProcessTypeDef pFlash;
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup FLASHEx FLASHEx
+ * @brief FLASH HAL Extension module driver
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/** @defgroup FLASHEx_Private_Constants FLASHEx Private Constants
+ * @{
+ */
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/** @defgroup FLASHEx_Private_Macros FLASHEx Private Macros
+ * @{
+ */
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/
+/** @defgroup FLASHEx_Private_Functions FLASHEx Private Functions
+ * @{
+ */
+void FLASH_PageErase(uint32_t PageAddress);
+static HAL_StatusTypeDef FLASH_OB_WRPConfig(FLASH_OBProgramInitTypeDef *pOBInit, FunctionalState NewState);
+static void FLASH_OB_WRPConfigWRP1OrPCROP1(uint32_t WRP1OrPCROP1, FunctionalState NewState);
+#if defined(STM32L100xC) || defined(STM32L151xC) || defined(STM32L152xC) || defined(STM32L162xC) \
+ || defined(STM32L151xCA) || defined(STM32L151xD) || defined(STM32L151xDX) || defined(STM32L152xCA) \
+ || defined(STM32L152xD) || defined(STM32L152xDX) || defined(STM32L162xCA) || defined(STM32L162xD) \
+ || defined(STM32L162xDX) || defined(STM32L151xE) || defined(STM32L152xE) || defined(STM32L162xE)
+static void FLASH_OB_WRPConfigWRP2OrPCROP2(uint32_t WRP2OrPCROP2, FunctionalState NewState);
+#endif /* STM32L100xC || STM32L151xC || STM32L152xC || (...) || STM32L151xE || STM32L152xE || STM32L162xE */
+#if defined(STM32L151xD) || defined(STM32L151xDX) || defined(STM32L152xD) || defined(STM32L152xDX) \
+ || defined(STM32L162xD) || defined(STM32L162xDX) || defined(STM32L151xE) || defined(STM32L152xE) \
+ || defined(STM32L162xE)
+static void FLASH_OB_WRPConfigWRP3(uint32_t WRP3, FunctionalState NewState);
+#endif /* STM32L151xD || STM32L152xD || STM32L162xD || STM32L151xE || STM32L152xE || STM32L162xE */
+#if defined(STM32L151xE) || defined(STM32L152xE) || defined(STM32L162xE) || defined(STM32L151xDX) \
+ || defined(STM32L152xDX) || defined(STM32L162xDX)
+static void FLASH_OB_WRPConfigWRP4(uint32_t WRP4, FunctionalState NewState);
+#endif /* STM32L151xE || STM32L152xE || STM32L151xDX || ... */
+#if defined(FLASH_OBR_SPRMOD)
+static HAL_StatusTypeDef FLASH_OB_PCROPConfig(FLASH_AdvOBProgramInitTypeDef *pAdvOBInit, FunctionalState NewState);
+#endif /* FLASH_OBR_SPRMOD */
+#if defined(FLASH_OBR_nRST_BFB2)
+static HAL_StatusTypeDef FLASH_OB_BootConfig(uint8_t OB_BOOT);
+#endif /* FLASH_OBR_nRST_BFB2 */
+static HAL_StatusTypeDef FLASH_OB_RDPConfig(uint8_t OB_RDP);
+static HAL_StatusTypeDef FLASH_OB_UserConfig(uint8_t OB_IWDG, uint8_t OB_STOP, uint8_t OB_STDBY);
+static HAL_StatusTypeDef FLASH_OB_BORConfig(uint8_t OB_BOR);
+static uint8_t FLASH_OB_GetRDP(void);
+static uint8_t FLASH_OB_GetUser(void);
+static uint8_t FLASH_OB_GetBOR(void);
+static HAL_StatusTypeDef FLASH_DATAEEPROM_FastProgramByte(uint32_t Address, uint8_t Data);
+static HAL_StatusTypeDef FLASH_DATAEEPROM_FastProgramHalfWord(uint32_t Address, uint16_t Data);
+static HAL_StatusTypeDef FLASH_DATAEEPROM_FastProgramWord(uint32_t Address, uint32_t Data);
+static HAL_StatusTypeDef FLASH_DATAEEPROM_ProgramWord(uint32_t Address, uint32_t Data);
+static HAL_StatusTypeDef FLASH_DATAEEPROM_ProgramHalfWord(uint32_t Address, uint16_t Data);
+static HAL_StatusTypeDef FLASH_DATAEEPROM_ProgramByte(uint32_t Address, uint8_t Data);
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/* Exported functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+/** @defgroup FLASHEx_Exported_Functions FLASHEx Exported Functions
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup FLASHEx_Exported_Functions_Group1 FLASHEx Memory Erasing functions
+ * @brief FLASH Memory Erasing functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ==============================================================================
+ ##### FLASH Erasing Programming functions #####
+ ==============================================================================
+
+ [..] The FLASH Memory Erasing functions, includes the following functions:
+ (+) @ref HAL_FLASHEx_Erase: return only when erase has been done
+ (+) @ref HAL_FLASHEx_Erase_IT: end of erase is done when @ref HAL_FLASH_EndOfOperationCallback
+ is called with parameter 0xFFFFFFFF
+
+ [..] Any operation of erase should follow these steps:
+ (#) Call the @ref HAL_FLASH_Unlock() function to enable the flash control register and
+ program memory access.
+ (#) Call the desired function to erase page.
+ (#) Call the @ref HAL_FLASH_Lock() to disable the flash program memory access
+ (recommended to protect the FLASH memory against possible unwanted operation).
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Erase the specified FLASH memory Pages
+ * @note To correctly run this function, the @ref HAL_FLASH_Unlock() function
+ * must be called before.
+ * Call the @ref HAL_FLASH_Lock() to disable the flash memory access
+ * (recommended to protect the FLASH memory against possible unwanted operation)
+ * @note For STM32L151xDX/STM32L152xDX/STM32L162xDX, as memory is not continuous between
+ * 2 banks, user should perform pages erase by bank only.
+ * @param[in] pEraseInit pointer to an FLASH_EraseInitTypeDef structure that
+ * contains the configuration information for the erasing.
+ *
+ * @param[out] PageError pointer to variable that
+ * contains the configuration information on faulty page in case of error
+ * (0xFFFFFFFF means that all the pages have been correctly erased)
+ *
+ * @retval HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL Status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_FLASHEx_Erase(FLASH_EraseInitTypeDef *pEraseInit, uint32_t *PageError)
+{
+ HAL_StatusTypeDef status = HAL_ERROR;
+ uint32_t address = 0U;
+
+ /* Process Locked */
+ __HAL_LOCK(&pFlash);
+
+ /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+ status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_TIMEOUT_VALUE);
+
+ if (status == HAL_OK)
+ {
+ /*Initialization of PageError variable*/
+ *PageError = 0xFFFFFFFFU;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_NBPAGES(pEraseInit->NbPages));
+ assert_param(IS_FLASH_TYPEERASE(pEraseInit->TypeErase));
+ assert_param(IS_FLASH_PROGRAM_ADDRESS(pEraseInit->PageAddress));
+ assert_param(IS_FLASH_PROGRAM_ADDRESS((pEraseInit->PageAddress & ~(FLASH_PAGE_SIZE - 1U)) + pEraseInit->NbPages * FLASH_PAGE_SIZE - 1U));
+
+#if defined(STM32L151xDX) || defined(STM32L152xDX) || defined(STM32L162xDX)
+ /* Check on which bank belongs the 1st address to erase */
+ if (pEraseInit->PageAddress < FLASH_BANK2_BASE)
+ {
+ /* BANK1 */
+ /* Check that last page to erase still belongs to BANK1 */
+ if (((pEraseInit->PageAddress & ~(FLASH_PAGE_SIZE - 1U)) + pEraseInit->NbPages * FLASH_PAGE_SIZE - 1U) > FLASH_BANK1_END)
+ {
+ /* Last page does not belong to BANK1, erase procedure cannot be performed because memory is not
+ continuous */
+ /* Process Unlocked */
+ __HAL_UNLOCK(&pFlash);
+ return HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* BANK2 */
+ /* Check that last page to erase still belongs to BANK2 */
+ if (((pEraseInit->PageAddress & ~(FLASH_PAGE_SIZE - 1U)) + pEraseInit->NbPages * FLASH_PAGE_SIZE - 1U) > FLASH_BANK2_END)
+ {
+ /* Last page does not belong to BANK2, erase procedure cannot be performed because memory is not
+ continuous */
+ /* Process Unlocked */
+ __HAL_UNLOCK(&pFlash);
+ return HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+ }
+#endif /* STM32L151xDX || STM32L152xDX || STM32L162xDX */
+
+ /* Erase page by page to be done*/
+ for(address = pEraseInit->PageAddress;
+ address < ((pEraseInit->NbPages * FLASH_PAGE_SIZE) + pEraseInit->PageAddress);
+ address += FLASH_PAGE_SIZE)
+ {
+ FLASH_PageErase(address);
+
+ /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+ status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_TIMEOUT_VALUE);
+
+ /* If the erase operation is completed, disable the ERASE Bit */
+ CLEAR_BIT(FLASH->PECR, FLASH_PECR_PROG);
+ CLEAR_BIT(FLASH->PECR, FLASH_PECR_ERASE);
+
+ if (status != HAL_OK)
+ {
+ /* In case of error, stop erase procedure and return the faulty address */
+ *PageError = address;
+ break;
+ }
+ }
+ }
+
+ /* Process Unlocked */
+ __HAL_UNLOCK(&pFlash);
+
+ return status;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Perform a page erase of the specified FLASH memory pages with interrupt enabled
+ * @note To correctly run this function, the @ref HAL_FLASH_Unlock() function
+ * must be called before.
+ * Call the @ref HAL_FLASH_Lock() to disable the flash memory access
+ * (recommended to protect the FLASH memory against possible unwanted operation)
+ * End of erase is done when @ref HAL_FLASH_EndOfOperationCallback is called with parameter
+ * 0xFFFFFFFF
+ * @note For STM32L151xDX/STM32L152xDX/STM32L162xDX, as memory is not continuous between
+ * 2 banks, user should perform pages erase by bank only.
+ * @param pEraseInit pointer to an FLASH_EraseInitTypeDef structure that
+ * contains the configuration information for the erasing.
+ *
+ * @retval HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL Status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_FLASHEx_Erase_IT(FLASH_EraseInitTypeDef *pEraseInit)
+{
+ HAL_StatusTypeDef status = HAL_ERROR;
+
+ /* If procedure already ongoing, reject the next one */
+ if (pFlash.ProcedureOnGoing != FLASH_PROC_NONE)
+ {
+ return HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_NBPAGES(pEraseInit->NbPages));
+ assert_param(IS_FLASH_TYPEERASE(pEraseInit->TypeErase));
+ assert_param(IS_FLASH_PROGRAM_ADDRESS(pEraseInit->PageAddress));
+ assert_param(IS_FLASH_PROGRAM_ADDRESS((pEraseInit->PageAddress & ~(FLASH_PAGE_SIZE - 1U)) + pEraseInit->NbPages * FLASH_PAGE_SIZE - 1U));
+
+ /* Process Locked */
+ __HAL_LOCK(&pFlash);
+
+#if defined(STM32L151xDX) || defined(STM32L152xDX) || defined(STM32L162xDX)
+ /* Check on which bank belongs the 1st address to erase */
+ if (pEraseInit->PageAddress < FLASH_BANK2_BASE)
+ {
+ /* BANK1 */
+ /* Check that last page to erase still belongs to BANK1 */
+ if (((pEraseInit->PageAddress & ~(FLASH_PAGE_SIZE - 1U)) + pEraseInit->NbPages * FLASH_PAGE_SIZE - 1U) > FLASH_BANK1_END)
+ {
+ /* Last page does not belong to BANK1, erase procedure cannot be performed because memory is not
+ continuous */
+ /* Process Unlocked */
+ __HAL_UNLOCK(&pFlash);
+ return HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* BANK2 */
+ /* Check that last page to erase still belongs to BANK2 */
+ if (((pEraseInit->PageAddress & ~(FLASH_PAGE_SIZE - 1U)) + pEraseInit->NbPages * FLASH_PAGE_SIZE - 1U) > FLASH_BANK2_END)
+ {
+ /* Last page does not belong to BANK2, erase procedure cannot be performed because memory is not
+ continuous */
+ /* Process Unlocked */
+ __HAL_UNLOCK(&pFlash);
+ return HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+ }
+#endif /* STM32L151xDX || STM32L152xDX || STM32L162xDX */
+
+ /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+ status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_TIMEOUT_VALUE);
+
+ if (status == HAL_OK)
+ {
+ /* Enable End of FLASH Operation and Error source interrupts */
+ __HAL_FLASH_ENABLE_IT(FLASH_IT_EOP | FLASH_IT_ERR);
+
+ pFlash.ProcedureOnGoing = FLASH_PROC_PAGEERASE;
+ pFlash.NbPagesToErase = pEraseInit->NbPages;
+ pFlash.Page = pEraseInit->PageAddress;
+
+ /*Erase 1st page and wait for IT*/
+ FLASH_PageErase(pEraseInit->PageAddress);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Process Unlocked */
+ __HAL_UNLOCK(&pFlash);
+ }
+
+ return status;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup FLASHEx_Exported_Functions_Group2 Option Bytes Programming functions
+ * @brief Option Bytes Programming functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ==============================================================================
+ ##### Option Bytes Programming functions #####
+ ==============================================================================
+
+ [..] Any operation of erase or program should follow these steps:
+ (#) Call the @ref HAL_FLASH_OB_Unlock() function to enable the Flash option control
+ register access.
+ (#) Call following function to program the desired option bytes.
+ (++) @ref HAL_FLASHEx_OBProgram:
+ - To Enable/Disable the desired sector write protection.
+ - To set the desired read Protection Level.
+ - To configure the user option Bytes: IWDG, STOP and the Standby.
+ - To Set the BOR level.
+ (#) Once all needed option bytes to be programmed are correctly written, call the
+ @ref HAL_FLASH_OB_Launch(void) function to launch the Option Bytes programming process.
+ (#) Call the @ref HAL_FLASH_OB_Lock() to disable the Flash option control register access (recommended
+ to protect the option Bytes against possible unwanted operations).
+
+ [..] Proprietary code Read Out Protection (PcROP):
+ (#) The PcROP sector is selected by using the same option bytes as the Write
+ protection (nWRPi bits). As a result, these 2 options are exclusive each other.
+ (#) In order to activate the PcROP (change the function of the nWRPi option bits),
+ the SPRMOD option bit must be activated.
+ (#) The active value of nWRPi bits is inverted when PCROP mode is active, this
+ means: if SPRMOD = 1 and nWRPi = 1 (default value), then the user sector "i"
+ is read/write protected.
+ (#) To activate PCROP mode for Flash sector(s), you need to call the following function:
+ (++) @ref HAL_FLASHEx_AdvOBProgram in selecting sectors to be read/write protected
+ (++) @ref HAL_FLASHEx_OB_SelectPCROP to enable the read/write protection
+ (#) PcROP is available only in STM32L151xBA, STM32L152xBA, STM32L151xC, STM32L152xC & STM32L162xC devices.
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Program option bytes
+ * @param pOBInit pointer to an FLASH_OBInitStruct structure that
+ * contains the configuration information for the programming.
+ *
+ * @retval HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL Status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_FLASHEx_OBProgram(FLASH_OBProgramInitTypeDef *pOBInit)
+{
+ HAL_StatusTypeDef status = HAL_ERROR;
+
+ /* Process Locked */
+ __HAL_LOCK(&pFlash);
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_OPTIONBYTE(pOBInit->OptionType));
+
+ /*Write protection configuration*/
+ if((pOBInit->OptionType & OPTIONBYTE_WRP) == OPTIONBYTE_WRP)
+ {
+ assert_param(IS_WRPSTATE(pOBInit->WRPState));
+ if (pOBInit->WRPState == OB_WRPSTATE_ENABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable of Write protection on the selected Sector*/
+ status = FLASH_OB_WRPConfig(pOBInit, ENABLE);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable of Write protection on the selected Sector*/
+ status = FLASH_OB_WRPConfig(pOBInit, DISABLE);
+ }
+ if (status != HAL_OK)
+ {
+ /* Process Unlocked */
+ __HAL_UNLOCK(&pFlash);
+ return status;
+ }
+ }
+
+ /* Read protection configuration*/
+ if((pOBInit->OptionType & OPTIONBYTE_RDP) == OPTIONBYTE_RDP)
+ {
+ status = FLASH_OB_RDPConfig(pOBInit->RDPLevel);
+ if (status != HAL_OK)
+ {
+ /* Process Unlocked */
+ __HAL_UNLOCK(&pFlash);
+ return status;
+ }
+ }
+
+ /* USER configuration*/
+ if((pOBInit->OptionType & OPTIONBYTE_USER) == OPTIONBYTE_USER)
+ {
+ status = FLASH_OB_UserConfig(pOBInit->USERConfig & OB_IWDG_SW,
+ pOBInit->USERConfig & OB_STOP_NORST,
+ pOBInit->USERConfig & OB_STDBY_NORST);
+ if (status != HAL_OK)
+ {
+ /* Process Unlocked */
+ __HAL_UNLOCK(&pFlash);
+ return status;
+ }
+ }
+
+ /* BOR Level configuration*/
+ if((pOBInit->OptionType & OPTIONBYTE_BOR) == OPTIONBYTE_BOR)
+ {
+ status = FLASH_OB_BORConfig(pOBInit->BORLevel);
+ if (status != HAL_OK)
+ {
+ /* Process Unlocked */
+ __HAL_UNLOCK(&pFlash);
+ return status;
+ }
+ }
+ /* Process Unlocked */
+ __HAL_UNLOCK(&pFlash);
+
+ return status;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Get the Option byte configuration
+ * @param pOBInit pointer to an FLASH_OBInitStruct structure that
+ * contains the configuration information for the programming.
+ *
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void HAL_FLASHEx_OBGetConfig(FLASH_OBProgramInitTypeDef *pOBInit)
+{
+ pOBInit->OptionType = OPTIONBYTE_WRP | OPTIONBYTE_RDP | OPTIONBYTE_USER | OPTIONBYTE_BOR;
+
+ /*Get WRP1*/
+ pOBInit->WRPSector0To31 = (uint32_t)(FLASH->WRPR1);
+
+#if defined(STM32L100xC) || defined(STM32L151xC) || defined(STM32L152xC) || defined(STM32L162xC) \
+ || defined(STM32L151xCA) || defined(STM32L151xD) || defined(STM32L151xDX) || defined(STM32L152xCA) \
+ || defined(STM32L152xD) || defined(STM32L152xDX) || defined(STM32L162xCA) || defined(STM32L162xD) \
+ || defined(STM32L162xDX) || defined(STM32L151xE) || defined(STM32L152xE) || defined(STM32L162xE)
+
+ /*Get WRP2*/
+ pOBInit->WRPSector32To63 = (uint32_t)(FLASH->WRPR2);
+
+#endif /* STM32L100xC || STM32L151xC || STM32L152xC || (...) || STM32L151xE || STM32L152xE || STM32L162xE */
+
+#if defined(STM32L151xD) || defined(STM32L151xDX) || defined(STM32L152xD) || defined(STM32L152xDX) \
+ || defined(STM32L162xD) || defined(STM32L162xDX) || defined(STM32L151xE) || defined(STM32L152xE) \
+ || defined(STM32L162xE)
+
+ /*Get WRP3*/
+ pOBInit->WRPSector64To95 = (uint32_t)(FLASH->WRPR3);
+
+#endif /* STM32L151xD || STM32L152xD || STM32L162xD || STM32L151xE || STM32L152xE || STM32L162xE */
+
+#if defined(STM32L151xE) || defined(STM32L152xE) || defined(STM32L162xE) || defined(STM32L151xDX) \
+ || defined(STM32L152xDX) || defined(STM32L162xDX)
+
+ /*Get WRP4*/
+ pOBInit->WRPSector96To127 = (uint32_t)(FLASH->WRPR4);
+
+#endif /* STM32L151xE || STM32L152xE || STM32L162xE || STM32L151xDX || ... */
+
+ /*Get RDP Level*/
+ pOBInit->RDPLevel = FLASH_OB_GetRDP();
+
+ /*Get USER*/
+ pOBInit->USERConfig = FLASH_OB_GetUser();
+
+ /*Get BOR Level*/
+ pOBInit->BORLevel = FLASH_OB_GetBOR();
+}
+
+#if defined(FLASH_OBR_SPRMOD) || defined(FLASH_OBR_nRST_BFB2)
+
+/**
+ * @brief Program option bytes
+ * @note This function can be used only for Cat2 & Cat3 devices for PCROP and Cat4 & Cat5 for BFB2.
+ * @param pAdvOBInit pointer to an FLASH_AdvOBProgramInitTypeDef structure that
+ * contains the configuration information for the programming.
+ *
+ * @retval HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL Status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_FLASHEx_AdvOBProgram (FLASH_AdvOBProgramInitTypeDef *pAdvOBInit)
+{
+ HAL_StatusTypeDef status = HAL_ERROR;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_OBEX(pAdvOBInit->OptionType));
+
+#if defined(FLASH_OBR_SPRMOD)
+
+ /* Program PCROP option byte*/
+ if ((pAdvOBInit->OptionType & OPTIONBYTE_PCROP) == OPTIONBYTE_PCROP)
+ {
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_PCROPSTATE(pAdvOBInit->PCROPState));
+ if (pAdvOBInit->PCROPState == OB_PCROP_STATE_ENABLE)
+ {
+ /*Enable of Write protection on the selected Sector*/
+ status = FLASH_OB_PCROPConfig(pAdvOBInit, ENABLE);
+ if (status != HAL_OK)
+ {
+ return status;
+ }
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable of Write protection on the selected Sector*/
+ status = FLASH_OB_PCROPConfig(pAdvOBInit, DISABLE);
+ if (status != HAL_OK)
+ {
+ return status;
+ }
+ }
+ }
+
+#endif /* FLASH_OBR_SPRMOD */
+
+#if defined(FLASH_OBR_nRST_BFB2)
+
+ /* Program BOOT config option byte */
+ if ((pAdvOBInit->OptionType & OPTIONBYTE_BOOTCONFIG) == OPTIONBYTE_BOOTCONFIG)
+ {
+ status = FLASH_OB_BootConfig(pAdvOBInit->BootConfig);
+ }
+
+#endif /* FLASH_OBR_nRST_BFB2 */
+
+ return status;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Get the OBEX byte configuration
+ * @note This function can be used only for Cat2 & Cat3 devices for PCROP and Cat4 & Cat5 for BFB2.
+ * @param pAdvOBInit pointer to an FLASH_AdvOBProgramInitTypeDef structure that
+ * contains the configuration information for the programming.
+ *
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void HAL_FLASHEx_AdvOBGetConfig(FLASH_AdvOBProgramInitTypeDef *pAdvOBInit)
+{
+ pAdvOBInit->OptionType = 0U;
+
+#if defined(FLASH_OBR_SPRMOD)
+
+ pAdvOBInit->OptionType |= OPTIONBYTE_PCROP;
+
+ /*Get PCROP state */
+ pAdvOBInit->PCROPState = (FLASH->OBR & FLASH_OBR_SPRMOD) >> POSITION_VAL(FLASH_OBR_SPRMOD);
+
+ /*Get PCROP protected sector from 0 to 31 */
+ pAdvOBInit->PCROPSector0To31 = FLASH->WRPR1;
+
+#if defined(STM32L100xC) || defined(STM32L151xC) || defined(STM32L152xC) || defined(STM32L162xC)
+
+ /*Get PCROP protected sector from 32 to 63 */
+ pAdvOBInit->PCROPSector32To63 = FLASH->WRPR2;
+
+#endif /* STM32L100xC || STM32L151xC || STM32L152xC || STM32L162xC */
+#endif /* FLASH_OBR_SPRMOD */
+
+#if defined(FLASH_OBR_nRST_BFB2)
+
+ pAdvOBInit->OptionType |= OPTIONBYTE_BOOTCONFIG;
+
+ /* Get Boot config OB */
+ pAdvOBInit->BootConfig = (FLASH->OBR & FLASH_OBR_nRST_BFB2) >> 16U;
+
+#endif /* FLASH_OBR_nRST_BFB2 */
+}
+
+#endif /* FLASH_OBR_SPRMOD || FLASH_OBR_nRST_BFB2 */
+
+#if defined(FLASH_OBR_SPRMOD)
+
+/**
+ * @brief Select the Protection Mode (SPRMOD).
+ * @note This function can be used only for STM32L151xBA, STM32L152xBA, STM32L151xC, STM32L152xC & STM32L162xC devices
+ * @note Once SPRMOD bit is active, unprotection of a protected sector is not possible
+ * @note Read a protected sector will set RDERR Flag and write a protected sector will set WRPERR Flag
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_FLASHEx_OB_SelectPCROP(void)
+{
+ HAL_StatusTypeDef status = HAL_OK;
+ uint16_t tmp1 = 0U;
+ uint32_t tmp2 = 0U;
+ uint8_t optiontmp = 0U;
+ uint16_t optiontmp2 = 0U;
+
+ status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_TIMEOUT_VALUE);
+
+ /* Mask RDP Byte */
+ optiontmp = (uint8_t)(*(__IO uint8_t *)(OB_BASE));
+
+ /* Update Option Byte */
+ optiontmp2 = (uint16_t)(OB_PCROP_SELECTED | optiontmp);
+
+ /* calculate the option byte to write */
+ tmp1 = (uint16_t)(~(optiontmp2 ));
+ tmp2 = (uint32_t)(((uint32_t)((uint32_t)(tmp1) << 16U)) | ((uint32_t)optiontmp2));
+
+ if(status == HAL_OK)
+ {
+ /* Clean the error context */
+ pFlash.ErrorCode = HAL_FLASH_ERROR_NONE;
+
+ /* program PCRop */
+ OB->RDP = tmp2;
+
+ /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+ status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_TIMEOUT_VALUE);
+ }
+
+ /* Return the Read protection operation Status */
+ return status;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Deselect the Protection Mode (SPRMOD).
+ * @note This function can be used only for STM32L151xBA, STM32L152xBA, STM32L151xC, STM32L152xC & STM32L162xC devices
+ * @note Once SPRMOD bit is active, unprotection of a protected sector is not possible
+ * @note Read a protected sector will set RDERR Flag and write a protected sector will set WRPERR Flag
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_FLASHEx_OB_DeSelectPCROP(void)
+{
+ HAL_StatusTypeDef status = HAL_OK;
+ uint16_t tmp1 = 0U;
+ uint32_t tmp2 = 0U;
+ uint8_t optiontmp = 0U;
+ uint16_t optiontmp2 = 0U;
+
+ status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_TIMEOUT_VALUE);
+
+ /* Mask RDP Byte */
+ optiontmp = (uint8_t)(*(__IO uint8_t *)(OB_BASE));
+
+ /* Update Option Byte */
+ optiontmp2 = (uint16_t)(OB_PCROP_DESELECTED | optiontmp);
+
+ /* calculate the option byte to write */
+ tmp1 = (uint16_t)(~(optiontmp2 ));
+ tmp2 = (uint32_t)(((uint32_t)((uint32_t)(tmp1) << 16U)) | ((uint32_t)optiontmp2));
+
+ if(status == HAL_OK)
+ {
+ /* Clean the error context */
+ pFlash.ErrorCode = HAL_FLASH_ERROR_NONE;
+
+ /* program PCRop */
+ OB->RDP = tmp2;
+
+ /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+ status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_TIMEOUT_VALUE);
+ }
+
+ /* Return the Read protection operation Status */
+ return status;
+}
+
+#endif /* FLASH_OBR_SPRMOD */
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup FLASHEx_Exported_Functions_Group3 DATA EEPROM Programming functions
+ * @brief DATA EEPROM Programming functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ===============================================================================
+ ##### DATA EEPROM Programming functions #####
+ ===============================================================================
+
+ [..] Any operation of erase or program should follow these steps:
+ (#) Call the @ref HAL_FLASHEx_DATAEEPROM_Unlock() function to enable the data EEPROM access
+ and Flash program erase control register access.
+ (#) Call the desired function to erase or program data.
+ (#) Call the @ref HAL_FLASHEx_DATAEEPROM_Lock() to disable the data EEPROM access
+ and Flash program erase control register access(recommended
+ to protect the DATA_EEPROM against possible unwanted operation).
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Unlocks the data memory and FLASH_PECR register access.
+ * @retval HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL Status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_FLASHEx_DATAEEPROM_Unlock(void)
+{
+ if((FLASH->PECR & FLASH_PECR_PELOCK) != RESET)
+ {
+ /* Unlocking the Data memory and FLASH_PECR register access*/
+ FLASH->PEKEYR = FLASH_PEKEY1;
+ FLASH->PEKEYR = FLASH_PEKEY2;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ return HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+ return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Locks the Data memory and FLASH_PECR register access.
+ * @retval HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL Status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_FLASHEx_DATAEEPROM_Lock(void)
+{
+ /* Set the PELOCK Bit to lock the data memory and FLASH_PECR register access */
+ SET_BIT(FLASH->PECR, FLASH_PECR_PELOCK);
+
+ return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Erase a word in data memory.
+ * @param Address specifies the address to be erased.
+ * @param TypeErase Indicate the way to erase at a specified address.
+ * This parameter can be a value of @ref FLASH_Type_Program
+ * @note To correctly run this function, the @ref HAL_FLASHEx_DATAEEPROM_Unlock() function
+ * must be called before.
+ * Call the @ref HAL_FLASHEx_DATAEEPROM_Lock() to the data EEPROM access
+ * and Flash program erase control register access(recommended to protect
+ * the DATA_EEPROM against possible unwanted operation).
+ * @retval HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL Status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_FLASHEx_DATAEEPROM_Erase(uint32_t TypeErase, uint32_t Address)
+{
+ HAL_StatusTypeDef status = HAL_OK;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TYPEPROGRAMDATA(TypeErase));
+ assert_param(IS_FLASH_DATA_ADDRESS(Address));
+
+ /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+ status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_TIMEOUT_VALUE);
+
+ if(status == HAL_OK)
+ {
+ /* Clean the error context */
+ pFlash.ErrorCode = HAL_FLASH_ERROR_NONE;
+
+ if(TypeErase == FLASH_TYPEERASEDATA_WORD)
+ {
+ /* Write 00000000h to valid address in the data memory */
+ *(__IO uint32_t *) Address = 0x00000000U;
+ }
+
+ if(TypeErase == FLASH_TYPEERASEDATA_HALFWORD)
+ {
+ /* Write 0000h to valid address in the data memory */
+ *(__IO uint16_t *) Address = (uint16_t)0x0000;
+ }
+
+ if(TypeErase == FLASH_TYPEERASEDATA_BYTE)
+ {
+ /* Write 00h to valid address in the data memory */
+ *(__IO uint8_t *) Address = (uint8_t)0x00;
+ }
+
+ status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_TIMEOUT_VALUE);
+ }
+
+ /* Return the erase status */
+ return status;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Program word at a specified address
+ * @note To correctly run this function, the @ref HAL_FLASHEx_DATAEEPROM_Unlock() function
+ * must be called before.
+ * Call the @ref HAL_FLASHEx_DATAEEPROM_Unlock() to he data EEPROM access
+ * and Flash program erase control register access(recommended to protect
+ * the DATA_EEPROM against possible unwanted operation).
+ * @note The function @ref HAL_FLASHEx_DATAEEPROM_EnableFixedTimeProgram() can be called before
+ * this function to configure the Fixed Time Programming.
+ * @param TypeProgram Indicate the way to program at a specified address.
+ * This parameter can be a value of @ref FLASHEx_Type_Program_Data
+ * @param Address specifie the address to be programmed.
+ * @param Data specifie the data to be programmed
+ *
+ * @retval HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL Status
+ */
+
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_FLASHEx_DATAEEPROM_Program(uint32_t TypeProgram, uint32_t Address, uint32_t Data)
+{
+ HAL_StatusTypeDef status = HAL_ERROR;
+
+ /* Process Locked */
+ __HAL_LOCK(&pFlash);
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TYPEPROGRAMDATA(TypeProgram));
+
+ /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+ status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_TIMEOUT_VALUE);
+
+ if(status == HAL_OK)
+ {
+ /* Clean the error context */
+ pFlash.ErrorCode = HAL_FLASH_ERROR_NONE;
+
+ if(TypeProgram == FLASH_TYPEPROGRAMDATA_WORD)
+ {
+ /* Program word (32-bit) at a specified address.*/
+ status = FLASH_DATAEEPROM_ProgramWord(Address, (uint32_t) Data);
+ }
+ else if(TypeProgram == FLASH_TYPEPROGRAMDATA_HALFWORD)
+ {
+ /* Program halfword (16-bit) at a specified address.*/
+ status = FLASH_DATAEEPROM_ProgramHalfWord(Address, (uint16_t) Data);
+ }
+ else if(TypeProgram == FLASH_TYPEPROGRAMDATA_BYTE)
+ {
+ /* Program byte (8-bit) at a specified address.*/
+ status = FLASH_DATAEEPROM_ProgramByte(Address, (uint8_t) Data);
+ }
+ else if(TypeProgram == FLASH_TYPEPROGRAMDATA_FASTBYTE)
+ {
+ /*Program word (8-bit) at a specified address.*/
+ status = FLASH_DATAEEPROM_FastProgramByte(Address, (uint8_t) Data);
+ }
+ else if(TypeProgram == FLASH_TYPEPROGRAMDATA_FASTHALFWORD)
+ {
+ /* Program halfword (16-bit) at a specified address.*/
+ status = FLASH_DATAEEPROM_FastProgramHalfWord(Address, (uint16_t) Data);
+ }
+ else if(TypeProgram == FLASH_TYPEPROGRAMDATA_FASTWORD)
+ {
+ /* Program word (32-bit) at a specified address.*/
+ status = FLASH_DATAEEPROM_FastProgramWord(Address, (uint32_t) Data);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ status = HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+
+ }
+
+ /* Process Unlocked */
+ __HAL_UNLOCK(&pFlash);
+
+ return status;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enable DATA EEPROM fixed Time programming (2*Tprog).
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void HAL_FLASHEx_DATAEEPROM_EnableFixedTimeProgram(void)
+{
+ SET_BIT(FLASH->PECR, FLASH_PECR_FTDW);
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Disables DATA EEPROM fixed Time programming (2*Tprog).
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void HAL_FLASHEx_DATAEEPROM_DisableFixedTimeProgram(void)
+{
+ CLEAR_BIT(FLASH->PECR, FLASH_PECR_FTDW);
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/** @addtogroup FLASHEx_Private_Functions
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/*
+==============================================================================
+ OPTIONS BYTES
+==============================================================================
+*/
+/**
+ * @brief Enables or disables the read out protection.
+ * @note To correctly run this function, the @ref HAL_FLASH_OB_Unlock() function
+ * must be called before.
+ * @param OB_RDP specifies the read protection level.
+ * This parameter can be:
+ * @arg @ref OB_RDP_LEVEL_0 No protection
+ * @arg @ref OB_RDP_LEVEL_1 Read protection of the memory
+ * @arg @ref OB_RDP_LEVEL_2 Chip protection
+ *
+ * !!!Warning!!! When enabling OB_RDP_LEVEL_2 it's no more possible to go back to level 1 or 0
+ *
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+static HAL_StatusTypeDef FLASH_OB_RDPConfig(uint8_t OB_RDP)
+{
+ HAL_StatusTypeDef status = HAL_OK;
+ uint32_t tmp1 = 0U, tmp2 = 0U, tmp3 = 0U;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_OB_RDP(OB_RDP));
+
+ tmp1 = (uint32_t)(OB->RDP & FLASH_OBR_RDPRT);
+
+ /* According to errata sheet, DocID022054 Rev 5, par2.1.5
+ Before setting Level0 in the RDP register, check that the current level is not equal to Level0.
+ If the current level is not equal to Level0, Level0 can be activated.
+ If the current level is Level0 then the RDP register must not be written again with Level0. */
+
+ if ((tmp1 == OB_RDP_LEVEL_0) && (OB_RDP == OB_RDP_LEVEL_0))
+ {
+ /*current level is Level0 then the RDP register must not be written again with Level0. */
+ status = HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+#if defined(FLASH_OBR_SPRMOD)
+ /* Mask SPRMOD bit */
+ tmp3 = (uint32_t)(OB->RDP & FLASH_OBR_SPRMOD);
+#endif
+
+ /* calculate the option byte to write */
+ tmp1 = (~((uint32_t)(OB_RDP | tmp3)));
+ tmp2 = (uint32_t)(((uint32_t)((uint32_t)(tmp1) << 16U)) | ((uint32_t)(OB_RDP | tmp3)));
+
+ /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+ status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_TIMEOUT_VALUE);
+
+ if(status == HAL_OK)
+ {
+ /* Clean the error context */
+ pFlash.ErrorCode = HAL_FLASH_ERROR_NONE;
+
+ /* program read protection level */
+ OB->RDP = tmp2;
+
+ /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+ status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_TIMEOUT_VALUE);
+ }
+ }
+
+ /* Return the Read protection operation Status */
+ return status;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Programs the FLASH brownout reset threshold level Option Byte.
+ * @param OB_BOR Selects the brownout reset threshold level.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg @ref OB_BOR_OFF BOR is disabled at power down, the reset is asserted when the VDD
+ * power supply reaches the PDR(Power Down Reset) threshold (1.5V)
+ * @arg @ref OB_BOR_LEVEL1 BOR Reset threshold levels for 1.7V - 1.8V VDD power supply
+ * @arg @ref OB_BOR_LEVEL2 BOR Reset threshold levels for 1.9V - 2.0V VDD power supply
+ * @arg @ref OB_BOR_LEVEL3 BOR Reset threshold levels for 2.3V - 2.4V VDD power supply
+ * @arg @ref OB_BOR_LEVEL4 BOR Reset threshold levels for 2.55V - 2.65V VDD power supply
+ * @arg @ref OB_BOR_LEVEL5 BOR Reset threshold levels for 2.8V - 2.9V VDD power supply
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+static HAL_StatusTypeDef FLASH_OB_BORConfig(uint8_t OB_BOR)
+{
+ HAL_StatusTypeDef status = HAL_OK;
+ uint32_t tmp = 0U, tmp1 = 0U;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_OB_BOR_LEVEL(OB_BOR));
+
+ /* Get the User Option byte register */
+ tmp1 = OB->USER & ((~FLASH_OBR_BOR_LEV) >> 16U);
+
+ /* Calculate the option byte to write - [0xFFU | nUSER | 0x00U | USER]*/
+ tmp = (uint32_t)~((OB_BOR | tmp1)) << 16U;
+ tmp |= (OB_BOR | tmp1);
+
+ /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+ status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_TIMEOUT_VALUE);
+
+ if(status == HAL_OK)
+ {
+ /* Clean the error context */
+ pFlash.ErrorCode = HAL_FLASH_ERROR_NONE;
+
+ /* Write the BOR Option Byte */
+ OB->USER = tmp;
+
+ /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+ status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_TIMEOUT_VALUE);
+ }
+
+ /* Return the Option Byte BOR Programming Status */
+ return status;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Returns the FLASH User Option Bytes values.
+ * @retval The FLASH User Option Bytes.
+ */
+static uint8_t FLASH_OB_GetUser(void)
+{
+ /* Return the User Option Byte */
+ return (uint8_t)((FLASH->OBR & (FLASH_OBR_IWDG_SW | FLASH_OBR_nRST_STOP | FLASH_OBR_nRST_STDBY)) >> 16U);
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Returns the FLASH Read Protection level.
+ * @retval FLASH RDP level
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg @ref OB_RDP_LEVEL_0 No protection
+ * @arg @ref OB_RDP_LEVEL_1 Read protection of the memory
+ * @arg @ref OB_RDP_LEVEL_2 Full chip protection
+ */
+static uint8_t FLASH_OB_GetRDP(void)
+{
+ uint8_t rdp_level = (uint8_t)(FLASH->OBR & FLASH_OBR_RDPRT);
+
+ if ((rdp_level != OB_RDP_LEVEL_0) && (rdp_level != OB_RDP_LEVEL_2))
+ {
+ return (OB_RDP_LEVEL_1);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ return (rdp_level);
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Returns the FLASH BOR level.
+ * @retval The BOR level Option Bytes.
+ */
+static uint8_t FLASH_OB_GetBOR(void)
+{
+ /* Return the BOR level */
+ return (uint8_t)((FLASH->OBR & (uint32_t)FLASH_OBR_BOR_LEV) >> 16U);
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Write protects the desired pages of the first 64KB of the Flash.
+ * @param pOBInit pointer to an FLASH_OBInitStruct structure that
+ * contains WRP parameters.
+ * @param NewState new state of the specified FLASH Pages Wtite protection.
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @retval HAL_StatusTypeDef
+ */
+static HAL_StatusTypeDef FLASH_OB_WRPConfig(FLASH_OBProgramInitTypeDef *pOBInit, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ HAL_StatusTypeDef status = HAL_OK;
+
+ /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+ status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_TIMEOUT_VALUE);
+
+ if(status == HAL_OK)
+ {
+ /* Clean the error context */
+ pFlash.ErrorCode = HAL_FLASH_ERROR_NONE;
+
+ /* WRP for sector between 0 to 31 */
+ if (pOBInit->WRPSector0To31 != 0U)
+ {
+ FLASH_OB_WRPConfigWRP1OrPCROP1(pOBInit->WRPSector0To31, NewState);
+ }
+
+#if defined(STM32L100xC) || defined(STM32L151xC) || defined(STM32L152xC) || defined(STM32L162xC) \
+ || defined(STM32L151xCA) || defined(STM32L151xD) || defined(STM32L151xDX) || defined(STM32L152xCA) \
+ || defined(STM32L152xD) || defined(STM32L152xDX) || defined(STM32L162xCA) || defined(STM32L162xD) \
+ || defined(STM32L162xDX) || defined(STM32L151xE) || defined(STM32L152xE) || defined(STM32L162xE)
+
+ /* Pages for Cat3, Cat4 & Cat5 devices*/
+ /* WRP for sector between 32 to 63 */
+ if (pOBInit->WRPSector32To63 != 0U)
+ {
+ FLASH_OB_WRPConfigWRP2OrPCROP2(pOBInit->WRPSector32To63, NewState);
+ }
+
+#endif /* STM32L100xC || STM32L151xC || STM32L152xC || (...) || STM32L151xE || STM32L152xE || STM32L162xE */
+
+#if defined(STM32L151xD) || defined(STM32L151xDX) || defined(STM32L152xD) || defined(STM32L152xDX) \
+ || defined(STM32L162xD) || defined(STM32L162xDX) || defined(STM32L151xE) || defined(STM32L152xE) \
+ || defined(STM32L162xE)
+
+ /* Pages for devices with FLASH >= 256KB*/
+ /* WRP for sector between 64 to 95 */
+ if (pOBInit->WRPSector64To95 != 0U)
+ {
+ FLASH_OB_WRPConfigWRP3(pOBInit->WRPSector64To95, NewState);
+ }
+
+#endif /* STM32L151xD || STM32L152xD || STM32L162xD || STM32L151xE || STM32L152xE || STM32L162xE */
+
+#if defined(STM32L151xE) || defined(STM32L152xE) || defined(STM32L162xE) || defined(STM32L151xDX) \
+ || defined(STM32L152xDX) || defined(STM32L162xDX)
+
+ /* Pages for Cat5 devices*/
+ /* WRP for sector between 96 to 127 */
+ if (pOBInit->WRPSector96To127 != 0U)
+ {
+ FLASH_OB_WRPConfigWRP4(pOBInit->WRPSector96To127, NewState);
+ }
+
+#endif /* STM32L151xE || STM32L152xE || STM32L162xE || STM32L151xDX || ... */
+
+ /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+ status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_TIMEOUT_VALUE);
+ }
+
+ /* Return the write protection operation Status */
+ return status;
+}
+
+#if defined(STM32L151xBA) || defined(STM32L152xBA) || defined(STM32L151xC) || defined(STM32L152xC) \
+ || defined(STM32L162xC)
+/**
+ * @brief Enables the read/write protection (PCROP) of the desired
+ * sectors.
+ * @note This function can be used only for Cat2 & Cat3 devices
+ * @param pAdvOBInit pointer to an FLASH_AdvOBProgramInitTypeDef structure that
+ * contains PCROP parameters.
+ * @param NewState new state of the specified FLASH Pages read/Write protection.
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+static HAL_StatusTypeDef FLASH_OB_PCROPConfig(FLASH_AdvOBProgramInitTypeDef *pAdvOBInit, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ HAL_StatusTypeDef status = HAL_OK;
+ FunctionalState pcropstate = DISABLE;
+
+ /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+ status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_TIMEOUT_VALUE);
+
+ /* Invert state to use same function of WRP */
+ if (NewState == DISABLE)
+ {
+ pcropstate = ENABLE;
+ }
+
+ if(status == HAL_OK)
+ {
+ /* Clean the error context */
+ pFlash.ErrorCode = HAL_FLASH_ERROR_NONE;
+
+ /* Pages for Cat2 devices*/
+ /* PCROP for sector between 0 to 31 */
+ if (pAdvOBInit->PCROPSector0To31 != 0U)
+ {
+ FLASH_OB_WRPConfigWRP1OrPCROP1(pAdvOBInit->PCROPSector0To31, pcropstate);
+ }
+
+#if defined(STM32L100xC) || defined(STM32L151xC) || defined(STM32L152xC) || defined(STM32L162xC)
+
+ /* Pages for Cat3 devices*/
+ /* WRP for sector between 32 to 63 */
+ if (pAdvOBInit->PCROPSector32To63 != 0U)
+ {
+ FLASH_OB_WRPConfigWRP2OrPCROP2(pAdvOBInit->PCROPSector32To63, pcropstate);
+ }
+
+#endif /* STM32L100xC || STM32L151xC || STM32L152xC || STM32L162xC */
+
+ /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+ status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_TIMEOUT_VALUE);
+ }
+
+ /* Return the write protection operation Status */
+ return status;
+}
+#endif /* STM32L151xBA || STM32L152xBA || STM32L151xC || STM32L152xC || STM32L162xC */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Write protects the desired pages of the first 128KB of the Flash.
+ * @param WRP1OrPCROP1 specifies the address of the pages to be write protected.
+ * This parameter can be a combination of @ref FLASHEx_Option_Bytes_Write_Protection1
+ * @param NewState new state of the specified FLASH Pages Write protection.
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+static void FLASH_OB_WRPConfigWRP1OrPCROP1(uint32_t WRP1OrPCROP1, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ uint32_t wrp01data = 0U, wrp23data = 0U;
+
+ uint32_t tmp1 = 0U, tmp2 = 0U;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_OB_WRP(WRP1OrPCROP1));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ wrp01data = (uint16_t)(((WRP1OrPCROP1 & WRP_MASK_LOW) | OB->WRP01));
+ wrp23data = (uint16_t)((((WRP1OrPCROP1 & WRP_MASK_HIGH)>>16U | OB->WRP23)));
+ tmp1 = (uint32_t)(~(wrp01data) << 16U)|(wrp01data);
+ OB->WRP01 = tmp1;
+
+ tmp2 = (uint32_t)(~(wrp23data) << 16U)|(wrp23data);
+ OB->WRP23 = tmp2;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ wrp01data = (uint16_t)(~WRP1OrPCROP1 & (WRP_MASK_LOW & OB->WRP01));
+ wrp23data = (uint16_t)((((~WRP1OrPCROP1 & WRP_MASK_HIGH)>>16U & OB->WRP23)));
+
+ tmp1 = (uint32_t)((~wrp01data) << 16U)|(wrp01data);
+ OB->WRP01 = tmp1;
+
+ tmp2 = (uint32_t)((~wrp23data) << 16U)|(wrp23data);
+ OB->WRP23 = tmp2;
+ }
+}
+
+#if defined(STM32L100xC) || defined(STM32L151xC) || defined(STM32L152xC) || defined(STM32L162xC) \
+ || defined(STM32L151xCA) || defined(STM32L151xD) || defined(STM32L151xDX) || defined(STM32L152xCA) \
+ || defined(STM32L152xD) || defined(STM32L152xDX) || defined(STM32L162xCA) || defined(STM32L162xD) \
+ || defined(STM32L162xDX) || defined(STM32L151xE) || defined(STM32L152xE) || defined(STM32L162xE)
+/**
+ * @brief Enable Write protects the desired pages of the second 128KB of the Flash.
+ * @note This function can be used only for Cat3, Cat4 & Cat5 devices.
+ * @param WRP2OrPCROP2 specifies the address of the pages to be write protected.
+ * This parameter can be a combination of @ref FLASHEx_Option_Bytes_Write_Protection2
+ * @param NewState new state of the specified FLASH Pages Wtite protection.
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+static void FLASH_OB_WRPConfigWRP2OrPCROP2(uint32_t WRP2OrPCROP2, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ uint32_t wrp45data = 0U, wrp67data = 0U;
+
+ uint32_t tmp1 = 0U, tmp2 = 0U;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_OB_WRP(WRP2OrPCROP2));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ wrp45data = (uint16_t)(((WRP2OrPCROP2 & WRP_MASK_LOW) | OB->WRP45));
+ wrp67data = (uint16_t)((((WRP2OrPCROP2 & WRP_MASK_HIGH)>>16U | OB->WRP67)));
+ tmp1 = (uint32_t)(~(wrp45data) << 16U)|(wrp45data);
+ OB->WRP45 = tmp1;
+
+ tmp2 = (uint32_t)(~(wrp67data) << 16U)|(wrp67data);
+ OB->WRP67 = tmp2;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ wrp45data = (uint16_t)(~WRP2OrPCROP2 & (WRP_MASK_LOW & OB->WRP45));
+ wrp67data = (uint16_t)((((~WRP2OrPCROP2 & WRP_MASK_HIGH)>>16U & OB->WRP67)));
+
+ tmp1 = (uint32_t)((~wrp45data) << 16U)|(wrp45data);
+ OB->WRP45 = tmp1;
+
+ tmp2 = (uint32_t)((~wrp67data) << 16U)|(wrp67data);
+ OB->WRP67 = tmp2;
+ }
+}
+#endif /* STM32L100xC || STM32L151xC || STM32L152xC || (...) || STM32L151xE || STM32L152xE || STM32L162xE */
+
+#if defined(STM32L151xD) || defined(STM32L151xDX) || defined(STM32L152xD) || defined(STM32L152xDX) \
+ || defined(STM32L162xD) || defined(STM32L162xDX) || defined(STM32L151xE) || defined(STM32L152xE) \
+ || defined(STM32L162xE)
+/**
+ * @brief Enable Write protects the desired pages of the third 128KB of the Flash.
+ * @note This function can be used only for STM32L151xD, STM32L152xD, STM32L162xD & Cat5 devices.
+ * @param WRP3 specifies the address of the pages to be write protected.
+ * This parameter can be a combination of @ref FLASHEx_Option_Bytes_Write_Protection3
+ * @param NewState new state of the specified FLASH Pages Wtite protection.
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+static void FLASH_OB_WRPConfigWRP3(uint32_t WRP3, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ uint32_t wrp89data = 0U, wrp1011data = 0U;
+
+ uint32_t tmp1 = 0U, tmp2 = 0U;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_OB_WRP(WRP3));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ wrp89data = (uint16_t)(((WRP3 & WRP_MASK_LOW) | OB->WRP89));
+ wrp1011data = (uint16_t)((((WRP3 & WRP_MASK_HIGH)>>16U | OB->WRP1011)));
+ tmp1 = (uint32_t)(~(wrp89data) << 16U)|(wrp89data);
+ OB->WRP89 = tmp1;
+
+ tmp2 = (uint32_t)(~(wrp1011data) << 16U)|(wrp1011data);
+ OB->WRP1011 = tmp2;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ wrp89data = (uint16_t)(~WRP3 & (WRP_MASK_LOW & OB->WRP89));
+ wrp1011data = (uint16_t)((((~WRP3 & WRP_MASK_HIGH)>>16U & OB->WRP1011)));
+
+ tmp1 = (uint32_t)((~wrp89data) << 16U)|(wrp89data);
+ OB->WRP89 = tmp1;
+
+ tmp2 = (uint32_t)((~wrp1011data) << 16U)|(wrp1011data);
+ OB->WRP1011 = tmp2;
+ }
+}
+#endif /* STM32L151xD || STM32L152xD || STM32L162xD || STM32L151xE || STM32L152xE || STM32L162xE */
+
+#if defined(STM32L151xE) || defined(STM32L152xE) || defined(STM32L162xE) || defined(STM32L151xDX) \
+ || defined(STM32L152xDX) || defined(STM32L162xDX)
+/**
+ * @brief Enable Write protects the desired pages of the Fourth 128KB of the Flash.
+ * @note This function can be used only for Cat5 & STM32L1xxDX devices.
+ * @param WRP4 specifies the address of the pages to be write protected.
+ * This parameter can be a combination of @ref FLASHEx_Option_Bytes_Write_Protection4
+ * @param NewState new state of the specified FLASH Pages Wtite protection.
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+static void FLASH_OB_WRPConfigWRP4(uint32_t WRP4, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ uint32_t wrp1213data = 0U, wrp1415data = 0U;
+
+ uint32_t tmp1 = 0U, tmp2 = 0U;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_OB_WRP(WRP4));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ wrp1213data = (uint16_t)(((WRP4 & WRP_MASK_LOW) | OB->WRP1213));
+ wrp1415data = (uint16_t)((((WRP4 & WRP_MASK_HIGH)>>16U | OB->WRP1415)));
+ tmp1 = (uint32_t)(~(wrp1213data) << 16U)|(wrp1213data);
+ OB->WRP1213 = tmp1;
+
+ tmp2 = (uint32_t)(~(wrp1415data) << 16U)|(wrp1415data);
+ OB->WRP1415 = tmp2;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ wrp1213data = (uint16_t)(~WRP4 & (WRP_MASK_LOW & OB->WRP1213));
+ wrp1415data = (uint16_t)((((~WRP4 & WRP_MASK_HIGH)>>16U & OB->WRP1415)));
+
+ tmp1 = (uint32_t)((~wrp1213data) << 16U)|(wrp1213data);
+ OB->WRP1213 = tmp1;
+
+ tmp2 = (uint32_t)((~wrp1415data) << 16U)|(wrp1415data);
+ OB->WRP1415 = tmp2;
+ }
+}
+#endif /* STM32L151xE || STM32L152xE || STM32L162xE || STM32L151xDX || ... */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Programs the FLASH User Option Byte: IWDG_SW / RST_STOP / RST_STDBY.
+ * @param OB_IWDG Selects the WDG mode.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg @ref OB_IWDG_SW Software WDG selected
+ * @arg @ref OB_IWDG_HW Hardware WDG selected
+ * @param OB_STOP Reset event when entering STOP mode.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg @ref OB_STOP_NORST No reset generated when entering in STOP
+ * @arg @ref OB_STOP_RST Reset generated when entering in STOP
+ * @param OB_STDBY Reset event when entering Standby mode.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg @ref OB_STDBY_NORST No reset generated when entering in STANDBY
+ * @arg @ref OB_STDBY_RST Reset generated when entering in STANDBY
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+static HAL_StatusTypeDef FLASH_OB_UserConfig(uint8_t OB_IWDG, uint8_t OB_STOP, uint8_t OB_STDBY)
+{
+ HAL_StatusTypeDef status = HAL_OK;
+ uint32_t tmp = 0U, tmp1 = 0U;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_OB_IWDG_SOURCE(OB_IWDG));
+ assert_param(IS_OB_STOP_SOURCE(OB_STOP));
+ assert_param(IS_OB_STDBY_SOURCE(OB_STDBY));
+
+ /* Get the User Option byte register */
+ tmp1 = OB->USER & ((~(FLASH_OBR_IWDG_SW | FLASH_OBR_nRST_STOP | FLASH_OBR_nRST_STDBY)) >> 16U);
+
+ /* Calculate the user option byte to write */
+ tmp = (uint32_t)(((uint32_t)~((uint32_t)((uint32_t)(OB_IWDG) | (uint32_t)(OB_STOP) | (uint32_t)(OB_STDBY) | tmp1))) << 16U);
+ tmp |= ((uint32_t)(OB_IWDG) | ((uint32_t)OB_STOP) | (uint32_t)(OB_STDBY) | tmp1);
+
+ /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+ status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_TIMEOUT_VALUE);
+
+ if(status == HAL_OK)
+ {
+ /* Clean the error context */
+ pFlash.ErrorCode = HAL_FLASH_ERROR_NONE;
+
+ /* Write the User Option Byte */
+ OB->USER = tmp;
+
+ /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+ status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_TIMEOUT_VALUE);
+ }
+
+ /* Return the Option Byte program Status */
+ return status;
+}
+
+#if defined(FLASH_OBR_nRST_BFB2)
+/**
+ * @brief Configures to boot from Bank1 or Bank2.
+ * @param OB_BOOT select the FLASH Bank to boot from.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg @ref OB_BOOT_BANK2 At startup, if boot pins are set in boot from user Flash
+ * position and this parameter is selected the device will boot from Bank2 or Bank1,
+ * depending on the activation of the bank. The active banks are checked in
+ * the following order: Bank2, followed by Bank1.
+ * The active bank is recognized by the value programmed at the base address
+ * of the respective bank (corresponding to the initial stack pointer value
+ * in the interrupt vector table).
+ * @arg @ref OB_BOOT_BANK1 At startup, if boot pins are set in boot from user Flash
+ * position and this parameter is selected the device will boot from Bank1(Default).
+ * For more information, please refer to AN2606 from www.st.com.
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+static HAL_StatusTypeDef FLASH_OB_BootConfig(uint8_t OB_BOOT)
+{
+ HAL_StatusTypeDef status = HAL_OK;
+ uint32_t tmp = 0U, tmp1 = 0U;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_OB_BOOT_BANK(OB_BOOT));
+
+ /* Get the User Option byte register and BOR Level*/
+ tmp1 = OB->USER & ((~FLASH_OBR_nRST_BFB2) >> 16U);
+
+ /* Calculate the option byte to write */
+ tmp = (uint32_t)~(OB_BOOT | tmp1) << 16U;
+ tmp |= (OB_BOOT | tmp1);
+
+ /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+ status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_TIMEOUT_VALUE);
+
+ if(status == HAL_OK)
+ {
+ /* Clean the error context */
+ pFlash.ErrorCode = HAL_FLASH_ERROR_NONE;
+
+ /* Write the BOOT Option Byte */
+ OB->USER = tmp;
+
+ /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+ status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_TIMEOUT_VALUE);
+ }
+
+ /* Return the Option Byte program Status */
+ return status;
+}
+
+#endif /* FLASH_OBR_nRST_BFB2 */
+
+/*
+==============================================================================
+ DATA
+==============================================================================
+*/
+
+/**
+ * @brief Write a Byte at a specified address in data memory.
+ * @param Address specifies the address to be written.
+ * @param Data specifies the data to be written.
+ * @note This function assumes that the is data word is already erased.
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+static HAL_StatusTypeDef FLASH_DATAEEPROM_FastProgramByte(uint32_t Address, uint8_t Data)
+{
+ HAL_StatusTypeDef status = HAL_OK;
+#if defined(STM32L100xB) || defined(STM32L151xB) || defined(STM32L152xB)
+ uint32_t tmp = 0U, tmpaddr = 0U;
+#endif /* STM32L100xB || STM32L151xB || STM32L152xB */
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_FLASH_DATA_ADDRESS(Address));
+
+ /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+ status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_TIMEOUT_VALUE);
+
+ if(status == HAL_OK)
+ {
+ /* Clear the FTDW bit */
+ CLEAR_BIT(FLASH->PECR, FLASH_PECR_FTDW);
+
+#if defined(STM32L100xB) || defined(STM32L151xB) || defined(STM32L152xB)
+ /* Possible only on Cat1 devices */
+ if(Data != (uint8_t)0x00U)
+ {
+ /* If the previous operation is completed, proceed to write the new Data */
+ *(__IO uint8_t *)Address = Data;
+
+ /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+ status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_TIMEOUT_VALUE);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ tmpaddr = Address & 0xFFFFFFFCU;
+ tmp = * (__IO uint32_t *) tmpaddr;
+ tmpaddr = 0xFFU << ((uint32_t) (0x8U * (Address & 0x3U)));
+ tmp &= ~tmpaddr;
+ status = HAL_FLASHEx_DATAEEPROM_Erase(FLASH_TYPEERASEDATA_WORD, Address & 0xFFFFFFFCU);
+ /* Process Unlocked */
+ __HAL_UNLOCK(&pFlash);
+ status = HAL_FLASHEx_DATAEEPROM_Program(FLASH_TYPEPROGRAMDATA_FASTWORD, (Address & 0xFFFFFFFCU), tmp);
+ /* Process Locked */
+ __HAL_LOCK(&pFlash);
+ }
+#else /*!Cat1*/
+ /* If the previous operation is completed, proceed to write the new Data */
+ *(__IO uint8_t *)Address = Data;
+
+ /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+ status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_TIMEOUT_VALUE);
+#endif /* STM32L100xB || STM32L151xB || STM32L152xB */
+ }
+ /* Return the Write Status */
+ return status;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Writes a half word at a specified address in data memory.
+ * @param Address specifies the address to be written.
+ * @param Data specifies the data to be written.
+ * @note This function assumes that the is data word is already erased.
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+static HAL_StatusTypeDef FLASH_DATAEEPROM_FastProgramHalfWord(uint32_t Address, uint16_t Data)
+{
+ HAL_StatusTypeDef status = HAL_OK;
+#if defined(STM32L100xB) || defined(STM32L151xB) || defined(STM32L152xB)
+ uint32_t tmp = 0U, tmpaddr = 0U;
+#endif /* STM32L100xB || STM32L151xB || STM32L152xB */
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_FLASH_DATA_ADDRESS(Address));
+
+ /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+ status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_TIMEOUT_VALUE);
+
+ if(status == HAL_OK)
+ {
+ /* Clear the FTDW bit */
+ CLEAR_BIT(FLASH->PECR, FLASH_PECR_FTDW);
+
+#if defined(STM32L100xB) || defined(STM32L151xB) || defined(STM32L152xB)
+ /* Possible only on Cat1 devices */
+ if(Data != (uint16_t)0x0000U)
+ {
+ /* If the previous operation is completed, proceed to write the new data */
+ *(__IO uint16_t *)Address = Data;
+
+ /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+ status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_TIMEOUT_VALUE);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Process Unlocked */
+ __HAL_UNLOCK(&pFlash);
+ if((Address & 0x3U) != 0x3U)
+ {
+ tmpaddr = Address & 0xFFFFFFFCU;
+ tmp = * (__IO uint32_t *) tmpaddr;
+ tmpaddr = 0xFFFFU << ((uint32_t) (0x8U * (Address & 0x3U)));
+ tmp &= ~tmpaddr;
+ status = HAL_FLASHEx_DATAEEPROM_Erase(FLASH_TYPEERASEDATA_WORD, Address & 0xFFFFFFFCU);
+ status = HAL_FLASHEx_DATAEEPROM_Program(FLASH_TYPEPROGRAMDATA_FASTWORD, (Address & 0xFFFFFFFCU), tmp);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ HAL_FLASHEx_DATAEEPROM_Program(FLASH_TYPEPROGRAMDATA_FASTBYTE, Address, 0x00U);
+ HAL_FLASHEx_DATAEEPROM_Program(FLASH_TYPEPROGRAMDATA_FASTBYTE, Address + 1U, 0x00U);
+ }
+ /* Process Locked */
+ __HAL_LOCK(&pFlash);
+ }
+#else /* !Cat1 */
+ /* If the previous operation is completed, proceed to write the new data */
+ *(__IO uint16_t *)Address = Data;
+
+ /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+ status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_TIMEOUT_VALUE);
+#endif /* STM32L100xB || STM32L151xB || STM32L152xB */
+ }
+ /* Return the Write Status */
+ return status;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Programs a word at a specified address in data memory.
+ * @param Address specifies the address to be written.
+ * @param Data specifies the data to be written.
+ * @note This function assumes that the is data word is already erased.
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+static HAL_StatusTypeDef FLASH_DATAEEPROM_FastProgramWord(uint32_t Address, uint32_t Data)
+{
+ HAL_StatusTypeDef status = HAL_OK;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_FLASH_DATA_ADDRESS(Address));
+
+ /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+ status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_TIMEOUT_VALUE);
+
+ if(status == HAL_OK)
+ {
+ /* Clear the FTDW bit */
+ CLEAR_BIT(FLASH->PECR, FLASH_PECR_FTDW);
+
+ /* If the previous operation is completed, proceed to program the new data */
+ *(__IO uint32_t *)Address = Data;
+
+ /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+ status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_TIMEOUT_VALUE);
+ }
+ /* Return the Write Status */
+ return status;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Write a Byte at a specified address in data memory without erase.
+ * @param Address specifies the address to be written.
+ * @param Data specifies the data to be written.
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+static HAL_StatusTypeDef FLASH_DATAEEPROM_ProgramByte(uint32_t Address, uint8_t Data)
+{
+ HAL_StatusTypeDef status = HAL_OK;
+#if defined(STM32L100xB) || defined(STM32L151xB) || defined(STM32L152xB)
+ uint32_t tmp = 0U, tmpaddr = 0U;
+#endif /* STM32L100xB || STM32L151xB || STM32L152xB */
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_FLASH_DATA_ADDRESS(Address));
+
+ /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+ status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_TIMEOUT_VALUE);
+
+ if(status == HAL_OK)
+ {
+#if defined(STM32L100xB) || defined(STM32L151xB) || defined(STM32L152xB)
+ if(Data != (uint8_t) 0x00U)
+ {
+ *(__IO uint8_t *)Address = Data;
+
+ /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+ status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_TIMEOUT_VALUE);
+
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ tmpaddr = Address & 0xFFFFFFFCU;
+ tmp = * (__IO uint32_t *) tmpaddr;
+ tmpaddr = 0xFFU << ((uint32_t) (0x8U * (Address & 0x3U)));
+ tmp &= ~tmpaddr;
+ status = HAL_FLASHEx_DATAEEPROM_Erase(FLASH_TYPEERASEDATA_WORD, Address & 0xFFFFFFFCU);
+ /* Process Unlocked */
+ __HAL_UNLOCK(&pFlash);
+ status = HAL_FLASHEx_DATAEEPROM_Program(FLASH_TYPEPROGRAMDATA_FASTWORD, (Address & 0xFFFFFFFCU), tmp);
+ /* Process Locked */
+ __HAL_LOCK(&pFlash);
+ }
+#else /* Not Cat1*/
+ *(__IO uint8_t *)Address = Data;
+
+ /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+ status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_TIMEOUT_VALUE);
+#endif /* STM32L100xB || STM32L151xB || STM32L152xB */
+ }
+ /* Return the Write Status */
+ return status;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Writes a half word at a specified address in data memory without erase.
+ * @param Address specifies the address to be written.
+ * @param Data specifies the data to be written.
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+static HAL_StatusTypeDef FLASH_DATAEEPROM_ProgramHalfWord(uint32_t Address, uint16_t Data)
+{
+ HAL_StatusTypeDef status = HAL_OK;
+#if defined(STM32L100xB) || defined(STM32L151xB) || defined(STM32L152xB)
+ uint32_t tmp = 0U, tmpaddr = 0U;
+#endif /* STM32L100xB || STM32L151xB || STM32L152xB */
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_FLASH_DATA_ADDRESS(Address));
+
+ /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+ status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_TIMEOUT_VALUE);
+
+ if(status == HAL_OK)
+ {
+#if defined(STM32L100xB) || defined(STM32L151xB) || defined(STM32L152xB)
+ if(Data != (uint16_t)0x0000U)
+ {
+ *(__IO uint16_t *)Address = Data;
+
+ /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+ status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_TIMEOUT_VALUE);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Process Unlocked */
+ __HAL_UNLOCK(&pFlash);
+ if((Address & 0x3U) != 0x3U)
+ {
+ tmpaddr = Address & 0xFFFFFFFCU;
+ tmp = * (__IO uint32_t *) tmpaddr;
+ tmpaddr = 0xFFFFU << ((uint32_t) (0x8U * (Address & 0x3U)));
+ tmp &= ~tmpaddr;
+ status = HAL_FLASHEx_DATAEEPROM_Erase(FLASH_TYPEERASEDATA_WORD, Address & 0xFFFFFFFCU);
+ status = HAL_FLASHEx_DATAEEPROM_Program(FLASH_TYPEPROGRAMDATA_FASTWORD, (Address & 0xFFFFFFFCU), tmp);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ HAL_FLASHEx_DATAEEPROM_Program(FLASH_TYPEPROGRAMDATA_FASTBYTE, Address, 0x00U);
+ HAL_FLASHEx_DATAEEPROM_Program(FLASH_TYPEPROGRAMDATA_FASTBYTE, Address + 1U, 0x00U);
+ }
+ /* Process Locked */
+ __HAL_LOCK(&pFlash);
+ }
+#else /* Not Cat1*/
+ *(__IO uint16_t *)Address = Data;
+
+ /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+ status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_TIMEOUT_VALUE);
+#endif /* STM32L100xB || STM32L151xB || STM32L152xB */
+ }
+ /* Return the Write Status */
+ return status;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Programs a word at a specified address in data memory without erase.
+ * @param Address specifies the address to be written.
+ * @param Data specifies the data to be written.
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+static HAL_StatusTypeDef FLASH_DATAEEPROM_ProgramWord(uint32_t Address, uint32_t Data)
+{
+ HAL_StatusTypeDef status = HAL_OK;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_FLASH_DATA_ADDRESS(Address));
+
+ /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+ status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_TIMEOUT_VALUE);
+
+ if(status == HAL_OK)
+ {
+ *(__IO uint32_t *)Address = Data;
+
+ /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+ status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_TIMEOUT_VALUE);
+ }
+ /* Return the Write Status */
+ return status;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/** @addtogroup FLASH
+ * @{
+ */
+
+
+/** @addtogroup FLASH_Private_Functions
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Erases a specified page in program memory.
+ * @param PageAddress The page address in program memory to be erased.
+ * @note A Page is erased in the Program memory only if the address to load
+ * is the start address of a page (multiple of @ref FLASH_PAGE_SIZE bytes).
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void FLASH_PageErase(uint32_t PageAddress)
+{
+ /* Clean the error context */
+ pFlash.ErrorCode = HAL_FLASH_ERROR_NONE;
+
+ /* Set the ERASE bit */
+ SET_BIT(FLASH->PECR, FLASH_PECR_ERASE);
+
+ /* Set PROG bit */
+ SET_BIT(FLASH->PECR, FLASH_PECR_PROG);
+
+ /* Write 00000000h to the first word of the program page to erase */
+ *(__IO uint32_t *)(uint32_t)(PageAddress & ~(FLASH_PAGE_SIZE - 1)) = 0x00000000;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif /* HAL_FLASH_MODULE_ENABLED */
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
diff --git a/FreeRTOS/Demo/CORTEX_MPU_M3_NUCLEO_L152RE_GCC/ST_Code/Drivers/STM32L1xx_HAL_Driver/Src/stm32l1xx_hal_flash_ramfunc.c b/FreeRTOS/Demo/CORTEX_MPU_M3_NUCLEO_L152RE_GCC/ST_Code/Drivers/STM32L1xx_HAL_Driver/Src/stm32l1xx_hal_flash_ramfunc.c new file mode 100644 index 000000000..85664607a --- /dev/null +++ b/FreeRTOS/Demo/CORTEX_MPU_M3_NUCLEO_L152RE_GCC/ST_Code/Drivers/STM32L1xx_HAL_Driver/Src/stm32l1xx_hal_flash_ramfunc.c @@ -0,0 +1,644 @@ +/**
+ ******************************************************************************
+ * @file stm32l1xx_hal_flash_ramfunc.c
+ * @author MCD Application Team
+ * @brief FLASH RAMFUNC driver.
+ * This file provides a Flash firmware functions which should be
+ * executed from internal SRAM
+ *
+ * @verbatim
+
+ *** ARM Compiler ***
+ --------------------
+ [..] RAM functions are defined using the toolchain options.
+ Functions that are be executed in RAM should reside in a separate
+ source module. Using the 'Options for File' dialog you can simply change
+ the 'Code / Const' area of a module to a memory space in physical RAM.
+ Available memory areas are declared in the 'Target' tab of the
+ Options for Target' dialog.
+
+ *** ICCARM Compiler ***
+ -----------------------
+ [..] RAM functions are defined using a specific toolchain keyword "__ramfunc".
+
+ *** GNU Compiler ***
+ --------------------
+ [..] RAM functions are defined using a specific toolchain attribute
+ "__attribute__((section(".RamFunc")))".
+
+@endverbatim
+ ******************************************************************************
+ * @attention
+ *
+ * <h2><center>© Copyright (c) 2017 STMicroelectronics.
+ * All rights reserved.</center></h2>
+ *
+ * This software component is licensed by ST under BSD 3-Clause license,
+ * the "License"; You may not use this file except in compliance with the
+ * License. You may obtain a copy of the License at:
+ * opensource.org/licenses/BSD-3-Clause
+ *
+ ******************************************************************************
+ */
+
+/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#include "stm32l1xx_hal.h"
+
+/** @addtogroup STM32L1xx_HAL_Driver
+ * @{
+ */
+
+#ifdef HAL_FLASH_MODULE_ENABLED
+
+/** @addtogroup FLASH
+ * @{
+ */
+/** @addtogroup FLASH_Private_Variables
+ * @{
+ */
+extern FLASH_ProcessTypeDef pFlash;
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup FLASH_RAMFUNC FLASH_RAMFUNC
+ * @brief FLASH functions executed from RAM
+ * @{
+ */
+
+
+/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/
+/** @defgroup FLASH_RAMFUNC_Private_Functions FLASH RAM Private Functions
+ * @{
+ */
+
+static __RAM_FUNC HAL_StatusTypeDef FLASHRAM_WaitForLastOperation(uint32_t Timeout);
+static __RAM_FUNC HAL_StatusTypeDef FLASHRAM_SetErrorCode(void);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/* Private functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+/** @defgroup FLASH_RAMFUNC_Exported_Functions FLASH RAM Exported Functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ===============================================================================
+ ##### ramfunc functions #####
+ ===============================================================================
+ [..]
+ This subsection provides a set of functions that should be executed from RAM
+ transfers.
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup FLASH_RAMFUNC_Exported_Functions_Group1 Peripheral features functions
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enable the power down mode during RUN mode.
+ * @note This function can be used only when the user code is running from Internal SRAM.
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+__RAM_FUNC HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_FLASHEx_EnableRunPowerDown(void)
+{
+ /* Enable the Power Down in Run mode*/
+ __HAL_FLASH_POWER_DOWN_ENABLE();
+
+ return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Disable the power down mode during RUN mode.
+ * @note This function can be used only when the user code is running from Internal SRAM.
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+__RAM_FUNC HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_FLASHEx_DisableRunPowerDown(void)
+{
+ /* Disable the Power Down in Run mode*/
+ __HAL_FLASH_POWER_DOWN_DISABLE();
+
+ return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup FLASH_RAMFUNC_Exported_Functions_Group2 Programming and erasing operation functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+#if defined(FLASH_PECR_PARALLBANK)
+/**
+ * @brief Erases a specified 2 pages in program memory in parallel.
+ * @note This function can be used only for STM32L151xD, STM32L152xD), STM32L162xD and Cat5 devices.
+ * To correctly run this function, the @ref HAL_FLASH_Unlock() function
+ * must be called before.
+ * Call the @ref HAL_FLASH_Lock() to disable the flash memory access
+ * (recommended to protect the FLASH memory against possible unwanted operation).
+ * @param Page_Address1: The page address in program memory to be erased in
+ * the first Bank (BANK1). This parameter should be between FLASH_BASE
+ * and FLASH_BANK1_END.
+ * @param Page_Address2: The page address in program memory to be erased in
+ * the second Bank (BANK2). This parameter should be between FLASH_BANK2_BASE
+ * and FLASH_BANK2_END.
+ * @note A Page is erased in the Program memory only if the address to load
+ * is the start address of a page (multiple of @ref FLASH_PAGE_SIZE bytes).
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+__RAM_FUNC HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_FLASHEx_EraseParallelPage(uint32_t Page_Address1, uint32_t Page_Address2)
+{
+ HAL_StatusTypeDef status = HAL_OK;
+
+ /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+ status = FLASHRAM_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_TIMEOUT_VALUE);
+
+ if(status == HAL_OK)
+ {
+ /* Proceed to erase the page */
+ SET_BIT(FLASH->PECR, FLASH_PECR_PARALLBANK);
+ SET_BIT(FLASH->PECR, FLASH_PECR_ERASE);
+ SET_BIT(FLASH->PECR, FLASH_PECR_PROG);
+
+ /* Write 00000000h to the first word of the first program page to erase */
+ *(__IO uint32_t *)Page_Address1 = 0x00000000U;
+ /* Write 00000000h to the first word of the second program page to erase */
+ *(__IO uint32_t *)Page_Address2 = 0x00000000U;
+
+ /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+ status = FLASHRAM_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_TIMEOUT_VALUE);
+
+ /* If the erase operation is completed, disable the ERASE, PROG and PARALLBANK bits */
+ CLEAR_BIT(FLASH->PECR, FLASH_PECR_PROG);
+ CLEAR_BIT(FLASH->PECR, FLASH_PECR_ERASE);
+ CLEAR_BIT(FLASH->PECR, FLASH_PECR_PARALLBANK);
+ }
+ /* Return the Erase Status */
+ return status;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Program 2 half pages in program memory in parallel (half page size is 32 Words).
+ * @note This function can be used only for STM32L151xD, STM32L152xD), STM32L162xD and Cat5 devices.
+ * @param Address1: specifies the first address to be written in the first bank
+ * (BANK1). This parameter should be between FLASH_BASE and (FLASH_BANK1_END - FLASH_PAGE_SIZE).
+ * @param pBuffer1: pointer to the buffer containing the data to be written
+ * to the first half page in the first bank.
+ * @param Address2: specifies the second address to be written in the second bank
+ * (BANK2). This parameter should be between FLASH_BANK2_BASE and (FLASH_BANK2_END - FLASH_PAGE_SIZE).
+ * @param pBuffer2: pointer to the buffer containing the data to be written
+ * to the second half page in the second bank.
+ * @note To correctly run this function, the @ref HAL_FLASH_Unlock() function
+ * must be called before.
+ * Call the @ref HAL_FLASH_Lock() to disable the flash memory access
+ * (recommended to protect the FLASH memory against possible unwanted operation).
+ * @note Half page write is possible only from SRAM.
+ * @note If there are more than 32 words to write, after 32 words another
+ * Half Page programming operation starts and has to be finished.
+ * @note A half page is written to the program memory only if the first
+ * address to load is the start address of a half page (multiple of 128
+ * bytes) and the 31 remaining words to load are in the same half page.
+ * @note During the Program memory half page write all read operations are
+ * forbidden (this includes DMA read operations and debugger read
+ * operations such as breakpoints, periodic updates, etc.).
+ * @note If a PGAERR is set during a Program memory half page write, the
+ * complete write operation is aborted. Software should then reset the
+ * FPRG and PROG/DATA bits and restart the write operation from the
+ * beginning.
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+__RAM_FUNC HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_FLASHEx_ProgramParallelHalfPage(uint32_t Address1, uint32_t* pBuffer1, uint32_t Address2, uint32_t* pBuffer2)
+{
+ uint32_t primask_bit;
+ uint32_t count = 0U;
+ HAL_StatusTypeDef status = HAL_OK;
+
+ /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+ status = FLASHRAM_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_TIMEOUT_VALUE);
+
+ if(status == HAL_OK)
+ {
+ /* Disable all IRQs */
+ primask_bit = __get_PRIMASK();
+ __disable_irq();
+
+ /* Proceed to program the new half page */
+ SET_BIT(FLASH->PECR, FLASH_PECR_PARALLBANK);
+ SET_BIT(FLASH->PECR, FLASH_PECR_FPRG);
+ SET_BIT(FLASH->PECR, FLASH_PECR_PROG);
+
+ /* Write the first half page directly with 32 different words */
+ while(count < 32U)
+ {
+ *(__IO uint32_t*) ((uint32_t)(Address1 + (4 * count))) = *pBuffer1;
+ pBuffer1++;
+ count ++;
+ }
+
+ /* Write the second half page directly with 32 different words */
+ count = 0U;
+ while(count < 32U)
+ {
+ *(__IO uint32_t*) ((uint32_t)(Address2 + (4 * count))) = *pBuffer2;
+ pBuffer2++;
+ count ++;
+ }
+
+ /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+ status = FLASHRAM_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_TIMEOUT_VALUE);
+
+ /* if the write operation is completed, disable the PROG, FPRG and PARALLBANK bits */
+ CLEAR_BIT(FLASH->PECR, FLASH_PECR_PROG);
+ CLEAR_BIT(FLASH->PECR, FLASH_PECR_FPRG);
+ CLEAR_BIT(FLASH->PECR, FLASH_PECR_PARALLBANK);
+
+ /* Enable IRQs */
+ __set_PRIMASK(primask_bit);
+ }
+
+ /* Return the Write Status */
+ return status;
+}
+#endif /* FLASH_PECR_PARALLBANK */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Program a half page in program memory.
+ * @param Address specifies the address to be written.
+ * @param pBuffer pointer to the buffer containing the data to be written to
+ * the half page.
+ * @note To correctly run this function, the @ref HAL_FLASH_Unlock() function
+ * must be called before.
+ * Call the @ref HAL_FLASH_Lock() to disable the flash memory access
+ * (recommended to protect the FLASH memory against possible unwanted operation)
+ * @note Half page write is possible only from SRAM.
+ * @note If there are more than 32 words to write, after 32 words another
+ * Half Page programming operation starts and has to be finished.
+ * @note A half page is written to the program memory only if the first
+ * address to load is the start address of a half page (multiple of 128
+ * bytes) and the 31 remaining words to load are in the same half page.
+ * @note During the Program memory half page write all read operations are
+ * forbidden (this includes DMA read operations and debugger read
+ * operations such as breakpoints, periodic updates, etc.).
+ * @note If a PGAERR is set during a Program memory half page write, the
+ * complete write operation is aborted. Software should then reset the
+ * FPRG and PROG/DATA bits and restart the write operation from the
+ * beginning.
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+__RAM_FUNC HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_FLASHEx_HalfPageProgram(uint32_t Address, uint32_t* pBuffer)
+{
+ uint32_t primask_bit;
+ uint32_t count = 0U;
+ HAL_StatusTypeDef status = HAL_OK;
+
+ /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+ status = FLASHRAM_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_TIMEOUT_VALUE);
+
+ if(status == HAL_OK)
+ {
+ /* Disable all IRQs */
+ primask_bit = __get_PRIMASK();
+ __disable_irq();
+
+ /* Proceed to program the new half page */
+ SET_BIT(FLASH->PECR, FLASH_PECR_FPRG);
+ SET_BIT(FLASH->PECR, FLASH_PECR_PROG);
+
+ /* Write one half page directly with 32 different words */
+ while(count < 32U)
+ {
+ *(__IO uint32_t*) ((uint32_t)(Address + (4 * count))) = *pBuffer;
+ pBuffer++;
+ count ++;
+ }
+
+ /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+ status = FLASHRAM_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_TIMEOUT_VALUE);
+
+ /* If the write operation is completed, disable the PROG and FPRG bits */
+ CLEAR_BIT(FLASH->PECR, FLASH_PECR_PROG);
+ CLEAR_BIT(FLASH->PECR, FLASH_PECR_FPRG);
+
+ /* Enable IRQs */
+ __set_PRIMASK(primask_bit);
+ }
+
+ /* Return the Write Status */
+ return status;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup FLASH_RAMFUNC_Exported_Functions_Group3 Peripheral errors functions
+ * @brief Peripheral errors functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ===============================================================================
+ ##### Peripheral errors functions #####
+ ===============================================================================
+ [..]
+ This subsection permit to get in run-time errors of the FLASH peripheral.
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Get the specific FLASH errors flag.
+ * @param Error pointer is the error value. It can be a mixed of:
+@if STM32L100xB
+@elif STM32L100xBA
+ * @arg @ref HAL_FLASH_ERROR_RD FLASH Read Protection error flag (PCROP)
+@elif STM32L151xB
+@elif STM32L151xBA
+ * @arg @ref HAL_FLASH_ERROR_RD FLASH Read Protection error flag (PCROP)
+@elif STM32L152xB
+@elif STM32L152xBA
+ * @arg @ref HAL_FLASH_ERROR_RD FLASH Read Protection error flag (PCROP)
+@elif STM32L100xC
+ * @arg @ref HAL_FLASH_ERROR_RD FLASH Read Protection error flag (PCROP)
+ * @arg @ref HAL_FLASH_ERROR_OPTVUSR FLASH Option User validity error
+@elif STM32L151xC
+ * @arg @ref HAL_FLASH_ERROR_RD FLASH Read Protection error flag (PCROP)
+ * @arg @ref HAL_FLASH_ERROR_OPTVUSR FLASH Option User validity error
+@elif STM32L152xC
+ * @arg @ref HAL_FLASH_ERROR_RD FLASH Read Protection error flag (PCROP)
+ * @arg @ref HAL_FLASH_ERROR_OPTVUSR FLASH Option User validity error
+@elif STM32L162xC
+ * @arg @ref HAL_FLASH_ERROR_RD FLASH Read Protection error flag (PCROP)
+ * @arg @ref HAL_FLASH_ERROR_OPTVUSR FLASH Option User validity error
+@else
+ * @arg @ref HAL_FLASH_ERROR_OPTVUSR FLASH Option User validity error
+@endif
+ * @arg @ref HAL_FLASH_ERROR_PGA FLASH Programming Alignment error flag
+ * @arg @ref HAL_FLASH_ERROR_WRP FLASH Write protected error flag
+ * @arg @ref HAL_FLASH_ERROR_OPTV FLASH Option valid error flag
+ * @retval HAL Status
+ */
+__RAM_FUNC HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_FLASHEx_GetError(uint32_t * Error)
+{
+ *Error = pFlash.ErrorCode;
+ return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup FLASH_RAMFUNC_Exported_Functions_Group4 DATA EEPROM functions
+ *
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Erase a double word in data memory.
+ * @param Address specifies the address to be erased.
+ * @note To correctly run this function, the HAL_FLASH_EEPROM_Unlock() function
+ * must be called before.
+ * Call the HAL_FLASH_EEPROM_Lock() to he data EEPROM access
+ * and Flash program erase control register access(recommended to protect
+ * the DATA_EEPROM against possible unwanted operation).
+ * @note Data memory double word erase is possible only from SRAM.
+ * @note A double word is erased to the data memory only if the first address
+ * to load is the start address of a double word (multiple of 8 bytes).
+ * @note During the Data memory double word erase, all read operations are
+ * forbidden (this includes DMA read operations and debugger read
+ * operations such as breakpoints, periodic updates, etc.).
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+
+__RAM_FUNC HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_FLASHEx_DATAEEPROM_EraseDoubleWord(uint32_t Address)
+{
+ uint32_t primask_bit;
+ HAL_StatusTypeDef status = HAL_OK;
+
+ /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+ status = FLASHRAM_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_TIMEOUT_VALUE);
+
+ if(status == HAL_OK)
+ {
+ /* Disable all IRQs */
+ primask_bit = __get_PRIMASK();
+ __disable_irq();
+
+ /* If the previous operation is completed, proceed to erase the next double word */
+ /* Set the ERASE bit */
+ SET_BIT(FLASH->PECR, FLASH_PECR_ERASE);
+
+ /* Set DATA bit */
+ SET_BIT(FLASH->PECR, FLASH_PECR_DATA);
+
+ /* Write 00000000h to the 2 words to erase */
+ *(__IO uint32_t *)Address = 0x00000000U;
+ Address += 4U;
+ *(__IO uint32_t *)Address = 0x00000000U;
+
+ /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+ status = FLASHRAM_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_TIMEOUT_VALUE);
+
+ /* If the erase operation is completed, disable the ERASE and DATA bits */
+ CLEAR_BIT(FLASH->PECR, FLASH_PECR_ERASE);
+ CLEAR_BIT(FLASH->PECR, FLASH_PECR_DATA);
+
+ /* Enable IRQs */
+ __set_PRIMASK(primask_bit);
+
+ }
+
+ /* Return the erase status */
+ return status;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Write a double word in data memory without erase.
+ * @param Address specifies the address to be written.
+ * @param Data specifies the data to be written.
+ * @note To correctly run this function, the HAL_FLASH_EEPROM_Unlock() function
+ * must be called before.
+ * Call the HAL_FLASH_EEPROM_Lock() to he data EEPROM access
+ * and Flash program erase control register access(recommended to protect
+ * the DATA_EEPROM against possible unwanted operation).
+ * @note Data memory double word write is possible only from SRAM.
+ * @note A data memory double word is written to the data memory only if the
+ * first address to load is the start address of a double word (multiple
+ * of double word).
+ * @note During the Data memory double word write, all read operations are
+ * forbidden (this includes DMA read operations and debugger read
+ * operations such as breakpoints, periodic updates, etc.).
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+__RAM_FUNC HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_FLASHEx_DATAEEPROM_ProgramDoubleWord(uint32_t Address, uint64_t Data)
+{
+ uint32_t primask_bit;
+ HAL_StatusTypeDef status = HAL_OK;
+
+ /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+ status = FLASHRAM_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_TIMEOUT_VALUE);
+
+ if(status == HAL_OK)
+ {
+ /* Disable all IRQs */
+ primask_bit = __get_PRIMASK();
+ __disable_irq();
+
+ /* If the previous operation is completed, proceed to program the new data*/
+ SET_BIT(FLASH->PECR, FLASH_PECR_FPRG);
+ SET_BIT(FLASH->PECR, FLASH_PECR_DATA);
+
+ /* Write the 2 words */
+ *(__IO uint32_t *)Address = (uint32_t) Data;
+ Address += 4U;
+ *(__IO uint32_t *)Address = (uint32_t) (Data >> 32);
+
+ /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+ status = FLASHRAM_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_TIMEOUT_VALUE);
+
+ /* If the write operation is completed, disable the FPRG and DATA bits */
+ CLEAR_BIT(FLASH->PECR, FLASH_PECR_FPRG);
+ CLEAR_BIT(FLASH->PECR, FLASH_PECR_DATA);
+
+ /* Enable IRQs */
+ __set_PRIMASK(primask_bit);
+ }
+
+ /* Return the Write Status */
+ return status;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/** @addtogroup FLASH_RAMFUNC_Private_Functions
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Set the specific FLASH error flag.
+ * @retval HAL Status
+ */
+static __RAM_FUNC HAL_StatusTypeDef FLASHRAM_SetErrorCode(void)
+{
+ uint32_t flags = 0U;
+
+ if(__HAL_FLASH_GET_FLAG(FLASH_FLAG_WRPERR))
+ {
+ pFlash.ErrorCode |= HAL_FLASH_ERROR_WRP;
+ flags |= FLASH_FLAG_WRPERR;
+ }
+ if(__HAL_FLASH_GET_FLAG(FLASH_FLAG_PGAERR))
+ {
+ pFlash.ErrorCode |= HAL_FLASH_ERROR_PGA;
+ flags |= FLASH_FLAG_PGAERR;
+ }
+ if(__HAL_FLASH_GET_FLAG(FLASH_FLAG_OPTVERR))
+ {
+ pFlash.ErrorCode |= HAL_FLASH_ERROR_OPTV;
+ flags |= FLASH_FLAG_OPTVERR;
+ }
+
+#if defined(FLASH_SR_RDERR)
+ if(__HAL_FLASH_GET_FLAG(FLASH_FLAG_RDERR))
+ {
+ pFlash.ErrorCode |= HAL_FLASH_ERROR_RD;
+ flags |= FLASH_FLAG_RDERR;
+ }
+#endif /* FLASH_SR_RDERR */
+#if defined(FLASH_SR_OPTVERRUSR)
+ if(__HAL_FLASH_GET_FLAG(FLASH_FLAG_OPTVERRUSR))
+ {
+ pFlash.ErrorCode |= HAL_FLASH_ERROR_OPTVUSR;
+ flags |= FLASH_FLAG_OPTVERRUSR;
+ }
+#endif /* FLASH_SR_OPTVERRUSR */
+
+ /* Clear FLASH error pending bits */
+ __HAL_FLASH_CLEAR_FLAG(flags);
+
+ return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Wait for a FLASH operation to complete.
+ * @param Timeout maximum flash operationtimeout
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+static __RAM_FUNC HAL_StatusTypeDef FLASHRAM_WaitForLastOperation(uint32_t Timeout)
+{
+ /* Wait for the FLASH operation to complete by polling on BUSY flag to be reset.
+ Even if the FLASH operation fails, the BUSY flag will be reset and an error
+ flag will be set */
+
+ while(__HAL_FLASH_GET_FLAG(FLASH_FLAG_BSY) && (Timeout != 0x00U))
+ {
+ Timeout--;
+ }
+
+ if(Timeout == 0x00U)
+ {
+ return HAL_TIMEOUT;
+ }
+
+ /* Check FLASH End of Operation flag */
+ if (__HAL_FLASH_GET_FLAG(FLASH_FLAG_EOP))
+ {
+ /* Clear FLASH End of Operation pending bit */
+ __HAL_FLASH_CLEAR_FLAG(FLASH_FLAG_EOP);
+ }
+
+ if(__HAL_FLASH_GET_FLAG(FLASH_FLAG_WRPERR) ||
+ __HAL_FLASH_GET_FLAG(FLASH_FLAG_OPTVERR) ||
+#if defined(FLASH_SR_RDERR)
+ __HAL_FLASH_GET_FLAG(FLASH_FLAG_RDERR) ||
+#endif /* FLASH_SR_RDERR */
+#if defined(FLASH_SR_OPTVERRUSR)
+ __HAL_FLASH_GET_FLAG(FLASH_FLAG_OPTVERRUSR) ||
+#endif /* FLASH_SR_OPTVERRUSR */
+ __HAL_FLASH_GET_FLAG(FLASH_FLAG_PGAERR))
+ {
+ /*Save the error code*/
+ FLASHRAM_SetErrorCode();
+ return HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+
+ /* There is no error flag set */
+ return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif /* HAL_FLASH_MODULE_ENABLED */
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+
+/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
diff --git a/FreeRTOS/Demo/CORTEX_MPU_M3_NUCLEO_L152RE_GCC/ST_Code/Drivers/STM32L1xx_HAL_Driver/Src/stm32l1xx_hal_gpio.c b/FreeRTOS/Demo/CORTEX_MPU_M3_NUCLEO_L152RE_GCC/ST_Code/Drivers/STM32L1xx_HAL_Driver/Src/stm32l1xx_hal_gpio.c new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8a72e8091 --- /dev/null +++ b/FreeRTOS/Demo/CORTEX_MPU_M3_NUCLEO_L152RE_GCC/ST_Code/Drivers/STM32L1xx_HAL_Driver/Src/stm32l1xx_hal_gpio.c @@ -0,0 +1,552 @@ +/**
+ ******************************************************************************
+ * @file stm32l1xx_hal_gpio.c
+ * @author MCD Application Team
+ * @brief GPIO HAL module driver.
+ * This file provides firmware functions to manage the following
+ * functionalities of the General Purpose Input/Output (GPIO) peripheral:
+ * + Initialization and de-initialization functions
+ * + IO operation functions
+ *
+ @verbatim
+ ==============================================================================
+ ##### GPIO Peripheral features #####
+ ==============================================================================
+ [..]
+ Each port bit of the general-purpose I/O (GPIO) ports can be individually
+ configured by software in several modes:
+ (+) Input mode
+ (+) Analog mode
+ (+) Output mode
+ (+) Alternate function mode
+ (+) External interrupt/event lines
+
+ [..]
+ During and just after reset, the alternate functions and external interrupt
+ lines are not active and the I/O ports are configured in input floating mode.
+
+ [..]
+ All GPIO pins have weak internal pull-up and pull-down resistors, which can be
+ activated or not.
+
+ [..]
+ In Output or Alternate mode, each IO can be configured on open-drain or push-pull
+ type and the IO speed can be selected depending on the VDD value.
+
+ [..]
+ The microcontroller IO pins are connected to onboard peripherals/modules through a
+ multiplexer that allows only one peripheral s alternate function (AF) connected
+ to an IO pin at a time. In this way, there can be no conflict between peripherals
+ sharing the same IO pin.
+
+ [..]
+ All ports have external interrupt/event capability. To use external interrupt
+ lines, the port must be configured in input mode. All available GPIO pins are
+ connected to the 16 external interrupt/event lines from EXTI0 to EXTI15.
+
+ [..]
+ The external interrupt/event controller consists of up to 28 edge detectors
+ (depending on products 16 lines are connected to GPIO) for generating event/interrupt
+ requests (each input line can be independently configured to select the type
+ (interrupt or event) and the corresponding trigger event (rising or falling or both).
+ Each line can also be masked independently.
+
+ ##### How to use this driver #####
+ ==============================================================================
+ [..]
+ (#) Enable the GPIO AHB clock using the following function : __GPIOx_CLK_ENABLE().
+
+ (#) Configure the GPIO pin(s) using HAL_GPIO_Init().
+ (++) Configure the IO mode using "Mode" member from GPIO_InitTypeDef structure
+ (++) Activate Pull-up, Pull-down resistor using "Pull" member from GPIO_InitTypeDef
+ structure.
+ (++) In case of Output or alternate function mode selection: the speed is
+ configured through "Speed" member from GPIO_InitTypeDef structure,
+ the speed is configurable: Low, Medium and High.
+ (++) If alternate mode is selected, the alternate function connected to the IO
+ is configured through "Alternate" member from GPIO_InitTypeDef structure
+ (++) Analog mode is required when a pin is to be used as ADC channel
+ or DAC output.
+ (++) In case of external interrupt/event selection the "Mode" member from
+ GPIO_InitTypeDef structure select the type (interrupt or event) and
+ the corresponding trigger event (rising or falling or both).
+
+ (#) In case of external interrupt/event mode selection, configure NVIC IRQ priority
+ mapped to the EXTI line using HAL_NVIC_SetPriority() and enable it using
+ HAL_NVIC_EnableIRQ().
+
+ (#) HAL_GPIO_DeInit allows to set register values to their reset value. It's also
+ recommended to use it to unconfigure pin which was used as an external interrupt
+ or in event mode. That's the only way to reset corresponding bit in EXTI & SYSCFG
+ registers.
+
+ (#) To get the level of a pin configured in input mode use HAL_GPIO_ReadPin().
+
+ (#) To set/reset the level of a pin configured in output mode use
+ HAL_GPIO_WritePin()/HAL_GPIO_TogglePin().
+
+ (#) To lock pin configuration until next reset use HAL_GPIO_LockPin().
+
+ (#) During and just after reset, the alternate functions are not
+ active and the GPIO pins are configured in input floating mode (except JTAG
+ pins).
+
+ (#) The LSE oscillator pins OSC32_IN and OSC32_OUT can be used as general purpose
+ (PC14 and PC15, respectively) when the LSE oscillator is off. The LSE has
+ priority over the GPIO function.
+
+ (#) The HSE oscillator pins OSC_IN/OSC_OUT can be used as
+ general purpose PH0 and PH1, respectively, when the HSE oscillator is off.
+ The HSE has priority over the GPIO function.
+
+ @endverbatim
+ ******************************************************************************
+ * @attention
+ *
+ * <h2><center>© Copyright (c) 2017 STMicroelectronics.
+ * All rights reserved.</center></h2>
+ *
+ * This software component is licensed by ST under BSD 3-Clause license,
+ * the "License"; You may not use this file except in compliance with the
+ * License. You may obtain a copy of the License at:
+ * opensource.org/licenses/BSD-3-Clause
+ *
+ ******************************************************************************
+ */
+
+/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#include "stm32l1xx_hal.h"
+
+/** @addtogroup STM32L1xx_HAL_Driver
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/** @addtogroup GPIO
+ * @brief GPIO HAL module driver
+ * @{
+ */
+
+#ifdef HAL_GPIO_MODULE_ENABLED
+
+/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/** @addtogroup GPIO_Private_Constants
+ * @{
+ */
+#define GPIO_MODE (0x00000003U)
+#define EXTI_MODE (0x10000000U)
+#define GPIO_MODE_IT (0x00010000U)
+#define GPIO_MODE_EVT (0x00020000U)
+#define RISING_EDGE (0x00100000U)
+#define FALLING_EDGE (0x00200000U)
+#define GPIO_OUTPUT_TYPE (0x00000010U)
+
+#define GPIO_NUMBER (16U)
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/
+/* Exported functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+/** @addtogroup GPIO_Exported_Functions
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/** @addtogroup GPIO_Exported_Functions_Group1
+ * @brief Initialization and Configuration functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ===============================================================================
+ ##### Initialization and Configuration functions #####
+ ===============================================================================
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Initializes the GPIOx peripheral according to the specified parameters in the GPIO_Init.
+ * @param GPIOx where x can be (A..G depending on device used) to select the GPIO peripheral for STM32L1XX family devices
+ * @param GPIO_Init pointer to a GPIO_InitTypeDef structure that contains
+ * the configuration information for the specified GPIO peripheral.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void HAL_GPIO_Init(GPIO_TypeDef *GPIOx, GPIO_InitTypeDef *GPIO_Init)
+{
+ uint32_t position = 0x00;
+ uint32_t iocurrent = 0x00;
+ uint32_t temp = 0x00;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_GPIO_ALL_INSTANCE(GPIOx));
+ assert_param(IS_GPIO_PIN(GPIO_Init->Pin));
+ assert_param(IS_GPIO_MODE(GPIO_Init->Mode));
+ assert_param(IS_GPIO_PULL(GPIO_Init->Pull));
+
+ /* Configure the port pins */
+ while (((GPIO_Init->Pin) >> position) != 0)
+ {
+ /* Get current io position */
+ iocurrent = (GPIO_Init->Pin) & (1U << position);
+
+ if(iocurrent)
+ {
+ /*--------------------- GPIO Mode Configuration ------------------------*/
+ /* In case of Alternate function mode selection */
+ if((GPIO_Init->Mode == GPIO_MODE_AF_PP) || (GPIO_Init->Mode == GPIO_MODE_AF_OD))
+ {
+ /* Check the Alternate function parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_GPIO_AF_INSTANCE(GPIOx));
+ assert_param(IS_GPIO_AF(GPIO_Init->Alternate));
+
+ /* Configure Alternate function mapped with the current IO */
+ /* Identify AFRL or AFRH register based on IO position*/
+ temp = GPIOx->AFR[position >> 3];
+ CLEAR_BIT(temp, 0xFU << ((uint32_t)(position & 0x07U) * 4)) ;
+ SET_BIT(temp, (uint32_t)(GPIO_Init->Alternate) << (((uint32_t)position & 0x07U) * 4));
+ GPIOx->AFR[position >> 3] = temp;
+ }
+
+ /* Configure IO Direction mode (Input, Output, Alternate or Analog) */
+ temp = GPIOx->MODER;
+ CLEAR_BIT(temp, GPIO_MODER_MODER0 << (position * 2));
+ SET_BIT(temp, (GPIO_Init->Mode & GPIO_MODE) << (position * 2));
+ GPIOx->MODER = temp;
+
+ /* In case of Output or Alternate function mode selection */
+ if ((GPIO_Init->Mode == GPIO_MODE_OUTPUT_PP) || (GPIO_Init->Mode == GPIO_MODE_AF_PP) ||
+ (GPIO_Init->Mode == GPIO_MODE_OUTPUT_OD) || (GPIO_Init->Mode == GPIO_MODE_AF_OD))
+ {
+ /* Check the Speed parameter */
+ assert_param(IS_GPIO_SPEED(GPIO_Init->Speed));
+ /* Configure the IO Speed */
+ temp = GPIOx->OSPEEDR;
+ CLEAR_BIT(temp, GPIO_OSPEEDER_OSPEEDR0 << (position * 2));
+ SET_BIT(temp, GPIO_Init->Speed << (position * 2));
+ GPIOx->OSPEEDR = temp;
+
+ /* Configure the IO Output Type */
+ temp = GPIOx->OTYPER;
+ CLEAR_BIT(temp, GPIO_OTYPER_OT_0 << position) ;
+ SET_BIT(temp, ((GPIO_Init->Mode & GPIO_OUTPUT_TYPE) >> 4) << position);
+ GPIOx->OTYPER = temp;
+ }
+
+ /* Activate the Pull-up or Pull down resistor for the current IO */
+ temp = GPIOx->PUPDR;
+ CLEAR_BIT(temp, GPIO_PUPDR_PUPDR0 << (position * 2));
+ SET_BIT(temp, (GPIO_Init->Pull) << (position * 2));
+ GPIOx->PUPDR = temp;
+
+ /*--------------------- EXTI Mode Configuration ------------------------*/
+ /* Configure the External Interrupt or event for the current IO */
+ if((GPIO_Init->Mode & EXTI_MODE) == EXTI_MODE)
+ {
+ /* Enable SYSCFG Clock */
+ __HAL_RCC_SYSCFG_CLK_ENABLE();
+
+ temp = SYSCFG->EXTICR[position >> 2];
+ CLEAR_BIT(temp, (0x0FU) << (4 * (position & 0x03)));
+ SET_BIT(temp, (GPIO_GET_INDEX(GPIOx)) << (4 * (position & 0x03)));
+ SYSCFG->EXTICR[position >> 2] = temp;
+
+ /* Clear EXTI line configuration */
+ temp = EXTI->IMR;
+ CLEAR_BIT(temp, (uint32_t)iocurrent);
+ if((GPIO_Init->Mode & GPIO_MODE_IT) == GPIO_MODE_IT)
+ {
+ SET_BIT(temp, iocurrent);
+ }
+ EXTI->IMR = temp;
+
+ temp = EXTI->EMR;
+ CLEAR_BIT(temp, (uint32_t)iocurrent);
+ if((GPIO_Init->Mode & GPIO_MODE_EVT) == GPIO_MODE_EVT)
+ {
+ SET_BIT(temp, iocurrent);
+ }
+ EXTI->EMR = temp;
+
+ /* Clear Rising Falling edge configuration */
+ temp = EXTI->RTSR;
+ CLEAR_BIT(temp, (uint32_t)iocurrent);
+ if((GPIO_Init->Mode & RISING_EDGE) == RISING_EDGE)
+ {
+ SET_BIT(temp, iocurrent);
+ }
+ EXTI->RTSR = temp;
+
+ temp = EXTI->FTSR;
+ CLEAR_BIT(temp, (uint32_t)iocurrent);
+ if((GPIO_Init->Mode & FALLING_EDGE) == FALLING_EDGE)
+ {
+ SET_BIT(temp, iocurrent);
+ }
+ EXTI->FTSR = temp;
+ }
+ }
+
+ position++;
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief De-initializes the GPIOx peripheral registers to their default reset values.
+ * @param GPIOx where x can be (A..G depending on device used) to select the GPIO peripheral for STM32L1XX family devices
+ * @param GPIO_Pin specifies the port bit to be written.
+ * This parameter can be one of GPIO_PIN_x where x can be (0..15).
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void HAL_GPIO_DeInit(GPIO_TypeDef *GPIOx, uint32_t GPIO_Pin)
+{
+ uint32_t position = 0x00;
+ uint32_t iocurrent = 0x00;
+ uint32_t tmp = 0x00;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_GPIO_ALL_INSTANCE(GPIOx));
+ assert_param(IS_GPIO_PIN(GPIO_Pin));
+
+ /* Configure the port pins */
+ while ((GPIO_Pin >> position) != 0)
+ {
+ /* Get current io position */
+ iocurrent = (GPIO_Pin) & (1U << position);
+
+ if (iocurrent)
+ {
+ /*------------------------- EXTI Mode Configuration --------------------*/
+ /* Clear the External Interrupt or Event for the current IO */
+
+ tmp = SYSCFG->EXTICR[position >> 2];
+ tmp &= ((0x0FU) << (4 * (position & 0x03)));
+ if(tmp == (GPIO_GET_INDEX(GPIOx) << (4 * (position & 0x03))))
+ {
+ tmp = (0x0FU) << (4 * (position & 0x03));
+ CLEAR_BIT(SYSCFG->EXTICR[position >> 2], tmp);
+
+ /* Clear EXTI line configuration */
+ CLEAR_BIT(EXTI->IMR, (uint32_t)iocurrent);
+ CLEAR_BIT(EXTI->EMR, (uint32_t)iocurrent);
+
+ /* Clear Rising Falling edge configuration */
+ CLEAR_BIT(EXTI->RTSR, (uint32_t)iocurrent);
+ CLEAR_BIT(EXTI->FTSR, (uint32_t)iocurrent);
+ }
+
+ /*------------------------- GPIO Mode Configuration --------------------*/
+ /* Configure IO Direction in Input Floting Mode */
+ CLEAR_BIT(GPIOx->MODER, GPIO_MODER_MODER0 << (position * 2));
+
+ /* Configure the default Alternate Function in current IO */
+ CLEAR_BIT(GPIOx->AFR[position >> 3], 0xFU << ((uint32_t)(position & 0x07U) * 4)) ;
+
+ /* Configure the default value for IO Speed */
+ CLEAR_BIT(GPIOx->OSPEEDR, GPIO_OSPEEDER_OSPEEDR0 << (position * 2));
+
+ /* Configure the default value IO Output Type */
+ CLEAR_BIT(GPIOx->OTYPER, GPIO_OTYPER_OT_0 << position) ;
+
+ /* Deactivate the Pull-up oand Pull-down resistor for the current IO */
+ CLEAR_BIT(GPIOx->PUPDR, GPIO_PUPDR_PUPDR0 << (position * 2));
+ }
+
+ position++;
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/** @addtogroup GPIO_Exported_Functions_Group2
+ * @brief GPIO Read, Write, Toggle, Lock and EXTI management functions.
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ===============================================================================
+ ##### IO operation functions #####
+ ===============================================================================
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Reads the specified input port pin.
+ * @param GPIOx where x can be (A..G depending on device used) to select the GPIO peripheral for STM32L1XX family devices
+ * @param GPIO_Pin specifies the port bit to read.
+ * This parameter can be GPIO_PIN_x where x can be (0..15).
+ * @retval The input port pin value.
+ */
+GPIO_PinState HAL_GPIO_ReadPin(GPIO_TypeDef* GPIOx, uint16_t GPIO_Pin)
+{
+ GPIO_PinState bitstatus;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_GPIO_PIN(GPIO_Pin));
+
+ if ((GPIOx->IDR & GPIO_Pin) != (uint32_t)GPIO_PIN_RESET)
+ {
+ bitstatus = GPIO_PIN_SET;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ bitstatus = GPIO_PIN_RESET;
+ }
+ return bitstatus;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Sets or clears the selected data port bit.
+ * @note This function uses GPIOx_BSRR register to allow atomic read/modify
+ * accesses. In this way, there is no risk of an IRQ occurring between
+ * the read and the modify access.
+ * @param GPIOx where x can be (A..G depending on device used) to select the GPIO peripheral for STM32L1XX family devices
+ * @param GPIO_Pin specifies the port bit to be written.
+ * This parameter can be one of GPIO_PIN_x where x can be (0..15).
+ * @param PinState specifies the value to be written to the selected bit.
+ * This parameter can be one of the GPIO_PinState enum values:
+ * @arg GPIO_PIN_RESET: to clear the port pin
+ * @arg GPIO_PIN_SET: to set the port pin
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void HAL_GPIO_WritePin(GPIO_TypeDef* GPIOx, uint16_t GPIO_Pin, GPIO_PinState PinState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_GPIO_PIN(GPIO_Pin));
+ assert_param(IS_GPIO_PIN_ACTION(PinState));
+
+ if (PinState != GPIO_PIN_RESET)
+ {
+ GPIOx->BSRR = (uint32_t)GPIO_Pin;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ GPIOx->BSRR = (uint32_t)GPIO_Pin << 16 ;
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Toggles the specified GPIO pin
+ * @param GPIOx where x can be (A..G depending on device used) to select the GPIO peripheral for STM32L1XX family devices
+ * @param GPIO_Pin specifies the pins to be toggled.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void HAL_GPIO_TogglePin(GPIO_TypeDef* GPIOx, uint16_t GPIO_Pin)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_GPIO_PIN(GPIO_Pin));
+
+ if ((GPIOx->ODR & GPIO_Pin) != 0x00u)
+ {
+ GPIOx->BSRR = (uint32_t)GPIO_Pin << GPIO_NUMBER;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ GPIOx->BSRR = (uint32_t)GPIO_Pin;
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+* @brief Locks GPIO Pins configuration registers.
+* @note The locked registers are GPIOx_MODER, GPIOx_OTYPER, GPIOx_OSPEEDR,
+* GPIOx_PUPDR, GPIOx_AFRL and GPIOx_AFRH.
+* @note The configuration of the locked GPIO pins can no longer be modified
+* until the next reset.
+* @note Limitation concerning GPIOx_OTYPER: Locking of GPIOx_OTYPER[i] with i = 15..8
+* depends from setting of GPIOx_LCKR[i-8] and not from GPIOx_LCKR[i].
+* GPIOx_LCKR[i-8] is locking GPIOx_OTYPER[i] together with GPIOx_OTYPER[i-8].
+* It is not possible to lock GPIOx_OTYPER[i] with i = 15..8, without locking also
+* GPIOx_OTYPER[i-8].
+* Workaround: When calling HAL_GPIO_LockPin with GPIO_Pin from GPIO_PIN_8 to GPIO_PIN_15,
+* you must call also HAL_GPIO_LockPin with GPIO_Pin - 8.
+* (When locking a pin from GPIO_PIN_8 to GPIO_PIN_15, you must lock also the corresponding
+* GPIO_PIN_0 to GPIO_PIN_7).
+* @param GPIOx where x can be (A..G depending on device used) to select the GPIO peripheral for STM32L1XX family devices
+* @param GPIO_Pin Specifies the port bit to be locked.
+* This parameter can be any combination of GPIO_Pin_x where x can be (0..15).
+* @retval None
+*/
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_GPIO_LockPin(GPIO_TypeDef* GPIOx, uint16_t GPIO_Pin)
+{
+ __IO uint32_t tmp = GPIO_LCKR_LCKK;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_GPIO_LOCK_INSTANCE(GPIOx));
+ assert_param(IS_GPIO_PIN(GPIO_Pin));
+
+ /* Apply lock key write sequence */
+ SET_BIT(tmp, GPIO_Pin);
+ /* Set LCKx bit(s): LCKK='1' + LCK[15-0] */
+ GPIOx->LCKR = tmp;
+ /* Reset LCKx bit(s): LCKK='0' + LCK[15-0] */
+ GPIOx->LCKR = GPIO_Pin;
+ /* Set LCKx bit(s): LCKK='1' + LCK[15-0] */
+ GPIOx->LCKR = tmp;
+ /* Read LCKK register. This read is mandatory to complete key lock sequence */
+ tmp = GPIOx->LCKR;
+
+ /* Read again in order to confirm lock is active */
+ if((GPIOx->LCKR & GPIO_LCKR_LCKK) != RESET)
+ {
+ return HAL_OK;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ return HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief This function handles EXTI interrupt request.
+ * @param GPIO_Pin Specifies the port pin connected to corresponding EXTI line.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void HAL_GPIO_EXTI_IRQHandler(uint16_t GPIO_Pin)
+{
+ /* EXTI line interrupt detected */
+ if(__HAL_GPIO_EXTI_GET_IT(GPIO_Pin) != RESET)
+ {
+ __HAL_GPIO_EXTI_CLEAR_IT(GPIO_Pin);
+ HAL_GPIO_EXTI_Callback(GPIO_Pin);
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief EXTI line detection callbacks.
+ * @param GPIO_Pin Specifies the port pin connected to corresponding EXTI line.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+__weak void HAL_GPIO_EXTI_Callback(uint16_t GPIO_Pin)
+{
+ /* Prevent unused argument(s) compilation warning */
+ UNUSED(GPIO_Pin);
+
+ /* NOTE : This function Should not be modified, when the callback is needed,
+ the HAL_GPIO_EXTI_Callback could be implemented in the user file
+ */
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif /* HAL_GPIO_MODULE_ENABLED */
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
diff --git a/FreeRTOS/Demo/CORTEX_MPU_M3_NUCLEO_L152RE_GCC/ST_Code/Drivers/STM32L1xx_HAL_Driver/Src/stm32l1xx_hal_pwr.c b/FreeRTOS/Demo/CORTEX_MPU_M3_NUCLEO_L152RE_GCC/ST_Code/Drivers/STM32L1xx_HAL_Driver/Src/stm32l1xx_hal_pwr.c new file mode 100644 index 000000000..dd0d058cc --- /dev/null +++ b/FreeRTOS/Demo/CORTEX_MPU_M3_NUCLEO_L152RE_GCC/ST_Code/Drivers/STM32L1xx_HAL_Driver/Src/stm32l1xx_hal_pwr.c @@ -0,0 +1,650 @@ +/**
+ ******************************************************************************
+ * @file stm32l1xx_hal_pwr.c
+ * @author MCD Application Team
+ * @brief PWR HAL module driver.
+ *
+ * This file provides firmware functions to manage the following
+ * functionalities of the Power Controller (PWR) peripheral:
+ * + Initialization/de-initialization functions
+ * + Peripheral Control functions
+ *
+ ******************************************************************************
+ * @attention
+ *
+ * <h2><center>© Copyright (c) 2017 STMicroelectronics.
+ * All rights reserved.</center></h2>
+ *
+ * This software component is licensed by ST under BSD 3-Clause license,
+ * the "License"; You may not use this file except in compliance with the
+ * License. You may obtain a copy of the License at:
+ * opensource.org/licenses/BSD-3-Clause
+ *
+ ******************************************************************************
+ */
+
+/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#include "stm32l1xx_hal.h"
+
+/** @addtogroup STM32L1xx_HAL_Driver
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup PWR PWR
+ * @brief PWR HAL module driver
+ * @{
+ */
+
+#ifdef HAL_PWR_MODULE_ENABLED
+
+/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#define PVD_MODE_IT (0x00010000U)
+#define PVD_MODE_EVT (0x00020000U)
+#define PVD_RISING_EDGE (0x00000001U)
+#define PVD_FALLING_EDGE (0x00000002U)
+
+/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+/** @defgroup PWR_Exported_Functions PWR Exported Functions
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup PWR_Exported_Functions_Group1 Initialization and de-initialization functions
+ * @brief Initialization and de-initialization functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ===============================================================================
+ ##### Initialization and de-initialization functions #####
+ ===============================================================================
+ [..]
+ After reset, the backup domain (RTC registers, RTC backup data
+ registers) is protected against possible unwanted
+ write accesses.
+ To enable access to the RTC Domain and RTC registers, proceed as follows:
+ (+) Enable the Power Controller (PWR) APB1 interface clock using the
+ __HAL_RCC_PWR_CLK_ENABLE() macro.
+ (+) Enable access to RTC domain using the HAL_PWR_EnableBkUpAccess() function.
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Deinitializes the PWR peripheral registers to their default reset values.
+ * @note Before calling this function, the VOS[1:0] bits should be configured
+ * to "10" and the system frequency has to be configured accordingly.
+ * To configure the VOS[1:0] bits, use the PWR_VoltageScalingConfig()
+ * function.
+ * @note ULP and FWU bits are not reset by this function.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void HAL_PWR_DeInit(void)
+{
+ __HAL_RCC_PWR_FORCE_RESET();
+ __HAL_RCC_PWR_RELEASE_RESET();
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables access to the backup domain (RTC registers, RTC
+ * backup data registers ).
+ * @note If the HSE divided by 2, 4, 8 or 16 is used as the RTC clock, the
+ * Backup Domain Access should be kept enabled.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void HAL_PWR_EnableBkUpAccess(void)
+{
+ /* Enable access to RTC and backup registers */
+ *(__IO uint32_t *) CR_DBP_BB = (uint32_t)ENABLE;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Disables access to the backup domain (RTC registers, RTC
+ * backup data registers).
+ * @note If the HSE divided by 2, 4, 8 or 16 is used as the RTC clock, the
+ * Backup Domain Access should be kept enabled.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void HAL_PWR_DisableBkUpAccess(void)
+{
+ /* Disable access to RTC and backup registers */
+ *(__IO uint32_t *) CR_DBP_BB = (uint32_t)DISABLE;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup PWR_Exported_Functions_Group2 Peripheral Control functions
+ * @brief Low Power modes configuration functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+
+ ===============================================================================
+ ##### Peripheral Control functions #####
+ ===============================================================================
+
+ *** PVD configuration ***
+ =========================
+ [..]
+ (+) The PVD is used to monitor the VDD power supply by comparing it to a
+ threshold selected by the PVD Level (PLS[2:0] bits in the PWR_CR).
+ (+) The PVD can use an external input analog voltage (PVD_IN) which is compared
+ internally to VREFINT. The PVD_IN (PB7) has to be configured in Analog mode
+ when PWR_PVDLevel_7 is selected (PLS[2:0] = 111).
+
+ (+) A PVDO flag is available to indicate if VDD/VDDA is higher or lower
+ than the PVD threshold. This event is internally connected to the EXTI
+ line16 and can generate an interrupt if enabled. This is done through
+ __HAL_PWR_PVD_EXTI_ENABLE_IT() macro.
+ (+) The PVD is stopped in Standby mode.
+
+ *** WakeUp pin configuration ***
+ ================================
+ [..]
+ (+) WakeUp pin is used to wake up the system from Standby mode. This pin is
+ forced in input pull-down configuration and is active on rising edges.
+ (+) There are two or three WakeUp pins:
+ WakeUp Pin 1 on PA.00.
+ WakeUp Pin 2 on PC.13.
+ WakeUp Pin 3 on PE.06. : Only on product with GPIOE available
+
+ [..]
+ *** Main and Backup Regulators configuration ***
+ ================================================
+
+ (+) The main internal regulator can be configured to have a tradeoff between
+ performance and power consumption when the device does not operate at
+ the maximum frequency. This is done through __HAL_PWR_VOLTAGESCALING_CONFIG()
+ macro which configure VOS bit in PWR_CR register:
+ (++) When this bit is set (Regulator voltage output Scale 1 mode selected)
+ the System frequency can go up to 32 MHz.
+ (++) When this bit is reset (Regulator voltage output Scale 2 mode selected)
+ the System frequency can go up to 16 MHz.
+ (++) When this bit is reset (Regulator voltage output Scale 3 mode selected)
+ the System frequency can go up to 4.2 MHz.
+
+ Refer to the datasheets for more details.
+
+ *** Low Power modes configuration ***
+ =====================================
+ [..]
+ The device features 5 low-power modes:
+ (+) Low power run mode: regulator in low power mode, limited clock frequency,
+ limited number of peripherals running.
+ (+) Sleep mode: Cortex-M3 core stopped, peripherals kept running.
+ (+) Low power sleep mode: Cortex-M3 core stopped, limited clock frequency,
+ limited number of peripherals running, regulator in low power mode.
+ (+) Stop mode: All clocks are stopped, regulator running, regulator in low power mode.
+ (+) Standby mode: VCORE domain powered off
+
+ *** Low power run mode ***
+ =========================
+ [..]
+ To further reduce the consumption when the system is in Run mode, the regulator can be
+ configured in low power mode. In this mode, the system frequency should not exceed
+ MSI frequency range1.
+ In Low power run mode, all I/O pins keep the same state as in Run mode.
+
+ (+) Entry:
+ (++) VCORE in range2
+ (++) Decrease the system frequency tonot exceed the frequency of MSI frequency range1.
+ (++) The regulator is forced in low power mode using the HAL_PWREx_EnableLowPowerRunMode()
+ function.
+ (+) Exit:
+ (++) The regulator is forced in Main regulator mode using the HAL_PWREx_DisableLowPowerRunMode()
+ function.
+ (++) Increase the system frequency if needed.
+
+ *** Sleep mode ***
+ ==================
+ [..]
+ (+) Entry:
+ The Sleep mode is entered by using the HAL_PWR_EnterSLEEPMode(PWR_MAINREGULATOR_ON, PWR_SLEEPENTRY_WFx)
+ functions with
+ (++) PWR_SLEEPENTRY_WFI: enter SLEEP mode with WFI instruction
+ (++) PWR_SLEEPENTRY_WFE: enter SLEEP mode with WFE instruction
+
+ (+) Exit:
+ (++) Any peripheral interrupt acknowledged by the nested vectored interrupt
+ controller (NVIC) can wake up the device from Sleep mode.
+
+ *** Low power sleep mode ***
+ ============================
+ [..]
+ (+) Entry:
+ The Low power sleep mode is entered by using the HAL_PWR_EnterSLEEPMode(PWR_LOWPOWERREGULATOR_ON, PWR_SLEEPENTRY_WFx)
+ functions with
+ (++) PWR_SLEEPENTRY_WFI: enter SLEEP mode with WFI instruction
+ (++) PWR_SLEEPENTRY_WFE: enter SLEEP mode with WFE instruction
+ (+) The Flash memory can be switched off by using the control bits (SLEEP_PD in the FLASH_ACR register.
+ This reduces power consumption but increases the wake-up time.
+
+ (+) Exit:
+ (++) If the WFI instruction was used to enter Low power sleep mode, any peripheral interrupt
+ acknowledged by the nested vectored interrupt controller (NVIC) can wake up the device
+ from Low power sleep mode. If the WFE instruction was used to enter Low power sleep mode,
+ the MCU exits Sleep mode as soon as an event occurs.
+
+ *** Stop mode ***
+ =================
+ [..]
+ The Stop mode is based on the Cortex-M3 deepsleep mode combined with peripheral
+ clock gating. The voltage regulator can be configured either in normal or low-power mode.
+ In Stop mode, all clocks in the VCORE domain are stopped, the PLL, the MSI, the HSI and
+ the HSE RC oscillators are disabled. Internal SRAM and register contents are preserved.
+ To get the lowest consumption in Stop mode, the internal Flash memory also enters low
+ power mode. When the Flash memory is in power-down mode, an additional startup delay is
+ incurred when waking up from Stop mode.
+ To minimize the consumption In Stop mode, VREFINT, the BOR, PVD, and temperature
+ sensor can be switched off before entering Stop mode. They can be switched on again by
+ software after exiting Stop mode using the ULP bit in the PWR_CR register.
+ In Stop mode, all I/O pins keep the same state as in Run mode.
+
+ (+) Entry:
+ The Stop mode is entered using the HAL_PWR_EnterSTOPMode(PWR_MAINREGULATOR_ON, PWR_SLEEPENTRY_WFI )
+ function with:
+ (++) Main regulator ON.
+ (++) Low Power regulator ON.
+ (++) PWR_SLEEPENTRY_WFI: enter SLEEP mode with WFI instruction
+ (++) PWR_SLEEPENTRY_WFE: enter SLEEP mode with WFE instruction
+ (+) Exit:
+ (++) By issuing an interrupt or a wakeup event, the MSI RC oscillator is selected as system clock.
+
+ *** Standby mode ***
+ ====================
+ [..]
+ The Standby mode allows to achieve the lowest power consumption. It is based on the
+ Cortex-M3 deepsleep mode, with the voltage regulator disabled. The VCORE domain is
+ consequently powered off. The PLL, the MSI, the HSI oscillator and the HSE oscillator are
+ also switched off. SRAM and register contents are lost except for the RTC registers, RTC
+ backup registers and Standby circuitry.
+
+ To minimize the consumption In Standby mode, VREFINT, the BOR, PVD, and temperature
+ sensor can be switched off before entering the Standby mode. They can be switched
+ on again by software after exiting the Standby mode.
+ function.
+
+ (+) Entry:
+ (++) The Standby mode is entered using the HAL_PWR_EnterSTANDBYMode() function.
+ (+) Exit:
+ (++) WKUP pin rising edge, RTC alarm (Alarm A and Alarm B), RTC wakeup,
+ tamper event, time-stamp event, external reset in NRST pin, IWDG reset.
+
+ *** Auto-wakeup (AWU) from low-power mode ***
+ =============================================
+ [..]
+ The MCU can be woken up from low-power mode by an RTC Alarm event, an RTC
+ Wakeup event, a tamper event, a time-stamp event, or a comparator event,
+ without depending on an external interrupt (Auto-wakeup mode).
+
+ (+) RTC auto-wakeup (AWU) from the Stop mode
+ (++) To wake up from the Stop mode with an RTC alarm event, it is necessary to:
+ (+++) Configure the EXTI Line 17 to be sensitive to rising edges (Interrupt
+ or Event modes) and Enable the RTC Alarm Interrupt using the HAL_RTC_SetAlarm_IT()
+ function
+ (+++) Configure the RTC to generate the RTC alarm using the HAL_RTC_Init()
+ and HAL_RTC_SetTime() functions.
+ (++) To wake up from the Stop mode with an RTC Tamper or time stamp event, it
+ is necessary to:
+ (+++) Configure the EXTI Line 19 to be sensitive to rising edges (Interrupt or Event modes) and
+ Enable the RTC Tamper or time stamp Interrupt using the HAL_RTCEx_SetTamper_IT()
+ or HAL_RTCEx_SetTimeStamp_IT() functions.
+ (++) To wake up from the Stop mode with an RTC WakeUp event, it is necessary to:
+ (+++) Configure the EXTI Line 20 to be sensitive to rising edges (Interrupt or Event modes) and
+ Enable the RTC WakeUp Interrupt using the HAL_RTCEx_SetWakeUpTimer_IT() function.
+ (+++) Configure the RTC to generate the RTC WakeUp event using the HAL_RTCEx_SetWakeUpTimer()
+ function.
+
+ (+) RTC auto-wakeup (AWU) from the Standby mode
+ (++) To wake up from the Standby mode with an RTC alarm event, it is necessary to:
+ (+++) Enable the RTC Alarm Interrupt using the HAL_RTC_SetAlarm_IT() function.
+ (+++) Configure the RTC to generate the RTC alarm using the HAL_RTC_Init()
+ and HAL_RTC_SetTime() functions.
+ (++) To wake up from the Standby mode with an RTC Tamper or time stamp event, it
+ is necessary to:
+ (+++) Enable the RTC Tamper or time stamp Interrupt and Configure the RTC to
+ detect the tamper or time stamp event using the HAL_RTCEx_SetTimeStamp_IT()
+ or HAL_RTCEx_SetTamper_IT()functions.
+ (++) To wake up from the Standby mode with an RTC WakeUp event, it is necessary to:
+ (+++) Enable the RTC WakeUp Interrupt and Configure the RTC to generate the RTC WakeUp event
+ using the HAL_RTCEx_SetWakeUpTimer_IT() and HAL_RTCEx_SetWakeUpTimer() functions.
+
+ (+) Comparator auto-wakeup (AWU) from the Stop mode
+ (++) To wake up from the Stop mode with an comparator 1 or comparator 2 wakeup
+ event, it is necessary to:
+ (+++) Configure the EXTI Line 21 or EXTI Line 22 for comparator to be sensitive to to the
+ selected edges (falling, rising or falling and rising) (Interrupt or Event modes) using
+ the COMP functions.
+ (+++) Configure the comparator to generate the event.
+
+
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Configures the voltage threshold detected by the Power Voltage Detector(PVD).
+ * @param sConfigPVD pointer to an PWR_PVDTypeDef structure that contains the configuration
+ * information for the PVD.
+ * @note Refer to the electrical characteristics of your device datasheet for
+ * more details about the voltage threshold corresponding to each
+ * detection level.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void HAL_PWR_ConfigPVD(PWR_PVDTypeDef *sConfigPVD)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_PWR_PVD_LEVEL(sConfigPVD->PVDLevel));
+ assert_param(IS_PWR_PVD_MODE(sConfigPVD->Mode));
+
+ /* Set PLS[7:5] bits according to PVDLevel value */
+ MODIFY_REG(PWR->CR, PWR_CR_PLS, sConfigPVD->PVDLevel);
+
+ /* Clear any previous config. Keep it clear if no event or IT mode is selected */
+ __HAL_PWR_PVD_EXTI_DISABLE_EVENT();
+ __HAL_PWR_PVD_EXTI_DISABLE_IT();
+ __HAL_PWR_PVD_EXTI_DISABLE_RISING_FALLING_EDGE();
+
+ /* Configure interrupt mode */
+ if((sConfigPVD->Mode & PVD_MODE_IT) == PVD_MODE_IT)
+ {
+ __HAL_PWR_PVD_EXTI_ENABLE_IT();
+ }
+
+ /* Configure event mode */
+ if((sConfigPVD->Mode & PVD_MODE_EVT) == PVD_MODE_EVT)
+ {
+ __HAL_PWR_PVD_EXTI_ENABLE_EVENT();
+ }
+
+ /* Configure the edge */
+ if((sConfigPVD->Mode & PVD_RISING_EDGE) == PVD_RISING_EDGE)
+ {
+ __HAL_PWR_PVD_EXTI_ENABLE_RISING_EDGE();
+ }
+
+ if((sConfigPVD->Mode & PVD_FALLING_EDGE) == PVD_FALLING_EDGE)
+ {
+ __HAL_PWR_PVD_EXTI_ENABLE_FALLING_EDGE();
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables the Power Voltage Detector(PVD).
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void HAL_PWR_EnablePVD(void)
+{
+ /* Enable the power voltage detector */
+ *(__IO uint32_t *) CR_PVDE_BB = (uint32_t)ENABLE;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Disables the Power Voltage Detector(PVD).
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void HAL_PWR_DisablePVD(void)
+{
+ /* Disable the power voltage detector */
+ *(__IO uint32_t *) CR_PVDE_BB = (uint32_t)DISABLE;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables the WakeUp PINx functionality.
+ * @param WakeUpPinx: Specifies the Power Wake-Up pin to enable.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg PWR_WAKEUP_PIN1
+ * @arg PWR_WAKEUP_PIN2
+ * @arg PWR_WAKEUP_PIN3: Only on product with GPIOE available
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void HAL_PWR_EnableWakeUpPin(uint32_t WakeUpPinx)
+{
+ /* Check the parameter */
+ assert_param(IS_PWR_WAKEUP_PIN(WakeUpPinx));
+ /* Enable the EWUPx pin */
+ *(__IO uint32_t *) CSR_EWUP_BB(WakeUpPinx) = (uint32_t)ENABLE;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Disables the WakeUp PINx functionality.
+ * @param WakeUpPinx: Specifies the Power Wake-Up pin to disable.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg PWR_WAKEUP_PIN1
+ * @arg PWR_WAKEUP_PIN2
+ * @arg PWR_WAKEUP_PIN3: Only on product with GPIOE available
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void HAL_PWR_DisableWakeUpPin(uint32_t WakeUpPinx)
+{
+ /* Check the parameter */
+ assert_param(IS_PWR_WAKEUP_PIN(WakeUpPinx));
+ /* Disable the EWUPx pin */
+ *(__IO uint32_t *) CSR_EWUP_BB(WakeUpPinx) = (uint32_t)DISABLE;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enters Sleep mode.
+ * @note In Sleep mode, all I/O pins keep the same state as in Run mode.
+ * @param Regulator: Specifies the regulator state in SLEEP mode.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg PWR_MAINREGULATOR_ON: SLEEP mode with regulator ON
+ * @arg PWR_LOWPOWERREGULATOR_ON: SLEEP mode with low power regulator ON
+ * @param SLEEPEntry: Specifies if SLEEP mode is entered with WFI or WFE instruction.
+ * When WFI entry is used, tick interrupt have to be disabled if not desired as
+ * the interrupt wake up source.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg PWR_SLEEPENTRY_WFI: enter SLEEP mode with WFI instruction
+ * @arg PWR_SLEEPENTRY_WFE: enter SLEEP mode with WFE instruction
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void HAL_PWR_EnterSLEEPMode(uint32_t Regulator, uint8_t SLEEPEntry)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_PWR_REGULATOR(Regulator));
+ assert_param(IS_PWR_SLEEP_ENTRY(SLEEPEntry));
+
+ /* Select the regulator state in Sleep mode: Set PDDS and LPSDSR bit according to PWR_Regulator value */
+ MODIFY_REG(PWR->CR, (PWR_CR_PDDS | PWR_CR_LPSDSR), Regulator);
+
+ /* Clear SLEEPDEEP bit of Cortex System Control Register */
+ CLEAR_BIT(SCB->SCR, ((uint32_t)SCB_SCR_SLEEPDEEP_Msk));
+
+ /* Select SLEEP mode entry -------------------------------------------------*/
+ if(SLEEPEntry == PWR_SLEEPENTRY_WFI)
+ {
+ /* Request Wait For Interrupt */
+ __WFI();
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Request Wait For Event */
+ __SEV();
+ __WFE();
+ __WFE();
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enters Stop mode.
+ * @note In Stop mode, all I/O pins keep the same state as in Run mode.
+ * @note When exiting Stop mode by using an interrupt or a wakeup event,
+ * MSI RC oscillator is selected as system clock.
+ * @note When the voltage regulator operates in low power mode, an additional
+ * startup delay is incurred when waking up from Stop mode.
+ * By keeping the internal regulator ON during Stop mode, the consumption
+ * is higher although the startup time is reduced.
+ * @param Regulator: Specifies the regulator state in Stop mode.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg PWR_MAINREGULATOR_ON: Stop mode with regulator ON
+ * @arg PWR_LOWPOWERREGULATOR_ON: Stop mode with low power regulator ON
+ * @param STOPEntry: Specifies if Stop mode in entered with WFI or WFE instruction.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg PWR_STOPENTRY_WFI: Enter Stop mode with WFI instruction
+ * @arg PWR_STOPENTRY_WFE: Enter Stop mode with WFE instruction
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void HAL_PWR_EnterSTOPMode(uint32_t Regulator, uint8_t STOPEntry)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_PWR_REGULATOR(Regulator));
+ assert_param(IS_PWR_STOP_ENTRY(STOPEntry));
+
+ /* Select the regulator state in Stop mode: Set PDDS and LPSDSR bit according to PWR_Regulator value */
+ MODIFY_REG(PWR->CR, (PWR_CR_PDDS | PWR_CR_LPSDSR), Regulator);
+
+ /* Set SLEEPDEEP bit of Cortex System Control Register */
+ SET_BIT(SCB->SCR, ((uint32_t)SCB_SCR_SLEEPDEEP_Msk));
+
+ /* Select Stop mode entry --------------------------------------------------*/
+ if(STOPEntry == PWR_STOPENTRY_WFI)
+ {
+ /* Request Wait For Interrupt */
+ __WFI();
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Request Wait For Event */
+ __SEV();
+ __WFE();
+ __WFE();
+ }
+ /* Reset SLEEPDEEP bit of Cortex System Control Register */
+ CLEAR_BIT(SCB->SCR, ((uint32_t)SCB_SCR_SLEEPDEEP_Msk));
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enters Standby mode.
+ * @note In Standby mode, all I/O pins are high impedance except for:
+ * - Reset pad (still available)
+ * - RTC_AF1 pin (PC13) if configured for tamper, time-stamp, RTC
+ * Alarm out, or RTC clock calibration out.
+ * - WKUP pin 1 (PA0) if enabled.
+ * - WKUP pin 2 (PC13) if enabled.
+ * - WKUP pin 3 (PE6) if enabled.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void HAL_PWR_EnterSTANDBYMode(void)
+{
+ /* Select Standby mode */
+ SET_BIT(PWR->CR, PWR_CR_PDDS);
+
+ /* Set SLEEPDEEP bit of Cortex System Control Register */
+ SET_BIT(SCB->SCR, ((uint32_t)SCB_SCR_SLEEPDEEP_Msk));
+
+ /* This option is used to ensure that store operations are completed */
+#if defined ( __CC_ARM)
+ __force_stores();
+#endif
+ /* Request Wait For Interrupt */
+ __WFI();
+}
+
+
+/**
+ * @brief Indicates Sleep-On-Exit when returning from Handler mode to Thread mode.
+ * @note Set SLEEPONEXIT bit of SCR register. When this bit is set, the processor
+ * re-enters SLEEP mode when an interruption handling is over.
+ * Setting this bit is useful when the processor is expected to run only on
+ * interruptions handling.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void HAL_PWR_EnableSleepOnExit(void)
+{
+ /* Set SLEEPONEXIT bit of Cortex System Control Register */
+ SET_BIT(SCB->SCR, ((uint32_t)SCB_SCR_SLEEPONEXIT_Msk));
+}
+
+
+/**
+ * @brief Disables Sleep-On-Exit feature when returning from Handler mode to Thread mode.
+ * @note Clears SLEEPONEXIT bit of SCR register. When this bit is set, the processor
+ * re-enters SLEEP mode when an interruption handling is over.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void HAL_PWR_DisableSleepOnExit(void)
+{
+ /* Clear SLEEPONEXIT bit of Cortex System Control Register */
+ CLEAR_BIT(SCB->SCR, ((uint32_t)SCB_SCR_SLEEPONEXIT_Msk));
+}
+
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables CORTEX M3 SEVONPEND bit.
+ * @note Sets SEVONPEND bit of SCR register. When this bit is set, this causes
+ * WFE to wake up when an interrupt moves from inactive to pended.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void HAL_PWR_EnableSEVOnPend(void)
+{
+ /* Set SEVONPEND bit of Cortex System Control Register */
+ SET_BIT(SCB->SCR, ((uint32_t)SCB_SCR_SEVONPEND_Msk));
+}
+
+
+/**
+ * @brief Disables CORTEX M3 SEVONPEND bit.
+ * @note Clears SEVONPEND bit of SCR register. When this bit is set, this causes
+ * WFE to wake up when an interrupt moves from inactive to pended.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void HAL_PWR_DisableSEVOnPend(void)
+{
+ /* Clear SEVONPEND bit of Cortex System Control Register */
+ CLEAR_BIT(SCB->SCR, ((uint32_t)SCB_SCR_SEVONPEND_Msk));
+}
+
+
+
+/**
+ * @brief This function handles the PWR PVD interrupt request.
+ * @note This API should be called under the PVD_IRQHandler().
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void HAL_PWR_PVD_IRQHandler(void)
+{
+ /* Check PWR exti flag */
+ if(__HAL_PWR_PVD_EXTI_GET_FLAG() != RESET)
+ {
+ /* PWR PVD interrupt user callback */
+ HAL_PWR_PVDCallback();
+
+ /* Clear PWR Exti pending bit */
+ __HAL_PWR_PVD_EXTI_CLEAR_FLAG();
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief PWR PVD interrupt callback
+ * @retval None
+ */
+__weak void HAL_PWR_PVDCallback(void)
+{
+ /* NOTE : This function Should not be modified, when the callback is needed,
+ the HAL_PWR_PVDCallback could be implemented in the user file
+ */
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif /* HAL_PWR_MODULE_ENABLED */
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
diff --git a/FreeRTOS/Demo/CORTEX_MPU_M3_NUCLEO_L152RE_GCC/ST_Code/Drivers/STM32L1xx_HAL_Driver/Src/stm32l1xx_hal_pwr_ex.c b/FreeRTOS/Demo/CORTEX_MPU_M3_NUCLEO_L152RE_GCC/ST_Code/Drivers/STM32L1xx_HAL_Driver/Src/stm32l1xx_hal_pwr_ex.c new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5e5c188e4 --- /dev/null +++ b/FreeRTOS/Demo/CORTEX_MPU_M3_NUCLEO_L152RE_GCC/ST_Code/Drivers/STM32L1xx_HAL_Driver/Src/stm32l1xx_hal_pwr_ex.c @@ -0,0 +1,161 @@ +/**
+ ******************************************************************************
+ * @file stm32l1xx_hal_pwr_ex.c
+ * @author MCD Application Team
+ * @brief Extended PWR HAL module driver.
+ * This file provides firmware functions to manage the following
+ * functionalities of the Power Controller (PWR) peripheral:
+ * + Extended Initialization and de-initialization functions
+ * + Extended Peripheral Control functions
+ *
+ ******************************************************************************
+ * @attention
+ *
+ * <h2><center>© Copyright (c) 2017 STMicroelectronics.
+ * All rights reserved.</center></h2>
+ *
+ * This software component is licensed by ST under BSD 3-Clause license,
+ * the "License"; You may not use this file except in compliance with the
+ * License. You may obtain a copy of the License at:
+ * opensource.org/licenses/BSD-3-Clause
+ *
+ ******************************************************************************
+ */
+
+/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#include "stm32l1xx_hal.h"
+
+/** @addtogroup STM32L1xx_HAL_Driver
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup PWREx PWREx
+ * @brief PWR HAL module driver
+ * @{
+ */
+
+#ifdef HAL_PWR_MODULE_ENABLED
+
+/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+/** @defgroup PWREx_Exported_Functions PWREx Exported Functions
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup PWREx_Exported_Functions_Group1 Peripheral Extended Features Functions
+ * @brief Low Power modes configuration functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+
+ ===============================================================================
+ ##### Peripheral extended features functions #####
+ ===============================================================================
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Return Voltage Scaling Range.
+ * @retval VOS bit field (PWR_REGULATOR_VOLTAGE_SCALE1, PWR_REGULATOR_VOLTAGE_SCALE2 or PWR_REGULATOR_VOLTAGE_SCALE3)
+ */
+uint32_t HAL_PWREx_GetVoltageRange(void)
+{
+ return (PWR->CR & PWR_CR_VOS);
+}
+
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables the Fast WakeUp from Ultra Low Power mode.
+ * @note This bit works in conjunction with ULP bit.
+ * Means, when ULP = 1 and FWU = 1 :VREFINT startup time is ignored when
+ * exiting from low power mode.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void HAL_PWREx_EnableFastWakeUp(void)
+{
+ /* Enable the fast wake up */
+ *(__IO uint32_t *) CR_FWU_BB = (uint32_t)ENABLE;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Disables the Fast WakeUp from Ultra Low Power mode.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void HAL_PWREx_DisableFastWakeUp(void)
+{
+ /* Disable the fast wake up */
+ *(__IO uint32_t *) CR_FWU_BB = (uint32_t)DISABLE;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables the Ultra Low Power mode
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void HAL_PWREx_EnableUltraLowPower(void)
+{
+ /* Enable the Ultra Low Power mode */
+ *(__IO uint32_t *) CR_ULP_BB = (uint32_t)ENABLE;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Disables the Ultra Low Power mode
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void HAL_PWREx_DisableUltraLowPower(void)
+{
+ /* Disable the Ultra Low Power mode */
+ *(__IO uint32_t *) CR_ULP_BB = (uint32_t)DISABLE;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enters the Low Power Run mode.
+ * @note Low power run mode can only be entered when VCORE is in range 2.
+ * In addition, the dynamic voltage scaling must not be used when Low
+ * power run mode is selected. Only Stop and Sleep modes with regulator
+ * configured in Low power mode is allowed when Low power run mode is
+ * selected.
+ * @note In Low power run mode, all I/O pins keep the same state as in Run mode.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void HAL_PWREx_EnableLowPowerRunMode(void)
+{
+ /* Enters the Low Power Run mode */
+ *(__IO uint32_t *) CR_LPSDSR_BB = (uint32_t)ENABLE;
+ *(__IO uint32_t *) CR_LPRUN_BB = (uint32_t)ENABLE;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Exits the Low Power Run mode.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_PWREx_DisableLowPowerRunMode(void)
+{
+ /* Exits the Low Power Run mode */
+ *(__IO uint32_t *) CR_LPRUN_BB = (uint32_t)DISABLE;
+ *(__IO uint32_t *) CR_LPSDSR_BB = (uint32_t)DISABLE;
+ return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif /* HAL_PWR_MODULE_ENABLED */
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
diff --git a/FreeRTOS/Demo/CORTEX_MPU_M3_NUCLEO_L152RE_GCC/ST_Code/Drivers/STM32L1xx_HAL_Driver/Src/stm32l1xx_hal_rcc.c b/FreeRTOS/Demo/CORTEX_MPU_M3_NUCLEO_L152RE_GCC/ST_Code/Drivers/STM32L1xx_HAL_Driver/Src/stm32l1xx_hal_rcc.c new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e2623a718 --- /dev/null +++ b/FreeRTOS/Demo/CORTEX_MPU_M3_NUCLEO_L152RE_GCC/ST_Code/Drivers/STM32L1xx_HAL_Driver/Src/stm32l1xx_hal_rcc.c @@ -0,0 +1,1394 @@ +/**
+ ******************************************************************************
+ * @file stm32l1xx_hal_rcc.c
+ * @author MCD Application Team
+ * @brief RCC HAL module driver.
+ * This file provides firmware functions to manage the following
+ * functionalities of the Reset and Clock Control (RCC) peripheral:
+ * + Initialization and de-initialization functions
+ * + Peripheral Control functions
+ *
+ @verbatim
+ ==============================================================================
+ ##### RCC specific features #####
+ ==============================================================================
+ [..]
+ After reset the device is running from multispeed internal oscillator clock
+ (MSI 2.097MHz) with Flash 0 wait state and Flash prefetch buffer is disabled,
+ and all peripherals are off except internal SRAM, Flash and JTAG.
+ (+) There is no prescaler on High speed (AHB) and Low speed (APB) buses;
+ all peripherals mapped on these buses are running at MSI speed.
+ (+) The clock for all peripherals is switched off, except the SRAM and FLASH.
+ (+) All GPIOs are in input floating state, except the JTAG pins which
+ are assigned to be used for debug purpose.
+ [..] Once the device started from reset, the user application has to:
+ (+) Configure the clock source to be used to drive the System clock
+ (if the application needs higher frequency/performance)
+ (+) Configure the System clock frequency and Flash settings
+ (+) Configure the AHB and APB buses prescalers
+ (+) Enable the clock for the peripheral(s) to be used
+ (+) Configure the clock source(s) for peripherals whose clocks are not
+ derived from the System clock (I2S, RTC, ADC, USB OTG FS/SDIO/RNG)
+ (*) SDIO only for STM32L1xxxD devices
+
+ ##### RCC Limitations #####
+ ==============================================================================
+ [..]
+ A delay between an RCC peripheral clock enable and the effective peripheral
+ enabling should be taken into account in order to manage the peripheral read/write
+ from/to registers.
+ (+) This delay depends on the peripheral mapping.
+ (++) AHB & APB peripherals, 1 dummy read is necessary
+
+ [..]
+ Workarounds:
+ (#) For AHB & APB peripherals, a dummy read to the peripheral register has been
+ inserted in each __HAL_RCC_PPP_CLK_ENABLE() macro.
+
+ @endverbatim
+ ******************************************************************************
+ * @attention
+ *
+ * <h2><center>© Copyright(c) 2017 STMicroelectronics.
+ * All rights reserved.</center></h2>
+ *
+ * This software component is licensed by ST under BSD 3-Clause license,
+ * the "License"; You may not use this file except in compliance with the
+ * License. You may obtain a copy of the License at:
+ * opensource.org/licenses/BSD-3-Clause
+ *
+ ******************************************************************************
+ */
+
+/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#include "stm32l1xx_hal.h"
+
+/** @addtogroup STM32L1xx_HAL_Driver
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup RCC RCC
+* @brief RCC HAL module driver
+ * @{
+ */
+
+#ifdef HAL_RCC_MODULE_ENABLED
+
+/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/** @defgroup RCC_Private_Macros RCC Private Macros
+ * @{
+ */
+
+#define MCO1_CLK_ENABLE() __HAL_RCC_GPIOA_CLK_ENABLE()
+#define MCO1_GPIO_PORT GPIOA
+#define MCO1_PIN GPIO_PIN_8
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+/** @defgroup RCC_Private_Variables RCC Private Variables
+ * @{
+ */
+extern const uint8_t PLLMulTable[]; /* Defined in CMSIS (system_stm32l0xx.c)*/
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/
+/** @defgroup RCC_Private_Functions RCC Private Functions
+ * @{
+ */
+static HAL_StatusTypeDef RCC_SetFlashLatencyFromMSIRange(uint32_t MSIrange);
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/* Exported functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+/** @defgroup RCC_Exported_Functions RCC Exported Functions
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup RCC_Exported_Functions_Group1 Initialization and de-initialization functions
+ * @brief Initialization and Configuration functions
+ *
+ @verbatim
+ ===============================================================================
+ ##### Initialization and de-initialization functions #####
+ ===============================================================================
+ [..]
+ This section provides functions allowing to configure the internal/external oscillators
+ (MSI, HSE, HSI, LSE, LSI, PLL, CSS and MCO) and the System buses clocks (SYSCLK, AHB, APB1
+ and APB2).
+
+ [..] Internal/external clock and PLL configuration
+ (#) MSI (Multispeed internal), Seven frequency ranges are available: 65.536 kHz,
+ 131.072 kHz, 262.144 kHz, 524.288 kHz, 1.048 MHz, 2.097 MHz (default value) and 4.194 MHz.
+
+ (#) HSI (high-speed internal), 16 MHz factory-trimmed RC used directly or through
+ the PLL as System clock source.
+ (#) LSI (low-speed internal), ~37 KHz low consumption RC used as IWDG and/or RTC
+ clock source.
+
+ (#) HSE (high-speed external), 1 to 24 MHz crystal oscillator used directly or
+ through the PLL as System clock source. Can be used also as RTC clock source.
+
+ (#) LSE (low-speed external), 32 KHz oscillator used as RTC clock source.
+
+ (#) PLL (clocked by HSI or HSE), featuring different output clocks:
+ (++) The first output is used to generate the high speed system clock (up to 32 MHz)
+ (++) The second output is used to generate the clock for the USB OTG FS (48 MHz)
+
+ (#) CSS (Clock security system), once enable using the macro __HAL_RCC_CSS_ENABLE()
+ and if a HSE clock failure occurs(HSE used directly or through PLL as System
+ clock source), the System clocks automatically switched to MSI and an interrupt
+ is generated if enabled. The interrupt is linked to the Cortex-M3 NMI
+ (Non-Maskable Interrupt) exception vector.
+
+ (#) MCO1 (microcontroller clock output), used to output SYSCLK, HSI, LSI, MSI, LSE,
+ HSE or PLL clock (through a configurable prescaler) on PA8 pin.
+
+ [..] System, AHB and APB buses clocks configuration
+ (#) Several clock sources can be used to drive the System clock (SYSCLK): MSI, HSI,
+ HSE and PLL.
+ The AHB clock (HCLK) is derived from System clock through configurable
+ prescaler and used to clock the CPU, memory and peripherals mapped
+ on AHB bus (DMA, GPIO...). APB1 (PCLK1) and APB2 (PCLK2) clocks are derived
+ from AHB clock through configurable prescalers and used to clock
+ the peripherals mapped on these buses. You can use
+ "@ref HAL_RCC_GetSysClockFreq()" function to retrieve the frequencies of these clocks.
+
+ -@- All the peripheral clocks are derived from the System clock (SYSCLK) except:
+ (+@) RTC: RTC clock can be derived either from the LSI, LSE or HSE clock
+ divided by 2 to 16. You have to use @ref __HAL_RCC_RTC_CONFIG() and @ref __HAL_RCC_RTC_ENABLE()
+ macros to configure this clock.
+ (+@) LCD: LCD clock can be derived either from the LSI, LSE or HSE clock
+ divided by 2 to 16. You have to use @ref __HAL_RCC_LCD_CONFIG()
+ macros to configure this clock.
+ (+@) USB OTG FS: USB OTG FS require a frequency equal to 48 MHz
+ to work correctly. This clock is derived of the main PLL through PLL Multiplier.
+
+ (+@) IWDG clock which is always the LSI clock.
+
+ (#) The maximum frequency of the SYSCLK and HCLK is 32 MHz, PCLK2 32 MHz
+ and PCLK1 32 MHz. Depending on the device voltage range, the maximum
+ frequency should be adapted accordingly.
+ @endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/*
+ Additional consideration on the HCLK based on Latency settings:
+ +----------------------------------------------------------------------+
+ | Latency | HCLK clock frequency (MHz) |
+ | |------------------------------------------------------|
+ | | voltage range 1 | voltage range 2 | voltage range 3 |
+ | | 1.8 V | 1.5 V | 1.2 V |
+ |---------------|------------------|-----------------|-----------------|
+ |0WS(1CPU cycle)| 0 < HCLK <= 16 | 0 < HCLK <= 8 | 0 < HCLK <= 2 |
+ |---------------|------------------|-----------------|-----------------|
+ |1WS(2CPU cycle)| 16 < HCLK <= 32 | 8 < HCLK <= 16 | 2 < HCLK <= 4 |
+ +----------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ The following table gives the different clock source frequencies depending on the product
+ voltage range:
+ +------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+ | Product voltage | Clock frequency |
+ | |------------------|-----------------------------|-----------------------|
+ | range | MSI | HSI | HSE | PLL |
+ |-----------------|---------|--------|-----------------------------|-----------------------|
+ | Range 1 (1.8 V) | 4.2 MHz | 16 MHz | HSE 32 MHz (external clock) | 32 MHz |
+ | | | | or 24 MHz (crystal) | (PLLVCO max = 96 MHz) |
+ |-----------------|---------|--------|-----------------------------|-----------------------|
+ | Range 2 (1.5 V) | 4.2 MHz | 16 MHz | 16 MHz | 16 MHz |
+ | | | | | (PLLVCO max = 48 MHz) |
+ |-----------------|---------|--------|-----------------------------|-----------------------|
+ | Range 3 (1.2 V) | 4.2 MHz | NA | 8 MHz | 4 MHz |
+ | | | | | (PLLVCO max = 24 MHz) |
+ +------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Resets the RCC clock configuration to the default reset state.
+ * @note The default reset state of the clock configuration is given below:
+ * - MSI ON and used as system clock source
+ * - HSI, HSE and PLL OFF
+ * - AHB, APB1 and APB2 prescaler set to 1.
+ * - CSS and MCO1 OFF
+ * - All interrupts disabled
+ * @note This function does not modify the configuration of the
+ * - Peripheral clocks
+ * - LSI, LSE and RTC clocks
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_RCC_DeInit(void)
+{
+ uint32_t tickstart;
+ HAL_StatusTypeDef status;
+
+ /* Set MSIClockRange, HSITRIM and MSITRIM bits to the reset values */
+ MODIFY_REG(RCC->ICSCR, (RCC_ICSCR_MSITRIM | RCC_ICSCR_HSITRIM | RCC_ICSCR_MSIRANGE), \
+ ((RCC_MSICALIBRATION_DEFAULT << RCC_ICSCR_MSITRIM_Pos) | (RCC_HSICALIBRATION_DEFAULT << RCC_ICSCR_HSITRIM_Pos) | RCC_ICSCR_MSIRANGE_5));
+
+ /* Set MSION bit */
+ SET_BIT(RCC->CR, RCC_CR_MSION);
+
+ /* Get Start Tick*/
+ tickstart = HAL_GetTick();
+
+ /* Wait till MSI is ready */
+ while (READ_BIT(RCC->CR, RCC_CR_MSIRDY) == 0U)
+ {
+ if ((HAL_GetTick() - tickstart) > MSI_TIMEOUT_VALUE)
+ {
+ return HAL_TIMEOUT;
+ }
+ }
+
+ /* Switch SYSCLK to MSI*/
+ CLEAR_BIT(RCC->CFGR, RCC_CFGR_SW);
+
+ /* Wait till MSI as SYSCLK status is ready */
+ while (READ_BIT(RCC->CFGR, RCC_CFGR_SWS) != 0U)
+ {
+ if ((HAL_GetTick() - tickstart) > CLOCKSWITCH_TIMEOUT_VALUE)
+ {
+ return HAL_TIMEOUT;
+ }
+ }
+
+ /* Update the SystemCoreClock global variable */
+ SystemCoreClock = MSI_VALUE;
+
+ /* Configure the source of time base considering new system clock settings */
+ status = HAL_InitTick(uwTickPrio);
+ if(status != HAL_OK)
+ {
+ return status;
+ }
+
+ /* Reset HSION, HSEON, CSSON & PLLON bits */
+ CLEAR_BIT(RCC->CR, RCC_CR_HSION | RCC_CR_HSEON | RCC_CR_CSSON | RCC_CR_PLLON);
+ /* Reset HSEBYP bit */
+ CLEAR_BIT(RCC->CR, RCC_CR_HSEBYP);
+
+ /* Get Start Tick*/
+ tickstart = HAL_GetTick();
+
+ /* Wait till PLL is not ready */
+ while (READ_BIT(RCC->CR, RCC_CR_PLLRDY) != 0U)
+ {
+ if ((HAL_GetTick() - tickstart) > PLL_TIMEOUT_VALUE)
+ {
+ return HAL_TIMEOUT;
+ }
+ }
+
+ /* Reset CFGR register */
+ CLEAR_REG(RCC->CFGR);
+
+ /* Disable all interrupts */
+ CLEAR_REG(RCC->CIR);
+
+ /* Clear all flags */
+#if defined(RCC_LSECSS_SUPPORT)
+ WRITE_REG(RCC->CIR, RCC_CIR_LSIRDYC | RCC_CIR_LSERDYC | RCC_CIR_HSIRDYC | RCC_CIR_HSERDYC | RCC_CIR_PLLRDYC | RCC_CIR_MSIRDYC | RCC_CIR_LSECSSC | RCC_CIR_CSSC);
+#else
+ WRITE_REG(RCC->CIR, RCC_CIR_LSIRDYC | RCC_CIR_LSERDYC | RCC_CIR_HSIRDYC | RCC_CIR_HSERDYC | RCC_CIR_PLLRDYC | RCC_CIR_MSIRDYC | RCC_CIR_CSSC);
+#endif
+
+ /* Clear all reset flags */
+ SET_BIT(RCC->CSR, RCC_CSR_RMVF);
+
+ return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Initializes the RCC Oscillators according to the specified parameters in the
+ * RCC_OscInitTypeDef.
+ * @param RCC_OscInitStruct pointer to an RCC_OscInitTypeDef structure that
+ * contains the configuration information for the RCC Oscillators.
+ * @note The PLL is not disabled when used as system clock.
+ * @note Transitions LSE Bypass to LSE On and LSE On to LSE Bypass are not
+ * supported by this macro. User should request a transition to LSE Off
+ * first and then LSE On or LSE Bypass.
+ * @note Transition HSE Bypass to HSE On and HSE On to HSE Bypass are not
+ * supported by this macro. User should request a transition to HSE Off
+ * first and then HSE On or HSE Bypass.
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_RCC_OscConfig(RCC_OscInitTypeDef *RCC_OscInitStruct)
+{
+ uint32_t tickstart;
+ HAL_StatusTypeDef status;
+ uint32_t sysclk_source, pll_config;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ if(RCC_OscInitStruct == NULL)
+ {
+ return HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+
+ assert_param(IS_RCC_OSCILLATORTYPE(RCC_OscInitStruct->OscillatorType));
+
+ sysclk_source = __HAL_RCC_GET_SYSCLK_SOURCE();
+ pll_config = __HAL_RCC_GET_PLL_OSCSOURCE();
+
+ /*------------------------------- HSE Configuration ------------------------*/
+ if(((RCC_OscInitStruct->OscillatorType) & RCC_OSCILLATORTYPE_HSE) == RCC_OSCILLATORTYPE_HSE)
+ {
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_RCC_HSE(RCC_OscInitStruct->HSEState));
+
+ /* When the HSE is used as system clock or clock source for PLL in these cases it is not allowed to be disabled */
+ if((sysclk_source == RCC_SYSCLKSOURCE_STATUS_HSE)
+ || ((sysclk_source == RCC_SYSCLKSOURCE_STATUS_PLLCLK) && (pll_config == RCC_PLLSOURCE_HSE)))
+ {
+ if((__HAL_RCC_GET_FLAG(RCC_FLAG_HSERDY) != 0U) && (RCC_OscInitStruct->HSEState == RCC_HSE_OFF))
+ {
+ return HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Set the new HSE configuration ---------------------------------------*/
+ __HAL_RCC_HSE_CONFIG(RCC_OscInitStruct->HSEState);
+
+ /* Check the HSE State */
+ if(RCC_OscInitStruct->HSEState != RCC_HSE_OFF)
+ {
+ /* Get Start Tick */
+ tickstart = HAL_GetTick();
+
+ /* Wait till HSE is ready */
+ while(__HAL_RCC_GET_FLAG(RCC_FLAG_HSERDY) == 0U)
+ {
+ if((HAL_GetTick() - tickstart ) > HSE_TIMEOUT_VALUE)
+ {
+ return HAL_TIMEOUT;
+ }
+ }
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Get Start Tick */
+ tickstart = HAL_GetTick();
+
+ /* Wait till HSE is disabled */
+ while(__HAL_RCC_GET_FLAG(RCC_FLAG_HSERDY) != 0U)
+ {
+ if((HAL_GetTick() - tickstart ) > HSE_TIMEOUT_VALUE)
+ {
+ return HAL_TIMEOUT;
+ }
+ }
+ }
+ }
+ }
+ /*----------------------------- HSI Configuration --------------------------*/
+ if(((RCC_OscInitStruct->OscillatorType) & RCC_OSCILLATORTYPE_HSI) == RCC_OSCILLATORTYPE_HSI)
+ {
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_RCC_HSI(RCC_OscInitStruct->HSIState));
+ assert_param(IS_RCC_CALIBRATION_VALUE(RCC_OscInitStruct->HSICalibrationValue));
+
+ /* Check if HSI is used as system clock or as PLL source when PLL is selected as system clock */
+ if((sysclk_source == RCC_SYSCLKSOURCE_STATUS_HSI)
+ || ((sysclk_source == RCC_SYSCLKSOURCE_STATUS_PLLCLK) && (pll_config == RCC_PLLSOURCE_HSI)))
+ {
+ /* When HSI is used as system clock it will not disabled */
+ if((__HAL_RCC_GET_FLAG(RCC_FLAG_HSIRDY) != 0U) && (RCC_OscInitStruct->HSIState != RCC_HSI_ON))
+ {
+ return HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+ /* Otherwise, just the calibration is allowed */
+ else
+ {
+ /* Adjusts the Internal High Speed oscillator (HSI) calibration value.*/
+ __HAL_RCC_HSI_CALIBRATIONVALUE_ADJUST(RCC_OscInitStruct->HSICalibrationValue);
+ }
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Check the HSI State */
+ if(RCC_OscInitStruct->HSIState != RCC_HSI_OFF)
+ {
+ /* Enable the Internal High Speed oscillator (HSI). */
+ __HAL_RCC_HSI_ENABLE();
+
+ /* Get Start Tick */
+ tickstart = HAL_GetTick();
+
+ /* Wait till HSI is ready */
+ while(__HAL_RCC_GET_FLAG(RCC_FLAG_HSIRDY) == 0U)
+ {
+ if((HAL_GetTick() - tickstart ) > HSI_TIMEOUT_VALUE)
+ {
+ return HAL_TIMEOUT;
+ }
+ }
+
+ /* Adjusts the Internal High Speed oscillator (HSI) calibration value.*/
+ __HAL_RCC_HSI_CALIBRATIONVALUE_ADJUST(RCC_OscInitStruct->HSICalibrationValue);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the Internal High Speed oscillator (HSI). */
+ __HAL_RCC_HSI_DISABLE();
+
+ /* Get Start Tick */
+ tickstart = HAL_GetTick();
+
+ /* Wait till HSI is disabled */
+ while(__HAL_RCC_GET_FLAG(RCC_FLAG_HSIRDY) != 0U)
+ {
+ if((HAL_GetTick() - tickstart ) > HSI_TIMEOUT_VALUE)
+ {
+ return HAL_TIMEOUT;
+ }
+ }
+ }
+ }
+ }
+ /*----------------------------- MSI Configuration --------------------------*/
+ if(((RCC_OscInitStruct->OscillatorType) & RCC_OSCILLATORTYPE_MSI) == RCC_OSCILLATORTYPE_MSI)
+ {
+ /* When the MSI is used as system clock it will not be disabled */
+ if((sysclk_source == RCC_CFGR_SWS_MSI) )
+ {
+ if((__HAL_RCC_GET_FLAG(RCC_FLAG_MSIRDY) != 0U) && (RCC_OscInitStruct->MSIState == RCC_MSI_OFF))
+ {
+ return HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+ /* Otherwise, just the calibration and MSI range change are allowed */
+ else
+ {
+ /* Check MSICalibrationValue and MSIClockRange input parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_RCC_MSICALIBRATION_VALUE(RCC_OscInitStruct->MSICalibrationValue));
+ assert_param(IS_RCC_MSI_CLOCK_RANGE(RCC_OscInitStruct->MSIClockRange));
+
+ /* To correctly read data from FLASH memory, the number of wait states (LATENCY)
+ must be correctly programmed according to the frequency of the CPU clock
+ (HCLK) and the supply voltage of the device. */
+ if(RCC_OscInitStruct->MSIClockRange > __HAL_RCC_GET_MSI_RANGE())
+ {
+ /* First increase number of wait states update if necessary */
+ if(RCC_SetFlashLatencyFromMSIRange(RCC_OscInitStruct->MSIClockRange) != HAL_OK)
+ {
+ return HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+
+ /* Selects the Multiple Speed oscillator (MSI) clock range .*/
+ __HAL_RCC_MSI_RANGE_CONFIG(RCC_OscInitStruct->MSIClockRange);
+ /* Adjusts the Multiple Speed oscillator (MSI) calibration value.*/
+ __HAL_RCC_MSI_CALIBRATIONVALUE_ADJUST(RCC_OscInitStruct->MSICalibrationValue);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Else, keep current flash latency while decreasing applies */
+ /* Selects the Multiple Speed oscillator (MSI) clock range .*/
+ __HAL_RCC_MSI_RANGE_CONFIG(RCC_OscInitStruct->MSIClockRange);
+ /* Adjusts the Multiple Speed oscillator (MSI) calibration value.*/
+ __HAL_RCC_MSI_CALIBRATIONVALUE_ADJUST(RCC_OscInitStruct->MSICalibrationValue);
+
+ /* Decrease number of wait states update if necessary */
+ if(RCC_SetFlashLatencyFromMSIRange(RCC_OscInitStruct->MSIClockRange) != HAL_OK)
+ {
+ return HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+ }
+
+ /* Update the SystemCoreClock global variable */
+ SystemCoreClock = (32768U * (1UL << ((RCC_OscInitStruct->MSIClockRange >> RCC_ICSCR_MSIRANGE_Pos) + 1U)))
+ >> AHBPrescTable[((RCC->CFGR & RCC_CFGR_HPRE) >> RCC_CFGR_HPRE_Pos)];
+
+ /* Configure the source of time base considering new system clocks settings*/
+ status = HAL_InitTick(uwTickPrio);
+ if(status != HAL_OK)
+ {
+ return status;
+ }
+ }
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Check MSI State */
+ assert_param(IS_RCC_MSI(RCC_OscInitStruct->MSIState));
+
+ /* Check the MSI State */
+ if(RCC_OscInitStruct->MSIState != RCC_MSI_OFF)
+ {
+ /* Enable the Multi Speed oscillator (MSI). */
+ __HAL_RCC_MSI_ENABLE();
+
+ /* Get Start Tick */
+ tickstart = HAL_GetTick();
+
+ /* Wait till MSI is ready */
+ while(__HAL_RCC_GET_FLAG(RCC_FLAG_MSIRDY) == 0U)
+ {
+ if((HAL_GetTick() - tickstart) > MSI_TIMEOUT_VALUE)
+ {
+ return HAL_TIMEOUT;
+ }
+ }
+ /* Check MSICalibrationValue and MSIClockRange input parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_RCC_MSICALIBRATION_VALUE(RCC_OscInitStruct->MSICalibrationValue));
+ assert_param(IS_RCC_MSI_CLOCK_RANGE(RCC_OscInitStruct->MSIClockRange));
+
+ /* Selects the Multiple Speed oscillator (MSI) clock range .*/
+ __HAL_RCC_MSI_RANGE_CONFIG(RCC_OscInitStruct->MSIClockRange);
+ /* Adjusts the Multiple Speed oscillator (MSI) calibration value.*/
+ __HAL_RCC_MSI_CALIBRATIONVALUE_ADJUST(RCC_OscInitStruct->MSICalibrationValue);
+
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the Multi Speed oscillator (MSI). */
+ __HAL_RCC_MSI_DISABLE();
+
+ /* Get Start Tick */
+ tickstart = HAL_GetTick();
+
+ /* Wait till MSI is ready */
+ while(__HAL_RCC_GET_FLAG(RCC_FLAG_MSIRDY) != 0U)
+ {
+ if((HAL_GetTick() - tickstart) > MSI_TIMEOUT_VALUE)
+ {
+ return HAL_TIMEOUT;
+ }
+ }
+ }
+ }
+ }
+ /*------------------------------ LSI Configuration -------------------------*/
+ if(((RCC_OscInitStruct->OscillatorType) & RCC_OSCILLATORTYPE_LSI) == RCC_OSCILLATORTYPE_LSI)
+ {
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_RCC_LSI(RCC_OscInitStruct->LSIState));
+
+ /* Check the LSI State */
+ if(RCC_OscInitStruct->LSIState != RCC_LSI_OFF)
+ {
+ /* Enable the Internal Low Speed oscillator (LSI). */
+ __HAL_RCC_LSI_ENABLE();
+
+ /* Get Start Tick */
+ tickstart = HAL_GetTick();
+
+ /* Wait till LSI is ready */
+ while(__HAL_RCC_GET_FLAG(RCC_FLAG_LSIRDY) == 0U)
+ {
+ if((HAL_GetTick() - tickstart ) > LSI_TIMEOUT_VALUE)
+ {
+ return HAL_TIMEOUT;
+ }
+ }
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the Internal Low Speed oscillator (LSI). */
+ __HAL_RCC_LSI_DISABLE();
+
+ /* Get Start Tick */
+ tickstart = HAL_GetTick();
+
+ /* Wait till LSI is disabled */
+ while(__HAL_RCC_GET_FLAG(RCC_FLAG_LSIRDY) != 0U)
+ {
+ if((HAL_GetTick() - tickstart ) > LSI_TIMEOUT_VALUE)
+ {
+ return HAL_TIMEOUT;
+ }
+ }
+ }
+ }
+ /*------------------------------ LSE Configuration -------------------------*/
+ if(((RCC_OscInitStruct->OscillatorType) & RCC_OSCILLATORTYPE_LSE) == RCC_OSCILLATORTYPE_LSE)
+ {
+ FlagStatus pwrclkchanged = RESET;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_RCC_LSE(RCC_OscInitStruct->LSEState));
+
+ /* Update LSE configuration in Backup Domain control register */
+ /* Requires to enable write access to Backup Domain of necessary */
+ if(__HAL_RCC_PWR_IS_CLK_DISABLED())
+ {
+ __HAL_RCC_PWR_CLK_ENABLE();
+ pwrclkchanged = SET;
+ }
+
+ if(HAL_IS_BIT_CLR(PWR->CR, PWR_CR_DBP))
+ {
+ /* Enable write access to Backup domain */
+ SET_BIT(PWR->CR, PWR_CR_DBP);
+
+ /* Wait for Backup domain Write protection disable */
+ tickstart = HAL_GetTick();
+
+ while(HAL_IS_BIT_CLR(PWR->CR, PWR_CR_DBP))
+ {
+ if((HAL_GetTick() - tickstart) > RCC_DBP_TIMEOUT_VALUE)
+ {
+ return HAL_TIMEOUT;
+ }
+ }
+ }
+
+ /* Set the new LSE configuration -----------------------------------------*/
+ __HAL_RCC_LSE_CONFIG(RCC_OscInitStruct->LSEState);
+ /* Check the LSE State */
+ if(RCC_OscInitStruct->LSEState != RCC_LSE_OFF)
+ {
+ /* Get Start Tick */
+ tickstart = HAL_GetTick();
+
+ /* Wait till LSE is ready */
+ while(__HAL_RCC_GET_FLAG(RCC_FLAG_LSERDY) == 0U)
+ {
+ if((HAL_GetTick() - tickstart ) > RCC_LSE_TIMEOUT_VALUE)
+ {
+ return HAL_TIMEOUT;
+ }
+ }
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Get Start Tick */
+ tickstart = HAL_GetTick();
+
+ /* Wait till LSE is disabled */
+ while(__HAL_RCC_GET_FLAG(RCC_FLAG_LSERDY) != 0U)
+ {
+ if((HAL_GetTick() - tickstart ) > RCC_LSE_TIMEOUT_VALUE)
+ {
+ return HAL_TIMEOUT;
+ }
+ }
+ }
+
+ /* Require to disable power clock if necessary */
+ if(pwrclkchanged == SET)
+ {
+ __HAL_RCC_PWR_CLK_DISABLE();
+ }
+ }
+
+ /*-------------------------------- PLL Configuration -----------------------*/
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_RCC_PLL(RCC_OscInitStruct->PLL.PLLState));
+ if ((RCC_OscInitStruct->PLL.PLLState) != RCC_PLL_NONE)
+ {
+ /* Check if the PLL is used as system clock or not */
+ if(sysclk_source != RCC_SYSCLKSOURCE_STATUS_PLLCLK)
+ {
+ if((RCC_OscInitStruct->PLL.PLLState) == RCC_PLL_ON)
+ {
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_RCC_PLLSOURCE(RCC_OscInitStruct->PLL.PLLSource));
+ assert_param(IS_RCC_PLL_MUL(RCC_OscInitStruct->PLL.PLLMUL));
+ assert_param(IS_RCC_PLL_DIV(RCC_OscInitStruct->PLL.PLLDIV));
+
+ /* Disable the main PLL. */
+ __HAL_RCC_PLL_DISABLE();
+
+ /* Get Start Tick */
+ tickstart = HAL_GetTick();
+
+ /* Wait till PLL is disabled */
+ while(__HAL_RCC_GET_FLAG(RCC_FLAG_PLLRDY) != 0U)
+ {
+ if((HAL_GetTick() - tickstart ) > PLL_TIMEOUT_VALUE)
+ {
+ return HAL_TIMEOUT;
+ }
+ }
+
+ /* Configure the main PLL clock source, multiplication and division factors. */
+ __HAL_RCC_PLL_CONFIG(RCC_OscInitStruct->PLL.PLLSource,
+ RCC_OscInitStruct->PLL.PLLMUL,
+ RCC_OscInitStruct->PLL.PLLDIV);
+ /* Enable the main PLL. */
+ __HAL_RCC_PLL_ENABLE();
+
+ /* Get Start Tick */
+ tickstart = HAL_GetTick();
+
+ /* Wait till PLL is ready */
+ while(__HAL_RCC_GET_FLAG(RCC_FLAG_PLLRDY) == 0U)
+ {
+ if((HAL_GetTick() - tickstart ) > PLL_TIMEOUT_VALUE)
+ {
+ return HAL_TIMEOUT;
+ }
+ }
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the main PLL. */
+ __HAL_RCC_PLL_DISABLE();
+
+ /* Get Start Tick */
+ tickstart = HAL_GetTick();
+
+ /* Wait till PLL is disabled */
+ while(__HAL_RCC_GET_FLAG(RCC_FLAG_PLLRDY) != 0U)
+ {
+ if((HAL_GetTick() - tickstart ) > PLL_TIMEOUT_VALUE)
+ {
+ return HAL_TIMEOUT;
+ }
+ }
+ }
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Check if there is a request to disable the PLL used as System clock source */
+ if((RCC_OscInitStruct->PLL.PLLState) == RCC_PLL_OFF)
+ {
+ return HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Do not return HAL_ERROR if request repeats the current configuration */
+ pll_config = RCC->CFGR;
+ if((READ_BIT(pll_config, RCC_CFGR_PLLSRC) != RCC_OscInitStruct->PLL.PLLSource) ||
+ (READ_BIT(pll_config, RCC_CFGR_PLLMUL) != RCC_OscInitStruct->PLL.PLLMUL) ||
+ (READ_BIT(pll_config, RCC_CFGR_PLLDIV) != RCC_OscInitStruct->PLL.PLLDIV))
+ {
+ return HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+ }
+ }
+ }
+
+ return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Initializes the CPU, AHB and APB buses clocks according to the specified
+ * parameters in the RCC_ClkInitStruct.
+ * @param RCC_ClkInitStruct pointer to an RCC_OscInitTypeDef structure that
+ * contains the configuration information for the RCC peripheral.
+ * @param FLatency FLASH Latency
+ * The value of this parameter depend on device used within the same series
+ * @note The SystemCoreClock CMSIS variable is used to store System Clock Frequency
+ * and updated by @ref HAL_RCC_GetHCLKFreq() function called within this function
+ *
+ * @note The MSI is used (enabled by hardware) as system clock source after
+ * start-up from Reset, wake-up from STOP and STANDBY mode, or in case
+ * of failure of the HSE used directly or indirectly as system clock
+ * (if the Clock Security System CSS is enabled).
+ *
+ * @note A switch from one clock source to another occurs only if the target
+ * clock source is ready (clock stable after start-up delay or PLL locked).
+ * If a clock source which is not yet ready is selected, the switch will
+ * occur when the clock source will be ready.
+ * You can use @ref HAL_RCC_GetClockConfig() function to know which clock is
+ * currently used as system clock source.
+ * @note Depending on the device voltage range, the software has to set correctly
+ * HPRE[3:0] bits to ensure that HCLK not exceed the maximum allowed frequency
+ * (for more details refer to section above "Initialization/de-initialization functions")
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_RCC_ClockConfig(RCC_ClkInitTypeDef *RCC_ClkInitStruct, uint32_t FLatency)
+{
+ uint32_t tickstart;
+ HAL_StatusTypeDef status;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ if(RCC_ClkInitStruct == NULL)
+ {
+ return HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+
+ assert_param(IS_FLASH_LATENCY(FLatency));
+
+ /* To correctly read data from FLASH memory, the number of wait states (LATENCY)
+ must be correctly programmed according to the frequency of the CPU clock
+ (HCLK) and the supply voltage of the device. */
+
+ /* Increasing the number of wait states because of higher CPU frequency */
+ if(FLatency > __HAL_FLASH_GET_LATENCY())
+ {
+ /* Program the new number of wait states to the LATENCY bits in the FLASH_ACR register */
+ __HAL_FLASH_SET_LATENCY(FLatency);
+
+ /* Check that the new number of wait states is taken into account to access the Flash
+ memory by reading the FLASH_ACR register */
+ if(__HAL_FLASH_GET_LATENCY() != FLatency)
+ {
+ return HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+ }
+
+ /*-------------------------- HCLK Configuration --------------------------*/
+ if(((RCC_ClkInitStruct->ClockType) & RCC_CLOCKTYPE_HCLK) == RCC_CLOCKTYPE_HCLK)
+ {
+ assert_param(IS_RCC_HCLK(RCC_ClkInitStruct->AHBCLKDivider));
+ MODIFY_REG(RCC->CFGR, RCC_CFGR_HPRE, RCC_ClkInitStruct->AHBCLKDivider);
+ }
+
+ /*------------------------- SYSCLK Configuration ---------------------------*/
+ if(((RCC_ClkInitStruct->ClockType) & RCC_CLOCKTYPE_SYSCLK) == RCC_CLOCKTYPE_SYSCLK)
+ {
+ assert_param(IS_RCC_SYSCLKSOURCE(RCC_ClkInitStruct->SYSCLKSource));
+
+ /* HSE is selected as System Clock Source */
+ if(RCC_ClkInitStruct->SYSCLKSource == RCC_SYSCLKSOURCE_HSE)
+ {
+ /* Check the HSE ready flag */
+ if(__HAL_RCC_GET_FLAG(RCC_FLAG_HSERDY) == 0U)
+ {
+ return HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+ }
+ /* PLL is selected as System Clock Source */
+ else if(RCC_ClkInitStruct->SYSCLKSource == RCC_SYSCLKSOURCE_PLLCLK)
+ {
+ /* Check the PLL ready flag */
+ if(__HAL_RCC_GET_FLAG(RCC_FLAG_PLLRDY) == 0U)
+ {
+ return HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+ }
+ /* HSI is selected as System Clock Source */
+ else if(RCC_ClkInitStruct->SYSCLKSource == RCC_SYSCLKSOURCE_HSI)
+ {
+ /* Check the HSI ready flag */
+ if(__HAL_RCC_GET_FLAG(RCC_FLAG_HSIRDY) == 0U)
+ {
+ return HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+ }
+ /* MSI is selected as System Clock Source */
+ else
+ {
+ /* Check the MSI ready flag */
+ if(__HAL_RCC_GET_FLAG(RCC_FLAG_MSIRDY) == 0U)
+ {
+ return HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+ }
+ __HAL_RCC_SYSCLK_CONFIG(RCC_ClkInitStruct->SYSCLKSource);
+
+ /* Get Start Tick */
+ tickstart = HAL_GetTick();
+
+ if(RCC_ClkInitStruct->SYSCLKSource == RCC_SYSCLKSOURCE_HSE)
+ {
+ while (__HAL_RCC_GET_SYSCLK_SOURCE() != RCC_SYSCLKSOURCE_STATUS_HSE)
+ {
+ if((HAL_GetTick() - tickstart ) > CLOCKSWITCH_TIMEOUT_VALUE)
+ {
+ return HAL_TIMEOUT;
+ }
+ }
+ }
+ else if(RCC_ClkInitStruct->SYSCLKSource == RCC_SYSCLKSOURCE_PLLCLK)
+ {
+ while (__HAL_RCC_GET_SYSCLK_SOURCE() != RCC_SYSCLKSOURCE_STATUS_PLLCLK)
+ {
+ if((HAL_GetTick() - tickstart ) > CLOCKSWITCH_TIMEOUT_VALUE)
+ {
+ return HAL_TIMEOUT;
+ }
+ }
+ }
+ else if(RCC_ClkInitStruct->SYSCLKSource == RCC_SYSCLKSOURCE_HSI)
+ {
+ while (__HAL_RCC_GET_SYSCLK_SOURCE() != RCC_SYSCLKSOURCE_STATUS_HSI)
+ {
+ if((HAL_GetTick() - tickstart ) > CLOCKSWITCH_TIMEOUT_VALUE)
+ {
+ return HAL_TIMEOUT;
+ }
+ }
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ while(__HAL_RCC_GET_SYSCLK_SOURCE() != RCC_SYSCLKSOURCE_STATUS_MSI)
+ {
+ if((HAL_GetTick() - tickstart ) > CLOCKSWITCH_TIMEOUT_VALUE)
+ {
+ return HAL_TIMEOUT;
+ }
+ }
+ }
+ }
+ /* Decreasing the number of wait states because of lower CPU frequency */
+ if(FLatency < __HAL_FLASH_GET_LATENCY())
+ {
+ /* Program the new number of wait states to the LATENCY bits in the FLASH_ACR register */
+ __HAL_FLASH_SET_LATENCY(FLatency);
+
+ /* Check that the new number of wait states is taken into account to access the Flash
+ memory by reading the FLASH_ACR register */
+ if(__HAL_FLASH_GET_LATENCY() != FLatency)
+ {
+ return HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+ }
+
+ /*-------------------------- PCLK1 Configuration ---------------------------*/
+ if(((RCC_ClkInitStruct->ClockType) & RCC_CLOCKTYPE_PCLK1) == RCC_CLOCKTYPE_PCLK1)
+ {
+ assert_param(IS_RCC_PCLK(RCC_ClkInitStruct->APB1CLKDivider));
+ MODIFY_REG(RCC->CFGR, RCC_CFGR_PPRE1, RCC_ClkInitStruct->APB1CLKDivider);
+ }
+
+ /*-------------------------- PCLK2 Configuration ---------------------------*/
+ if(((RCC_ClkInitStruct->ClockType) & RCC_CLOCKTYPE_PCLK2) == RCC_CLOCKTYPE_PCLK2)
+ {
+ assert_param(IS_RCC_PCLK(RCC_ClkInitStruct->APB2CLKDivider));
+ MODIFY_REG(RCC->CFGR, RCC_CFGR_PPRE2, ((RCC_ClkInitStruct->APB2CLKDivider) << 3U));
+ }
+
+ /* Update the SystemCoreClock global variable */
+ SystemCoreClock = HAL_RCC_GetSysClockFreq() >> AHBPrescTable[(RCC->CFGR & RCC_CFGR_HPRE)>> RCC_CFGR_HPRE_Pos];
+
+ /* Configure the source of time base considering new system clocks settings*/
+ status = HAL_InitTick(uwTickPrio);
+
+ return status;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup RCC_Exported_Functions_Group2 Peripheral Control functions
+ * @brief RCC clocks control functions
+ *
+ @verbatim
+ ===============================================================================
+ ##### Peripheral Control functions #####
+ ===============================================================================
+ [..]
+ This subsection provides a set of functions allowing to control the RCC Clocks
+ frequencies.
+
+ @endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Selects the clock source to output on MCO pin.
+ * @note MCO pin should be configured in alternate function mode.
+ * @param RCC_MCOx specifies the output direction for the clock source.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg @ref RCC_MCO1 Clock source to output on MCO1 pin(PA8).
+ * @param RCC_MCOSource specifies the clock source to output.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg @ref RCC_MCO1SOURCE_NOCLOCK No clock selected as MCO clock
+ * @arg @ref RCC_MCO1SOURCE_SYSCLK System clock selected as MCO clock
+ * @arg @ref RCC_MCO1SOURCE_HSI HSI selected as MCO clock
+ * @arg @ref RCC_MCO1SOURCE_HSE HSE selected as MCO clock
+ * @arg @ref RCC_MCO1SOURCE_MSI MSI oscillator clock selected as MCO clock
+ * @arg @ref RCC_MCO1SOURCE_PLLCLK PLL clock selected as MCO clock
+ * @arg @ref RCC_MCO1SOURCE_LSI LSI clock selected as MCO clock
+ * @arg @ref RCC_MCO1SOURCE_LSE LSE clock selected as MCO clock
+ * @param RCC_MCODiv specifies the MCO DIV.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg @ref RCC_MCODIV_1 no division applied to MCO clock
+ * @arg @ref RCC_MCODIV_2 division by 2 applied to MCO clock
+ * @arg @ref RCC_MCODIV_4 division by 4 applied to MCO clock
+ * @arg @ref RCC_MCODIV_8 division by 8 applied to MCO clock
+ * @arg @ref RCC_MCODIV_16 division by 16 applied to MCO clock
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void HAL_RCC_MCOConfig(uint32_t RCC_MCOx, uint32_t RCC_MCOSource, uint32_t RCC_MCODiv)
+{
+ GPIO_InitTypeDef gpio;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_RCC_MCO(RCC_MCOx));
+ assert_param(IS_RCC_MCODIV(RCC_MCODiv));
+ assert_param(IS_RCC_MCO1SOURCE(RCC_MCOSource));
+
+ /* Configure the MCO1 pin in alternate function mode */
+ gpio.Mode = GPIO_MODE_AF_PP;
+ gpio.Speed = GPIO_SPEED_FREQ_HIGH;
+ gpio.Pull = GPIO_NOPULL;
+ gpio.Pin = MCO1_PIN;
+ gpio.Alternate = GPIO_AF0_MCO;
+
+ /* MCO1 Clock Enable */
+ MCO1_CLK_ENABLE();
+
+ HAL_GPIO_Init(MCO1_GPIO_PORT, &gpio);
+
+ /* Configure the MCO clock source */
+ __HAL_RCC_MCO1_CONFIG(RCC_MCOSource, RCC_MCODiv);
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables the Clock Security System.
+ * @note If a failure is detected on the HSE oscillator clock, this oscillator
+ * is automatically disabled and an interrupt is generated to inform the
+ * software about the failure (Clock Security System Interrupt, CSSI),
+ * allowing the MCU to perform rescue operations. The CSSI is linked to
+ * the Cortex-M3 NMI (Non-Maskable Interrupt) exception vector.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void HAL_RCC_EnableCSS(void)
+{
+ *(__IO uint32_t *) RCC_CR_CSSON_BB = (uint32_t)ENABLE;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Disables the Clock Security System.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void HAL_RCC_DisableCSS(void)
+{
+ *(__IO uint32_t *) RCC_CR_CSSON_BB = (uint32_t)DISABLE;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Returns the SYSCLK frequency
+ * @note The system frequency computed by this function is not the real
+ * frequency in the chip. It is calculated based on the predefined
+ * constant and the selected clock source:
+ * @note If SYSCLK source is MSI, function returns a value based on MSI
+ * Value as defined by the MSI range.
+ * @note If SYSCLK source is HSI, function returns values based on HSI_VALUE(*)
+ * @note If SYSCLK source is HSE, function returns a value based on HSE_VALUE(**)
+ * @note If SYSCLK source is PLL, function returns a value based on HSE_VALUE(**)
+ * or HSI_VALUE(*) multiplied/divided by the PLL factors.
+ * @note (*) HSI_VALUE is a constant defined in stm32l1xx_hal_conf.h file (default value
+ * 16 MHz) but the real value may vary depending on the variations
+ * in voltage and temperature.
+ * @note (**) HSE_VALUE is a constant defined in stm32l1xx_hal_conf.h file (default value
+ * 8 MHz), user has to ensure that HSE_VALUE is same as the real
+ * frequency of the crystal used. Otherwise, this function may
+ * have wrong result.
+ *
+ * @note The result of this function could be not correct when using fractional
+ * value for HSE crystal.
+ *
+ * @note This function can be used by the user application to compute the
+ * baud-rate for the communication peripherals or configure other parameters.
+ *
+ * @note Each time SYSCLK changes, this function must be called to update the
+ * right SYSCLK value. Otherwise, any configuration based on this function will be incorrect.
+ *
+ * @retval SYSCLK frequency
+ */
+uint32_t HAL_RCC_GetSysClockFreq(void)
+{
+ uint32_t tmpreg, pllm, plld, pllvco, msiclkrange, sysclockfreq;
+
+ tmpreg = RCC->CFGR;
+
+ /* Get SYSCLK source -------------------------------------------------------*/
+ switch (tmpreg & RCC_CFGR_SWS)
+ {
+ case RCC_SYSCLKSOURCE_STATUS_HSI: /* HSI used as system clock source */
+ {
+ sysclockfreq = HSI_VALUE;
+ break;
+ }
+ case RCC_SYSCLKSOURCE_STATUS_HSE: /* HSE used as system clock */
+ {
+ sysclockfreq = HSE_VALUE;
+ break;
+ }
+ case RCC_SYSCLKSOURCE_STATUS_PLLCLK: /* PLL used as system clock */
+ {
+ pllm = PLLMulTable[(uint32_t)(tmpreg & RCC_CFGR_PLLMUL) >> RCC_CFGR_PLLMUL_Pos];
+ plld = ((uint32_t)(tmpreg & RCC_CFGR_PLLDIV) >> RCC_CFGR_PLLDIV_Pos) + 1U;
+ if (__HAL_RCC_GET_PLL_OSCSOURCE() != RCC_PLLSOURCE_HSI)
+ {
+ /* HSE used as PLL clock source */
+ pllvco = (HSE_VALUE * pllm) / plld;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* HSI used as PLL clock source */
+ pllvco = (HSI_VALUE * pllm) / plld;
+ }
+ sysclockfreq = pllvco;
+ break;
+ }
+ case RCC_SYSCLKSOURCE_STATUS_MSI: /* MSI used as system clock source */
+ default: /* MSI used as system clock */
+ {
+ msiclkrange = (RCC->ICSCR & RCC_ICSCR_MSIRANGE ) >> RCC_ICSCR_MSIRANGE_Pos;
+ sysclockfreq = (32768U * (1UL << (msiclkrange + 1U)));
+ break;
+ }
+ }
+ return sysclockfreq;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Returns the HCLK frequency
+ * @note Each time HCLK changes, this function must be called to update the
+ * right HCLK value. Otherwise, any configuration based on this function will be incorrect.
+ *
+ * @note The SystemCoreClock CMSIS variable is used to store System Clock Frequency
+ * and updated within this function
+ * @retval HCLK frequency
+ */
+uint32_t HAL_RCC_GetHCLKFreq(void)
+{
+ return SystemCoreClock;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Returns the PCLK1 frequency
+ * @note Each time PCLK1 changes, this function must be called to update the
+ * right PCLK1 value. Otherwise, any configuration based on this function will be incorrect.
+ * @retval PCLK1 frequency
+ */
+uint32_t HAL_RCC_GetPCLK1Freq(void)
+{
+ /* Get HCLK source and Compute PCLK1 frequency ---------------------------*/
+ return (HAL_RCC_GetHCLKFreq() >> APBPrescTable[(RCC->CFGR & RCC_CFGR_PPRE1) >> RCC_CFGR_PPRE1_Pos]);
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Returns the PCLK2 frequency
+ * @note Each time PCLK2 changes, this function must be called to update the
+ * right PCLK2 value. Otherwise, any configuration based on this function will be incorrect.
+ * @retval PCLK2 frequency
+ */
+uint32_t HAL_RCC_GetPCLK2Freq(void)
+{
+ /* Get HCLK source and Compute PCLK2 frequency ---------------------------*/
+ return (HAL_RCC_GetHCLKFreq()>> APBPrescTable[(RCC->CFGR & RCC_CFGR_PPRE2) >> RCC_CFGR_PPRE2_Pos]);
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Configures the RCC_OscInitStruct according to the internal
+ * RCC configuration registers.
+ * @param RCC_OscInitStruct pointer to an RCC_OscInitTypeDef structure that
+ * will be configured.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void HAL_RCC_GetOscConfig(RCC_OscInitTypeDef *RCC_OscInitStruct)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(RCC_OscInitStruct != (void *)NULL);
+
+ /* Set all possible values for the Oscillator type parameter ---------------*/
+ RCC_OscInitStruct->OscillatorType = RCC_OSCILLATORTYPE_HSE | RCC_OSCILLATORTYPE_HSI \
+ | RCC_OSCILLATORTYPE_LSE | RCC_OSCILLATORTYPE_LSI | RCC_OSCILLATORTYPE_MSI;
+
+
+ /* Get the HSE configuration -----------------------------------------------*/
+ if((RCC->CR &RCC_CR_HSEBYP) == RCC_CR_HSEBYP)
+ {
+ RCC_OscInitStruct->HSEState = RCC_HSE_BYPASS;
+ }
+ else if((RCC->CR &RCC_CR_HSEON) == RCC_CR_HSEON)
+ {
+ RCC_OscInitStruct->HSEState = RCC_HSE_ON;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ RCC_OscInitStruct->HSEState = RCC_HSE_OFF;
+ }
+
+ /* Get the HSI configuration -----------------------------------------------*/
+ if((RCC->CR &RCC_CR_HSION) == RCC_CR_HSION)
+ {
+ RCC_OscInitStruct->HSIState = RCC_HSI_ON;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ RCC_OscInitStruct->HSIState = RCC_HSI_OFF;
+ }
+
+ RCC_OscInitStruct->HSICalibrationValue = (uint32_t)((RCC->ICSCR & RCC_ICSCR_HSITRIM) >> RCC_ICSCR_HSITRIM_Pos);
+
+ /* Get the MSI configuration -----------------------------------------------*/
+ if((RCC->CR &RCC_CR_MSION) == RCC_CR_MSION)
+ {
+ RCC_OscInitStruct->MSIState = RCC_MSI_ON;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ RCC_OscInitStruct->MSIState = RCC_MSI_OFF;
+ }
+
+ RCC_OscInitStruct->MSICalibrationValue = (uint32_t)((RCC->ICSCR & RCC_ICSCR_MSITRIM) >> RCC_ICSCR_MSITRIM_Pos);
+ RCC_OscInitStruct->MSIClockRange = (uint32_t)((RCC->ICSCR & RCC_ICSCR_MSIRANGE));
+
+ /* Get the LSE configuration -----------------------------------------------*/
+ if((RCC->CSR &RCC_CSR_LSEBYP) == RCC_CSR_LSEBYP)
+ {
+ RCC_OscInitStruct->LSEState = RCC_LSE_BYPASS;
+ }
+ else if((RCC->CSR &RCC_CSR_LSEON) == RCC_CSR_LSEON)
+ {
+ RCC_OscInitStruct->LSEState = RCC_LSE_ON;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ RCC_OscInitStruct->LSEState = RCC_LSE_OFF;
+ }
+
+ /* Get the LSI configuration -----------------------------------------------*/
+ if((RCC->CSR &RCC_CSR_LSION) == RCC_CSR_LSION)
+ {
+ RCC_OscInitStruct->LSIState = RCC_LSI_ON;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ RCC_OscInitStruct->LSIState = RCC_LSI_OFF;
+ }
+
+
+ /* Get the PLL configuration -----------------------------------------------*/
+ if((RCC->CR &RCC_CR_PLLON) == RCC_CR_PLLON)
+ {
+ RCC_OscInitStruct->PLL.PLLState = RCC_PLL_ON;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ RCC_OscInitStruct->PLL.PLLState = RCC_PLL_OFF;
+ }
+ RCC_OscInitStruct->PLL.PLLSource = (uint32_t)(RCC->CFGR & RCC_CFGR_PLLSRC);
+ RCC_OscInitStruct->PLL.PLLMUL = (uint32_t)(RCC->CFGR & RCC_CFGR_PLLMUL);
+ RCC_OscInitStruct->PLL.PLLDIV = (uint32_t)(RCC->CFGR & RCC_CFGR_PLLDIV);
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Get the RCC_ClkInitStruct according to the internal
+ * RCC configuration registers.
+ * @param RCC_ClkInitStruct pointer to an RCC_ClkInitTypeDef structure that
+ * contains the current clock configuration.
+ * @param pFLatency Pointer on the Flash Latency.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void HAL_RCC_GetClockConfig(RCC_ClkInitTypeDef *RCC_ClkInitStruct, uint32_t *pFLatency)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(RCC_ClkInitStruct != (void *)NULL);
+ assert_param(pFLatency != (void *)NULL);
+
+ /* Set all possible values for the Clock type parameter --------------------*/
+ RCC_ClkInitStruct->ClockType = RCC_CLOCKTYPE_SYSCLK | RCC_CLOCKTYPE_HCLK | RCC_CLOCKTYPE_PCLK1 | RCC_CLOCKTYPE_PCLK2;
+
+ /* Get the SYSCLK configuration --------------------------------------------*/
+ RCC_ClkInitStruct->SYSCLKSource = (uint32_t)(RCC->CFGR & RCC_CFGR_SW);
+
+ /* Get the HCLK configuration ----------------------------------------------*/
+ RCC_ClkInitStruct->AHBCLKDivider = (uint32_t)(RCC->CFGR & RCC_CFGR_HPRE);
+
+ /* Get the APB1 configuration ----------------------------------------------*/
+ RCC_ClkInitStruct->APB1CLKDivider = (uint32_t)(RCC->CFGR & RCC_CFGR_PPRE1);
+
+ /* Get the APB2 configuration ----------------------------------------------*/
+ RCC_ClkInitStruct->APB2CLKDivider = (uint32_t)((RCC->CFGR & RCC_CFGR_PPRE2) >> 3U);
+
+ /* Get the Flash Wait State (Latency) configuration ------------------------*/
+ *pFLatency = __HAL_FLASH_GET_LATENCY();
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief This function handles the RCC CSS interrupt request.
+ * @note This API should be called under the NMI_Handler().
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void HAL_RCC_NMI_IRQHandler(void)
+{
+ /* Check RCC CSSF flag */
+ if(__HAL_RCC_GET_IT(RCC_IT_CSS))
+ {
+ /* RCC Clock Security System interrupt user callback */
+ HAL_RCC_CSSCallback();
+
+ /* Clear RCC CSS pending bit */
+ __HAL_RCC_CLEAR_IT(RCC_IT_CSS);
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief RCC Clock Security System interrupt callback
+ * @retval none
+ */
+__weak void HAL_RCC_CSSCallback(void)
+{
+ /* NOTE : This function Should not be modified, when the callback is needed,
+ the HAL_RCC_CSSCallback could be implemented in the user file
+ */
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/
+/** @addtogroup RCC_Private_Functions
+ * @{
+ */
+/**
+ * @brief Update number of Flash wait states in line with MSI range and current
+ voltage range
+ * @param MSIrange MSI range value from RCC_MSIRANGE_0 to RCC_MSIRANGE_6
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+static HAL_StatusTypeDef RCC_SetFlashLatencyFromMSIRange(uint32_t MSIrange)
+{
+ uint32_t vos;
+ uint32_t latency = FLASH_LATENCY_0; /* default value 0WS */
+
+ /* HCLK can reach 4 MHz only if AHB prescaler = 1 */
+ if (READ_BIT(RCC->CFGR, RCC_CFGR_HPRE) == RCC_SYSCLK_DIV1)
+ {
+ if(__HAL_RCC_PWR_IS_CLK_ENABLED())
+ {
+ vos = READ_BIT(PWR->CR, PWR_CR_VOS);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ __HAL_RCC_PWR_CLK_ENABLE();
+ vos = READ_BIT(PWR->CR, PWR_CR_VOS);
+ __HAL_RCC_PWR_CLK_DISABLE();
+ }
+
+ /* Check if need to set latency 1 only for Range 3 & HCLK = 4MHz */
+ if((vos == PWR_REGULATOR_VOLTAGE_SCALE3) && (MSIrange == RCC_MSIRANGE_6))
+ {
+ latency = FLASH_LATENCY_1; /* 1WS */
+ }
+ }
+
+ __HAL_FLASH_SET_LATENCY(latency);
+
+ /* Check that the new number of wait states is taken into account to access the Flash
+ memory by reading the FLASH_ACR register */
+ if(__HAL_FLASH_GET_LATENCY() != latency)
+ {
+ return HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+
+ return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif /* HAL_RCC_MODULE_ENABLED */
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
diff --git a/FreeRTOS/Demo/CORTEX_MPU_M3_NUCLEO_L152RE_GCC/ST_Code/Drivers/STM32L1xx_HAL_Driver/Src/stm32l1xx_hal_rcc_ex.c b/FreeRTOS/Demo/CORTEX_MPU_M3_NUCLEO_L152RE_GCC/ST_Code/Drivers/STM32L1xx_HAL_Driver/Src/stm32l1xx_hal_rcc_ex.c new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6dac30987 --- /dev/null +++ b/FreeRTOS/Demo/CORTEX_MPU_M3_NUCLEO_L152RE_GCC/ST_Code/Drivers/STM32L1xx_HAL_Driver/Src/stm32l1xx_hal_rcc_ex.c @@ -0,0 +1,440 @@ +/**
+ ******************************************************************************
+ * @file stm32l1xx_hal_rcc_ex.c
+ * @author MCD Application Team
+ * @brief Extended RCC HAL module driver.
+ * This file provides firmware functions to manage the following
+ * functionalities RCC extension peripheral:
+ * + Extended Peripheral Control functions
+ *
+ ******************************************************************************
+ * @attention
+ *
+ * <h2><center>© Copyright(c) 2017 STMicroelectronics.
+ * All rights reserved.</center></h2>
+ *
+ * This software component is licensed by ST under BSD 3-Clause license,
+ * the "License"; You may not use this file except in compliance with the
+ * License. You may obtain a copy of the License at:
+ * opensource.org/licenses/BSD-3-Clause
+ *
+ ******************************************************************************
+ */
+
+/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#include "stm32l1xx_hal.h"
+
+/** @addtogroup STM32L1xx_HAL_Driver
+ * @{
+ */
+
+#ifdef HAL_RCC_MODULE_ENABLED
+
+/** @defgroup RCCEx RCCEx
+ * @brief RCC Extension HAL module driver
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/** @defgroup RCCEx_Private_Constants RCCEx Private Constants
+ * @{
+ */
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/** @defgroup RCCEx_Private_Macros RCCEx Private Macros
+ * @{
+ */
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+/** @defgroup RCCEx_Exported_Functions RCCEx Exported Functions
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup RCCEx_Exported_Functions_Group1 Extended Peripheral Control functions
+ * @brief Extended Peripheral Control functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ===============================================================================
+ ##### Extended Peripheral Control functions #####
+ ===============================================================================
+ [..]
+ This subsection provides a set of functions allowing to control the RCC Clocks
+ frequencies.
+ [..]
+ (@) Important note: Care must be taken when HAL_RCCEx_PeriphCLKConfig() is used to
+ select the RTC clock source; in this case the Backup domain will be reset in
+ order to modify the RTC Clock source, as consequence RTC registers (including
+ the backup registers) are set to their reset values.
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Initializes the RCC extended peripherals clocks according to the specified
+ * parameters in the RCC_PeriphCLKInitTypeDef.
+ * @param PeriphClkInit pointer to an RCC_PeriphCLKInitTypeDef structure that
+ * contains the configuration information for the Extended Peripherals clocks(RTC/LCD clock).
+ * @retval HAL status
+ * @note If HAL_ERROR returned, first switch-OFF HSE clock oscillator with @ref HAL_RCC_OscConfig()
+ * to possibly update HSE divider.
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_RCCEx_PeriphCLKConfig(RCC_PeriphCLKInitTypeDef *PeriphClkInit)
+{
+ uint32_t tickstart;
+ uint32_t temp_reg;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_RCC_PERIPHCLOCK(PeriphClkInit->PeriphClockSelection));
+
+ /*------------------------------- RTC/LCD Configuration ------------------------*/
+ if ((((PeriphClkInit->PeriphClockSelection) & RCC_PERIPHCLK_RTC) == RCC_PERIPHCLK_RTC)
+#if defined(LCD)
+ || (((PeriphClkInit->PeriphClockSelection) & RCC_PERIPHCLK_LCD) == RCC_PERIPHCLK_LCD)
+#endif /* LCD */
+ )
+ {
+ /* check for RTC Parameters used to output RTCCLK */
+ if(((PeriphClkInit->PeriphClockSelection) & RCC_PERIPHCLK_RTC) == RCC_PERIPHCLK_RTC)
+ {
+ assert_param(IS_RCC_RTCCLKSOURCE(PeriphClkInit->RTCClockSelection));
+ }
+
+#if defined(LCD)
+ if(((PeriphClkInit->PeriphClockSelection) & RCC_PERIPHCLK_LCD) == RCC_PERIPHCLK_LCD)
+ {
+ assert_param(IS_RCC_RTCCLKSOURCE(PeriphClkInit->LCDClockSelection));
+ }
+#endif /* LCD */
+
+ FlagStatus pwrclkchanged = RESET;
+
+ /* As soon as function is called to change RTC clock source, activation of the
+ power domain is done. */
+ /* Requires to enable write access to Backup Domain of necessary */
+ if(__HAL_RCC_PWR_IS_CLK_DISABLED())
+ {
+ __HAL_RCC_PWR_CLK_ENABLE();
+ pwrclkchanged = SET;
+ }
+
+ if(HAL_IS_BIT_CLR(PWR->CR, PWR_CR_DBP))
+ {
+ /* Enable write access to Backup domain */
+ SET_BIT(PWR->CR, PWR_CR_DBP);
+
+ /* Wait for Backup domain Write protection disable */
+ tickstart = HAL_GetTick();
+
+ while(HAL_IS_BIT_CLR(PWR->CR, PWR_CR_DBP))
+ {
+ if((HAL_GetTick() - tickstart) > RCC_DBP_TIMEOUT_VALUE)
+ {
+ return HAL_TIMEOUT;
+ }
+ }
+ }
+
+ /* Check if user wants to change HSE RTC prescaler whereas HSE is enabled */
+ temp_reg = (RCC->CR & RCC_CR_RTCPRE);
+ if ((temp_reg != (PeriphClkInit->RTCClockSelection & RCC_CR_RTCPRE))
+#if defined (LCD)
+ || (temp_reg != (PeriphClkInit->LCDClockSelection & RCC_CR_RTCPRE))
+#endif /* LCD */
+ )
+ { /* Check HSE State */
+ if ((PeriphClkInit->RTCClockSelection & RCC_CSR_RTCSEL) == RCC_CSR_RTCSEL_HSE)
+ {
+ if (HAL_IS_BIT_SET(RCC->CR, RCC_CR_HSERDY))
+ {
+ /* To update HSE divider, first switch-OFF HSE clock oscillator*/
+ return HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+ }
+ }
+
+ /* Reset the Backup domain only if the RTC Clock source selection is modified from reset value */
+ temp_reg = (RCC->CSR & RCC_CSR_RTCSEL);
+
+ if((temp_reg != 0x00000000U) && (((temp_reg != (PeriphClkInit->RTCClockSelection & RCC_CSR_RTCSEL)) \
+ && (((PeriphClkInit->PeriphClockSelection) & RCC_PERIPHCLK_RTC) == RCC_PERIPHCLK_RTC))
+#if defined(LCD)
+ || ((temp_reg != (PeriphClkInit->LCDClockSelection & RCC_CSR_RTCSEL)) \
+ && (((PeriphClkInit->PeriphClockSelection) & RCC_PERIPHCLK_LCD) == RCC_PERIPHCLK_LCD))
+#endif /* LCD */
+ ))
+ {
+ /* Store the content of CSR register before the reset of Backup Domain */
+ temp_reg = (RCC->CSR & ~(RCC_CSR_RTCSEL));
+
+ /* RTC Clock selection can be changed only if the Backup Domain is reset */
+ __HAL_RCC_BACKUPRESET_FORCE();
+ __HAL_RCC_BACKUPRESET_RELEASE();
+
+ /* Restore the Content of CSR register */
+ RCC->CSR = temp_reg;
+
+ /* Wait for LSERDY if LSE was enabled */
+ if (HAL_IS_BIT_SET(temp_reg, RCC_CSR_LSEON))
+ {
+ /* Get Start Tick */
+ tickstart = HAL_GetTick();
+
+ /* Wait till LSE is ready */
+ while(__HAL_RCC_GET_FLAG(RCC_FLAG_LSERDY) == 0U)
+ {
+ if((HAL_GetTick() - tickstart ) > RCC_LSE_TIMEOUT_VALUE)
+ {
+ return HAL_TIMEOUT;
+ }
+ }
+ }
+ }
+ __HAL_RCC_RTC_CONFIG(PeriphClkInit->RTCClockSelection);
+
+ /* Require to disable power clock if necessary */
+ if(pwrclkchanged == SET)
+ {
+ __HAL_RCC_PWR_CLK_DISABLE();
+ }
+ }
+
+ return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Get the PeriphClkInit according to the internal RCC configuration registers.
+ * @param PeriphClkInit pointer to an RCC_PeriphCLKInitTypeDef structure that
+ * returns the configuration information for the Extended Peripherals clocks(RTC/LCD clocks).
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void HAL_RCCEx_GetPeriphCLKConfig(RCC_PeriphCLKInitTypeDef *PeriphClkInit)
+{
+ uint32_t srcclk;
+
+ /* Set all possible values for the extended clock type parameter------------*/
+ PeriphClkInit->PeriphClockSelection = RCC_PERIPHCLK_RTC;
+#if defined(LCD)
+ PeriphClkInit->PeriphClockSelection |= RCC_PERIPHCLK_LCD;
+#endif /* LCD */
+
+ /* Get the RTC/LCD configuration -----------------------------------------------*/
+ srcclk = __HAL_RCC_GET_RTC_SOURCE();
+ if (srcclk != RCC_RTCCLKSOURCE_HSE_DIV2)
+ {
+ /* Source clock is LSE or LSI*/
+ PeriphClkInit->RTCClockSelection = srcclk;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Source clock is HSE. Need to get the prescaler value*/
+ PeriphClkInit->RTCClockSelection = srcclk | (READ_BIT(RCC->CR, RCC_CR_RTCPRE));
+ }
+#if defined(LCD)
+ PeriphClkInit->LCDClockSelection = PeriphClkInit->RTCClockSelection;
+#endif /* LCD */
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Return the peripheral clock frequency
+ * @note Return 0 if peripheral clock is unknown
+ * @param PeriphClk Peripheral clock identifier
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg @ref RCC_PERIPHCLK_RTC RTC peripheral clock
+ * @arg @ref RCC_PERIPHCLK_LCD LCD peripheral clock (*)
+ * @note (*) means that this peripheral is not present on all the devices
+ * @retval Frequency in Hz (0: means that no available frequency for the peripheral)
+ */
+uint32_t HAL_RCCEx_GetPeriphCLKFreq(uint32_t PeriphClk)
+{
+ uint32_t frequency = 0;
+ uint32_t srcclk;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_RCC_PERIPHCLOCK(PeriphClk));
+
+ switch (PeriphClk)
+ {
+ case RCC_PERIPHCLK_RTC:
+#if defined(LCD)
+ case RCC_PERIPHCLK_LCD:
+#endif /* LCD */
+ {
+ /* Get the current RTC source */
+ srcclk = __HAL_RCC_GET_RTC_SOURCE();
+
+ /* Check if LSE is ready if RTC clock selection is LSE */
+ if (srcclk == RCC_RTCCLKSOURCE_LSE)
+ {
+ if (HAL_IS_BIT_SET(RCC->CSR, RCC_CSR_LSERDY))
+ {
+ frequency = LSE_VALUE;
+ }
+ }
+ /* Check if LSI is ready if RTC clock selection is LSI */
+ else if (srcclk == RCC_RTCCLKSOURCE_LSI)
+ {
+ if (HAL_IS_BIT_SET(RCC->CSR, RCC_CSR_LSIRDY))
+ {
+ frequency = LSI_VALUE;
+ }
+ }
+ /* Check if HSE is ready and if RTC clock selection is HSE */
+ else if (srcclk == RCC_RTCCLKSOURCE_HSE_DIVX)
+ {
+ if (HAL_IS_BIT_SET(RCC->CR, RCC_CR_HSERDY))
+ {
+ /* Get the current HSE clock divider */
+ switch (__HAL_RCC_GET_RTC_HSE_PRESCALER())
+ {
+ case RCC_RTC_HSE_DIV_16: /* HSE DIV16 has been selected */
+ {
+ frequency = HSE_VALUE / 16U;
+ break;
+ }
+ case RCC_RTC_HSE_DIV_8: /* HSE DIV8 has been selected */
+ {
+ frequency = HSE_VALUE / 8U;
+ break;
+ }
+ case RCC_RTC_HSE_DIV_4: /* HSE DIV4 has been selected */
+ {
+ frequency = HSE_VALUE / 4U;
+ break;
+ }
+ default: /* HSE DIV2 has been selected */
+ {
+ frequency = HSE_VALUE / 2U;
+ break;
+ }
+ }
+ }
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* No clock source, frequency default init at 0 */
+ }
+ break;
+ }
+
+ default:
+ break;
+ }
+
+ return(frequency);
+}
+
+#if defined(RCC_LSECSS_SUPPORT)
+/**
+ * @brief Enables the LSE Clock Security System.
+ * @note If a failure is detected on the external 32 kHz oscillator, the LSE clock is no longer supplied
+ * to the RTC but no hardware action is made to the registers.
+ * In Standby mode a wakeup is generated. In other modes an interrupt can be sent to wakeup
+ * the software (see Section 5.3.4: Clock interrupt register (RCC_CIR) on page 104).
+ * The software MUST then disable the LSECSSON bit, stop the defective 32 kHz oscillator
+ * (disabling LSEON), and can change the RTC clock source (no clock or LSI or HSE, with
+ * RTCSEL), or take any required action to secure the application.
+ * @note LSE CSS available only for high density and medium+ devices
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void HAL_RCCEx_EnableLSECSS(void)
+{
+ *(__IO uint32_t *) CSR_LSECSSON_BB = (uint32_t)ENABLE;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Disables the LSE Clock Security System.
+ * @note Once enabled this bit cannot be disabled, except after an LSE failure detection
+ * (LSECSSD=1). In that case the software MUST disable the LSECSSON bit.
+ * Reset by power on reset and RTC software reset (RTCRST bit).
+ * @note LSE CSS available only for high density and medium+ devices
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void HAL_RCCEx_DisableLSECSS(void)
+{
+ /* Disable LSE CSS */
+ *(__IO uint32_t *) CSR_LSECSSON_BB = (uint32_t)DISABLE;
+
+ /* Disable LSE CSS IT */
+ __HAL_RCC_DISABLE_IT(RCC_IT_LSECSS);
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enable the LSE Clock Security System IT & corresponding EXTI line.
+ * @note LSE Clock Security System IT is mapped on RTC EXTI line 19
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void HAL_RCCEx_EnableLSECSS_IT(void)
+{
+ /* Enable LSE CSS */
+ *(__IO uint32_t *) CSR_LSECSSON_BB = (uint32_t)ENABLE;
+
+ /* Enable LSE CSS IT */
+ __HAL_RCC_ENABLE_IT(RCC_IT_LSECSS);
+
+ /* Enable IT on EXTI Line 19 */
+ __HAL_RCC_LSECSS_EXTI_ENABLE_IT();
+ __HAL_RCC_LSECSS_EXTI_ENABLE_RISING_EDGE();
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Handle the RCC LSE Clock Security System interrupt request.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void HAL_RCCEx_LSECSS_IRQHandler(void)
+{
+ /* Check RCC LSE CSSF flag */
+ if(__HAL_RCC_GET_IT(RCC_IT_LSECSS))
+ {
+ /* RCC LSE Clock Security System interrupt user callback */
+ HAL_RCCEx_LSECSS_Callback();
+
+ /* Clear RCC LSE CSS pending bit */
+ __HAL_RCC_CLEAR_IT(RCC_IT_LSECSS);
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief RCCEx LSE Clock Security System interrupt callback.
+ * @retval none
+ */
+__weak void HAL_RCCEx_LSECSS_Callback(void)
+{
+ /* NOTE : This function should not be modified, when the callback is needed,
+ the @ref HAL_RCCEx_LSECSS_Callback should be implemented in the user file
+ */
+}
+#endif /* RCC_LSECSS_SUPPORT */
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif /* HAL_RCC_MODULE_ENABLED */
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
diff --git a/FreeRTOS/Demo/CORTEX_MPU_M3_NUCLEO_L152RE_GCC/ST_Code/Drivers/STM32L1xx_HAL_Driver/Src/stm32l1xx_hal_tim.c b/FreeRTOS/Demo/CORTEX_MPU_M3_NUCLEO_L152RE_GCC/ST_Code/Drivers/STM32L1xx_HAL_Driver/Src/stm32l1xx_hal_tim.c new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8fb3b3980 --- /dev/null +++ b/FreeRTOS/Demo/CORTEX_MPU_M3_NUCLEO_L152RE_GCC/ST_Code/Drivers/STM32L1xx_HAL_Driver/Src/stm32l1xx_hal_tim.c @@ -0,0 +1,6296 @@ +/**
+ ******************************************************************************
+ * @file stm32l1xx_hal_tim.c
+ * @author MCD Application Team
+ * @brief TIM HAL module driver.
+ * This file provides firmware functions to manage the following
+ * functionalities of the Timer (TIM) peripheral:
+ * + TIM Time Base Initialization
+ * + TIM Time Base Start
+ * + TIM Time Base Start Interruption
+ * + TIM Time Base Start DMA
+ * + TIM Output Compare/PWM Initialization
+ * + TIM Output Compare/PWM Channel Configuration
+ * + TIM Output Compare/PWM Start
+ * + TIM Output Compare/PWM Start Interruption
+ * + TIM Output Compare/PWM Start DMA
+ * + TIM Input Capture Initialization
+ * + TIM Input Capture Channel Configuration
+ * + TIM Input Capture Start
+ * + TIM Input Capture Start Interruption
+ * + TIM Input Capture Start DMA
+ * + TIM One Pulse Initialization
+ * + TIM One Pulse Channel Configuration
+ * + TIM One Pulse Start
+ * + TIM Encoder Interface Initialization
+ * + TIM Encoder Interface Start
+ * + TIM Encoder Interface Start Interruption
+ * + TIM Encoder Interface Start DMA
+ * + Commutation Event configuration with Interruption and DMA
+ * + TIM OCRef clear configuration
+ * + TIM External Clock configuration
+ @verbatim
+ ==============================================================================
+ ##### TIMER Generic features #####
+ ==============================================================================
+ [..] The Timer features include:
+ (#) 16-bit up, down, up/down auto-reload counter.
+ (#) 16-bit programmable prescaler allowing dividing (also on the fly) the
+ counter clock frequency either by any factor between 1 and 65536.
+ (#) Up to 4 independent channels for:
+ (++) Input Capture
+ (++) Output Compare
+ (++) PWM generation (Edge and Center-aligned Mode)
+ (++) One-pulse mode output
+ (#) Synchronization circuit to control the timer with external signals and to interconnect
+ several timers together.
+ (#) Supports incremental encoder for positioning purposes
+
+ ##### How to use this driver #####
+ ==============================================================================
+ [..]
+ (#) Initialize the TIM low level resources by implementing the following functions
+ depending on the selected feature:
+ (++) Time Base : HAL_TIM_Base_MspInit()
+ (++) Input Capture : HAL_TIM_IC_MspInit()
+ (++) Output Compare : HAL_TIM_OC_MspInit()
+ (++) PWM generation : HAL_TIM_PWM_MspInit()
+ (++) One-pulse mode output : HAL_TIM_OnePulse_MspInit()
+ (++) Encoder mode output : HAL_TIM_Encoder_MspInit()
+
+ (#) Initialize the TIM low level resources :
+ (##) Enable the TIM interface clock using __HAL_RCC_TIMx_CLK_ENABLE();
+ (##) TIM pins configuration
+ (+++) Enable the clock for the TIM GPIOs using the following function:
+ __HAL_RCC_GPIOx_CLK_ENABLE();
+ (+++) Configure these TIM pins in Alternate function mode using HAL_GPIO_Init();
+
+ (#) The external Clock can be configured, if needed (the default clock is the
+ internal clock from the APBx), using the following function:
+ HAL_TIM_ConfigClockSource, the clock configuration should be done before
+ any start function.
+
+ (#) Configure the TIM in the desired functioning mode using one of the
+ Initialization function of this driver:
+ (++) HAL_TIM_Base_Init: to use the Timer to generate a simple time base
+ (++) HAL_TIM_OC_Init and HAL_TIM_OC_ConfigChannel: to use the Timer to generate an
+ Output Compare signal.
+ (++) HAL_TIM_PWM_Init and HAL_TIM_PWM_ConfigChannel: to use the Timer to generate a
+ PWM signal.
+ (++) HAL_TIM_IC_Init and HAL_TIM_IC_ConfigChannel: to use the Timer to measure an
+ external signal.
+ (++) HAL_TIM_OnePulse_Init and HAL_TIM_OnePulse_ConfigChannel: to use the Timer
+ in One Pulse Mode.
+ (++) HAL_TIM_Encoder_Init: to use the Timer Encoder Interface.
+
+ (#) Activate the TIM peripheral using one of the start functions depending from the feature used:
+ (++) Time Base : HAL_TIM_Base_Start(), HAL_TIM_Base_Start_DMA(), HAL_TIM_Base_Start_IT()
+ (++) Input Capture : HAL_TIM_IC_Start(), HAL_TIM_IC_Start_DMA(), HAL_TIM_IC_Start_IT()
+ (++) Output Compare : HAL_TIM_OC_Start(), HAL_TIM_OC_Start_DMA(), HAL_TIM_OC_Start_IT()
+ (++) PWM generation : HAL_TIM_PWM_Start(), HAL_TIM_PWM_Start_DMA(), HAL_TIM_PWM_Start_IT()
+ (++) One-pulse mode output : HAL_TIM_OnePulse_Start(), HAL_TIM_OnePulse_Start_IT()
+ (++) Encoder mode output : HAL_TIM_Encoder_Start(), HAL_TIM_Encoder_Start_DMA(), HAL_TIM_Encoder_Start_IT().
+
+ (#) The DMA Burst is managed with the two following functions:
+ HAL_TIM_DMABurst_WriteStart()
+ HAL_TIM_DMABurst_ReadStart()
+
+ *** Callback registration ***
+ =============================================
+
+ The compilation define USE_HAL_TIM_REGISTER_CALLBACKS when set to 1
+ allows the user to configure dynamically the driver callbacks.
+
+ Use Function @ref HAL_TIM_RegisterCallback() to register a callback.
+ @ref HAL_TIM_RegisterCallback() takes as parameters the HAL peripheral handle,
+ the Callback ID and a pointer to the user callback function.
+
+ Use function @ref HAL_TIM_UnRegisterCallback() to reset a callback to the default
+ weak function.
+ @ref HAL_TIM_UnRegisterCallback takes as parameters the HAL peripheral handle,
+ and the Callback ID.
+
+ These functions allow to register/unregister following callbacks:
+ (+) Base_MspInitCallback : TIM Base Msp Init Callback.
+ (+) Base_MspDeInitCallback : TIM Base Msp DeInit Callback.
+ (+) IC_MspInitCallback : TIM IC Msp Init Callback.
+ (+) IC_MspDeInitCallback : TIM IC Msp DeInit Callback.
+ (+) OC_MspInitCallback : TIM OC Msp Init Callback.
+ (+) OC_MspDeInitCallback : TIM OC Msp DeInit Callback.
+ (+) PWM_MspInitCallback : TIM PWM Msp Init Callback.
+ (+) PWM_MspDeInitCallback : TIM PWM Msp DeInit Callback.
+ (+) OnePulse_MspInitCallback : TIM One Pulse Msp Init Callback.
+ (+) OnePulse_MspDeInitCallback : TIM One Pulse Msp DeInit Callback.
+ (+) Encoder_MspInitCallback : TIM Encoder Msp Init Callback.
+ (+) Encoder_MspDeInitCallback : TIM Encoder Msp DeInit Callback.
+ (+) PeriodElapsedCallback : TIM Period Elapsed Callback.
+ (+) PeriodElapsedHalfCpltCallback : TIM Period Elapsed half complete Callback.
+ (+) TriggerCallback : TIM Trigger Callback.
+ (+) TriggerHalfCpltCallback : TIM Trigger half complete Callback.
+ (+) IC_CaptureCallback : TIM Input Capture Callback.
+ (+) IC_CaptureHalfCpltCallback : TIM Input Capture half complete Callback.
+ (+) OC_DelayElapsedCallback : TIM Output Compare Delay Elapsed Callback.
+ (+) PWM_PulseFinishedCallback : TIM PWM Pulse Finished Callback.
+ (+) PWM_PulseFinishedHalfCpltCallback : TIM PWM Pulse Finished half complete Callback.
+ (+) ErrorCallback : TIM Error Callback.
+
+By default, after the Init and when the state is HAL_TIM_STATE_RESET
+all interrupt callbacks are set to the corresponding weak functions:
+ examples @ref HAL_TIM_TriggerCallback(), @ref HAL_TIM_ErrorCallback().
+
+ Exception done for MspInit and MspDeInit functions that are reset to the legacy weak
+ functionalities in the Init / DeInit only when these callbacks are null
+ (not registered beforehand). If not, MspInit or MspDeInit are not null, the Init / DeInit
+ keep and use the user MspInit / MspDeInit callbacks(registered beforehand)
+
+ Callbacks can be registered / unregistered in HAL_TIM_STATE_READY state only.
+ Exception done MspInit / MspDeInit that can be registered / unregistered
+ in HAL_TIM_STATE_READY or HAL_TIM_STATE_RESET state,
+ thus registered(user) MspInit / DeInit callbacks can be used during the Init / DeInit.
+ In that case first register the MspInit/MspDeInit user callbacks
+ using @ref HAL_TIM_RegisterCallback() before calling DeInit or Init function.
+
+ When The compilation define USE_HAL_TIM_REGISTER_CALLBACKS is set to 0 or
+ not defined, the callback registration feature is not available and all callbacks
+ are set to the corresponding weak functions.
+
+ @endverbatim
+ ******************************************************************************
+ * @attention
+ *
+ * <h2><center>© Copyright (c) 2016 STMicroelectronics.
+ * All rights reserved.</center></h2>
+ *
+ * This software component is licensed by ST under BSD 3-Clause license,
+ * the "License"; You may not use this file except in compliance with the
+ * License. You may obtain a copy of the License at:
+ * opensource.org/licenses/BSD-3-Clause
+ *
+ ******************************************************************************
+ */
+
+/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#include "stm32l1xx_hal.h"
+
+/** @addtogroup STM32L1xx_HAL_Driver
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup TIM TIM
+ * @brief TIM HAL module driver
+ * @{
+ */
+
+#ifdef HAL_TIM_MODULE_ENABLED
+
+/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/
+/** @addtogroup TIM_Private_Functions
+ * @{
+ */
+static void TIM_Base_SetConfig(TIM_TypeDef *TIMx, TIM_Base_InitTypeDef *Structure);
+static void TIM_OC1_SetConfig(TIM_TypeDef *TIMx, TIM_OC_InitTypeDef *OC_Config);
+static void TIM_OC2_SetConfig(TIM_TypeDef *TIMx, TIM_OC_InitTypeDef *OC_Config);
+static void TIM_OC3_SetConfig(TIM_TypeDef *TIMx, TIM_OC_InitTypeDef *OC_Config);
+static void TIM_OC4_SetConfig(TIM_TypeDef *TIMx, TIM_OC_InitTypeDef *OC_Config);
+static void TIM_TI1_SetConfig(TIM_TypeDef *TIMx, uint32_t TIM_ICPolarity, uint32_t TIM_ICSelection, uint32_t TIM_ICFilter);
+static void TIM_TI1_ConfigInputStage(TIM_TypeDef *TIMx, uint32_t TIM_ICPolarity, uint32_t TIM_ICFilter);
+static void TIM_TI2_SetConfig(TIM_TypeDef *TIMx, uint32_t TIM_ICPolarity, uint32_t TIM_ICSelection,
+ uint32_t TIM_ICFilter);
+static void TIM_TI2_ConfigInputStage(TIM_TypeDef *TIMx, uint32_t TIM_ICPolarity, uint32_t TIM_ICFilter);
+static void TIM_TI3_SetConfig(TIM_TypeDef *TIMx, uint32_t TIM_ICPolarity, uint32_t TIM_ICSelection,
+ uint32_t TIM_ICFilter);
+static void TIM_TI4_SetConfig(TIM_TypeDef *TIMx, uint32_t TIM_ICPolarity, uint32_t TIM_ICSelection,
+ uint32_t TIM_ICFilter);
+static void TIM_ITRx_SetConfig(TIM_TypeDef *TIMx, uint32_t InputTriggerSource);
+static void TIM_ETR_SetConfig(TIM_TypeDef *TIMx, uint32_t TIM_ExtTRGPrescaler,
+ uint32_t TIM_ExtTRGPolarity, uint32_t ExtTRGFilter);
+static void TIM_CCxChannelCmd(TIM_TypeDef *TIMx, uint32_t Channel, uint32_t ChannelState);
+static void TIM_DMAPeriodElapsedCplt(DMA_HandleTypeDef *hdma);
+static void TIM_DMAPeriodElapsedHalfCplt(DMA_HandleTypeDef *hdma);
+static void TIM_DMATriggerCplt(DMA_HandleTypeDef *hdma);
+static void TIM_DMATriggerHalfCplt(DMA_HandleTypeDef *hdma);
+static HAL_StatusTypeDef TIM_SlaveTimer_SetConfig(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim,
+ TIM_SlaveConfigTypeDef *sSlaveConfig);
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+/* Exported functions --------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+/** @defgroup TIM_Exported_Functions TIM Exported Functions
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup TIM_Exported_Functions_Group1 TIM Time Base functions
+ * @brief Time Base functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ==============================================================================
+ ##### Time Base functions #####
+ ==============================================================================
+ [..]
+ This section provides functions allowing to:
+ (+) Initialize and configure the TIM base.
+ (+) De-initialize the TIM base.
+ (+) Start the Time Base.
+ (+) Stop the Time Base.
+ (+) Start the Time Base and enable interrupt.
+ (+) Stop the Time Base and disable interrupt.
+ (+) Start the Time Base and enable DMA transfer.
+ (+) Stop the Time Base and disable DMA transfer.
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+/**
+ * @brief Initializes the TIM Time base Unit according to the specified
+ * parameters in the TIM_HandleTypeDef and initialize the associated handle.
+ * @note Switching from Center Aligned counter mode to Edge counter mode (or reverse)
+ * requires a timer reset to avoid unexpected direction
+ * due to DIR bit readonly in center aligned mode.
+ * Ex: call @ref HAL_TIM_Base_DeInit() before HAL_TIM_Base_Init()
+ * @param htim TIM Base handle
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_Base_Init(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim)
+{
+ /* Check the TIM handle allocation */
+ if (htim == NULL)
+ {
+ return HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_COUNTER_MODE(htim->Init.CounterMode));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_CLOCKDIVISION_DIV(htim->Init.ClockDivision));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_AUTORELOAD_PRELOAD(htim->Init.AutoReloadPreload));
+
+ if (htim->State == HAL_TIM_STATE_RESET)
+ {
+ /* Allocate lock resource and initialize it */
+ htim->Lock = HAL_UNLOCKED;
+
+#if (USE_HAL_TIM_REGISTER_CALLBACKS == 1)
+ /* Reset interrupt callbacks to legacy weak callbacks */
+ TIM_ResetCallback(htim);
+
+ if (htim->Base_MspInitCallback == NULL)
+ {
+ htim->Base_MspInitCallback = HAL_TIM_Base_MspInit;
+ }
+ /* Init the low level hardware : GPIO, CLOCK, NVIC */
+ htim->Base_MspInitCallback(htim);
+#else
+ /* Init the low level hardware : GPIO, CLOCK, NVIC */
+ HAL_TIM_Base_MspInit(htim);
+#endif /* USE_HAL_TIM_REGISTER_CALLBACKS */
+ }
+
+ /* Set the TIM state */
+ htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_BUSY;
+
+ /* Set the Time Base configuration */
+ TIM_Base_SetConfig(htim->Instance, &htim->Init);
+
+ /* Initialize the TIM state*/
+ htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_READY;
+
+ return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief DeInitializes the TIM Base peripheral
+ * @param htim TIM Base handle
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_Base_DeInit(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+
+ htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_BUSY;
+
+ /* Disable the TIM Peripheral Clock */
+ __HAL_TIM_DISABLE(htim);
+
+#if (USE_HAL_TIM_REGISTER_CALLBACKS == 1)
+ if (htim->Base_MspDeInitCallback == NULL)
+ {
+ htim->Base_MspDeInitCallback = HAL_TIM_Base_MspDeInit;
+ }
+ /* DeInit the low level hardware */
+ htim->Base_MspDeInitCallback(htim);
+#else
+ /* DeInit the low level hardware: GPIO, CLOCK, NVIC */
+ HAL_TIM_Base_MspDeInit(htim);
+#endif /* USE_HAL_TIM_REGISTER_CALLBACKS */
+
+ /* Change TIM state */
+ htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_RESET;
+
+ /* Release Lock */
+ __HAL_UNLOCK(htim);
+
+ return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Initializes the TIM Base MSP.
+ * @param htim TIM Base handle
+ * @retval None
+ */
+__weak void HAL_TIM_Base_MspInit(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim)
+{
+ /* Prevent unused argument(s) compilation warning */
+ UNUSED(htim);
+
+ /* NOTE : This function should not be modified, when the callback is needed,
+ the HAL_TIM_Base_MspInit could be implemented in the user file
+ */
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief DeInitializes TIM Base MSP.
+ * @param htim TIM Base handle
+ * @retval None
+ */
+__weak void HAL_TIM_Base_MspDeInit(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim)
+{
+ /* Prevent unused argument(s) compilation warning */
+ UNUSED(htim);
+
+ /* NOTE : This function should not be modified, when the callback is needed,
+ the HAL_TIM_Base_MspDeInit could be implemented in the user file
+ */
+}
+
+
+/**
+ * @brief Starts the TIM Base generation.
+ * @param htim TIM Base handle
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_Base_Start(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim)
+{
+ uint32_t tmpsmcr;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+
+ /* Set the TIM state */
+ htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_BUSY;
+
+ /* Enable the Peripheral, except in trigger mode where enable is automatically done with trigger */
+ tmpsmcr = htim->Instance->SMCR & TIM_SMCR_SMS;
+ if (!IS_TIM_SLAVEMODE_TRIGGER_ENABLED(tmpsmcr))
+ {
+ __HAL_TIM_ENABLE(htim);
+ }
+
+ /* Change the TIM state*/
+ htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_READY;
+
+ /* Return function status */
+ return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Stops the TIM Base generation.
+ * @param htim TIM Base handle
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_Base_Stop(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+
+ /* Set the TIM state */
+ htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_BUSY;
+
+ /* Disable the Peripheral */
+ __HAL_TIM_DISABLE(htim);
+
+ /* Change the TIM state*/
+ htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_READY;
+
+ /* Return function status */
+ return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Starts the TIM Base generation in interrupt mode.
+ * @param htim TIM Base handle
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_Base_Start_IT(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim)
+{
+ uint32_t tmpsmcr;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+
+ /* Enable the TIM Update interrupt */
+ __HAL_TIM_ENABLE_IT(htim, TIM_IT_UPDATE);
+
+ /* Enable the Peripheral, except in trigger mode where enable is automatically done with trigger */
+ tmpsmcr = htim->Instance->SMCR & TIM_SMCR_SMS;
+ if (!IS_TIM_SLAVEMODE_TRIGGER_ENABLED(tmpsmcr))
+ {
+ __HAL_TIM_ENABLE(htim);
+ }
+
+ /* Return function status */
+ return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Stops the TIM Base generation in interrupt mode.
+ * @param htim TIM Base handle
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_Base_Stop_IT(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+ /* Disable the TIM Update interrupt */
+ __HAL_TIM_DISABLE_IT(htim, TIM_IT_UPDATE);
+
+ /* Disable the Peripheral */
+ __HAL_TIM_DISABLE(htim);
+
+ /* Return function status */
+ return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Starts the TIM Base generation in DMA mode.
+ * @param htim TIM Base handle
+ * @param pData The source Buffer address.
+ * @param Length The length of data to be transferred from memory to peripheral.
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_Base_Start_DMA(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, uint32_t *pData, uint16_t Length)
+{
+ uint32_t tmpsmcr;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_DMA_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+
+ if ((htim->State == HAL_TIM_STATE_BUSY))
+ {
+ return HAL_BUSY;
+ }
+ else if ((htim->State == HAL_TIM_STATE_READY))
+ {
+ if ((pData == NULL) && (Length > 0U))
+ {
+ return HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_BUSY;
+ }
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* nothing to do */
+ }
+
+ /* Set the DMA Period elapsed callbacks */
+ htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_UPDATE]->XferCpltCallback = TIM_DMAPeriodElapsedCplt;
+ htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_UPDATE]->XferHalfCpltCallback = TIM_DMAPeriodElapsedHalfCplt;
+
+ /* Set the DMA error callback */
+ htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_UPDATE]->XferErrorCallback = TIM_DMAError ;
+
+ /* Enable the DMA channel */
+ if (HAL_DMA_Start_IT(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_UPDATE], (uint32_t)pData, (uint32_t)&htim->Instance->ARR, Length) != HAL_OK)
+ {
+ return HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+
+ /* Enable the TIM Update DMA request */
+ __HAL_TIM_ENABLE_DMA(htim, TIM_DMA_UPDATE);
+
+ /* Enable the Peripheral, except in trigger mode where enable is automatically done with trigger */
+ tmpsmcr = htim->Instance->SMCR & TIM_SMCR_SMS;
+ if (!IS_TIM_SLAVEMODE_TRIGGER_ENABLED(tmpsmcr))
+ {
+ __HAL_TIM_ENABLE(htim);
+ }
+
+ /* Return function status */
+ return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Stops the TIM Base generation in DMA mode.
+ * @param htim TIM Base handle
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_Base_Stop_DMA(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_DMA_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+
+ /* Disable the TIM Update DMA request */
+ __HAL_TIM_DISABLE_DMA(htim, TIM_DMA_UPDATE);
+
+ (void)HAL_DMA_Abort_IT(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_UPDATE]);
+
+ /* Disable the Peripheral */
+ __HAL_TIM_DISABLE(htim);
+
+ /* Change the htim state */
+ htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_READY;
+
+ /* Return function status */
+ return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup TIM_Exported_Functions_Group2 TIM Output Compare functions
+ * @brief TIM Output Compare functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ==============================================================================
+ ##### TIM Output Compare functions #####
+ ==============================================================================
+ [..]
+ This section provides functions allowing to:
+ (+) Initialize and configure the TIM Output Compare.
+ (+) De-initialize the TIM Output Compare.
+ (+) Start the TIM Output Compare.
+ (+) Stop the TIM Output Compare.
+ (+) Start the TIM Output Compare and enable interrupt.
+ (+) Stop the TIM Output Compare and disable interrupt.
+ (+) Start the TIM Output Compare and enable DMA transfer.
+ (+) Stop the TIM Output Compare and disable DMA transfer.
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+/**
+ * @brief Initializes the TIM Output Compare according to the specified
+ * parameters in the TIM_HandleTypeDef and initializes the associated handle.
+ * @note Switching from Center Aligned counter mode to Edge counter mode (or reverse)
+ * requires a timer reset to avoid unexpected direction
+ * due to DIR bit readonly in center aligned mode.
+ * Ex: call @ref HAL_TIM_OC_DeInit() before HAL_TIM_OC_Init()
+ * @param htim TIM Output Compare handle
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_OC_Init(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim)
+{
+ /* Check the TIM handle allocation */
+ if (htim == NULL)
+ {
+ return HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_COUNTER_MODE(htim->Init.CounterMode));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_CLOCKDIVISION_DIV(htim->Init.ClockDivision));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_AUTORELOAD_PRELOAD(htim->Init.AutoReloadPreload));
+
+ if (htim->State == HAL_TIM_STATE_RESET)
+ {
+ /* Allocate lock resource and initialize it */
+ htim->Lock = HAL_UNLOCKED;
+
+#if (USE_HAL_TIM_REGISTER_CALLBACKS == 1)
+ /* Reset interrupt callbacks to legacy weak callbacks */
+ TIM_ResetCallback(htim);
+
+ if (htim->OC_MspInitCallback == NULL)
+ {
+ htim->OC_MspInitCallback = HAL_TIM_OC_MspInit;
+ }
+ /* Init the low level hardware : GPIO, CLOCK, NVIC */
+ htim->OC_MspInitCallback(htim);
+#else
+ /* Init the low level hardware : GPIO, CLOCK, NVIC and DMA */
+ HAL_TIM_OC_MspInit(htim);
+#endif /* USE_HAL_TIM_REGISTER_CALLBACKS */
+ }
+
+ /* Set the TIM state */
+ htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_BUSY;
+
+ /* Init the base time for the Output Compare */
+ TIM_Base_SetConfig(htim->Instance, &htim->Init);
+
+ /* Initialize the TIM state*/
+ htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_READY;
+
+ return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief DeInitializes the TIM peripheral
+ * @param htim TIM Output Compare handle
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_OC_DeInit(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+
+ htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_BUSY;
+
+ /* Disable the TIM Peripheral Clock */
+ __HAL_TIM_DISABLE(htim);
+
+#if (USE_HAL_TIM_REGISTER_CALLBACKS == 1)
+ if (htim->OC_MspDeInitCallback == NULL)
+ {
+ htim->OC_MspDeInitCallback = HAL_TIM_OC_MspDeInit;
+ }
+ /* DeInit the low level hardware */
+ htim->OC_MspDeInitCallback(htim);
+#else
+ /* DeInit the low level hardware: GPIO, CLOCK, NVIC and DMA */
+ HAL_TIM_OC_MspDeInit(htim);
+#endif /* USE_HAL_TIM_REGISTER_CALLBACKS */
+
+ /* Change TIM state */
+ htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_RESET;
+
+ /* Release Lock */
+ __HAL_UNLOCK(htim);
+
+ return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Initializes the TIM Output Compare MSP.
+ * @param htim TIM Output Compare handle
+ * @retval None
+ */
+__weak void HAL_TIM_OC_MspInit(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim)
+{
+ /* Prevent unused argument(s) compilation warning */
+ UNUSED(htim);
+
+ /* NOTE : This function should not be modified, when the callback is needed,
+ the HAL_TIM_OC_MspInit could be implemented in the user file
+ */
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief DeInitializes TIM Output Compare MSP.
+ * @param htim TIM Output Compare handle
+ * @retval None
+ */
+__weak void HAL_TIM_OC_MspDeInit(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim)
+{
+ /* Prevent unused argument(s) compilation warning */
+ UNUSED(htim);
+
+ /* NOTE : This function should not be modified, when the callback is needed,
+ the HAL_TIM_OC_MspDeInit could be implemented in the user file
+ */
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Starts the TIM Output Compare signal generation.
+ * @param htim TIM Output Compare handle
+ * @param Channel TIM Channel to be enabled
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_1: TIM Channel 1 selected
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_2: TIM Channel 2 selected
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_3: TIM Channel 3 selected
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_4: TIM Channel 4 selected
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_OC_Start(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, uint32_t Channel)
+{
+ uint32_t tmpsmcr;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_CCX_INSTANCE(htim->Instance, Channel));
+
+ /* Enable the Output compare channel */
+ TIM_CCxChannelCmd(htim->Instance, Channel, TIM_CCx_ENABLE);
+
+ /* Enable the Peripheral, except in trigger mode where enable is automatically done with trigger */
+ tmpsmcr = htim->Instance->SMCR & TIM_SMCR_SMS;
+ if (!IS_TIM_SLAVEMODE_TRIGGER_ENABLED(tmpsmcr))
+ {
+ __HAL_TIM_ENABLE(htim);
+ }
+
+ /* Return function status */
+ return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Stops the TIM Output Compare signal generation.
+ * @param htim TIM Output Compare handle
+ * @param Channel TIM Channel to be disabled
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_1: TIM Channel 1 selected
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_2: TIM Channel 2 selected
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_3: TIM Channel 3 selected
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_4: TIM Channel 4 selected
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_OC_Stop(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, uint32_t Channel)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_CCX_INSTANCE(htim->Instance, Channel));
+
+ /* Disable the Output compare channel */
+ TIM_CCxChannelCmd(htim->Instance, Channel, TIM_CCx_DISABLE);
+
+ /* Disable the Peripheral */
+ __HAL_TIM_DISABLE(htim);
+
+ /* Return function status */
+ return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Starts the TIM Output Compare signal generation in interrupt mode.
+ * @param htim TIM Output Compare handle
+ * @param Channel TIM Channel to be enabled
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_1: TIM Channel 1 selected
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_2: TIM Channel 2 selected
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_3: TIM Channel 3 selected
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_4: TIM Channel 4 selected
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_OC_Start_IT(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, uint32_t Channel)
+{
+ uint32_t tmpsmcr;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_CCX_INSTANCE(htim->Instance, Channel));
+
+ switch (Channel)
+ {
+ case TIM_CHANNEL_1:
+ {
+ /* Enable the TIM Capture/Compare 1 interrupt */
+ __HAL_TIM_ENABLE_IT(htim, TIM_IT_CC1);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ case TIM_CHANNEL_2:
+ {
+ /* Enable the TIM Capture/Compare 2 interrupt */
+ __HAL_TIM_ENABLE_IT(htim, TIM_IT_CC2);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ case TIM_CHANNEL_3:
+ {
+ /* Enable the TIM Capture/Compare 3 interrupt */
+ __HAL_TIM_ENABLE_IT(htim, TIM_IT_CC3);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ case TIM_CHANNEL_4:
+ {
+ /* Enable the TIM Capture/Compare 4 interrupt */
+ __HAL_TIM_ENABLE_IT(htim, TIM_IT_CC4);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ default:
+ break;
+ }
+
+ /* Enable the Output compare channel */
+ TIM_CCxChannelCmd(htim->Instance, Channel, TIM_CCx_ENABLE);
+
+ /* Enable the Peripheral, except in trigger mode where enable is automatically done with trigger */
+ tmpsmcr = htim->Instance->SMCR & TIM_SMCR_SMS;
+ if (!IS_TIM_SLAVEMODE_TRIGGER_ENABLED(tmpsmcr))
+ {
+ __HAL_TIM_ENABLE(htim);
+ }
+
+ /* Return function status */
+ return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Stops the TIM Output Compare signal generation in interrupt mode.
+ * @param htim TIM Output Compare handle
+ * @param Channel TIM Channel to be disabled
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_1: TIM Channel 1 selected
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_2: TIM Channel 2 selected
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_3: TIM Channel 3 selected
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_4: TIM Channel 4 selected
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_OC_Stop_IT(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, uint32_t Channel)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_CCX_INSTANCE(htim->Instance, Channel));
+
+ switch (Channel)
+ {
+ case TIM_CHANNEL_1:
+ {
+ /* Disable the TIM Capture/Compare 1 interrupt */
+ __HAL_TIM_DISABLE_IT(htim, TIM_IT_CC1);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ case TIM_CHANNEL_2:
+ {
+ /* Disable the TIM Capture/Compare 2 interrupt */
+ __HAL_TIM_DISABLE_IT(htim, TIM_IT_CC2);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ case TIM_CHANNEL_3:
+ {
+ /* Disable the TIM Capture/Compare 3 interrupt */
+ __HAL_TIM_DISABLE_IT(htim, TIM_IT_CC3);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ case TIM_CHANNEL_4:
+ {
+ /* Disable the TIM Capture/Compare 4 interrupt */
+ __HAL_TIM_DISABLE_IT(htim, TIM_IT_CC4);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ default:
+ break;
+ }
+
+ /* Disable the Output compare channel */
+ TIM_CCxChannelCmd(htim->Instance, Channel, TIM_CCx_DISABLE);
+
+ /* Disable the Peripheral */
+ __HAL_TIM_DISABLE(htim);
+
+ /* Return function status */
+ return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Starts the TIM Output Compare signal generation in DMA mode.
+ * @param htim TIM Output Compare handle
+ * @param Channel TIM Channel to be enabled
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_1: TIM Channel 1 selected
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_2: TIM Channel 2 selected
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_3: TIM Channel 3 selected
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_4: TIM Channel 4 selected
+ * @param pData The source Buffer address.
+ * @param Length The length of data to be transferred from memory to TIM peripheral
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_OC_Start_DMA(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, uint32_t Channel, uint32_t *pData, uint16_t Length)
+{
+ uint32_t tmpsmcr;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_CCX_INSTANCE(htim->Instance, Channel));
+
+ if ((htim->State == HAL_TIM_STATE_BUSY))
+ {
+ return HAL_BUSY;
+ }
+ else if ((htim->State == HAL_TIM_STATE_READY))
+ {
+ if ((pData == NULL) && (Length > 0U))
+ {
+ return HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_BUSY;
+ }
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* nothing to do */
+ }
+
+ switch (Channel)
+ {
+ case TIM_CHANNEL_1:
+ {
+ /* Set the DMA compare callbacks */
+ htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC1]->XferCpltCallback = TIM_DMADelayPulseCplt;
+ htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC1]->XferHalfCpltCallback = TIM_DMADelayPulseHalfCplt;
+
+ /* Set the DMA error callback */
+ htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC1]->XferErrorCallback = TIM_DMAError ;
+
+ /* Enable the DMA channel */
+ if (HAL_DMA_Start_IT(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC1], (uint32_t)pData, (uint32_t)&htim->Instance->CCR1, Length) != HAL_OK)
+ {
+ return HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+
+ /* Enable the TIM Capture/Compare 1 DMA request */
+ __HAL_TIM_ENABLE_DMA(htim, TIM_DMA_CC1);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ case TIM_CHANNEL_2:
+ {
+ /* Set the DMA compare callbacks */
+ htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC2]->XferCpltCallback = TIM_DMADelayPulseCplt;
+ htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC2]->XferHalfCpltCallback = TIM_DMADelayPulseHalfCplt;
+
+ /* Set the DMA error callback */
+ htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC2]->XferErrorCallback = TIM_DMAError ;
+
+ /* Enable the DMA channel */
+ if (HAL_DMA_Start_IT(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC2], (uint32_t)pData, (uint32_t)&htim->Instance->CCR2, Length) != HAL_OK)
+ {
+ return HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+
+ /* Enable the TIM Capture/Compare 2 DMA request */
+ __HAL_TIM_ENABLE_DMA(htim, TIM_DMA_CC2);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ case TIM_CHANNEL_3:
+ {
+ /* Set the DMA compare callbacks */
+ htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC3]->XferCpltCallback = TIM_DMADelayPulseCplt;
+ htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC3]->XferHalfCpltCallback = TIM_DMADelayPulseHalfCplt;
+
+ /* Set the DMA error callback */
+ htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC3]->XferErrorCallback = TIM_DMAError ;
+
+ /* Enable the DMA channel */
+ if (HAL_DMA_Start_IT(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC3], (uint32_t)pData, (uint32_t)&htim->Instance->CCR3, Length) != HAL_OK)
+ {
+ return HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+ /* Enable the TIM Capture/Compare 3 DMA request */
+ __HAL_TIM_ENABLE_DMA(htim, TIM_DMA_CC3);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ case TIM_CHANNEL_4:
+ {
+ /* Set the DMA compare callbacks */
+ htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC4]->XferCpltCallback = TIM_DMADelayPulseCplt;
+ htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC4]->XferHalfCpltCallback = TIM_DMADelayPulseHalfCplt;
+
+ /* Set the DMA error callback */
+ htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC4]->XferErrorCallback = TIM_DMAError ;
+
+ /* Enable the DMA channel */
+ if (HAL_DMA_Start_IT(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC4], (uint32_t)pData, (uint32_t)&htim->Instance->CCR4, Length) != HAL_OK)
+ {
+ return HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+ /* Enable the TIM Capture/Compare 4 DMA request */
+ __HAL_TIM_ENABLE_DMA(htim, TIM_DMA_CC4);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ default:
+ break;
+ }
+
+ /* Enable the Output compare channel */
+ TIM_CCxChannelCmd(htim->Instance, Channel, TIM_CCx_ENABLE);
+
+ /* Enable the Peripheral, except in trigger mode where enable is automatically done with trigger */
+ tmpsmcr = htim->Instance->SMCR & TIM_SMCR_SMS;
+ if (!IS_TIM_SLAVEMODE_TRIGGER_ENABLED(tmpsmcr))
+ {
+ __HAL_TIM_ENABLE(htim);
+ }
+
+ /* Return function status */
+ return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Stops the TIM Output Compare signal generation in DMA mode.
+ * @param htim TIM Output Compare handle
+ * @param Channel TIM Channel to be disabled
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_1: TIM Channel 1 selected
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_2: TIM Channel 2 selected
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_3: TIM Channel 3 selected
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_4: TIM Channel 4 selected
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_OC_Stop_DMA(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, uint32_t Channel)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_CCX_INSTANCE(htim->Instance, Channel));
+
+ switch (Channel)
+ {
+ case TIM_CHANNEL_1:
+ {
+ /* Disable the TIM Capture/Compare 1 DMA request */
+ __HAL_TIM_DISABLE_DMA(htim, TIM_DMA_CC1);
+ (void)HAL_DMA_Abort_IT(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC1]);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ case TIM_CHANNEL_2:
+ {
+ /* Disable the TIM Capture/Compare 2 DMA request */
+ __HAL_TIM_DISABLE_DMA(htim, TIM_DMA_CC2);
+ (void)HAL_DMA_Abort_IT(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC2]);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ case TIM_CHANNEL_3:
+ {
+ /* Disable the TIM Capture/Compare 3 DMA request */
+ __HAL_TIM_DISABLE_DMA(htim, TIM_DMA_CC3);
+ (void)HAL_DMA_Abort_IT(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC3]);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ case TIM_CHANNEL_4:
+ {
+ /* Disable the TIM Capture/Compare 4 interrupt */
+ __HAL_TIM_DISABLE_DMA(htim, TIM_DMA_CC4);
+ (void)HAL_DMA_Abort_IT(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC4]);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ default:
+ break;
+ }
+
+ /* Disable the Output compare channel */
+ TIM_CCxChannelCmd(htim->Instance, Channel, TIM_CCx_DISABLE);
+
+ /* Disable the Peripheral */
+ __HAL_TIM_DISABLE(htim);
+
+ /* Change the htim state */
+ htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_READY;
+
+ /* Return function status */
+ return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup TIM_Exported_Functions_Group3 TIM PWM functions
+ * @brief TIM PWM functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ==============================================================================
+ ##### TIM PWM functions #####
+ ==============================================================================
+ [..]
+ This section provides functions allowing to:
+ (+) Initialize and configure the TIM PWM.
+ (+) De-initialize the TIM PWM.
+ (+) Start the TIM PWM.
+ (+) Stop the TIM PWM.
+ (+) Start the TIM PWM and enable interrupt.
+ (+) Stop the TIM PWM and disable interrupt.
+ (+) Start the TIM PWM and enable DMA transfer.
+ (+) Stop the TIM PWM and disable DMA transfer.
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+/**
+ * @brief Initializes the TIM PWM Time Base according to the specified
+ * parameters in the TIM_HandleTypeDef and initializes the associated handle.
+ * @note Switching from Center Aligned counter mode to Edge counter mode (or reverse)
+ * requires a timer reset to avoid unexpected direction
+ * due to DIR bit readonly in center aligned mode.
+ * Ex: call @ref HAL_TIM_PWM_DeInit() before HAL_TIM_PWM_Init()
+ * @param htim TIM PWM handle
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_PWM_Init(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim)
+{
+ /* Check the TIM handle allocation */
+ if (htim == NULL)
+ {
+ return HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_COUNTER_MODE(htim->Init.CounterMode));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_CLOCKDIVISION_DIV(htim->Init.ClockDivision));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_AUTORELOAD_PRELOAD(htim->Init.AutoReloadPreload));
+
+ if (htim->State == HAL_TIM_STATE_RESET)
+ {
+ /* Allocate lock resource and initialize it */
+ htim->Lock = HAL_UNLOCKED;
+
+#if (USE_HAL_TIM_REGISTER_CALLBACKS == 1)
+ /* Reset interrupt callbacks to legacy weak callbacks */
+ TIM_ResetCallback(htim);
+
+ if (htim->PWM_MspInitCallback == NULL)
+ {
+ htim->PWM_MspInitCallback = HAL_TIM_PWM_MspInit;
+ }
+ /* Init the low level hardware : GPIO, CLOCK, NVIC */
+ htim->PWM_MspInitCallback(htim);
+#else
+ /* Init the low level hardware : GPIO, CLOCK, NVIC and DMA */
+ HAL_TIM_PWM_MspInit(htim);
+#endif /* USE_HAL_TIM_REGISTER_CALLBACKS */
+ }
+
+ /* Set the TIM state */
+ htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_BUSY;
+
+ /* Init the base time for the PWM */
+ TIM_Base_SetConfig(htim->Instance, &htim->Init);
+
+ /* Initialize the TIM state*/
+ htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_READY;
+
+ return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief DeInitializes the TIM peripheral
+ * @param htim TIM PWM handle
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_PWM_DeInit(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+
+ htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_BUSY;
+
+ /* Disable the TIM Peripheral Clock */
+ __HAL_TIM_DISABLE(htim);
+
+#if (USE_HAL_TIM_REGISTER_CALLBACKS == 1)
+ if (htim->PWM_MspDeInitCallback == NULL)
+ {
+ htim->PWM_MspDeInitCallback = HAL_TIM_PWM_MspDeInit;
+ }
+ /* DeInit the low level hardware */
+ htim->PWM_MspDeInitCallback(htim);
+#else
+ /* DeInit the low level hardware: GPIO, CLOCK, NVIC and DMA */
+ HAL_TIM_PWM_MspDeInit(htim);
+#endif /* USE_HAL_TIM_REGISTER_CALLBACKS */
+
+ /* Change TIM state */
+ htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_RESET;
+
+ /* Release Lock */
+ __HAL_UNLOCK(htim);
+
+ return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Initializes the TIM PWM MSP.
+ * @param htim TIM PWM handle
+ * @retval None
+ */
+__weak void HAL_TIM_PWM_MspInit(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim)
+{
+ /* Prevent unused argument(s) compilation warning */
+ UNUSED(htim);
+
+ /* NOTE : This function should not be modified, when the callback is needed,
+ the HAL_TIM_PWM_MspInit could be implemented in the user file
+ */
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief DeInitializes TIM PWM MSP.
+ * @param htim TIM PWM handle
+ * @retval None
+ */
+__weak void HAL_TIM_PWM_MspDeInit(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim)
+{
+ /* Prevent unused argument(s) compilation warning */
+ UNUSED(htim);
+
+ /* NOTE : This function should not be modified, when the callback is needed,
+ the HAL_TIM_PWM_MspDeInit could be implemented in the user file
+ */
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Starts the PWM signal generation.
+ * @param htim TIM handle
+ * @param Channel TIM Channels to be enabled
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_1: TIM Channel 1 selected
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_2: TIM Channel 2 selected
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_3: TIM Channel 3 selected
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_4: TIM Channel 4 selected
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_PWM_Start(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, uint32_t Channel)
+{
+ uint32_t tmpsmcr;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_CCX_INSTANCE(htim->Instance, Channel));
+
+ /* Enable the Capture compare channel */
+ TIM_CCxChannelCmd(htim->Instance, Channel, TIM_CCx_ENABLE);
+
+ /* Enable the Peripheral, except in trigger mode where enable is automatically done with trigger */
+ tmpsmcr = htim->Instance->SMCR & TIM_SMCR_SMS;
+ if (!IS_TIM_SLAVEMODE_TRIGGER_ENABLED(tmpsmcr))
+ {
+ __HAL_TIM_ENABLE(htim);
+ }
+
+ /* Return function status */
+ return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Stops the PWM signal generation.
+ * @param htim TIM PWM handle
+ * @param Channel TIM Channels to be disabled
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_1: TIM Channel 1 selected
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_2: TIM Channel 2 selected
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_3: TIM Channel 3 selected
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_4: TIM Channel 4 selected
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_PWM_Stop(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, uint32_t Channel)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_CCX_INSTANCE(htim->Instance, Channel));
+
+ /* Disable the Capture compare channel */
+ TIM_CCxChannelCmd(htim->Instance, Channel, TIM_CCx_DISABLE);
+
+ /* Disable the Peripheral */
+ __HAL_TIM_DISABLE(htim);
+
+ /* Change the htim state */
+ htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_READY;
+
+ /* Return function status */
+ return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Starts the PWM signal generation in interrupt mode.
+ * @param htim TIM PWM handle
+ * @param Channel TIM Channel to be enabled
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_1: TIM Channel 1 selected
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_2: TIM Channel 2 selected
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_3: TIM Channel 3 selected
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_4: TIM Channel 4 selected
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_PWM_Start_IT(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, uint32_t Channel)
+{
+ uint32_t tmpsmcr;
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_CCX_INSTANCE(htim->Instance, Channel));
+
+ switch (Channel)
+ {
+ case TIM_CHANNEL_1:
+ {
+ /* Enable the TIM Capture/Compare 1 interrupt */
+ __HAL_TIM_ENABLE_IT(htim, TIM_IT_CC1);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ case TIM_CHANNEL_2:
+ {
+ /* Enable the TIM Capture/Compare 2 interrupt */
+ __HAL_TIM_ENABLE_IT(htim, TIM_IT_CC2);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ case TIM_CHANNEL_3:
+ {
+ /* Enable the TIM Capture/Compare 3 interrupt */
+ __HAL_TIM_ENABLE_IT(htim, TIM_IT_CC3);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ case TIM_CHANNEL_4:
+ {
+ /* Enable the TIM Capture/Compare 4 interrupt */
+ __HAL_TIM_ENABLE_IT(htim, TIM_IT_CC4);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ default:
+ break;
+ }
+
+ /* Enable the Capture compare channel */
+ TIM_CCxChannelCmd(htim->Instance, Channel, TIM_CCx_ENABLE);
+
+ /* Enable the Peripheral, except in trigger mode where enable is automatically done with trigger */
+ tmpsmcr = htim->Instance->SMCR & TIM_SMCR_SMS;
+ if (!IS_TIM_SLAVEMODE_TRIGGER_ENABLED(tmpsmcr))
+ {
+ __HAL_TIM_ENABLE(htim);
+ }
+
+ /* Return function status */
+ return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Stops the PWM signal generation in interrupt mode.
+ * @param htim TIM PWM handle
+ * @param Channel TIM Channels to be disabled
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_1: TIM Channel 1 selected
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_2: TIM Channel 2 selected
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_3: TIM Channel 3 selected
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_4: TIM Channel 4 selected
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_PWM_Stop_IT(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, uint32_t Channel)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_CCX_INSTANCE(htim->Instance, Channel));
+
+ switch (Channel)
+ {
+ case TIM_CHANNEL_1:
+ {
+ /* Disable the TIM Capture/Compare 1 interrupt */
+ __HAL_TIM_DISABLE_IT(htim, TIM_IT_CC1);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ case TIM_CHANNEL_2:
+ {
+ /* Disable the TIM Capture/Compare 2 interrupt */
+ __HAL_TIM_DISABLE_IT(htim, TIM_IT_CC2);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ case TIM_CHANNEL_3:
+ {
+ /* Disable the TIM Capture/Compare 3 interrupt */
+ __HAL_TIM_DISABLE_IT(htim, TIM_IT_CC3);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ case TIM_CHANNEL_4:
+ {
+ /* Disable the TIM Capture/Compare 4 interrupt */
+ __HAL_TIM_DISABLE_IT(htim, TIM_IT_CC4);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ default:
+ break;
+ }
+
+ /* Disable the Capture compare channel */
+ TIM_CCxChannelCmd(htim->Instance, Channel, TIM_CCx_DISABLE);
+
+ /* Disable the Peripheral */
+ __HAL_TIM_DISABLE(htim);
+
+ /* Return function status */
+ return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Starts the TIM PWM signal generation in DMA mode.
+ * @param htim TIM PWM handle
+ * @param Channel TIM Channels to be enabled
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_1: TIM Channel 1 selected
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_2: TIM Channel 2 selected
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_3: TIM Channel 3 selected
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_4: TIM Channel 4 selected
+ * @param pData The source Buffer address.
+ * @param Length The length of data to be transferred from memory to TIM peripheral
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_PWM_Start_DMA(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, uint32_t Channel, uint32_t *pData, uint16_t Length)
+{
+ uint32_t tmpsmcr;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_CCX_INSTANCE(htim->Instance, Channel));
+
+ if ((htim->State == HAL_TIM_STATE_BUSY))
+ {
+ return HAL_BUSY;
+ }
+ else if ((htim->State == HAL_TIM_STATE_READY))
+ {
+ if ((pData == NULL) && (Length > 0U))
+ {
+ return HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_BUSY;
+ }
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* nothing to do */
+ }
+
+ switch (Channel)
+ {
+ case TIM_CHANNEL_1:
+ {
+ /* Set the DMA compare callbacks */
+ htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC1]->XferCpltCallback = TIM_DMADelayPulseCplt;
+ htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC1]->XferHalfCpltCallback = TIM_DMADelayPulseHalfCplt;
+
+ /* Set the DMA error callback */
+ htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC1]->XferErrorCallback = TIM_DMAError ;
+
+ /* Enable the DMA channel */
+ if (HAL_DMA_Start_IT(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC1], (uint32_t)pData, (uint32_t)&htim->Instance->CCR1, Length) != HAL_OK)
+ {
+ return HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+
+ /* Enable the TIM Capture/Compare 1 DMA request */
+ __HAL_TIM_ENABLE_DMA(htim, TIM_DMA_CC1);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ case TIM_CHANNEL_2:
+ {
+ /* Set the DMA compare callbacks */
+ htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC2]->XferCpltCallback = TIM_DMADelayPulseCplt;
+ htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC2]->XferHalfCpltCallback = TIM_DMADelayPulseHalfCplt;
+
+ /* Set the DMA error callback */
+ htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC2]->XferErrorCallback = TIM_DMAError ;
+
+ /* Enable the DMA channel */
+ if (HAL_DMA_Start_IT(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC2], (uint32_t)pData, (uint32_t)&htim->Instance->CCR2, Length) != HAL_OK)
+ {
+ return HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+ /* Enable the TIM Capture/Compare 2 DMA request */
+ __HAL_TIM_ENABLE_DMA(htim, TIM_DMA_CC2);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ case TIM_CHANNEL_3:
+ {
+ /* Set the DMA compare callbacks */
+ htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC3]->XferCpltCallback = TIM_DMADelayPulseCplt;
+ htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC3]->XferHalfCpltCallback = TIM_DMADelayPulseHalfCplt;
+
+ /* Set the DMA error callback */
+ htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC3]->XferErrorCallback = TIM_DMAError ;
+
+ /* Enable the DMA channel */
+ if (HAL_DMA_Start_IT(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC3], (uint32_t)pData, (uint32_t)&htim->Instance->CCR3, Length) != HAL_OK)
+ {
+ return HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+ /* Enable the TIM Output Capture/Compare 3 request */
+ __HAL_TIM_ENABLE_DMA(htim, TIM_DMA_CC3);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ case TIM_CHANNEL_4:
+ {
+ /* Set the DMA compare callbacks */
+ htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC4]->XferCpltCallback = TIM_DMADelayPulseCplt;
+ htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC4]->XferHalfCpltCallback = TIM_DMADelayPulseHalfCplt;
+
+ /* Set the DMA error callback */
+ htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC4]->XferErrorCallback = TIM_DMAError ;
+
+ /* Enable the DMA channel */
+ if (HAL_DMA_Start_IT(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC4], (uint32_t)pData, (uint32_t)&htim->Instance->CCR4, Length) != HAL_OK)
+ {
+ return HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+ /* Enable the TIM Capture/Compare 4 DMA request */
+ __HAL_TIM_ENABLE_DMA(htim, TIM_DMA_CC4);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ default:
+ break;
+ }
+
+ /* Enable the Capture compare channel */
+ TIM_CCxChannelCmd(htim->Instance, Channel, TIM_CCx_ENABLE);
+
+ /* Enable the Peripheral, except in trigger mode where enable is automatically done with trigger */
+ tmpsmcr = htim->Instance->SMCR & TIM_SMCR_SMS;
+ if (!IS_TIM_SLAVEMODE_TRIGGER_ENABLED(tmpsmcr))
+ {
+ __HAL_TIM_ENABLE(htim);
+ }
+
+ /* Return function status */
+ return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Stops the TIM PWM signal generation in DMA mode.
+ * @param htim TIM PWM handle
+ * @param Channel TIM Channels to be disabled
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_1: TIM Channel 1 selected
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_2: TIM Channel 2 selected
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_3: TIM Channel 3 selected
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_4: TIM Channel 4 selected
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_PWM_Stop_DMA(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, uint32_t Channel)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_CCX_INSTANCE(htim->Instance, Channel));
+
+ switch (Channel)
+ {
+ case TIM_CHANNEL_1:
+ {
+ /* Disable the TIM Capture/Compare 1 DMA request */
+ __HAL_TIM_DISABLE_DMA(htim, TIM_DMA_CC1);
+ (void)HAL_DMA_Abort_IT(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC1]);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ case TIM_CHANNEL_2:
+ {
+ /* Disable the TIM Capture/Compare 2 DMA request */
+ __HAL_TIM_DISABLE_DMA(htim, TIM_DMA_CC2);
+ (void)HAL_DMA_Abort_IT(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC2]);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ case TIM_CHANNEL_3:
+ {
+ /* Disable the TIM Capture/Compare 3 DMA request */
+ __HAL_TIM_DISABLE_DMA(htim, TIM_DMA_CC3);
+ (void)HAL_DMA_Abort_IT(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC3]);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ case TIM_CHANNEL_4:
+ {
+ /* Disable the TIM Capture/Compare 4 interrupt */
+ __HAL_TIM_DISABLE_DMA(htim, TIM_DMA_CC4);
+ (void)HAL_DMA_Abort_IT(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC4]);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ default:
+ break;
+ }
+
+ /* Disable the Capture compare channel */
+ TIM_CCxChannelCmd(htim->Instance, Channel, TIM_CCx_DISABLE);
+
+ /* Disable the Peripheral */
+ __HAL_TIM_DISABLE(htim);
+
+ /* Change the htim state */
+ htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_READY;
+
+ /* Return function status */
+ return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup TIM_Exported_Functions_Group4 TIM Input Capture functions
+ * @brief TIM Input Capture functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ==============================================================================
+ ##### TIM Input Capture functions #####
+ ==============================================================================
+ [..]
+ This section provides functions allowing to:
+ (+) Initialize and configure the TIM Input Capture.
+ (+) De-initialize the TIM Input Capture.
+ (+) Start the TIM Input Capture.
+ (+) Stop the TIM Input Capture.
+ (+) Start the TIM Input Capture and enable interrupt.
+ (+) Stop the TIM Input Capture and disable interrupt.
+ (+) Start the TIM Input Capture and enable DMA transfer.
+ (+) Stop the TIM Input Capture and disable DMA transfer.
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+/**
+ * @brief Initializes the TIM Input Capture Time base according to the specified
+ * parameters in the TIM_HandleTypeDef and initializes the associated handle.
+ * @note Switching from Center Aligned counter mode to Edge counter mode (or reverse)
+ * requires a timer reset to avoid unexpected direction
+ * due to DIR bit readonly in center aligned mode.
+ * Ex: call @ref HAL_TIM_IC_DeInit() before HAL_TIM_IC_Init()
+ * @param htim TIM Input Capture handle
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_IC_Init(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim)
+{
+ /* Check the TIM handle allocation */
+ if (htim == NULL)
+ {
+ return HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_COUNTER_MODE(htim->Init.CounterMode));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_CLOCKDIVISION_DIV(htim->Init.ClockDivision));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_AUTORELOAD_PRELOAD(htim->Init.AutoReloadPreload));
+
+ if (htim->State == HAL_TIM_STATE_RESET)
+ {
+ /* Allocate lock resource and initialize it */
+ htim->Lock = HAL_UNLOCKED;
+
+#if (USE_HAL_TIM_REGISTER_CALLBACKS == 1)
+ /* Reset interrupt callbacks to legacy weak callbacks */
+ TIM_ResetCallback(htim);
+
+ if (htim->IC_MspInitCallback == NULL)
+ {
+ htim->IC_MspInitCallback = HAL_TIM_IC_MspInit;
+ }
+ /* Init the low level hardware : GPIO, CLOCK, NVIC */
+ htim->IC_MspInitCallback(htim);
+#else
+ /* Init the low level hardware : GPIO, CLOCK, NVIC and DMA */
+ HAL_TIM_IC_MspInit(htim);
+#endif /* USE_HAL_TIM_REGISTER_CALLBACKS */
+ }
+
+ /* Set the TIM state */
+ htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_BUSY;
+
+ /* Init the base time for the input capture */
+ TIM_Base_SetConfig(htim->Instance, &htim->Init);
+
+ /* Initialize the TIM state*/
+ htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_READY;
+
+ return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief DeInitializes the TIM peripheral
+ * @param htim TIM Input Capture handle
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_IC_DeInit(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+
+ htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_BUSY;
+
+ /* Disable the TIM Peripheral Clock */
+ __HAL_TIM_DISABLE(htim);
+
+#if (USE_HAL_TIM_REGISTER_CALLBACKS == 1)
+ if (htim->IC_MspDeInitCallback == NULL)
+ {
+ htim->IC_MspDeInitCallback = HAL_TIM_IC_MspDeInit;
+ }
+ /* DeInit the low level hardware */
+ htim->IC_MspDeInitCallback(htim);
+#else
+ /* DeInit the low level hardware: GPIO, CLOCK, NVIC and DMA */
+ HAL_TIM_IC_MspDeInit(htim);
+#endif /* USE_HAL_TIM_REGISTER_CALLBACKS */
+
+ /* Change TIM state */
+ htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_RESET;
+
+ /* Release Lock */
+ __HAL_UNLOCK(htim);
+
+ return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Initializes the TIM Input Capture MSP.
+ * @param htim TIM Input Capture handle
+ * @retval None
+ */
+__weak void HAL_TIM_IC_MspInit(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim)
+{
+ /* Prevent unused argument(s) compilation warning */
+ UNUSED(htim);
+
+ /* NOTE : This function should not be modified, when the callback is needed,
+ the HAL_TIM_IC_MspInit could be implemented in the user file
+ */
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief DeInitializes TIM Input Capture MSP.
+ * @param htim TIM handle
+ * @retval None
+ */
+__weak void HAL_TIM_IC_MspDeInit(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim)
+{
+ /* Prevent unused argument(s) compilation warning */
+ UNUSED(htim);
+
+ /* NOTE : This function should not be modified, when the callback is needed,
+ the HAL_TIM_IC_MspDeInit could be implemented in the user file
+ */
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Starts the TIM Input Capture measurement.
+ * @param htim TIM Input Capture handle
+ * @param Channel TIM Channels to be enabled
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_1: TIM Channel 1 selected
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_2: TIM Channel 2 selected
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_3: TIM Channel 3 selected
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_4: TIM Channel 4 selected
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_IC_Start(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, uint32_t Channel)
+{
+ uint32_t tmpsmcr;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_CCX_INSTANCE(htim->Instance, Channel));
+
+ /* Enable the Input Capture channel */
+ TIM_CCxChannelCmd(htim->Instance, Channel, TIM_CCx_ENABLE);
+
+ /* Enable the Peripheral, except in trigger mode where enable is automatically done with trigger */
+ tmpsmcr = htim->Instance->SMCR & TIM_SMCR_SMS;
+ if (!IS_TIM_SLAVEMODE_TRIGGER_ENABLED(tmpsmcr))
+ {
+ __HAL_TIM_ENABLE(htim);
+ }
+
+ /* Return function status */
+ return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Stops the TIM Input Capture measurement.
+ * @param htim TIM Input Capture handle
+ * @param Channel TIM Channels to be disabled
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_1: TIM Channel 1 selected
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_2: TIM Channel 2 selected
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_3: TIM Channel 3 selected
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_4: TIM Channel 4 selected
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_IC_Stop(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, uint32_t Channel)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_CCX_INSTANCE(htim->Instance, Channel));
+
+ /* Disable the Input Capture channel */
+ TIM_CCxChannelCmd(htim->Instance, Channel, TIM_CCx_DISABLE);
+
+ /* Disable the Peripheral */
+ __HAL_TIM_DISABLE(htim);
+
+ /* Return function status */
+ return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Starts the TIM Input Capture measurement in interrupt mode.
+ * @param htim TIM Input Capture handle
+ * @param Channel TIM Channels to be enabled
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_1: TIM Channel 1 selected
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_2: TIM Channel 2 selected
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_3: TIM Channel 3 selected
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_4: TIM Channel 4 selected
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_IC_Start_IT(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, uint32_t Channel)
+{
+ uint32_t tmpsmcr;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_CCX_INSTANCE(htim->Instance, Channel));
+
+ switch (Channel)
+ {
+ case TIM_CHANNEL_1:
+ {
+ /* Enable the TIM Capture/Compare 1 interrupt */
+ __HAL_TIM_ENABLE_IT(htim, TIM_IT_CC1);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ case TIM_CHANNEL_2:
+ {
+ /* Enable the TIM Capture/Compare 2 interrupt */
+ __HAL_TIM_ENABLE_IT(htim, TIM_IT_CC2);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ case TIM_CHANNEL_3:
+ {
+ /* Enable the TIM Capture/Compare 3 interrupt */
+ __HAL_TIM_ENABLE_IT(htim, TIM_IT_CC3);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ case TIM_CHANNEL_4:
+ {
+ /* Enable the TIM Capture/Compare 4 interrupt */
+ __HAL_TIM_ENABLE_IT(htim, TIM_IT_CC4);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ default:
+ break;
+ }
+ /* Enable the Input Capture channel */
+ TIM_CCxChannelCmd(htim->Instance, Channel, TIM_CCx_ENABLE);
+
+ /* Enable the Peripheral, except in trigger mode where enable is automatically done with trigger */
+ tmpsmcr = htim->Instance->SMCR & TIM_SMCR_SMS;
+ if (!IS_TIM_SLAVEMODE_TRIGGER_ENABLED(tmpsmcr))
+ {
+ __HAL_TIM_ENABLE(htim);
+ }
+
+ /* Return function status */
+ return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Stops the TIM Input Capture measurement in interrupt mode.
+ * @param htim TIM Input Capture handle
+ * @param Channel TIM Channels to be disabled
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_1: TIM Channel 1 selected
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_2: TIM Channel 2 selected
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_3: TIM Channel 3 selected
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_4: TIM Channel 4 selected
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_IC_Stop_IT(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, uint32_t Channel)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_CCX_INSTANCE(htim->Instance, Channel));
+
+ switch (Channel)
+ {
+ case TIM_CHANNEL_1:
+ {
+ /* Disable the TIM Capture/Compare 1 interrupt */
+ __HAL_TIM_DISABLE_IT(htim, TIM_IT_CC1);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ case TIM_CHANNEL_2:
+ {
+ /* Disable the TIM Capture/Compare 2 interrupt */
+ __HAL_TIM_DISABLE_IT(htim, TIM_IT_CC2);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ case TIM_CHANNEL_3:
+ {
+ /* Disable the TIM Capture/Compare 3 interrupt */
+ __HAL_TIM_DISABLE_IT(htim, TIM_IT_CC3);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ case TIM_CHANNEL_4:
+ {
+ /* Disable the TIM Capture/Compare 4 interrupt */
+ __HAL_TIM_DISABLE_IT(htim, TIM_IT_CC4);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ default:
+ break;
+ }
+
+ /* Disable the Input Capture channel */
+ TIM_CCxChannelCmd(htim->Instance, Channel, TIM_CCx_DISABLE);
+
+ /* Disable the Peripheral */
+ __HAL_TIM_DISABLE(htim);
+
+ /* Return function status */
+ return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Starts the TIM Input Capture measurement in DMA mode.
+ * @param htim TIM Input Capture handle
+ * @param Channel TIM Channels to be enabled
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_1: TIM Channel 1 selected
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_2: TIM Channel 2 selected
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_3: TIM Channel 3 selected
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_4: TIM Channel 4 selected
+ * @param pData The destination Buffer address.
+ * @param Length The length of data to be transferred from TIM peripheral to memory.
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_IC_Start_DMA(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, uint32_t Channel, uint32_t *pData, uint16_t Length)
+{
+ uint32_t tmpsmcr;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_CCX_INSTANCE(htim->Instance, Channel));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_DMA_CC_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+
+ if ((htim->State == HAL_TIM_STATE_BUSY))
+ {
+ return HAL_BUSY;
+ }
+ else if ((htim->State == HAL_TIM_STATE_READY))
+ {
+ if ((pData == NULL) && (Length > 0U))
+ {
+ return HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_BUSY;
+ }
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* nothing to do */
+ }
+
+ switch (Channel)
+ {
+ case TIM_CHANNEL_1:
+ {
+ /* Set the DMA capture callbacks */
+ htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC1]->XferCpltCallback = TIM_DMACaptureCplt;
+ htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC1]->XferHalfCpltCallback = TIM_DMACaptureHalfCplt;
+
+ /* Set the DMA error callback */
+ htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC1]->XferErrorCallback = TIM_DMAError ;
+
+ /* Enable the DMA channel */
+ if (HAL_DMA_Start_IT(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC1], (uint32_t)&htim->Instance->CCR1, (uint32_t)pData, Length) != HAL_OK)
+ {
+ return HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+ /* Enable the TIM Capture/Compare 1 DMA request */
+ __HAL_TIM_ENABLE_DMA(htim, TIM_DMA_CC1);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ case TIM_CHANNEL_2:
+ {
+ /* Set the DMA capture callbacks */
+ htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC2]->XferCpltCallback = TIM_DMACaptureCplt;
+ htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC2]->XferHalfCpltCallback = TIM_DMACaptureHalfCplt;
+
+ /* Set the DMA error callback */
+ htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC2]->XferErrorCallback = TIM_DMAError ;
+
+ /* Enable the DMA channel */
+ if (HAL_DMA_Start_IT(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC2], (uint32_t)&htim->Instance->CCR2, (uint32_t)pData, Length) != HAL_OK)
+ {
+ return HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+ /* Enable the TIM Capture/Compare 2 DMA request */
+ __HAL_TIM_ENABLE_DMA(htim, TIM_DMA_CC2);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ case TIM_CHANNEL_3:
+ {
+ /* Set the DMA capture callbacks */
+ htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC3]->XferCpltCallback = TIM_DMACaptureCplt;
+ htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC3]->XferHalfCpltCallback = TIM_DMACaptureHalfCplt;
+
+ /* Set the DMA error callback */
+ htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC3]->XferErrorCallback = TIM_DMAError ;
+
+ /* Enable the DMA channel */
+ if (HAL_DMA_Start_IT(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC3], (uint32_t)&htim->Instance->CCR3, (uint32_t)pData, Length) != HAL_OK)
+ {
+ return HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+ /* Enable the TIM Capture/Compare 3 DMA request */
+ __HAL_TIM_ENABLE_DMA(htim, TIM_DMA_CC3);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ case TIM_CHANNEL_4:
+ {
+ /* Set the DMA capture callbacks */
+ htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC4]->XferCpltCallback = TIM_DMACaptureCplt;
+ htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC4]->XferHalfCpltCallback = TIM_DMACaptureHalfCplt;
+
+ /* Set the DMA error callback */
+ htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC4]->XferErrorCallback = TIM_DMAError ;
+
+ /* Enable the DMA channel */
+ if (HAL_DMA_Start_IT(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC4], (uint32_t)&htim->Instance->CCR4, (uint32_t)pData, Length) != HAL_OK)
+ {
+ return HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+ /* Enable the TIM Capture/Compare 4 DMA request */
+ __HAL_TIM_ENABLE_DMA(htim, TIM_DMA_CC4);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ default:
+ break;
+ }
+
+ /* Enable the Input Capture channel */
+ TIM_CCxChannelCmd(htim->Instance, Channel, TIM_CCx_ENABLE);
+
+ /* Enable the Peripheral, except in trigger mode where enable is automatically done with trigger */
+ tmpsmcr = htim->Instance->SMCR & TIM_SMCR_SMS;
+ if (!IS_TIM_SLAVEMODE_TRIGGER_ENABLED(tmpsmcr))
+ {
+ __HAL_TIM_ENABLE(htim);
+ }
+
+ /* Return function status */
+ return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Stops the TIM Input Capture measurement in DMA mode.
+ * @param htim TIM Input Capture handle
+ * @param Channel TIM Channels to be disabled
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_1: TIM Channel 1 selected
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_2: TIM Channel 2 selected
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_3: TIM Channel 3 selected
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_4: TIM Channel 4 selected
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_IC_Stop_DMA(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, uint32_t Channel)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_CCX_INSTANCE(htim->Instance, Channel));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_DMA_CC_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+
+ switch (Channel)
+ {
+ case TIM_CHANNEL_1:
+ {
+ /* Disable the TIM Capture/Compare 1 DMA request */
+ __HAL_TIM_DISABLE_DMA(htim, TIM_DMA_CC1);
+ (void)HAL_DMA_Abort_IT(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC1]);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ case TIM_CHANNEL_2:
+ {
+ /* Disable the TIM Capture/Compare 2 DMA request */
+ __HAL_TIM_DISABLE_DMA(htim, TIM_DMA_CC2);
+ (void)HAL_DMA_Abort_IT(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC2]);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ case TIM_CHANNEL_3:
+ {
+ /* Disable the TIM Capture/Compare 3 DMA request */
+ __HAL_TIM_DISABLE_DMA(htim, TIM_DMA_CC3);
+ (void)HAL_DMA_Abort_IT(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC3]);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ case TIM_CHANNEL_4:
+ {
+ /* Disable the TIM Capture/Compare 4 DMA request */
+ __HAL_TIM_DISABLE_DMA(htim, TIM_DMA_CC4);
+ (void)HAL_DMA_Abort_IT(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC4]);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ default:
+ break;
+ }
+
+ /* Disable the Input Capture channel */
+ TIM_CCxChannelCmd(htim->Instance, Channel, TIM_CCx_DISABLE);
+
+ /* Disable the Peripheral */
+ __HAL_TIM_DISABLE(htim);
+
+ /* Change the htim state */
+ htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_READY;
+
+ /* Return function status */
+ return HAL_OK;
+}
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup TIM_Exported_Functions_Group5 TIM One Pulse functions
+ * @brief TIM One Pulse functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ==============================================================================
+ ##### TIM One Pulse functions #####
+ ==============================================================================
+ [..]
+ This section provides functions allowing to:
+ (+) Initialize and configure the TIM One Pulse.
+ (+) De-initialize the TIM One Pulse.
+ (+) Start the TIM One Pulse.
+ (+) Stop the TIM One Pulse.
+ (+) Start the TIM One Pulse and enable interrupt.
+ (+) Stop the TIM One Pulse and disable interrupt.
+ (+) Start the TIM One Pulse and enable DMA transfer.
+ (+) Stop the TIM One Pulse and disable DMA transfer.
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+/**
+ * @brief Initializes the TIM One Pulse Time Base according to the specified
+ * parameters in the TIM_HandleTypeDef and initializes the associated handle.
+ * @note Switching from Center Aligned counter mode to Edge counter mode (or reverse)
+ * requires a timer reset to avoid unexpected direction
+ * due to DIR bit readonly in center aligned mode.
+ * Ex: call @ref HAL_TIM_OnePulse_DeInit() before HAL_TIM_OnePulse_Init()
+ * @param htim TIM One Pulse handle
+ * @param OnePulseMode Select the One pulse mode.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_OPMODE_SINGLE: Only one pulse will be generated.
+ * @arg TIM_OPMODE_REPETITIVE: Repetitive pulses will be generated.
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_OnePulse_Init(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, uint32_t OnePulseMode)
+{
+ /* Check the TIM handle allocation */
+ if (htim == NULL)
+ {
+ return HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_COUNTER_MODE(htim->Init.CounterMode));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_CLOCKDIVISION_DIV(htim->Init.ClockDivision));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_OPM_MODE(OnePulseMode));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_AUTORELOAD_PRELOAD(htim->Init.AutoReloadPreload));
+
+ if (htim->State == HAL_TIM_STATE_RESET)
+ {
+ /* Allocate lock resource and initialize it */
+ htim->Lock = HAL_UNLOCKED;
+
+#if (USE_HAL_TIM_REGISTER_CALLBACKS == 1)
+ /* Reset interrupt callbacks to legacy weak callbacks */
+ TIM_ResetCallback(htim);
+
+ if (htim->OnePulse_MspInitCallback == NULL)
+ {
+ htim->OnePulse_MspInitCallback = HAL_TIM_OnePulse_MspInit;
+ }
+ /* Init the low level hardware : GPIO, CLOCK, NVIC */
+ htim->OnePulse_MspInitCallback(htim);
+#else
+ /* Init the low level hardware : GPIO, CLOCK, NVIC and DMA */
+ HAL_TIM_OnePulse_MspInit(htim);
+#endif /* USE_HAL_TIM_REGISTER_CALLBACKS */
+ }
+
+ /* Set the TIM state */
+ htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_BUSY;
+
+ /* Configure the Time base in the One Pulse Mode */
+ TIM_Base_SetConfig(htim->Instance, &htim->Init);
+
+ /* Reset the OPM Bit */
+ htim->Instance->CR1 &= ~TIM_CR1_OPM;
+
+ /* Configure the OPM Mode */
+ htim->Instance->CR1 |= OnePulseMode;
+
+ /* Initialize the TIM state*/
+ htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_READY;
+
+ return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief DeInitializes the TIM One Pulse
+ * @param htim TIM One Pulse handle
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_OnePulse_DeInit(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+
+ htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_BUSY;
+
+ /* Disable the TIM Peripheral Clock */
+ __HAL_TIM_DISABLE(htim);
+
+#if (USE_HAL_TIM_REGISTER_CALLBACKS == 1)
+ if (htim->OnePulse_MspDeInitCallback == NULL)
+ {
+ htim->OnePulse_MspDeInitCallback = HAL_TIM_OnePulse_MspDeInit;
+ }
+ /* DeInit the low level hardware */
+ htim->OnePulse_MspDeInitCallback(htim);
+#else
+ /* DeInit the low level hardware: GPIO, CLOCK, NVIC */
+ HAL_TIM_OnePulse_MspDeInit(htim);
+#endif /* USE_HAL_TIM_REGISTER_CALLBACKS */
+
+ /* Change TIM state */
+ htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_RESET;
+
+ /* Release Lock */
+ __HAL_UNLOCK(htim);
+
+ return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Initializes the TIM One Pulse MSP.
+ * @param htim TIM One Pulse handle
+ * @retval None
+ */
+__weak void HAL_TIM_OnePulse_MspInit(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim)
+{
+ /* Prevent unused argument(s) compilation warning */
+ UNUSED(htim);
+
+ /* NOTE : This function should not be modified, when the callback is needed,
+ the HAL_TIM_OnePulse_MspInit could be implemented in the user file
+ */
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief DeInitializes TIM One Pulse MSP.
+ * @param htim TIM One Pulse handle
+ * @retval None
+ */
+__weak void HAL_TIM_OnePulse_MspDeInit(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim)
+{
+ /* Prevent unused argument(s) compilation warning */
+ UNUSED(htim);
+
+ /* NOTE : This function should not be modified, when the callback is needed,
+ the HAL_TIM_OnePulse_MspDeInit could be implemented in the user file
+ */
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Starts the TIM One Pulse signal generation.
+ * @param htim TIM One Pulse handle
+ * @param OutputChannel TIM Channels to be enabled
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_1: TIM Channel 1 selected
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_2: TIM Channel 2 selected
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_OnePulse_Start(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, uint32_t OutputChannel)
+{
+ /* Prevent unused argument(s) compilation warning */
+ UNUSED(OutputChannel);
+
+ /* Enable the Capture compare and the Input Capture channels
+ (in the OPM Mode the two possible channels that can be used are TIM_CHANNEL_1 and TIM_CHANNEL_2)
+ if TIM_CHANNEL_1 is used as output, the TIM_CHANNEL_2 will be used as input and
+ if TIM_CHANNEL_1 is used as input, the TIM_CHANNEL_2 will be used as output
+ in all combinations, the TIM_CHANNEL_1 and TIM_CHANNEL_2 should be enabled together
+
+ No need to enable the counter, it's enabled automatically by hardware
+ (the counter starts in response to a stimulus and generate a pulse */
+
+ TIM_CCxChannelCmd(htim->Instance, TIM_CHANNEL_1, TIM_CCx_ENABLE);
+ TIM_CCxChannelCmd(htim->Instance, TIM_CHANNEL_2, TIM_CCx_ENABLE);
+
+ /* Return function status */
+ return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Stops the TIM One Pulse signal generation.
+ * @param htim TIM One Pulse handle
+ * @param OutputChannel TIM Channels to be disable
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_1: TIM Channel 1 selected
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_2: TIM Channel 2 selected
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_OnePulse_Stop(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, uint32_t OutputChannel)
+{
+ /* Prevent unused argument(s) compilation warning */
+ UNUSED(OutputChannel);
+
+ /* Disable the Capture compare and the Input Capture channels
+ (in the OPM Mode the two possible channels that can be used are TIM_CHANNEL_1 and TIM_CHANNEL_2)
+ if TIM_CHANNEL_1 is used as output, the TIM_CHANNEL_2 will be used as input and
+ if TIM_CHANNEL_1 is used as input, the TIM_CHANNEL_2 will be used as output
+ in all combinations, the TIM_CHANNEL_1 and TIM_CHANNEL_2 should be disabled together */
+
+ TIM_CCxChannelCmd(htim->Instance, TIM_CHANNEL_1, TIM_CCx_DISABLE);
+ TIM_CCxChannelCmd(htim->Instance, TIM_CHANNEL_2, TIM_CCx_DISABLE);
+
+ /* Disable the Peripheral */
+ __HAL_TIM_DISABLE(htim);
+
+ /* Return function status */
+ return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Starts the TIM One Pulse signal generation in interrupt mode.
+ * @param htim TIM One Pulse handle
+ * @param OutputChannel TIM Channels to be enabled
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_1: TIM Channel 1 selected
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_2: TIM Channel 2 selected
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_OnePulse_Start_IT(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, uint32_t OutputChannel)
+{
+ /* Prevent unused argument(s) compilation warning */
+ UNUSED(OutputChannel);
+
+ /* Enable the Capture compare and the Input Capture channels
+ (in the OPM Mode the two possible channels that can be used are TIM_CHANNEL_1 and TIM_CHANNEL_2)
+ if TIM_CHANNEL_1 is used as output, the TIM_CHANNEL_2 will be used as input and
+ if TIM_CHANNEL_1 is used as input, the TIM_CHANNEL_2 will be used as output
+ in all combinations, the TIM_CHANNEL_1 and TIM_CHANNEL_2 should be enabled together
+
+ No need to enable the counter, it's enabled automatically by hardware
+ (the counter starts in response to a stimulus and generate a pulse */
+
+ /* Enable the TIM Capture/Compare 1 interrupt */
+ __HAL_TIM_ENABLE_IT(htim, TIM_IT_CC1);
+
+ /* Enable the TIM Capture/Compare 2 interrupt */
+ __HAL_TIM_ENABLE_IT(htim, TIM_IT_CC2);
+
+ TIM_CCxChannelCmd(htim->Instance, TIM_CHANNEL_1, TIM_CCx_ENABLE);
+ TIM_CCxChannelCmd(htim->Instance, TIM_CHANNEL_2, TIM_CCx_ENABLE);
+
+ /* Return function status */
+ return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Stops the TIM One Pulse signal generation in interrupt mode.
+ * @param htim TIM One Pulse handle
+ * @param OutputChannel TIM Channels to be enabled
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_1: TIM Channel 1 selected
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_2: TIM Channel 2 selected
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_OnePulse_Stop_IT(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, uint32_t OutputChannel)
+{
+ /* Prevent unused argument(s) compilation warning */
+ UNUSED(OutputChannel);
+
+ /* Disable the TIM Capture/Compare 1 interrupt */
+ __HAL_TIM_DISABLE_IT(htim, TIM_IT_CC1);
+
+ /* Disable the TIM Capture/Compare 2 interrupt */
+ __HAL_TIM_DISABLE_IT(htim, TIM_IT_CC2);
+
+ /* Disable the Capture compare and the Input Capture channels
+ (in the OPM Mode the two possible channels that can be used are TIM_CHANNEL_1 and TIM_CHANNEL_2)
+ if TIM_CHANNEL_1 is used as output, the TIM_CHANNEL_2 will be used as input and
+ if TIM_CHANNEL_1 is used as input, the TIM_CHANNEL_2 will be used as output
+ in all combinations, the TIM_CHANNEL_1 and TIM_CHANNEL_2 should be disabled together */
+ TIM_CCxChannelCmd(htim->Instance, TIM_CHANNEL_1, TIM_CCx_DISABLE);
+ TIM_CCxChannelCmd(htim->Instance, TIM_CHANNEL_2, TIM_CCx_DISABLE);
+
+ /* Disable the Peripheral */
+ __HAL_TIM_DISABLE(htim);
+
+ /* Return function status */
+ return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup TIM_Exported_Functions_Group6 TIM Encoder functions
+ * @brief TIM Encoder functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ==============================================================================
+ ##### TIM Encoder functions #####
+ ==============================================================================
+ [..]
+ This section provides functions allowing to:
+ (+) Initialize and configure the TIM Encoder.
+ (+) De-initialize the TIM Encoder.
+ (+) Start the TIM Encoder.
+ (+) Stop the TIM Encoder.
+ (+) Start the TIM Encoder and enable interrupt.
+ (+) Stop the TIM Encoder and disable interrupt.
+ (+) Start the TIM Encoder and enable DMA transfer.
+ (+) Stop the TIM Encoder and disable DMA transfer.
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+/**
+ * @brief Initializes the TIM Encoder Interface and initialize the associated handle.
+ * @note Switching from Center Aligned counter mode to Edge counter mode (or reverse)
+ * requires a timer reset to avoid unexpected direction
+ * due to DIR bit readonly in center aligned mode.
+ * Ex: call @ref HAL_TIM_Encoder_DeInit() before HAL_TIM_Encoder_Init()
+ * @note Encoder mode and External clock mode 2 are not compatible and must not be selected together
+ * Ex: A call for @ref HAL_TIM_Encoder_Init will erase the settings of @ref HAL_TIM_ConfigClockSource
+ * using TIM_CLOCKSOURCE_ETRMODE2 and vice versa
+ * @param htim TIM Encoder Interface handle
+ * @param sConfig TIM Encoder Interface configuration structure
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_Encoder_Init(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, TIM_Encoder_InitTypeDef *sConfig)
+{
+ uint32_t tmpsmcr;
+ uint32_t tmpccmr1;
+ uint32_t tmpccer;
+
+ /* Check the TIM handle allocation */
+ if (htim == NULL)
+ {
+ return HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_COUNTER_MODE(htim->Init.CounterMode));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_CLOCKDIVISION_DIV(htim->Init.ClockDivision));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_AUTORELOAD_PRELOAD(htim->Init.AutoReloadPreload));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_CC2_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_ENCODER_MODE(sConfig->EncoderMode));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_IC_SELECTION(sConfig->IC1Selection));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_IC_SELECTION(sConfig->IC2Selection));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_IC_POLARITY(sConfig->IC1Polarity));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_IC_POLARITY(sConfig->IC2Polarity));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_IC_PRESCALER(sConfig->IC1Prescaler));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_IC_PRESCALER(sConfig->IC2Prescaler));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_IC_FILTER(sConfig->IC1Filter));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_IC_FILTER(sConfig->IC2Filter));
+
+ if (htim->State == HAL_TIM_STATE_RESET)
+ {
+ /* Allocate lock resource and initialize it */
+ htim->Lock = HAL_UNLOCKED;
+
+#if (USE_HAL_TIM_REGISTER_CALLBACKS == 1)
+ /* Reset interrupt callbacks to legacy weak callbacks */
+ TIM_ResetCallback(htim);
+
+ if (htim->Encoder_MspInitCallback == NULL)
+ {
+ htim->Encoder_MspInitCallback = HAL_TIM_Encoder_MspInit;
+ }
+ /* Init the low level hardware : GPIO, CLOCK, NVIC */
+ htim->Encoder_MspInitCallback(htim);
+#else
+ /* Init the low level hardware : GPIO, CLOCK, NVIC and DMA */
+ HAL_TIM_Encoder_MspInit(htim);
+#endif /* USE_HAL_TIM_REGISTER_CALLBACKS */
+ }
+
+ /* Set the TIM state */
+ htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_BUSY;
+
+ /* Reset the SMS and ECE bits */
+ htim->Instance->SMCR &= ~(TIM_SMCR_SMS | TIM_SMCR_ECE);
+
+ /* Configure the Time base in the Encoder Mode */
+ TIM_Base_SetConfig(htim->Instance, &htim->Init);
+
+ /* Get the TIMx SMCR register value */
+ tmpsmcr = htim->Instance->SMCR;
+
+ /* Get the TIMx CCMR1 register value */
+ tmpccmr1 = htim->Instance->CCMR1;
+
+ /* Get the TIMx CCER register value */
+ tmpccer = htim->Instance->CCER;
+
+ /* Set the encoder Mode */
+ tmpsmcr |= sConfig->EncoderMode;
+
+ /* Select the Capture Compare 1 and the Capture Compare 2 as input */
+ tmpccmr1 &= ~(TIM_CCMR1_CC1S | TIM_CCMR1_CC2S);
+ tmpccmr1 |= (sConfig->IC1Selection | (sConfig->IC2Selection << 8U));
+
+ /* Set the Capture Compare 1 and the Capture Compare 2 prescalers and filters */
+ tmpccmr1 &= ~(TIM_CCMR1_IC1PSC | TIM_CCMR1_IC2PSC);
+ tmpccmr1 &= ~(TIM_CCMR1_IC1F | TIM_CCMR1_IC2F);
+ tmpccmr1 |= sConfig->IC1Prescaler | (sConfig->IC2Prescaler << 8U);
+ tmpccmr1 |= (sConfig->IC1Filter << 4U) | (sConfig->IC2Filter << 12U);
+
+ /* Set the TI1 and the TI2 Polarities */
+ tmpccer &= ~(TIM_CCER_CC1P | TIM_CCER_CC2P);
+ tmpccer &= ~(TIM_CCER_CC1NP | TIM_CCER_CC2NP);
+ tmpccer |= sConfig->IC1Polarity | (sConfig->IC2Polarity << 4U);
+
+ /* Write to TIMx SMCR */
+ htim->Instance->SMCR = tmpsmcr;
+
+ /* Write to TIMx CCMR1 */
+ htim->Instance->CCMR1 = tmpccmr1;
+
+ /* Write to TIMx CCER */
+ htim->Instance->CCER = tmpccer;
+
+ /* Initialize the TIM state*/
+ htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_READY;
+
+ return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+
+/**
+ * @brief DeInitializes the TIM Encoder interface
+ * @param htim TIM Encoder Interface handle
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_Encoder_DeInit(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+
+ htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_BUSY;
+
+ /* Disable the TIM Peripheral Clock */
+ __HAL_TIM_DISABLE(htim);
+
+#if (USE_HAL_TIM_REGISTER_CALLBACKS == 1)
+ if (htim->Encoder_MspDeInitCallback == NULL)
+ {
+ htim->Encoder_MspDeInitCallback = HAL_TIM_Encoder_MspDeInit;
+ }
+ /* DeInit the low level hardware */
+ htim->Encoder_MspDeInitCallback(htim);
+#else
+ /* DeInit the low level hardware: GPIO, CLOCK, NVIC */
+ HAL_TIM_Encoder_MspDeInit(htim);
+#endif /* USE_HAL_TIM_REGISTER_CALLBACKS */
+
+ /* Change TIM state */
+ htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_RESET;
+
+ /* Release Lock */
+ __HAL_UNLOCK(htim);
+
+ return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Initializes the TIM Encoder Interface MSP.
+ * @param htim TIM Encoder Interface handle
+ * @retval None
+ */
+__weak void HAL_TIM_Encoder_MspInit(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim)
+{
+ /* Prevent unused argument(s) compilation warning */
+ UNUSED(htim);
+
+ /* NOTE : This function should not be modified, when the callback is needed,
+ the HAL_TIM_Encoder_MspInit could be implemented in the user file
+ */
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief DeInitializes TIM Encoder Interface MSP.
+ * @param htim TIM Encoder Interface handle
+ * @retval None
+ */
+__weak void HAL_TIM_Encoder_MspDeInit(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim)
+{
+ /* Prevent unused argument(s) compilation warning */
+ UNUSED(htim);
+
+ /* NOTE : This function should not be modified, when the callback is needed,
+ the HAL_TIM_Encoder_MspDeInit could be implemented in the user file
+ */
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Starts the TIM Encoder Interface.
+ * @param htim TIM Encoder Interface handle
+ * @param Channel TIM Channels to be enabled
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_1: TIM Channel 1 selected
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_2: TIM Channel 2 selected
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_ALL: TIM Channel 1 and TIM Channel 2 are selected
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_Encoder_Start(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, uint32_t Channel)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_CC2_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+
+ /* Enable the encoder interface channels */
+ switch (Channel)
+ {
+ case TIM_CHANNEL_1:
+ {
+ TIM_CCxChannelCmd(htim->Instance, TIM_CHANNEL_1, TIM_CCx_ENABLE);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ case TIM_CHANNEL_2:
+ {
+ TIM_CCxChannelCmd(htim->Instance, TIM_CHANNEL_2, TIM_CCx_ENABLE);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ default :
+ {
+ TIM_CCxChannelCmd(htim->Instance, TIM_CHANNEL_1, TIM_CCx_ENABLE);
+ TIM_CCxChannelCmd(htim->Instance, TIM_CHANNEL_2, TIM_CCx_ENABLE);
+ break;
+ }
+ }
+ /* Enable the Peripheral */
+ __HAL_TIM_ENABLE(htim);
+
+ /* Return function status */
+ return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Stops the TIM Encoder Interface.
+ * @param htim TIM Encoder Interface handle
+ * @param Channel TIM Channels to be disabled
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_1: TIM Channel 1 selected
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_2: TIM Channel 2 selected
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_ALL: TIM Channel 1 and TIM Channel 2 are selected
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_Encoder_Stop(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, uint32_t Channel)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_CC2_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+
+ /* Disable the Input Capture channels 1 and 2
+ (in the EncoderInterface the two possible channels that can be used are TIM_CHANNEL_1 and TIM_CHANNEL_2) */
+ switch (Channel)
+ {
+ case TIM_CHANNEL_1:
+ {
+ TIM_CCxChannelCmd(htim->Instance, TIM_CHANNEL_1, TIM_CCx_DISABLE);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ case TIM_CHANNEL_2:
+ {
+ TIM_CCxChannelCmd(htim->Instance, TIM_CHANNEL_2, TIM_CCx_DISABLE);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ default :
+ {
+ TIM_CCxChannelCmd(htim->Instance, TIM_CHANNEL_1, TIM_CCx_DISABLE);
+ TIM_CCxChannelCmd(htim->Instance, TIM_CHANNEL_2, TIM_CCx_DISABLE);
+ break;
+ }
+ }
+
+ /* Disable the Peripheral */
+ __HAL_TIM_DISABLE(htim);
+
+ /* Return function status */
+ return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Starts the TIM Encoder Interface in interrupt mode.
+ * @param htim TIM Encoder Interface handle
+ * @param Channel TIM Channels to be enabled
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_1: TIM Channel 1 selected
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_2: TIM Channel 2 selected
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_ALL: TIM Channel 1 and TIM Channel 2 are selected
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_Encoder_Start_IT(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, uint32_t Channel)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_CC2_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+
+ /* Enable the encoder interface channels */
+ /* Enable the capture compare Interrupts 1 and/or 2 */
+ switch (Channel)
+ {
+ case TIM_CHANNEL_1:
+ {
+ TIM_CCxChannelCmd(htim->Instance, TIM_CHANNEL_1, TIM_CCx_ENABLE);
+ __HAL_TIM_ENABLE_IT(htim, TIM_IT_CC1);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ case TIM_CHANNEL_2:
+ {
+ TIM_CCxChannelCmd(htim->Instance, TIM_CHANNEL_2, TIM_CCx_ENABLE);
+ __HAL_TIM_ENABLE_IT(htim, TIM_IT_CC2);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ default :
+ {
+ TIM_CCxChannelCmd(htim->Instance, TIM_CHANNEL_1, TIM_CCx_ENABLE);
+ TIM_CCxChannelCmd(htim->Instance, TIM_CHANNEL_2, TIM_CCx_ENABLE);
+ __HAL_TIM_ENABLE_IT(htim, TIM_IT_CC1);
+ __HAL_TIM_ENABLE_IT(htim, TIM_IT_CC2);
+ break;
+ }
+ }
+
+ /* Enable the Peripheral */
+ __HAL_TIM_ENABLE(htim);
+
+ /* Return function status */
+ return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Stops the TIM Encoder Interface in interrupt mode.
+ * @param htim TIM Encoder Interface handle
+ * @param Channel TIM Channels to be disabled
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_1: TIM Channel 1 selected
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_2: TIM Channel 2 selected
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_ALL: TIM Channel 1 and TIM Channel 2 are selected
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_Encoder_Stop_IT(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, uint32_t Channel)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_CC2_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+
+ /* Disable the Input Capture channels 1 and 2
+ (in the EncoderInterface the two possible channels that can be used are TIM_CHANNEL_1 and TIM_CHANNEL_2) */
+ if (Channel == TIM_CHANNEL_1)
+ {
+ TIM_CCxChannelCmd(htim->Instance, TIM_CHANNEL_1, TIM_CCx_DISABLE);
+
+ /* Disable the capture compare Interrupts 1 */
+ __HAL_TIM_DISABLE_IT(htim, TIM_IT_CC1);
+ }
+ else if (Channel == TIM_CHANNEL_2)
+ {
+ TIM_CCxChannelCmd(htim->Instance, TIM_CHANNEL_2, TIM_CCx_DISABLE);
+
+ /* Disable the capture compare Interrupts 2 */
+ __HAL_TIM_DISABLE_IT(htim, TIM_IT_CC2);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ TIM_CCxChannelCmd(htim->Instance, TIM_CHANNEL_1, TIM_CCx_DISABLE);
+ TIM_CCxChannelCmd(htim->Instance, TIM_CHANNEL_2, TIM_CCx_DISABLE);
+
+ /* Disable the capture compare Interrupts 1 and 2 */
+ __HAL_TIM_DISABLE_IT(htim, TIM_IT_CC1);
+ __HAL_TIM_DISABLE_IT(htim, TIM_IT_CC2);
+ }
+
+ /* Disable the Peripheral */
+ __HAL_TIM_DISABLE(htim);
+
+ /* Change the htim state */
+ htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_READY;
+
+ /* Return function status */
+ return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Starts the TIM Encoder Interface in DMA mode.
+ * @param htim TIM Encoder Interface handle
+ * @param Channel TIM Channels to be enabled
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_1: TIM Channel 1 selected
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_2: TIM Channel 2 selected
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_ALL: TIM Channel 1 and TIM Channel 2 are selected
+ * @param pData1 The destination Buffer address for IC1.
+ * @param pData2 The destination Buffer address for IC2.
+ * @param Length The length of data to be transferred from TIM peripheral to memory.
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_Encoder_Start_DMA(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, uint32_t Channel, uint32_t *pData1, uint32_t *pData2, uint16_t Length)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_DMA_CC_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+
+ if ((htim->State == HAL_TIM_STATE_BUSY))
+ {
+ return HAL_BUSY;
+ }
+ else if ((htim->State == HAL_TIM_STATE_READY))
+ {
+ if ((((pData1 == NULL) || (pData2 == NULL))) && (Length > 0U))
+ {
+ return HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_BUSY;
+ }
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* nothing to do */
+ }
+
+ switch (Channel)
+ {
+ case TIM_CHANNEL_1:
+ {
+ /* Set the DMA capture callbacks */
+ htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC1]->XferCpltCallback = TIM_DMACaptureCplt;
+ htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC1]->XferHalfCpltCallback = TIM_DMACaptureHalfCplt;
+
+ /* Set the DMA error callback */
+ htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC1]->XferErrorCallback = TIM_DMAError ;
+
+ /* Enable the DMA channel */
+ if (HAL_DMA_Start_IT(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC1], (uint32_t)&htim->Instance->CCR1, (uint32_t)pData1, Length) != HAL_OK)
+ {
+ return HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+ /* Enable the TIM Input Capture DMA request */
+ __HAL_TIM_ENABLE_DMA(htim, TIM_DMA_CC1);
+
+ /* Enable the Peripheral */
+ __HAL_TIM_ENABLE(htim);
+
+ /* Enable the Capture compare channel */
+ TIM_CCxChannelCmd(htim->Instance, TIM_CHANNEL_1, TIM_CCx_ENABLE);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ case TIM_CHANNEL_2:
+ {
+ /* Set the DMA capture callbacks */
+ htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC2]->XferCpltCallback = TIM_DMACaptureCplt;
+ htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC2]->XferHalfCpltCallback = TIM_DMACaptureHalfCplt;
+
+ /* Set the DMA error callback */
+ htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC2]->XferErrorCallback = TIM_DMAError;
+ /* Enable the DMA channel */
+ if (HAL_DMA_Start_IT(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC2], (uint32_t)&htim->Instance->CCR2, (uint32_t)pData2, Length) != HAL_OK)
+ {
+ return HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+ /* Enable the TIM Input Capture DMA request */
+ __HAL_TIM_ENABLE_DMA(htim, TIM_DMA_CC2);
+
+ /* Enable the Peripheral */
+ __HAL_TIM_ENABLE(htim);
+
+ /* Enable the Capture compare channel */
+ TIM_CCxChannelCmd(htim->Instance, TIM_CHANNEL_2, TIM_CCx_ENABLE);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ case TIM_CHANNEL_ALL:
+ {
+ /* Set the DMA capture callbacks */
+ htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC1]->XferCpltCallback = TIM_DMACaptureCplt;
+ htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC1]->XferHalfCpltCallback = TIM_DMACaptureHalfCplt;
+
+ /* Set the DMA error callback */
+ htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC1]->XferErrorCallback = TIM_DMAError ;
+
+ /* Enable the DMA channel */
+ if (HAL_DMA_Start_IT(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC1], (uint32_t)&htim->Instance->CCR1, (uint32_t)pData1, Length) != HAL_OK)
+ {
+ return HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+
+ /* Set the DMA capture callbacks */
+ htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC2]->XferCpltCallback = TIM_DMACaptureCplt;
+ htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC2]->XferHalfCpltCallback = TIM_DMACaptureHalfCplt;
+
+ /* Set the DMA error callback */
+ htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC2]->XferErrorCallback = TIM_DMAError ;
+
+ /* Enable the DMA channel */
+ if (HAL_DMA_Start_IT(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC2], (uint32_t)&htim->Instance->CCR2, (uint32_t)pData2, Length) != HAL_OK)
+ {
+ return HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+ /* Enable the Peripheral */
+ __HAL_TIM_ENABLE(htim);
+
+ /* Enable the Capture compare channel */
+ TIM_CCxChannelCmd(htim->Instance, TIM_CHANNEL_1, TIM_CCx_ENABLE);
+ TIM_CCxChannelCmd(htim->Instance, TIM_CHANNEL_2, TIM_CCx_ENABLE);
+
+ /* Enable the TIM Input Capture DMA request */
+ __HAL_TIM_ENABLE_DMA(htim, TIM_DMA_CC1);
+ /* Enable the TIM Input Capture DMA request */
+ __HAL_TIM_ENABLE_DMA(htim, TIM_DMA_CC2);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ default:
+ break;
+ }
+ /* Return function status */
+ return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Stops the TIM Encoder Interface in DMA mode.
+ * @param htim TIM Encoder Interface handle
+ * @param Channel TIM Channels to be enabled
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_1: TIM Channel 1 selected
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_2: TIM Channel 2 selected
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_ALL: TIM Channel 1 and TIM Channel 2 are selected
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_Encoder_Stop_DMA(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, uint32_t Channel)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_DMA_CC_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+
+ /* Disable the Input Capture channels 1 and 2
+ (in the EncoderInterface the two possible channels that can be used are TIM_CHANNEL_1 and TIM_CHANNEL_2) */
+ if (Channel == TIM_CHANNEL_1)
+ {
+ TIM_CCxChannelCmd(htim->Instance, TIM_CHANNEL_1, TIM_CCx_DISABLE);
+
+ /* Disable the capture compare DMA Request 1 */
+ __HAL_TIM_DISABLE_DMA(htim, TIM_DMA_CC1);
+ (void)HAL_DMA_Abort_IT(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC1]);
+ }
+ else if (Channel == TIM_CHANNEL_2)
+ {
+ TIM_CCxChannelCmd(htim->Instance, TIM_CHANNEL_2, TIM_CCx_DISABLE);
+
+ /* Disable the capture compare DMA Request 2 */
+ __HAL_TIM_DISABLE_DMA(htim, TIM_DMA_CC2);
+ (void)HAL_DMA_Abort_IT(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC2]);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ TIM_CCxChannelCmd(htim->Instance, TIM_CHANNEL_1, TIM_CCx_DISABLE);
+ TIM_CCxChannelCmd(htim->Instance, TIM_CHANNEL_2, TIM_CCx_DISABLE);
+
+ /* Disable the capture compare DMA Request 1 and 2 */
+ __HAL_TIM_DISABLE_DMA(htim, TIM_DMA_CC1);
+ __HAL_TIM_DISABLE_DMA(htim, TIM_DMA_CC2);
+ (void)HAL_DMA_Abort_IT(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC1]);
+ (void)HAL_DMA_Abort_IT(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC2]);
+ }
+
+ /* Disable the Peripheral */
+ __HAL_TIM_DISABLE(htim);
+
+ /* Change the htim state */
+ htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_READY;
+
+ /* Return function status */
+ return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+/** @defgroup TIM_Exported_Functions_Group7 TIM IRQ handler management
+ * @brief TIM IRQ handler management
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ==============================================================================
+ ##### IRQ handler management #####
+ ==============================================================================
+ [..]
+ This section provides Timer IRQ handler function.
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+/**
+ * @brief This function handles TIM interrupts requests.
+ * @param htim TIM handle
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void HAL_TIM_IRQHandler(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim)
+{
+ /* Capture compare 1 event */
+ if (__HAL_TIM_GET_FLAG(htim, TIM_FLAG_CC1) != RESET)
+ {
+ if (__HAL_TIM_GET_IT_SOURCE(htim, TIM_IT_CC1) != RESET)
+ {
+ {
+ __HAL_TIM_CLEAR_IT(htim, TIM_IT_CC1);
+ htim->Channel = HAL_TIM_ACTIVE_CHANNEL_1;
+
+ /* Input capture event */
+ if ((htim->Instance->CCMR1 & TIM_CCMR1_CC1S) != 0x00U)
+ {
+#if (USE_HAL_TIM_REGISTER_CALLBACKS == 1)
+ htim->IC_CaptureCallback(htim);
+#else
+ HAL_TIM_IC_CaptureCallback(htim);
+#endif /* USE_HAL_TIM_REGISTER_CALLBACKS */
+ }
+ /* Output compare event */
+ else
+ {
+#if (USE_HAL_TIM_REGISTER_CALLBACKS == 1)
+ htim->OC_DelayElapsedCallback(htim);
+ htim->PWM_PulseFinishedCallback(htim);
+#else
+ HAL_TIM_OC_DelayElapsedCallback(htim);
+ HAL_TIM_PWM_PulseFinishedCallback(htim);
+#endif /* USE_HAL_TIM_REGISTER_CALLBACKS */
+ }
+ htim->Channel = HAL_TIM_ACTIVE_CHANNEL_CLEARED;
+ }
+ }
+ }
+ /* Capture compare 2 event */
+ if (__HAL_TIM_GET_FLAG(htim, TIM_FLAG_CC2) != RESET)
+ {
+ if (__HAL_TIM_GET_IT_SOURCE(htim, TIM_IT_CC2) != RESET)
+ {
+ __HAL_TIM_CLEAR_IT(htim, TIM_IT_CC2);
+ htim->Channel = HAL_TIM_ACTIVE_CHANNEL_2;
+ /* Input capture event */
+ if ((htim->Instance->CCMR1 & TIM_CCMR1_CC2S) != 0x00U)
+ {
+#if (USE_HAL_TIM_REGISTER_CALLBACKS == 1)
+ htim->IC_CaptureCallback(htim);
+#else
+ HAL_TIM_IC_CaptureCallback(htim);
+#endif /* USE_HAL_TIM_REGISTER_CALLBACKS */
+ }
+ /* Output compare event */
+ else
+ {
+#if (USE_HAL_TIM_REGISTER_CALLBACKS == 1)
+ htim->OC_DelayElapsedCallback(htim);
+ htim->PWM_PulseFinishedCallback(htim);
+#else
+ HAL_TIM_OC_DelayElapsedCallback(htim);
+ HAL_TIM_PWM_PulseFinishedCallback(htim);
+#endif /* USE_HAL_TIM_REGISTER_CALLBACKS */
+ }
+ htim->Channel = HAL_TIM_ACTIVE_CHANNEL_CLEARED;
+ }
+ }
+ /* Capture compare 3 event */
+ if (__HAL_TIM_GET_FLAG(htim, TIM_FLAG_CC3) != RESET)
+ {
+ if (__HAL_TIM_GET_IT_SOURCE(htim, TIM_IT_CC3) != RESET)
+ {
+ __HAL_TIM_CLEAR_IT(htim, TIM_IT_CC3);
+ htim->Channel = HAL_TIM_ACTIVE_CHANNEL_3;
+ /* Input capture event */
+ if ((htim->Instance->CCMR2 & TIM_CCMR2_CC3S) != 0x00U)
+ {
+#if (USE_HAL_TIM_REGISTER_CALLBACKS == 1)
+ htim->IC_CaptureCallback(htim);
+#else
+ HAL_TIM_IC_CaptureCallback(htim);
+#endif /* USE_HAL_TIM_REGISTER_CALLBACKS */
+ }
+ /* Output compare event */
+ else
+ {
+#if (USE_HAL_TIM_REGISTER_CALLBACKS == 1)
+ htim->OC_DelayElapsedCallback(htim);
+ htim->PWM_PulseFinishedCallback(htim);
+#else
+ HAL_TIM_OC_DelayElapsedCallback(htim);
+ HAL_TIM_PWM_PulseFinishedCallback(htim);
+#endif /* USE_HAL_TIM_REGISTER_CALLBACKS */
+ }
+ htim->Channel = HAL_TIM_ACTIVE_CHANNEL_CLEARED;
+ }
+ }
+ /* Capture compare 4 event */
+ if (__HAL_TIM_GET_FLAG(htim, TIM_FLAG_CC4) != RESET)
+ {
+ if (__HAL_TIM_GET_IT_SOURCE(htim, TIM_IT_CC4) != RESET)
+ {
+ __HAL_TIM_CLEAR_IT(htim, TIM_IT_CC4);
+ htim->Channel = HAL_TIM_ACTIVE_CHANNEL_4;
+ /* Input capture event */
+ if ((htim->Instance->CCMR2 & TIM_CCMR2_CC4S) != 0x00U)
+ {
+#if (USE_HAL_TIM_REGISTER_CALLBACKS == 1)
+ htim->IC_CaptureCallback(htim);
+#else
+ HAL_TIM_IC_CaptureCallback(htim);
+#endif /* USE_HAL_TIM_REGISTER_CALLBACKS */
+ }
+ /* Output compare event */
+ else
+ {
+#if (USE_HAL_TIM_REGISTER_CALLBACKS == 1)
+ htim->OC_DelayElapsedCallback(htim);
+ htim->PWM_PulseFinishedCallback(htim);
+#else
+ HAL_TIM_OC_DelayElapsedCallback(htim);
+ HAL_TIM_PWM_PulseFinishedCallback(htim);
+#endif /* USE_HAL_TIM_REGISTER_CALLBACKS */
+ }
+ htim->Channel = HAL_TIM_ACTIVE_CHANNEL_CLEARED;
+ }
+ }
+ /* TIM Update event */
+ if (__HAL_TIM_GET_FLAG(htim, TIM_FLAG_UPDATE) != RESET)
+ {
+ if (__HAL_TIM_GET_IT_SOURCE(htim, TIM_IT_UPDATE) != RESET)
+ {
+ __HAL_TIM_CLEAR_IT(htim, TIM_IT_UPDATE);
+#if (USE_HAL_TIM_REGISTER_CALLBACKS == 1)
+ htim->PeriodElapsedCallback(htim);
+#else
+ HAL_TIM_PeriodElapsedCallback(htim);
+#endif /* USE_HAL_TIM_REGISTER_CALLBACKS */
+ }
+ }
+ /* TIM Trigger detection event */
+ if (__HAL_TIM_GET_FLAG(htim, TIM_FLAG_TRIGGER) != RESET)
+ {
+ if (__HAL_TIM_GET_IT_SOURCE(htim, TIM_IT_TRIGGER) != RESET)
+ {
+ __HAL_TIM_CLEAR_IT(htim, TIM_IT_TRIGGER);
+#if (USE_HAL_TIM_REGISTER_CALLBACKS == 1)
+ htim->TriggerCallback(htim);
+#else
+ HAL_TIM_TriggerCallback(htim);
+#endif /* USE_HAL_TIM_REGISTER_CALLBACKS */
+ }
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup TIM_Exported_Functions_Group8 TIM Peripheral Control functions
+ * @brief TIM Peripheral Control functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ==============================================================================
+ ##### Peripheral Control functions #####
+ ==============================================================================
+ [..]
+ This section provides functions allowing to:
+ (+) Configure The Input Output channels for OC, PWM, IC or One Pulse mode.
+ (+) Configure External Clock source.
+ (+) Configure Master and the Slave synchronization.
+ (+) Configure the DMA Burst Mode.
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Initializes the TIM Output Compare Channels according to the specified
+ * parameters in the TIM_OC_InitTypeDef.
+ * @param htim TIM Output Compare handle
+ * @param sConfig TIM Output Compare configuration structure
+ * @param Channel TIM Channels to configure
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_1: TIM Channel 1 selected
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_2: TIM Channel 2 selected
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_3: TIM Channel 3 selected
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_4: TIM Channel 4 selected
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_OC_ConfigChannel(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim,
+ TIM_OC_InitTypeDef *sConfig,
+ uint32_t Channel)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_CHANNELS(Channel));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_OC_MODE(sConfig->OCMode));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_OC_POLARITY(sConfig->OCPolarity));
+
+ /* Process Locked */
+ __HAL_LOCK(htim);
+
+ htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_BUSY;
+
+ switch (Channel)
+ {
+ case TIM_CHANNEL_1:
+ {
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_CC1_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+
+ /* Configure the TIM Channel 1 in Output Compare */
+ TIM_OC1_SetConfig(htim->Instance, sConfig);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ case TIM_CHANNEL_2:
+ {
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_CC2_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+
+ /* Configure the TIM Channel 2 in Output Compare */
+ TIM_OC2_SetConfig(htim->Instance, sConfig);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ case TIM_CHANNEL_3:
+ {
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_CC3_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+
+ /* Configure the TIM Channel 3 in Output Compare */
+ TIM_OC3_SetConfig(htim->Instance, sConfig);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ case TIM_CHANNEL_4:
+ {
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_CC4_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+
+ /* Configure the TIM Channel 4 in Output Compare */
+ TIM_OC4_SetConfig(htim->Instance, sConfig);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ default:
+ break;
+ }
+
+ htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_READY;
+
+ __HAL_UNLOCK(htim);
+
+ return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Initializes the TIM Input Capture Channels according to the specified
+ * parameters in the TIM_IC_InitTypeDef.
+ * @param htim TIM IC handle
+ * @param sConfig TIM Input Capture configuration structure
+ * @param Channel TIM Channel to configure
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_1: TIM Channel 1 selected
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_2: TIM Channel 2 selected
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_3: TIM Channel 3 selected
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_4: TIM Channel 4 selected
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_IC_ConfigChannel(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, TIM_IC_InitTypeDef *sConfig, uint32_t Channel)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_CC1_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_IC_POLARITY(sConfig->ICPolarity));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_IC_SELECTION(sConfig->ICSelection));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_IC_PRESCALER(sConfig->ICPrescaler));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_IC_FILTER(sConfig->ICFilter));
+
+ /* Process Locked */
+ __HAL_LOCK(htim);
+
+ htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_BUSY;
+
+ if (Channel == TIM_CHANNEL_1)
+ {
+ /* TI1 Configuration */
+ TIM_TI1_SetConfig(htim->Instance,
+ sConfig->ICPolarity,
+ sConfig->ICSelection,
+ sConfig->ICFilter);
+
+ /* Reset the IC1PSC Bits */
+ htim->Instance->CCMR1 &= ~TIM_CCMR1_IC1PSC;
+
+ /* Set the IC1PSC value */
+ htim->Instance->CCMR1 |= sConfig->ICPrescaler;
+ }
+ else if (Channel == TIM_CHANNEL_2)
+ {
+ /* TI2 Configuration */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_CC2_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+
+ TIM_TI2_SetConfig(htim->Instance,
+ sConfig->ICPolarity,
+ sConfig->ICSelection,
+ sConfig->ICFilter);
+
+ /* Reset the IC2PSC Bits */
+ htim->Instance->CCMR1 &= ~TIM_CCMR1_IC2PSC;
+
+ /* Set the IC2PSC value */
+ htim->Instance->CCMR1 |= (sConfig->ICPrescaler << 8U);
+ }
+ else if (Channel == TIM_CHANNEL_3)
+ {
+ /* TI3 Configuration */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_CC3_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+
+ TIM_TI3_SetConfig(htim->Instance,
+ sConfig->ICPolarity,
+ sConfig->ICSelection,
+ sConfig->ICFilter);
+
+ /* Reset the IC3PSC Bits */
+ htim->Instance->CCMR2 &= ~TIM_CCMR2_IC3PSC;
+
+ /* Set the IC3PSC value */
+ htim->Instance->CCMR2 |= sConfig->ICPrescaler;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* TI4 Configuration */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_CC4_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+
+ TIM_TI4_SetConfig(htim->Instance,
+ sConfig->ICPolarity,
+ sConfig->ICSelection,
+ sConfig->ICFilter);
+
+ /* Reset the IC4PSC Bits */
+ htim->Instance->CCMR2 &= ~TIM_CCMR2_IC4PSC;
+
+ /* Set the IC4PSC value */
+ htim->Instance->CCMR2 |= (sConfig->ICPrescaler << 8U);
+ }
+
+ htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_READY;
+
+ __HAL_UNLOCK(htim);
+
+ return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Initializes the TIM PWM channels according to the specified
+ * parameters in the TIM_OC_InitTypeDef.
+ * @param htim TIM PWM handle
+ * @param sConfig TIM PWM configuration structure
+ * @param Channel TIM Channels to be configured
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_1: TIM Channel 1 selected
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_2: TIM Channel 2 selected
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_3: TIM Channel 3 selected
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_4: TIM Channel 4 selected
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_PWM_ConfigChannel(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim,
+ TIM_OC_InitTypeDef *sConfig,
+ uint32_t Channel)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_CHANNELS(Channel));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_PWM_MODE(sConfig->OCMode));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_OC_POLARITY(sConfig->OCPolarity));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_FAST_STATE(sConfig->OCFastMode));
+
+ /* Process Locked */
+ __HAL_LOCK(htim);
+
+ htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_BUSY;
+
+ switch (Channel)
+ {
+ case TIM_CHANNEL_1:
+ {
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_CC1_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+
+ /* Configure the Channel 1 in PWM mode */
+ TIM_OC1_SetConfig(htim->Instance, sConfig);
+
+ /* Set the Preload enable bit for channel1 */
+ htim->Instance->CCMR1 |= TIM_CCMR1_OC1PE;
+
+ /* Configure the Output Fast mode */
+ htim->Instance->CCMR1 &= ~TIM_CCMR1_OC1FE;
+ htim->Instance->CCMR1 |= sConfig->OCFastMode;
+ break;
+ }
+
+ case TIM_CHANNEL_2:
+ {
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_CC2_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+
+ /* Configure the Channel 2 in PWM mode */
+ TIM_OC2_SetConfig(htim->Instance, sConfig);
+
+ /* Set the Preload enable bit for channel2 */
+ htim->Instance->CCMR1 |= TIM_CCMR1_OC2PE;
+
+ /* Configure the Output Fast mode */
+ htim->Instance->CCMR1 &= ~TIM_CCMR1_OC2FE;
+ htim->Instance->CCMR1 |= sConfig->OCFastMode << 8U;
+ break;
+ }
+
+ case TIM_CHANNEL_3:
+ {
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_CC3_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+
+ /* Configure the Channel 3 in PWM mode */
+ TIM_OC3_SetConfig(htim->Instance, sConfig);
+
+ /* Set the Preload enable bit for channel3 */
+ htim->Instance->CCMR2 |= TIM_CCMR2_OC3PE;
+
+ /* Configure the Output Fast mode */
+ htim->Instance->CCMR2 &= ~TIM_CCMR2_OC3FE;
+ htim->Instance->CCMR2 |= sConfig->OCFastMode;
+ break;
+ }
+
+ case TIM_CHANNEL_4:
+ {
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_CC4_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+
+ /* Configure the Channel 4 in PWM mode */
+ TIM_OC4_SetConfig(htim->Instance, sConfig);
+
+ /* Set the Preload enable bit for channel4 */
+ htim->Instance->CCMR2 |= TIM_CCMR2_OC4PE;
+
+ /* Configure the Output Fast mode */
+ htim->Instance->CCMR2 &= ~TIM_CCMR2_OC4FE;
+ htim->Instance->CCMR2 |= sConfig->OCFastMode << 8U;
+ break;
+ }
+
+ default:
+ break;
+ }
+
+ htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_READY;
+
+ __HAL_UNLOCK(htim);
+
+ return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Initializes the TIM One Pulse Channels according to the specified
+ * parameters in the TIM_OnePulse_InitTypeDef.
+ * @param htim TIM One Pulse handle
+ * @param sConfig TIM One Pulse configuration structure
+ * @param OutputChannel TIM output channel to configure
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_1: TIM Channel 1 selected
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_2: TIM Channel 2 selected
+ * @param InputChannel TIM input Channel to configure
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_1: TIM Channel 1 selected
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_2: TIM Channel 2 selected
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_OnePulse_ConfigChannel(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, TIM_OnePulse_InitTypeDef *sConfig, uint32_t OutputChannel, uint32_t InputChannel)
+{
+ TIM_OC_InitTypeDef temp1;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_OPM_CHANNELS(OutputChannel));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_OPM_CHANNELS(InputChannel));
+
+ if (OutputChannel != InputChannel)
+ {
+ /* Process Locked */
+ __HAL_LOCK(htim);
+
+ htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_BUSY;
+
+ /* Extract the Output compare configuration from sConfig structure */
+ temp1.OCMode = sConfig->OCMode;
+ temp1.Pulse = sConfig->Pulse;
+ temp1.OCPolarity = sConfig->OCPolarity;
+
+ switch (OutputChannel)
+ {
+ case TIM_CHANNEL_1:
+ {
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_CC1_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+
+ TIM_OC1_SetConfig(htim->Instance, &temp1);
+ break;
+ }
+ case TIM_CHANNEL_2:
+ {
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_CC2_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+
+ TIM_OC2_SetConfig(htim->Instance, &temp1);
+ break;
+ }
+ default:
+ break;
+ }
+
+ switch (InputChannel)
+ {
+ case TIM_CHANNEL_1:
+ {
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_CC1_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+
+ TIM_TI1_SetConfig(htim->Instance, sConfig->ICPolarity,
+ sConfig->ICSelection, sConfig->ICFilter);
+
+ /* Reset the IC1PSC Bits */
+ htim->Instance->CCMR1 &= ~TIM_CCMR1_IC1PSC;
+
+ /* Select the Trigger source */
+ htim->Instance->SMCR &= ~TIM_SMCR_TS;
+ htim->Instance->SMCR |= TIM_TS_TI1FP1;
+
+ /* Select the Slave Mode */
+ htim->Instance->SMCR &= ~TIM_SMCR_SMS;
+ htim->Instance->SMCR |= TIM_SLAVEMODE_TRIGGER;
+ break;
+ }
+ case TIM_CHANNEL_2:
+ {
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_CC2_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+
+ TIM_TI2_SetConfig(htim->Instance, sConfig->ICPolarity,
+ sConfig->ICSelection, sConfig->ICFilter);
+
+ /* Reset the IC2PSC Bits */
+ htim->Instance->CCMR1 &= ~TIM_CCMR1_IC2PSC;
+
+ /* Select the Trigger source */
+ htim->Instance->SMCR &= ~TIM_SMCR_TS;
+ htim->Instance->SMCR |= TIM_TS_TI2FP2;
+
+ /* Select the Slave Mode */
+ htim->Instance->SMCR &= ~TIM_SMCR_SMS;
+ htim->Instance->SMCR |= TIM_SLAVEMODE_TRIGGER;
+ break;
+ }
+
+ default:
+ break;
+ }
+
+ htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_READY;
+
+ __HAL_UNLOCK(htim);
+
+ return HAL_OK;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ return HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Configure the DMA Burst to transfer Data from the memory to the TIM peripheral
+ * @param htim TIM handle
+ * @param BurstBaseAddress TIM Base address from where the DMA will start the Data write
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_DMABASE_CR1
+ * @arg TIM_DMABASE_CR2
+ * @arg TIM_DMABASE_SMCR
+ * @arg TIM_DMABASE_DIER
+ * @arg TIM_DMABASE_SR
+ * @arg TIM_DMABASE_EGR
+ * @arg TIM_DMABASE_CCMR1
+ * @arg TIM_DMABASE_CCMR2
+ * @arg TIM_DMABASE_CCER
+ * @arg TIM_DMABASE_CNT
+ * @arg TIM_DMABASE_PSC
+ * @arg TIM_DMABASE_ARR
+ * @arg TIM_DMABASE_CCR1
+ * @arg TIM_DMABASE_CCR2
+ * @arg TIM_DMABASE_CCR3
+ * @arg TIM_DMABASE_CCR4
+ * @arg TIM_DMABASE_OR
+ * @param BurstRequestSrc TIM DMA Request sources
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_DMA_UPDATE: TIM update Interrupt source
+ * @arg TIM_DMA_CC1: TIM Capture Compare 1 DMA source
+ * @arg TIM_DMA_CC2: TIM Capture Compare 2 DMA source
+ * @arg TIM_DMA_CC3: TIM Capture Compare 3 DMA source
+ * @arg TIM_DMA_CC4: TIM Capture Compare 4 DMA source
+ * @arg TIM_DMA_TRIGGER: TIM Trigger DMA source
+ * @param BurstBuffer The Buffer address.
+ * @param BurstLength DMA Burst length. This parameter can be one value
+ * between: TIM_DMABURSTLENGTH_1TRANSFER and TIM_DMABURSTLENGTH_18TRANSFERS.
+ * @note This function should be used only when BurstLength is equal to DMA data transfer length.
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_DMABurst_WriteStart(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, uint32_t BurstBaseAddress, uint32_t BurstRequestSrc,
+ uint32_t *BurstBuffer, uint32_t BurstLength)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_DMABURST_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_DMA_BASE(BurstBaseAddress));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_DMA_SOURCE(BurstRequestSrc));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_DMA_LENGTH(BurstLength));
+
+ if ((htim->State == HAL_TIM_STATE_BUSY))
+ {
+ return HAL_BUSY;
+ }
+ else if ((htim->State == HAL_TIM_STATE_READY))
+ {
+ if ((BurstBuffer == NULL) && (BurstLength > 0U))
+ {
+ return HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_BUSY;
+ }
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* nothing to do */
+ }
+ switch (BurstRequestSrc)
+ {
+ case TIM_DMA_UPDATE:
+ {
+ /* Set the DMA Period elapsed callbacks */
+ htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_UPDATE]->XferCpltCallback = TIM_DMAPeriodElapsedCplt;
+ htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_UPDATE]->XferHalfCpltCallback = TIM_DMAPeriodElapsedHalfCplt;
+
+ /* Set the DMA error callback */
+ htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_UPDATE]->XferErrorCallback = TIM_DMAError ;
+
+ /* Enable the DMA channel */
+ if (HAL_DMA_Start_IT(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_UPDATE], (uint32_t)BurstBuffer, (uint32_t)&htim->Instance->DMAR, ((BurstLength) >> 8U) + 1U) != HAL_OK)
+ {
+ return HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+ break;
+ }
+ case TIM_DMA_CC1:
+ {
+ /* Set the DMA compare callbacks */
+ htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC1]->XferCpltCallback = TIM_DMADelayPulseCplt;
+ htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC1]->XferHalfCpltCallback = TIM_DMADelayPulseHalfCplt;
+
+ /* Set the DMA error callback */
+ htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC1]->XferErrorCallback = TIM_DMAError ;
+
+ /* Enable the DMA channel */
+ if (HAL_DMA_Start_IT(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC1], (uint32_t)BurstBuffer, (uint32_t)&htim->Instance->DMAR, ((BurstLength) >> 8U) + 1U) != HAL_OK)
+ {
+ return HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+ break;
+ }
+ case TIM_DMA_CC2:
+ {
+ /* Set the DMA compare callbacks */
+ htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC2]->XferCpltCallback = TIM_DMADelayPulseCplt;
+ htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC2]->XferHalfCpltCallback = TIM_DMADelayPulseHalfCplt;
+
+ /* Set the DMA error callback */
+ htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC2]->XferErrorCallback = TIM_DMAError ;
+
+ /* Enable the DMA channel */
+ if (HAL_DMA_Start_IT(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC2], (uint32_t)BurstBuffer, (uint32_t)&htim->Instance->DMAR, ((BurstLength) >> 8U) + 1U) != HAL_OK)
+ {
+ return HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+ break;
+ }
+ case TIM_DMA_CC3:
+ {
+ /* Set the DMA compare callbacks */
+ htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC3]->XferCpltCallback = TIM_DMADelayPulseCplt;
+ htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC3]->XferHalfCpltCallback = TIM_DMADelayPulseHalfCplt;
+
+ /* Set the DMA error callback */
+ htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC3]->XferErrorCallback = TIM_DMAError ;
+
+ /* Enable the DMA channel */
+ if (HAL_DMA_Start_IT(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC3], (uint32_t)BurstBuffer, (uint32_t)&htim->Instance->DMAR, ((BurstLength) >> 8U) + 1U) != HAL_OK)
+ {
+ return HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+ break;
+ }
+ case TIM_DMA_CC4:
+ {
+ /* Set the DMA compare callbacks */
+ htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC4]->XferCpltCallback = TIM_DMADelayPulseCplt;
+ htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC4]->XferHalfCpltCallback = TIM_DMADelayPulseHalfCplt;
+
+ /* Set the DMA error callback */
+ htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC4]->XferErrorCallback = TIM_DMAError ;
+
+ /* Enable the DMA channel */
+ if (HAL_DMA_Start_IT(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC4], (uint32_t)BurstBuffer, (uint32_t)&htim->Instance->DMAR, ((BurstLength) >> 8U) + 1U) != HAL_OK)
+ {
+ return HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+ break;
+ }
+ case TIM_DMA_TRIGGER:
+ {
+ /* Set the DMA trigger callbacks */
+ htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_TRIGGER]->XferCpltCallback = TIM_DMATriggerCplt;
+ htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_TRIGGER]->XferHalfCpltCallback = TIM_DMATriggerHalfCplt;
+
+ /* Set the DMA error callback */
+ htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_TRIGGER]->XferErrorCallback = TIM_DMAError ;
+
+ /* Enable the DMA channel */
+ if (HAL_DMA_Start_IT(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_TRIGGER], (uint32_t)BurstBuffer, (uint32_t)&htim->Instance->DMAR, ((BurstLength) >> 8U) + 1U) != HAL_OK)
+ {
+ return HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+ break;
+ }
+ default:
+ break;
+ }
+ /* configure the DMA Burst Mode */
+ htim->Instance->DCR = (BurstBaseAddress | BurstLength);
+
+ /* Enable the TIM DMA Request */
+ __HAL_TIM_ENABLE_DMA(htim, BurstRequestSrc);
+
+ htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_READY;
+
+ /* Return function status */
+ return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Stops the TIM DMA Burst mode
+ * @param htim TIM handle
+ * @param BurstRequestSrc TIM DMA Request sources to disable
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_DMABurst_WriteStop(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, uint32_t BurstRequestSrc)
+{
+ HAL_StatusTypeDef status = HAL_OK;
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_DMA_SOURCE(BurstRequestSrc));
+
+ /* Abort the DMA transfer (at least disable the DMA channel) */
+ switch (BurstRequestSrc)
+ {
+ case TIM_DMA_UPDATE:
+ {
+ status = HAL_DMA_Abort_IT(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_UPDATE]);
+ break;
+ }
+ case TIM_DMA_CC1:
+ {
+ status = HAL_DMA_Abort_IT(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC1]);
+ break;
+ }
+ case TIM_DMA_CC2:
+ {
+ status = HAL_DMA_Abort_IT(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC2]);
+ break;
+ }
+ case TIM_DMA_CC3:
+ {
+ status = HAL_DMA_Abort_IT(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC3]);
+ break;
+ }
+ case TIM_DMA_CC4:
+ {
+ status = HAL_DMA_Abort_IT(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC4]);
+ break;
+ }
+ case TIM_DMA_TRIGGER:
+ {
+ status = HAL_DMA_Abort_IT(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_TRIGGER]);
+ break;
+ }
+ default:
+ break;
+ }
+
+ if (HAL_OK == status)
+ {
+ /* Disable the TIM Update DMA request */
+ __HAL_TIM_DISABLE_DMA(htim, BurstRequestSrc);
+ }
+
+ /* Return function status */
+ return status;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Configure the DMA Burst to transfer Data from the TIM peripheral to the memory
+ * @param htim TIM handle
+ * @param BurstBaseAddress TIM Base address from where the DMA will start the Data read
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_DMABASE_CR1
+ * @arg TIM_DMABASE_CR2
+ * @arg TIM_DMABASE_SMCR
+ * @arg TIM_DMABASE_DIER
+ * @arg TIM_DMABASE_SR
+ * @arg TIM_DMABASE_EGR
+ * @arg TIM_DMABASE_CCMR1
+ * @arg TIM_DMABASE_CCMR2
+ * @arg TIM_DMABASE_CCER
+ * @arg TIM_DMABASE_CNT
+ * @arg TIM_DMABASE_PSC
+ * @arg TIM_DMABASE_ARR
+ * @arg TIM_DMABASE_CCR1
+ * @arg TIM_DMABASE_CCR2
+ * @arg TIM_DMABASE_CCR3
+ * @arg TIM_DMABASE_CCR4
+ * @arg TIM_DMABASE_OR
+ * @param BurstRequestSrc TIM DMA Request sources
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_DMA_UPDATE: TIM update Interrupt source
+ * @arg TIM_DMA_CC1: TIM Capture Compare 1 DMA source
+ * @arg TIM_DMA_CC2: TIM Capture Compare 2 DMA source
+ * @arg TIM_DMA_CC3: TIM Capture Compare 3 DMA source
+ * @arg TIM_DMA_CC4: TIM Capture Compare 4 DMA source
+ * @arg TIM_DMA_TRIGGER: TIM Trigger DMA source
+ * @param BurstBuffer The Buffer address.
+ * @param BurstLength DMA Burst length. This parameter can be one value
+ * between: TIM_DMABURSTLENGTH_1TRANSFER and TIM_DMABURSTLENGTH_18TRANSFERS.
+ * @note This function should be used only when BurstLength is equal to DMA data transfer length.
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_DMABurst_ReadStart(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, uint32_t BurstBaseAddress, uint32_t BurstRequestSrc,
+ uint32_t *BurstBuffer, uint32_t BurstLength)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_DMABURST_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_DMA_BASE(BurstBaseAddress));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_DMA_SOURCE(BurstRequestSrc));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_DMA_LENGTH(BurstLength));
+
+ if ((htim->State == HAL_TIM_STATE_BUSY))
+ {
+ return HAL_BUSY;
+ }
+ else if ((htim->State == HAL_TIM_STATE_READY))
+ {
+ if ((BurstBuffer == NULL) && (BurstLength > 0U))
+ {
+ return HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_BUSY;
+ }
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* nothing to do */
+ }
+ switch (BurstRequestSrc)
+ {
+ case TIM_DMA_UPDATE:
+ {
+ /* Set the DMA Period elapsed callbacks */
+ htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_UPDATE]->XferCpltCallback = TIM_DMAPeriodElapsedCplt;
+ htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_UPDATE]->XferHalfCpltCallback = TIM_DMAPeriodElapsedHalfCplt;
+
+ /* Set the DMA error callback */
+ htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_UPDATE]->XferErrorCallback = TIM_DMAError ;
+
+ /* Enable the DMA channel */
+ if (HAL_DMA_Start_IT(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_UPDATE], (uint32_t)&htim->Instance->DMAR, (uint32_t)BurstBuffer, ((BurstLength) >> 8U) + 1U) != HAL_OK)
+ {
+ return HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+ break;
+ }
+ case TIM_DMA_CC1:
+ {
+ /* Set the DMA capture callbacks */
+ htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC1]->XferCpltCallback = TIM_DMACaptureCplt;
+ htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC1]->XferHalfCpltCallback = TIM_DMACaptureHalfCplt;
+
+ /* Set the DMA error callback */
+ htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC1]->XferErrorCallback = TIM_DMAError ;
+
+ /* Enable the DMA channel */
+ if (HAL_DMA_Start_IT(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC1], (uint32_t)&htim->Instance->DMAR, (uint32_t)BurstBuffer, ((BurstLength) >> 8U) + 1U) != HAL_OK)
+ {
+ return HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+ break;
+ }
+ case TIM_DMA_CC2:
+ {
+ /* Set the DMA capture/compare callbacks */
+ htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC2]->XferCpltCallback = TIM_DMACaptureCplt;
+ htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC2]->XferHalfCpltCallback = TIM_DMACaptureHalfCplt;
+
+ /* Set the DMA error callback */
+ htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC2]->XferErrorCallback = TIM_DMAError ;
+
+ /* Enable the DMA channel */
+ if (HAL_DMA_Start_IT(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC2], (uint32_t)&htim->Instance->DMAR, (uint32_t)BurstBuffer, ((BurstLength) >> 8U) + 1U) != HAL_OK)
+ {
+ return HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+ break;
+ }
+ case TIM_DMA_CC3:
+ {
+ /* Set the DMA capture callbacks */
+ htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC3]->XferCpltCallback = TIM_DMACaptureCplt;
+ htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC3]->XferHalfCpltCallback = TIM_DMACaptureHalfCplt;
+
+ /* Set the DMA error callback */
+ htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC3]->XferErrorCallback = TIM_DMAError ;
+
+ /* Enable the DMA channel */
+ if (HAL_DMA_Start_IT(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC3], (uint32_t)&htim->Instance->DMAR, (uint32_t)BurstBuffer, ((BurstLength) >> 8U) + 1U) != HAL_OK)
+ {
+ return HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+ break;
+ }
+ case TIM_DMA_CC4:
+ {
+ /* Set the DMA capture callbacks */
+ htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC4]->XferCpltCallback = TIM_DMACaptureCplt;
+ htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC4]->XferHalfCpltCallback = TIM_DMACaptureHalfCplt;
+
+ /* Set the DMA error callback */
+ htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC4]->XferErrorCallback = TIM_DMAError ;
+
+ /* Enable the DMA channel */
+ if (HAL_DMA_Start_IT(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC4], (uint32_t)&htim->Instance->DMAR, (uint32_t)BurstBuffer, ((BurstLength) >> 8U) + 1U) != HAL_OK)
+ {
+ return HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+ break;
+ }
+ case TIM_DMA_TRIGGER:
+ {
+ /* Set the DMA trigger callbacks */
+ htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_TRIGGER]->XferCpltCallback = TIM_DMATriggerCplt;
+ htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_TRIGGER]->XferHalfCpltCallback = TIM_DMATriggerHalfCplt;
+
+ /* Set the DMA error callback */
+ htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_TRIGGER]->XferErrorCallback = TIM_DMAError ;
+
+ /* Enable the DMA channel */
+ if (HAL_DMA_Start_IT(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_TRIGGER], (uint32_t)&htim->Instance->DMAR, (uint32_t)BurstBuffer, ((BurstLength) >> 8U) + 1U) != HAL_OK)
+ {
+ return HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+ break;
+ }
+ default:
+ break;
+ }
+
+ /* configure the DMA Burst Mode */
+ htim->Instance->DCR = (BurstBaseAddress | BurstLength);
+
+ /* Enable the TIM DMA Request */
+ __HAL_TIM_ENABLE_DMA(htim, BurstRequestSrc);
+
+ htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_READY;
+
+ /* Return function status */
+ return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Stop the DMA burst reading
+ * @param htim TIM handle
+ * @param BurstRequestSrc TIM DMA Request sources to disable.
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_DMABurst_ReadStop(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, uint32_t BurstRequestSrc)
+{
+ HAL_StatusTypeDef status = HAL_OK;
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_DMA_SOURCE(BurstRequestSrc));
+
+ /* Abort the DMA transfer (at least disable the DMA channel) */
+ switch (BurstRequestSrc)
+ {
+ case TIM_DMA_UPDATE:
+ {
+ status = HAL_DMA_Abort_IT(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_UPDATE]);
+ break;
+ }
+ case TIM_DMA_CC1:
+ {
+ status = HAL_DMA_Abort_IT(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC1]);
+ break;
+ }
+ case TIM_DMA_CC2:
+ {
+ status = HAL_DMA_Abort_IT(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC2]);
+ break;
+ }
+ case TIM_DMA_CC3:
+ {
+ status = HAL_DMA_Abort_IT(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC3]);
+ break;
+ }
+ case TIM_DMA_CC4:
+ {
+ status = HAL_DMA_Abort_IT(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC4]);
+ break;
+ }
+ case TIM_DMA_TRIGGER:
+ {
+ status = HAL_DMA_Abort_IT(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_TRIGGER]);
+ break;
+ }
+ default:
+ break;
+ }
+
+ if (HAL_OK == status)
+ {
+ /* Disable the TIM Update DMA request */
+ __HAL_TIM_DISABLE_DMA(htim, BurstRequestSrc);
+ }
+
+ /* Return function status */
+ return status;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Generate a software event
+ * @param htim TIM handle
+ * @param EventSource specifies the event source.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_EVENTSOURCE_UPDATE: Timer update Event source
+ * @arg TIM_EVENTSOURCE_CC1: Timer Capture Compare 1 Event source
+ * @arg TIM_EVENTSOURCE_CC2: Timer Capture Compare 2 Event source
+ * @arg TIM_EVENTSOURCE_CC3: Timer Capture Compare 3 Event source
+ * @arg TIM_EVENTSOURCE_CC4: Timer Capture Compare 4 Event source
+ * @arg TIM_EVENTSOURCE_TRIGGER: Timer Trigger Event source
+ * @note Basic timers can only generate an update event.
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_GenerateEvent(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, uint32_t EventSource)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_EVENT_SOURCE(EventSource));
+
+ /* Process Locked */
+ __HAL_LOCK(htim);
+
+ /* Change the TIM state */
+ htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_BUSY;
+
+ /* Set the event sources */
+ htim->Instance->EGR = EventSource;
+
+ /* Change the TIM state */
+ htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_READY;
+
+ __HAL_UNLOCK(htim);
+
+ /* Return function status */
+ return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Configures the OCRef clear feature
+ * @param htim TIM handle
+ * @param sClearInputConfig pointer to a TIM_ClearInputConfigTypeDef structure that
+ * contains the OCREF clear feature and parameters for the TIM peripheral.
+ * @param Channel specifies the TIM Channel
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_1: TIM Channel 1
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_2: TIM Channel 2
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_3: TIM Channel 3
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_4: TIM Channel 4
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_ConfigOCrefClear(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim,
+ TIM_ClearInputConfigTypeDef *sClearInputConfig,
+ uint32_t Channel)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_OCXREF_CLEAR_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_CLEARINPUT_SOURCE(sClearInputConfig->ClearInputSource));
+
+ /* Process Locked */
+ __HAL_LOCK(htim);
+
+ htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_BUSY;
+
+ switch (sClearInputConfig->ClearInputSource)
+ {
+ case TIM_CLEARINPUTSOURCE_NONE:
+ {
+ /* Clear the OCREF clear selection bit and the the ETR Bits */
+ CLEAR_BIT(htim->Instance->SMCR, (TIM_SMCR_OCCS | TIM_SMCR_ETF | TIM_SMCR_ETPS | TIM_SMCR_ECE | TIM_SMCR_ETP));
+ break;
+ }
+ case TIM_CLEARINPUTSOURCE_OCREFCLR:
+ {
+ /* Clear the OCREF clear selection bit */
+ CLEAR_BIT(htim->Instance->SMCR, TIM_SMCR_OCCS);
+ }
+ break;
+
+ case TIM_CLEARINPUTSOURCE_ETR:
+ {
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_CLEARINPUT_POLARITY(sClearInputConfig->ClearInputPolarity));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_CLEARINPUT_PRESCALER(sClearInputConfig->ClearInputPrescaler));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_CLEARINPUT_FILTER(sClearInputConfig->ClearInputFilter));
+
+ /* When OCRef clear feature is used with ETR source, ETR prescaler must be off */
+ if (sClearInputConfig->ClearInputPrescaler != TIM_CLEARINPUTPRESCALER_DIV1)
+ {
+ htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_READY;
+ __HAL_UNLOCK(htim);
+ return HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+
+ TIM_ETR_SetConfig(htim->Instance,
+ sClearInputConfig->ClearInputPrescaler,
+ sClearInputConfig->ClearInputPolarity,
+ sClearInputConfig->ClearInputFilter);
+
+ /* Set the OCREF clear selection bit */
+ SET_BIT(htim->Instance->SMCR, TIM_SMCR_OCCS);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ default:
+ break;
+ }
+
+ switch (Channel)
+ {
+ case TIM_CHANNEL_1:
+ {
+ if (sClearInputConfig->ClearInputState != (uint32_t)DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the OCREF clear feature for Channel 1 */
+ SET_BIT(htim->Instance->CCMR1, TIM_CCMR1_OC1CE);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the OCREF clear feature for Channel 1 */
+ CLEAR_BIT(htim->Instance->CCMR1, TIM_CCMR1_OC1CE);
+ }
+ break;
+ }
+ case TIM_CHANNEL_2:
+ {
+ if (sClearInputConfig->ClearInputState != (uint32_t)DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the OCREF clear feature for Channel 2 */
+ SET_BIT(htim->Instance->CCMR1, TIM_CCMR1_OC2CE);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the OCREF clear feature for Channel 2 */
+ CLEAR_BIT(htim->Instance->CCMR1, TIM_CCMR1_OC2CE);
+ }
+ break;
+ }
+ case TIM_CHANNEL_3:
+ {
+ if (sClearInputConfig->ClearInputState != (uint32_t)DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the OCREF clear feature for Channel 3 */
+ SET_BIT(htim->Instance->CCMR2, TIM_CCMR2_OC3CE);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the OCREF clear feature for Channel 3 */
+ CLEAR_BIT(htim->Instance->CCMR2, TIM_CCMR2_OC3CE);
+ }
+ break;
+ }
+ case TIM_CHANNEL_4:
+ {
+ if (sClearInputConfig->ClearInputState != (uint32_t)DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the OCREF clear feature for Channel 4 */
+ SET_BIT(htim->Instance->CCMR2, TIM_CCMR2_OC4CE);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the OCREF clear feature for Channel 4 */
+ CLEAR_BIT(htim->Instance->CCMR2, TIM_CCMR2_OC4CE);
+ }
+ break;
+ }
+ default:
+ break;
+ }
+
+ htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_READY;
+
+ __HAL_UNLOCK(htim);
+
+ return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Configures the clock source to be used
+ * @param htim TIM handle
+ * @param sClockSourceConfig pointer to a TIM_ClockConfigTypeDef structure that
+ * contains the clock source information for the TIM peripheral.
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_ConfigClockSource(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, TIM_ClockConfigTypeDef *sClockSourceConfig)
+{
+ uint32_t tmpsmcr;
+
+ /* Process Locked */
+ __HAL_LOCK(htim);
+
+ htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_BUSY;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_CLOCKSOURCE(sClockSourceConfig->ClockSource));
+
+ /* Reset the SMS, TS, ECE, ETPS and ETRF bits */
+ tmpsmcr = htim->Instance->SMCR;
+ tmpsmcr &= ~(TIM_SMCR_SMS | TIM_SMCR_TS);
+ tmpsmcr &= ~(TIM_SMCR_ETF | TIM_SMCR_ETPS | TIM_SMCR_ECE | TIM_SMCR_ETP);
+ htim->Instance->SMCR = tmpsmcr;
+
+ switch (sClockSourceConfig->ClockSource)
+ {
+ case TIM_CLOCKSOURCE_INTERNAL:
+ {
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+ break;
+ }
+
+ case TIM_CLOCKSOURCE_ETRMODE1:
+ {
+ /* Check whether or not the timer instance supports external trigger input mode 1 (ETRF)*/
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_CLOCKSOURCE_ETRMODE1_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+
+ /* Check ETR input conditioning related parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_CLOCKPRESCALER(sClockSourceConfig->ClockPrescaler));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_CLOCKPOLARITY(sClockSourceConfig->ClockPolarity));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_CLOCKFILTER(sClockSourceConfig->ClockFilter));
+
+ /* Configure the ETR Clock source */
+ TIM_ETR_SetConfig(htim->Instance,
+ sClockSourceConfig->ClockPrescaler,
+ sClockSourceConfig->ClockPolarity,
+ sClockSourceConfig->ClockFilter);
+
+ /* Select the External clock mode1 and the ETRF trigger */
+ tmpsmcr = htim->Instance->SMCR;
+ tmpsmcr |= (TIM_SLAVEMODE_EXTERNAL1 | TIM_CLOCKSOURCE_ETRMODE1);
+ /* Write to TIMx SMCR */
+ htim->Instance->SMCR = tmpsmcr;
+ break;
+ }
+
+ case TIM_CLOCKSOURCE_ETRMODE2:
+ {
+ /* Check whether or not the timer instance supports external trigger input mode 2 (ETRF)*/
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_CLOCKSOURCE_ETRMODE2_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+
+ /* Check ETR input conditioning related parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_CLOCKPRESCALER(sClockSourceConfig->ClockPrescaler));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_CLOCKPOLARITY(sClockSourceConfig->ClockPolarity));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_CLOCKFILTER(sClockSourceConfig->ClockFilter));
+
+ /* Configure the ETR Clock source */
+ TIM_ETR_SetConfig(htim->Instance,
+ sClockSourceConfig->ClockPrescaler,
+ sClockSourceConfig->ClockPolarity,
+ sClockSourceConfig->ClockFilter);
+ /* Enable the External clock mode2 */
+ htim->Instance->SMCR |= TIM_SMCR_ECE;
+ break;
+ }
+
+ case TIM_CLOCKSOURCE_TI1:
+ {
+ /* Check whether or not the timer instance supports external clock mode 1 */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_CLOCKSOURCE_TIX_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+
+ /* Check TI1 input conditioning related parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_CLOCKPOLARITY(sClockSourceConfig->ClockPolarity));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_CLOCKFILTER(sClockSourceConfig->ClockFilter));
+
+ TIM_TI1_ConfigInputStage(htim->Instance,
+ sClockSourceConfig->ClockPolarity,
+ sClockSourceConfig->ClockFilter);
+ TIM_ITRx_SetConfig(htim->Instance, TIM_CLOCKSOURCE_TI1);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ case TIM_CLOCKSOURCE_TI2:
+ {
+ /* Check whether or not the timer instance supports external clock mode 1 (ETRF)*/
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_CLOCKSOURCE_TIX_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+
+ /* Check TI2 input conditioning related parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_CLOCKPOLARITY(sClockSourceConfig->ClockPolarity));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_CLOCKFILTER(sClockSourceConfig->ClockFilter));
+
+ TIM_TI2_ConfigInputStage(htim->Instance,
+ sClockSourceConfig->ClockPolarity,
+ sClockSourceConfig->ClockFilter);
+ TIM_ITRx_SetConfig(htim->Instance, TIM_CLOCKSOURCE_TI2);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ case TIM_CLOCKSOURCE_TI1ED:
+ {
+ /* Check whether or not the timer instance supports external clock mode 1 */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_CLOCKSOURCE_TIX_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+
+ /* Check TI1 input conditioning related parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_CLOCKPOLARITY(sClockSourceConfig->ClockPolarity));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_CLOCKFILTER(sClockSourceConfig->ClockFilter));
+
+ TIM_TI1_ConfigInputStage(htim->Instance,
+ sClockSourceConfig->ClockPolarity,
+ sClockSourceConfig->ClockFilter);
+ TIM_ITRx_SetConfig(htim->Instance, TIM_CLOCKSOURCE_TI1ED);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ case TIM_CLOCKSOURCE_ITR0:
+ case TIM_CLOCKSOURCE_ITR1:
+ case TIM_CLOCKSOURCE_ITR2:
+ case TIM_CLOCKSOURCE_ITR3:
+ {
+ /* Check whether or not the timer instance supports internal trigger input */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_CLOCKSOURCE_ITRX_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+
+ TIM_ITRx_SetConfig(htim->Instance, sClockSourceConfig->ClockSource);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ default:
+ break;
+ }
+ htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_READY;
+
+ __HAL_UNLOCK(htim);
+
+ return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Selects the signal connected to the TI1 input: direct from CH1_input
+ * or a XOR combination between CH1_input, CH2_input & CH3_input
+ * @param htim TIM handle.
+ * @param TI1_Selection Indicate whether or not channel 1 is connected to the
+ * output of a XOR gate.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_TI1SELECTION_CH1: The TIMx_CH1 pin is connected to TI1 input
+ * @arg TIM_TI1SELECTION_XORCOMBINATION: The TIMx_CH1, CH2 and CH3
+ * pins are connected to the TI1 input (XOR combination)
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_ConfigTI1Input(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, uint32_t TI1_Selection)
+{
+ uint32_t tmpcr2;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_XOR_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_TI1SELECTION(TI1_Selection));
+
+ /* Get the TIMx CR2 register value */
+ tmpcr2 = htim->Instance->CR2;
+
+ /* Reset the TI1 selection */
+ tmpcr2 &= ~TIM_CR2_TI1S;
+
+ /* Set the TI1 selection */
+ tmpcr2 |= TI1_Selection;
+
+ /* Write to TIMxCR2 */
+ htim->Instance->CR2 = tmpcr2;
+
+ return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Configures the TIM in Slave mode
+ * @param htim TIM handle.
+ * @param sSlaveConfig pointer to a TIM_SlaveConfigTypeDef structure that
+ * contains the selected trigger (internal trigger input, filtered
+ * timer input or external trigger input) and the Slave mode
+ * (Disable, Reset, Gated, Trigger, External clock mode 1).
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_SlaveConfigSynchro(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, TIM_SlaveConfigTypeDef *sSlaveConfig)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_SLAVE_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_SLAVE_MODE(sSlaveConfig->SlaveMode));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_TRIGGER_SELECTION(sSlaveConfig->InputTrigger));
+
+ __HAL_LOCK(htim);
+
+ htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_BUSY;
+
+ if(TIM_SlaveTimer_SetConfig(htim, sSlaveConfig) != HAL_OK)
+ {
+ htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_READY;
+ __HAL_UNLOCK(htim);
+ return HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+
+ /* Disable Trigger Interrupt */
+ __HAL_TIM_DISABLE_IT(htim, TIM_IT_TRIGGER);
+
+ /* Disable Trigger DMA request */
+ __HAL_TIM_DISABLE_DMA(htim, TIM_DMA_TRIGGER);
+
+ htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_READY;
+
+ __HAL_UNLOCK(htim);
+
+ return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Configures the TIM in Slave mode in interrupt mode
+ * @param htim TIM handle.
+ * @param sSlaveConfig pointer to a TIM_SlaveConfigTypeDef structure that
+ * contains the selected trigger (internal trigger input, filtered
+ * timer input or external trigger input) and the Slave mode
+ * (Disable, Reset, Gated, Trigger, External clock mode 1).
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_SlaveConfigSynchro_IT(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim,
+ TIM_SlaveConfigTypeDef *sSlaveConfig)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_SLAVE_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_SLAVE_MODE(sSlaveConfig->SlaveMode));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_TRIGGER_SELECTION(sSlaveConfig->InputTrigger));
+
+ __HAL_LOCK(htim);
+
+ htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_BUSY;
+
+ if(TIM_SlaveTimer_SetConfig(htim, sSlaveConfig) != HAL_OK)
+ {
+ htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_READY;
+ __HAL_UNLOCK(htim);
+ return HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+
+ /* Enable Trigger Interrupt */
+ __HAL_TIM_ENABLE_IT(htim, TIM_IT_TRIGGER);
+
+ /* Disable Trigger DMA request */
+ __HAL_TIM_DISABLE_DMA(htim, TIM_DMA_TRIGGER);
+
+ htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_READY;
+
+ __HAL_UNLOCK(htim);
+
+ return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Read the captured value from Capture Compare unit
+ * @param htim TIM handle.
+ * @param Channel TIM Channels to be enabled
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_1: TIM Channel 1 selected
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_2: TIM Channel 2 selected
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_3: TIM Channel 3 selected
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_4: TIM Channel 4 selected
+ * @retval Captured value
+ */
+uint32_t HAL_TIM_ReadCapturedValue(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, uint32_t Channel)
+{
+ uint32_t tmpreg = 0U;
+
+ switch (Channel)
+ {
+ case TIM_CHANNEL_1:
+ {
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_CC1_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+
+ /* Return the capture 1 value */
+ tmpreg = htim->Instance->CCR1;
+
+ break;
+ }
+ case TIM_CHANNEL_2:
+ {
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_CC2_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+
+ /* Return the capture 2 value */
+ tmpreg = htim->Instance->CCR2;
+
+ break;
+ }
+
+ case TIM_CHANNEL_3:
+ {
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_CC3_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+
+ /* Return the capture 3 value */
+ tmpreg = htim->Instance->CCR3;
+
+ break;
+ }
+
+ case TIM_CHANNEL_4:
+ {
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_CC4_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+
+ /* Return the capture 4 value */
+ tmpreg = htim->Instance->CCR4;
+
+ break;
+ }
+
+ default:
+ break;
+ }
+
+ return tmpreg;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup TIM_Exported_Functions_Group9 TIM Callbacks functions
+ * @brief TIM Callbacks functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ==============================================================================
+ ##### TIM Callbacks functions #####
+ ==============================================================================
+ [..]
+ This section provides TIM callback functions:
+ (+) TIM Period elapsed callback
+ (+) TIM Output Compare callback
+ (+) TIM Input capture callback
+ (+) TIM Trigger callback
+ (+) TIM Error callback
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Period elapsed callback in non-blocking mode
+ * @param htim TIM handle
+ * @retval None
+ */
+__weak void HAL_TIM_PeriodElapsedCallback(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim)
+{
+ /* Prevent unused argument(s) compilation warning */
+ UNUSED(htim);
+
+ /* NOTE : This function should not be modified, when the callback is needed,
+ the HAL_TIM_PeriodElapsedCallback could be implemented in the user file
+ */
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Period elapsed half complete callback in non-blocking mode
+ * @param htim TIM handle
+ * @retval None
+ */
+__weak void HAL_TIM_PeriodElapsedHalfCpltCallback(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim)
+{
+ /* Prevent unused argument(s) compilation warning */
+ UNUSED(htim);
+
+ /* NOTE : This function should not be modified, when the callback is needed,
+ the HAL_TIM_PeriodElapsedHalfCpltCallback could be implemented in the user file
+ */
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Output Compare callback in non-blocking mode
+ * @param htim TIM OC handle
+ * @retval None
+ */
+__weak void HAL_TIM_OC_DelayElapsedCallback(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim)
+{
+ /* Prevent unused argument(s) compilation warning */
+ UNUSED(htim);
+
+ /* NOTE : This function should not be modified, when the callback is needed,
+ the HAL_TIM_OC_DelayElapsedCallback could be implemented in the user file
+ */
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Input Capture callback in non-blocking mode
+ * @param htim TIM IC handle
+ * @retval None
+ */
+__weak void HAL_TIM_IC_CaptureCallback(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim)
+{
+ /* Prevent unused argument(s) compilation warning */
+ UNUSED(htim);
+
+ /* NOTE : This function should not be modified, when the callback is needed,
+ the HAL_TIM_IC_CaptureCallback could be implemented in the user file
+ */
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Input Capture half complete callback in non-blocking mode
+ * @param htim TIM IC handle
+ * @retval None
+ */
+__weak void HAL_TIM_IC_CaptureHalfCpltCallback(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim)
+{
+ /* Prevent unused argument(s) compilation warning */
+ UNUSED(htim);
+
+ /* NOTE : This function should not be modified, when the callback is needed,
+ the HAL_TIM_IC_CaptureHalfCpltCallback could be implemented in the user file
+ */
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief PWM Pulse finished callback in non-blocking mode
+ * @param htim TIM handle
+ * @retval None
+ */
+__weak void HAL_TIM_PWM_PulseFinishedCallback(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim)
+{
+ /* Prevent unused argument(s) compilation warning */
+ UNUSED(htim);
+
+ /* NOTE : This function should not be modified, when the callback is needed,
+ the HAL_TIM_PWM_PulseFinishedCallback could be implemented in the user file
+ */
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief PWM Pulse finished half complete callback in non-blocking mode
+ * @param htim TIM handle
+ * @retval None
+ */
+__weak void HAL_TIM_PWM_PulseFinishedHalfCpltCallback(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim)
+{
+ /* Prevent unused argument(s) compilation warning */
+ UNUSED(htim);
+
+ /* NOTE : This function should not be modified, when the callback is needed,
+ the HAL_TIM_PWM_PulseFinishedHalfCpltCallback could be implemented in the user file
+ */
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Hall Trigger detection callback in non-blocking mode
+ * @param htim TIM handle
+ * @retval None
+ */
+__weak void HAL_TIM_TriggerCallback(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim)
+{
+ /* Prevent unused argument(s) compilation warning */
+ UNUSED(htim);
+
+ /* NOTE : This function should not be modified, when the callback is needed,
+ the HAL_TIM_TriggerCallback could be implemented in the user file
+ */
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Hall Trigger detection half complete callback in non-blocking mode
+ * @param htim TIM handle
+ * @retval None
+ */
+__weak void HAL_TIM_TriggerHalfCpltCallback(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim)
+{
+ /* Prevent unused argument(s) compilation warning */
+ UNUSED(htim);
+
+ /* NOTE : This function should not be modified, when the callback is needed,
+ the HAL_TIM_TriggerHalfCpltCallback could be implemented in the user file
+ */
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Timer error callback in non-blocking mode
+ * @param htim TIM handle
+ * @retval None
+ */
+__weak void HAL_TIM_ErrorCallback(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim)
+{
+ /* Prevent unused argument(s) compilation warning */
+ UNUSED(htim);
+
+ /* NOTE : This function should not be modified, when the callback is needed,
+ the HAL_TIM_ErrorCallback could be implemented in the user file
+ */
+}
+
+#if (USE_HAL_TIM_REGISTER_CALLBACKS == 1)
+/**
+ * @brief Register a User TIM callback to be used instead of the weak predefined callback
+ * @param htim tim handle
+ * @param CallbackID ID of the callback to be registered
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg @ref HAL_TIM_BASE_MSPINIT_CB_ID Base MspInit Callback ID
+ * @arg @ref HAL_TIM_BASE_MSPDEINIT_CB_ID Base MspDeInit Callback ID
+ * @arg @ref HAL_TIM_IC_MSPINIT_CB_ID IC MspInit Callback ID
+ * @arg @ref HAL_TIM_IC_MSPDEINIT_CB_ID IC MspDeInit Callback ID
+ * @arg @ref HAL_TIM_OC_MSPINIT_CB_ID OC MspInit Callback ID
+ * @arg @ref HAL_TIM_OC_MSPDEINIT_CB_ID OC MspDeInit Callback ID
+ * @arg @ref HAL_TIM_PWM_MSPINIT_CB_ID PWM MspInit Callback ID
+ * @arg @ref HAL_TIM_PWM_MSPDEINIT_CB_ID PWM MspDeInit Callback ID
+ * @arg @ref HAL_TIM_ONE_PULSE_MSPINIT_CB_ID One Pulse MspInit Callback ID
+ * @arg @ref HAL_TIM_ONE_PULSE_MSPDEINIT_CB_ID One Pulse MspDeInit Callback ID
+ * @arg @ref HAL_TIM_ENCODER_MSPINIT_CB_ID Encoder MspInit Callback ID
+ * @arg @ref HAL_TIM_ENCODER_MSPDEINIT_CB_ID Encoder MspDeInit Callback ID
+ * @arg @ref HAL_TIM_PERIOD_ELAPSED_CB_ID Period Elapsed Callback ID
+ * @arg @ref HAL_TIM_PERIOD_ELAPSED_HALF_CB_ID Period Elapsed half complete Callback ID
+ * @arg @ref HAL_TIM_TRIGGER_CB_ID Trigger Callback ID
+ * @arg @ref HAL_TIM_TRIGGER_HALF_CB_ID Trigger half complete Callback ID
+ * @arg @ref HAL_TIM_IC_CAPTURE_CB_ID Input Capture Callback ID
+ * @arg @ref HAL_TIM_IC_CAPTURE_HALF_CB_ID Input Capture half complete Callback ID
+ * @arg @ref HAL_TIM_OC_DELAY_ELAPSED_CB_ID Output Compare Delay Elapsed Callback ID
+ * @arg @ref HAL_TIM_PWM_PULSE_FINISHED_CB_ID PWM Pulse Finished Callback ID
+ * @arg @ref HAL_TIM_PWM_PULSE_FINISHED_HALF_CB_ID PWM Pulse Finished half complete Callback ID
+ * @arg @ref HAL_TIM_ERROR_CB_ID Error Callback ID
+ * @param pCallback pointer to the callback function
+ * @retval status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_RegisterCallback(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, HAL_TIM_CallbackIDTypeDef CallbackID, pTIM_CallbackTypeDef pCallback)
+{
+ HAL_StatusTypeDef status = HAL_OK;
+
+ if (pCallback == NULL)
+ {
+ return HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+ /* Process locked */
+ __HAL_LOCK(htim);
+
+ if (htim->State == HAL_TIM_STATE_READY)
+ {
+ switch (CallbackID)
+ {
+ case HAL_TIM_BASE_MSPINIT_CB_ID :
+ htim->Base_MspInitCallback = pCallback;
+ break;
+
+ case HAL_TIM_BASE_MSPDEINIT_CB_ID :
+ htim->Base_MspDeInitCallback = pCallback;
+ break;
+
+ case HAL_TIM_IC_MSPINIT_CB_ID :
+ htim->IC_MspInitCallback = pCallback;
+ break;
+
+ case HAL_TIM_IC_MSPDEINIT_CB_ID :
+ htim->IC_MspDeInitCallback = pCallback;
+ break;
+
+ case HAL_TIM_OC_MSPINIT_CB_ID :
+ htim->OC_MspInitCallback = pCallback;
+ break;
+
+ case HAL_TIM_OC_MSPDEINIT_CB_ID :
+ htim->OC_MspDeInitCallback = pCallback;
+ break;
+
+ case HAL_TIM_PWM_MSPINIT_CB_ID :
+ htim->PWM_MspInitCallback = pCallback;
+ break;
+
+ case HAL_TIM_PWM_MSPDEINIT_CB_ID :
+ htim->PWM_MspDeInitCallback = pCallback;
+ break;
+
+ case HAL_TIM_ONE_PULSE_MSPINIT_CB_ID :
+ htim->OnePulse_MspInitCallback = pCallback;
+ break;
+
+ case HAL_TIM_ONE_PULSE_MSPDEINIT_CB_ID :
+ htim->OnePulse_MspDeInitCallback = pCallback;
+ break;
+
+ case HAL_TIM_ENCODER_MSPINIT_CB_ID :
+ htim->Encoder_MspInitCallback = pCallback;
+ break;
+
+ case HAL_TIM_ENCODER_MSPDEINIT_CB_ID :
+ htim->Encoder_MspDeInitCallback = pCallback;
+ break;
+
+ case HAL_TIM_PERIOD_ELAPSED_CB_ID :
+ htim->PeriodElapsedCallback = pCallback;
+ break;
+
+ case HAL_TIM_PERIOD_ELAPSED_HALF_CB_ID :
+ htim->PeriodElapsedHalfCpltCallback = pCallback;
+ break;
+
+ case HAL_TIM_TRIGGER_CB_ID :
+ htim->TriggerCallback = pCallback;
+ break;
+
+ case HAL_TIM_TRIGGER_HALF_CB_ID :
+ htim->TriggerHalfCpltCallback = pCallback;
+ break;
+
+ case HAL_TIM_IC_CAPTURE_CB_ID :
+ htim->IC_CaptureCallback = pCallback;
+ break;
+
+ case HAL_TIM_IC_CAPTURE_HALF_CB_ID :
+ htim->IC_CaptureHalfCpltCallback = pCallback;
+ break;
+
+ case HAL_TIM_OC_DELAY_ELAPSED_CB_ID :
+ htim->OC_DelayElapsedCallback = pCallback;
+ break;
+
+ case HAL_TIM_PWM_PULSE_FINISHED_CB_ID :
+ htim->PWM_PulseFinishedCallback = pCallback;
+ break;
+
+ case HAL_TIM_PWM_PULSE_FINISHED_HALF_CB_ID :
+ htim->PWM_PulseFinishedHalfCpltCallback = pCallback;
+ break;
+
+ case HAL_TIM_ERROR_CB_ID :
+ htim->ErrorCallback = pCallback;
+ break;
+
+ default :
+ /* Return error status */
+ status = HAL_ERROR;
+ break;
+ }
+ }
+ else if (htim->State == HAL_TIM_STATE_RESET)
+ {
+ switch (CallbackID)
+ {
+ case HAL_TIM_BASE_MSPINIT_CB_ID :
+ htim->Base_MspInitCallback = pCallback;
+ break;
+
+ case HAL_TIM_BASE_MSPDEINIT_CB_ID :
+ htim->Base_MspDeInitCallback = pCallback;
+ break;
+
+ case HAL_TIM_IC_MSPINIT_CB_ID :
+ htim->IC_MspInitCallback = pCallback;
+ break;
+
+ case HAL_TIM_IC_MSPDEINIT_CB_ID :
+ htim->IC_MspDeInitCallback = pCallback;
+ break;
+
+ case HAL_TIM_OC_MSPINIT_CB_ID :
+ htim->OC_MspInitCallback = pCallback;
+ break;
+
+ case HAL_TIM_OC_MSPDEINIT_CB_ID :
+ htim->OC_MspDeInitCallback = pCallback;
+ break;
+
+ case HAL_TIM_PWM_MSPINIT_CB_ID :
+ htim->PWM_MspInitCallback = pCallback;
+ break;
+
+ case HAL_TIM_PWM_MSPDEINIT_CB_ID :
+ htim->PWM_MspDeInitCallback = pCallback;
+ break;
+
+ case HAL_TIM_ONE_PULSE_MSPINIT_CB_ID :
+ htim->OnePulse_MspInitCallback = pCallback;
+ break;
+
+ case HAL_TIM_ONE_PULSE_MSPDEINIT_CB_ID :
+ htim->OnePulse_MspDeInitCallback = pCallback;
+ break;
+
+ case HAL_TIM_ENCODER_MSPINIT_CB_ID :
+ htim->Encoder_MspInitCallback = pCallback;
+ break;
+
+ case HAL_TIM_ENCODER_MSPDEINIT_CB_ID :
+ htim->Encoder_MspDeInitCallback = pCallback;
+ break;
+
+ default :
+ /* Return error status */
+ status = HAL_ERROR;
+ break;
+ }
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Return error status */
+ status = HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+
+ /* Release Lock */
+ __HAL_UNLOCK(htim);
+
+ return status;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Unregister a TIM callback
+ * TIM callback is redirected to the weak predefined callback
+ * @param htim tim handle
+ * @param CallbackID ID of the callback to be unregistered
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg @ref HAL_TIM_BASE_MSPINIT_CB_ID Base MspInit Callback ID
+ * @arg @ref HAL_TIM_BASE_MSPDEINIT_CB_ID Base MspDeInit Callback ID
+ * @arg @ref HAL_TIM_IC_MSPINIT_CB_ID IC MspInit Callback ID
+ * @arg @ref HAL_TIM_IC_MSPDEINIT_CB_ID IC MspDeInit Callback ID
+ * @arg @ref HAL_TIM_OC_MSPINIT_CB_ID OC MspInit Callback ID
+ * @arg @ref HAL_TIM_OC_MSPDEINIT_CB_ID OC MspDeInit Callback ID
+ * @arg @ref HAL_TIM_PWM_MSPINIT_CB_ID PWM MspInit Callback ID
+ * @arg @ref HAL_TIM_PWM_MSPDEINIT_CB_ID PWM MspDeInit Callback ID
+ * @arg @ref HAL_TIM_ONE_PULSE_MSPINIT_CB_ID One Pulse MspInit Callback ID
+ * @arg @ref HAL_TIM_ONE_PULSE_MSPDEINIT_CB_ID One Pulse MspDeInit Callback ID
+ * @arg @ref HAL_TIM_ENCODER_MSPINIT_CB_ID Encoder MspInit Callback ID
+ * @arg @ref HAL_TIM_ENCODER_MSPDEINIT_CB_ID Encoder MspDeInit Callback ID
+ * @arg @ref HAL_TIM_PERIOD_ELAPSED_CB_ID Period Elapsed Callback ID
+ * @arg @ref HAL_TIM_PERIOD_ELAPSED_HALF_CB_ID Period Elapsed half complete Callback ID
+ * @arg @ref HAL_TIM_TRIGGER_CB_ID Trigger Callback ID
+ * @arg @ref HAL_TIM_TRIGGER_HALF_CB_ID Trigger half complete Callback ID
+ * @arg @ref HAL_TIM_IC_CAPTURE_CB_ID Input Capture Callback ID
+ * @arg @ref HAL_TIM_IC_CAPTURE_HALF_CB_ID Input Capture half complete Callback ID
+ * @arg @ref HAL_TIM_OC_DELAY_ELAPSED_CB_ID Output Compare Delay Elapsed Callback ID
+ * @arg @ref HAL_TIM_PWM_PULSE_FINISHED_CB_ID PWM Pulse Finished Callback ID
+ * @arg @ref HAL_TIM_PWM_PULSE_FINISHED_HALF_CB_ID PWM Pulse Finished half complete Callback ID
+ * @arg @ref HAL_TIM_ERROR_CB_ID Error Callback ID
+ * @retval status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_UnRegisterCallback(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, HAL_TIM_CallbackIDTypeDef CallbackID)
+{
+ HAL_StatusTypeDef status = HAL_OK;
+
+ /* Process locked */
+ __HAL_LOCK(htim);
+
+ if (htim->State == HAL_TIM_STATE_READY)
+ {
+ switch (CallbackID)
+ {
+ case HAL_TIM_BASE_MSPINIT_CB_ID :
+ htim->Base_MspInitCallback = HAL_TIM_Base_MspInit; /* Legacy weak Base MspInit Callback */
+ break;
+
+ case HAL_TIM_BASE_MSPDEINIT_CB_ID :
+ htim->Base_MspDeInitCallback = HAL_TIM_Base_MspDeInit; /* Legacy weak Base Msp DeInit Callback */
+ break;
+
+ case HAL_TIM_IC_MSPINIT_CB_ID :
+ htim->IC_MspInitCallback = HAL_TIM_IC_MspInit; /* Legacy weak IC Msp Init Callback */
+ break;
+
+ case HAL_TIM_IC_MSPDEINIT_CB_ID :
+ htim->IC_MspDeInitCallback = HAL_TIM_IC_MspDeInit; /* Legacy weak IC Msp DeInit Callback */
+ break;
+
+ case HAL_TIM_OC_MSPINIT_CB_ID :
+ htim->OC_MspInitCallback = HAL_TIM_OC_MspInit; /* Legacy weak OC Msp Init Callback */
+ break;
+
+ case HAL_TIM_OC_MSPDEINIT_CB_ID :
+ htim->OC_MspDeInitCallback = HAL_TIM_OC_MspDeInit; /* Legacy weak OC Msp DeInit Callback */
+ break;
+
+ case HAL_TIM_PWM_MSPINIT_CB_ID :
+ htim->PWM_MspInitCallback = HAL_TIM_PWM_MspInit; /* Legacy weak PWM Msp Init Callback */
+ break;
+
+ case HAL_TIM_PWM_MSPDEINIT_CB_ID :
+ htim->PWM_MspDeInitCallback = HAL_TIM_PWM_MspDeInit; /* Legacy weak PWM Msp DeInit Callback */
+ break;
+
+ case HAL_TIM_ONE_PULSE_MSPINIT_CB_ID :
+ htim->OnePulse_MspInitCallback = HAL_TIM_OnePulse_MspInit; /* Legacy weak One Pulse Msp Init Callback */
+ break;
+
+ case HAL_TIM_ONE_PULSE_MSPDEINIT_CB_ID :
+ htim->OnePulse_MspDeInitCallback = HAL_TIM_OnePulse_MspDeInit; /* Legacy weak One Pulse Msp DeInit Callback */
+ break;
+
+ case HAL_TIM_ENCODER_MSPINIT_CB_ID :
+ htim->Encoder_MspInitCallback = HAL_TIM_Encoder_MspInit; /* Legacy weak Encoder Msp Init Callback */
+ break;
+
+ case HAL_TIM_ENCODER_MSPDEINIT_CB_ID :
+ htim->Encoder_MspDeInitCallback = HAL_TIM_Encoder_MspDeInit; /* Legacy weak Encoder Msp DeInit Callback */
+ break;
+
+ case HAL_TIM_PERIOD_ELAPSED_CB_ID :
+ htim->PeriodElapsedCallback = HAL_TIM_PeriodElapsedCallback; /* Legacy weak Period Elapsed Callback */
+ break;
+
+ case HAL_TIM_PERIOD_ELAPSED_HALF_CB_ID :
+ htim->PeriodElapsedHalfCpltCallback = HAL_TIM_PeriodElapsedHalfCpltCallback; /* Legacy weak Period Elapsed half complete Callback */
+ break;
+
+ case HAL_TIM_TRIGGER_CB_ID :
+ htim->TriggerCallback = HAL_TIM_TriggerCallback; /* Legacy weak Trigger Callback */
+ break;
+
+ case HAL_TIM_TRIGGER_HALF_CB_ID :
+ htim->TriggerHalfCpltCallback = HAL_TIM_TriggerHalfCpltCallback; /* Legacy weak Trigger half complete Callback */
+ break;
+
+ case HAL_TIM_IC_CAPTURE_CB_ID :
+ htim->IC_CaptureCallback = HAL_TIM_IC_CaptureCallback; /* Legacy weak IC Capture Callback */
+ break;
+
+ case HAL_TIM_IC_CAPTURE_HALF_CB_ID :
+ htim->IC_CaptureHalfCpltCallback = HAL_TIM_IC_CaptureHalfCpltCallback; /* Legacy weak IC Capture half complete Callback */
+ break;
+
+ case HAL_TIM_OC_DELAY_ELAPSED_CB_ID :
+ htim->OC_DelayElapsedCallback = HAL_TIM_OC_DelayElapsedCallback; /* Legacy weak OC Delay Elapsed Callback */
+ break;
+
+ case HAL_TIM_PWM_PULSE_FINISHED_CB_ID :
+ htim->PWM_PulseFinishedCallback = HAL_TIM_PWM_PulseFinishedCallback; /* Legacy weak PWM Pulse Finished Callback */
+ break;
+
+ case HAL_TIM_PWM_PULSE_FINISHED_HALF_CB_ID :
+ htim->PWM_PulseFinishedHalfCpltCallback = HAL_TIM_PWM_PulseFinishedHalfCpltCallback; /* Legacy weak PWM Pulse Finished half complete Callback */
+ break;
+
+ case HAL_TIM_ERROR_CB_ID :
+ htim->ErrorCallback = HAL_TIM_ErrorCallback; /* Legacy weak Error Callback */
+ break;
+
+ default :
+ /* Return error status */
+ status = HAL_ERROR;
+ break;
+ }
+ }
+ else if (htim->State == HAL_TIM_STATE_RESET)
+ {
+ switch (CallbackID)
+ {
+ case HAL_TIM_BASE_MSPINIT_CB_ID :
+ htim->Base_MspInitCallback = HAL_TIM_Base_MspInit; /* Legacy weak Base MspInit Callback */
+ break;
+
+ case HAL_TIM_BASE_MSPDEINIT_CB_ID :
+ htim->Base_MspDeInitCallback = HAL_TIM_Base_MspDeInit; /* Legacy weak Base Msp DeInit Callback */
+ break;
+
+ case HAL_TIM_IC_MSPINIT_CB_ID :
+ htim->IC_MspInitCallback = HAL_TIM_IC_MspInit; /* Legacy weak IC Msp Init Callback */
+ break;
+
+ case HAL_TIM_IC_MSPDEINIT_CB_ID :
+ htim->IC_MspDeInitCallback = HAL_TIM_IC_MspDeInit; /* Legacy weak IC Msp DeInit Callback */
+ break;
+
+ case HAL_TIM_OC_MSPINIT_CB_ID :
+ htim->OC_MspInitCallback = HAL_TIM_OC_MspInit; /* Legacy weak OC Msp Init Callback */
+ break;
+
+ case HAL_TIM_OC_MSPDEINIT_CB_ID :
+ htim->OC_MspDeInitCallback = HAL_TIM_OC_MspDeInit; /* Legacy weak OC Msp DeInit Callback */
+ break;
+
+ case HAL_TIM_PWM_MSPINIT_CB_ID :
+ htim->PWM_MspInitCallback = HAL_TIM_PWM_MspInit; /* Legacy weak PWM Msp Init Callback */
+ break;
+
+ case HAL_TIM_PWM_MSPDEINIT_CB_ID :
+ htim->PWM_MspDeInitCallback = HAL_TIM_PWM_MspDeInit; /* Legacy weak PWM Msp DeInit Callback */
+ break;
+
+ case HAL_TIM_ONE_PULSE_MSPINIT_CB_ID :
+ htim->OnePulse_MspInitCallback = HAL_TIM_OnePulse_MspInit; /* Legacy weak One Pulse Msp Init Callback */
+ break;
+
+ case HAL_TIM_ONE_PULSE_MSPDEINIT_CB_ID :
+ htim->OnePulse_MspDeInitCallback = HAL_TIM_OnePulse_MspDeInit; /* Legacy weak One Pulse Msp DeInit Callback */
+ break;
+
+ case HAL_TIM_ENCODER_MSPINIT_CB_ID :
+ htim->Encoder_MspInitCallback = HAL_TIM_Encoder_MspInit; /* Legacy weak Encoder Msp Init Callback */
+ break;
+
+ case HAL_TIM_ENCODER_MSPDEINIT_CB_ID :
+ htim->Encoder_MspDeInitCallback = HAL_TIM_Encoder_MspDeInit; /* Legacy weak Encoder Msp DeInit Callback */
+ break;
+
+ default :
+ /* Return error status */
+ status = HAL_ERROR;
+ break;
+ }
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Return error status */
+ status = HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+
+ /* Release Lock */
+ __HAL_UNLOCK(htim);
+
+ return status;
+}
+#endif /* USE_HAL_TIM_REGISTER_CALLBACKS */
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup TIM_Exported_Functions_Group10 TIM Peripheral State functions
+ * @brief TIM Peripheral State functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ==============================================================================
+ ##### Peripheral State functions #####
+ ==============================================================================
+ [..]
+ This subsection permits to get in run-time the status of the peripheral
+ and the data flow.
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Return the TIM Base handle state.
+ * @param htim TIM Base handle
+ * @retval HAL state
+ */
+HAL_TIM_StateTypeDef HAL_TIM_Base_GetState(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim)
+{
+ return htim->State;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Return the TIM OC handle state.
+ * @param htim TIM Output Compare handle
+ * @retval HAL state
+ */
+HAL_TIM_StateTypeDef HAL_TIM_OC_GetState(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim)
+{
+ return htim->State;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Return the TIM PWM handle state.
+ * @param htim TIM handle
+ * @retval HAL state
+ */
+HAL_TIM_StateTypeDef HAL_TIM_PWM_GetState(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim)
+{
+ return htim->State;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Return the TIM Input Capture handle state.
+ * @param htim TIM IC handle
+ * @retval HAL state
+ */
+HAL_TIM_StateTypeDef HAL_TIM_IC_GetState(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim)
+{
+ return htim->State;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Return the TIM One Pulse Mode handle state.
+ * @param htim TIM OPM handle
+ * @retval HAL state
+ */
+HAL_TIM_StateTypeDef HAL_TIM_OnePulse_GetState(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim)
+{
+ return htim->State;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Return the TIM Encoder Mode handle state.
+ * @param htim TIM Encoder Interface handle
+ * @retval HAL state
+ */
+HAL_TIM_StateTypeDef HAL_TIM_Encoder_GetState(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim)
+{
+ return htim->State;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup TIM_Private_Functions TIM Private Functions
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief TIM DMA error callback
+ * @param hdma pointer to DMA handle.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void TIM_DMAError(DMA_HandleTypeDef *hdma)
+{
+ TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim = (TIM_HandleTypeDef *)((DMA_HandleTypeDef *)hdma)->Parent;
+
+ htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_READY;
+
+#if (USE_HAL_TIM_REGISTER_CALLBACKS == 1)
+ htim->ErrorCallback(htim);
+#else
+ HAL_TIM_ErrorCallback(htim);
+#endif /* USE_HAL_TIM_REGISTER_CALLBACKS */
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief TIM DMA Delay Pulse complete callback.
+ * @param hdma pointer to DMA handle.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void TIM_DMADelayPulseCplt(DMA_HandleTypeDef *hdma)
+{
+ TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim = (TIM_HandleTypeDef *)((DMA_HandleTypeDef *)hdma)->Parent;
+
+ htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_READY;
+
+ if (hdma == htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC1])
+ {
+ htim->Channel = HAL_TIM_ACTIVE_CHANNEL_1;
+ }
+ else if (hdma == htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC2])
+ {
+ htim->Channel = HAL_TIM_ACTIVE_CHANNEL_2;
+ }
+ else if (hdma == htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC3])
+ {
+ htim->Channel = HAL_TIM_ACTIVE_CHANNEL_3;
+ }
+ else if (hdma == htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC4])
+ {
+ htim->Channel = HAL_TIM_ACTIVE_CHANNEL_4;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* nothing to do */
+ }
+
+#if (USE_HAL_TIM_REGISTER_CALLBACKS == 1)
+ htim->PWM_PulseFinishedCallback(htim);
+#else
+ HAL_TIM_PWM_PulseFinishedCallback(htim);
+#endif /* USE_HAL_TIM_REGISTER_CALLBACKS */
+
+ htim->Channel = HAL_TIM_ACTIVE_CHANNEL_CLEARED;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief TIM DMA Delay Pulse half complete callback.
+ * @param hdma pointer to DMA handle.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void TIM_DMADelayPulseHalfCplt(DMA_HandleTypeDef *hdma)
+{
+ TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim = (TIM_HandleTypeDef *)((DMA_HandleTypeDef *)hdma)->Parent;
+
+ htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_READY;
+
+ if (hdma == htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC1])
+ {
+ htim->Channel = HAL_TIM_ACTIVE_CHANNEL_1;
+ }
+ else if (hdma == htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC2])
+ {
+ htim->Channel = HAL_TIM_ACTIVE_CHANNEL_2;
+ }
+ else if (hdma == htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC3])
+ {
+ htim->Channel = HAL_TIM_ACTIVE_CHANNEL_3;
+ }
+ else if (hdma == htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC4])
+ {
+ htim->Channel = HAL_TIM_ACTIVE_CHANNEL_4;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* nothing to do */
+ }
+
+#if (USE_HAL_TIM_REGISTER_CALLBACKS == 1)
+ htim->PWM_PulseFinishedHalfCpltCallback(htim);
+#else
+ HAL_TIM_PWM_PulseFinishedHalfCpltCallback(htim);
+#endif /* USE_HAL_TIM_REGISTER_CALLBACKS */
+
+ htim->Channel = HAL_TIM_ACTIVE_CHANNEL_CLEARED;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief TIM DMA Capture complete callback.
+ * @param hdma pointer to DMA handle.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void TIM_DMACaptureCplt(DMA_HandleTypeDef *hdma)
+{
+ TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim = (TIM_HandleTypeDef *)((DMA_HandleTypeDef *)hdma)->Parent;
+
+ htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_READY;
+
+ if (hdma == htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC1])
+ {
+ htim->Channel = HAL_TIM_ACTIVE_CHANNEL_1;
+ }
+ else if (hdma == htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC2])
+ {
+ htim->Channel = HAL_TIM_ACTIVE_CHANNEL_2;
+ }
+ else if (hdma == htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC3])
+ {
+ htim->Channel = HAL_TIM_ACTIVE_CHANNEL_3;
+ }
+ else if (hdma == htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC4])
+ {
+ htim->Channel = HAL_TIM_ACTIVE_CHANNEL_4;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* nothing to do */
+ }
+
+#if (USE_HAL_TIM_REGISTER_CALLBACKS == 1)
+ htim->IC_CaptureCallback(htim);
+#else
+ HAL_TIM_IC_CaptureCallback(htim);
+#endif /* USE_HAL_TIM_REGISTER_CALLBACKS */
+
+ htim->Channel = HAL_TIM_ACTIVE_CHANNEL_CLEARED;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief TIM DMA Capture half complete callback.
+ * @param hdma pointer to DMA handle.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void TIM_DMACaptureHalfCplt(DMA_HandleTypeDef *hdma)
+{
+ TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim = (TIM_HandleTypeDef *)((DMA_HandleTypeDef *)hdma)->Parent;
+
+ htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_READY;
+
+ if (hdma == htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC1])
+ {
+ htim->Channel = HAL_TIM_ACTIVE_CHANNEL_1;
+ }
+ else if (hdma == htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC2])
+ {
+ htim->Channel = HAL_TIM_ACTIVE_CHANNEL_2;
+ }
+ else if (hdma == htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC3])
+ {
+ htim->Channel = HAL_TIM_ACTIVE_CHANNEL_3;
+ }
+ else if (hdma == htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC4])
+ {
+ htim->Channel = HAL_TIM_ACTIVE_CHANNEL_4;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* nothing to do */
+ }
+
+#if (USE_HAL_TIM_REGISTER_CALLBACKS == 1)
+ htim->IC_CaptureHalfCpltCallback(htim);
+#else
+ HAL_TIM_IC_CaptureHalfCpltCallback(htim);
+#endif /* USE_HAL_TIM_REGISTER_CALLBACKS */
+
+ htim->Channel = HAL_TIM_ACTIVE_CHANNEL_CLEARED;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief TIM DMA Period Elapse complete callback.
+ * @param hdma pointer to DMA handle.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+static void TIM_DMAPeriodElapsedCplt(DMA_HandleTypeDef *hdma)
+{
+ TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim = (TIM_HandleTypeDef *)((DMA_HandleTypeDef *)hdma)->Parent;
+
+ htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_READY;
+
+#if (USE_HAL_TIM_REGISTER_CALLBACKS == 1)
+ htim->PeriodElapsedCallback(htim);
+#else
+ HAL_TIM_PeriodElapsedCallback(htim);
+#endif /* USE_HAL_TIM_REGISTER_CALLBACKS */
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief TIM DMA Period Elapse half complete callback.
+ * @param hdma pointer to DMA handle.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+static void TIM_DMAPeriodElapsedHalfCplt(DMA_HandleTypeDef *hdma)
+{
+ TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim = (TIM_HandleTypeDef *)((DMA_HandleTypeDef *)hdma)->Parent;
+
+ htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_READY;
+
+#if (USE_HAL_TIM_REGISTER_CALLBACKS == 1)
+ htim->PeriodElapsedHalfCpltCallback(htim);
+#else
+ HAL_TIM_PeriodElapsedHalfCpltCallback(htim);
+#endif /* USE_HAL_TIM_REGISTER_CALLBACKS */
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief TIM DMA Trigger callback.
+ * @param hdma pointer to DMA handle.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+static void TIM_DMATriggerCplt(DMA_HandleTypeDef *hdma)
+{
+ TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim = (TIM_HandleTypeDef *)((DMA_HandleTypeDef *)hdma)->Parent;
+
+ htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_READY;
+
+#if (USE_HAL_TIM_REGISTER_CALLBACKS == 1)
+ htim->TriggerCallback(htim);
+#else
+ HAL_TIM_TriggerCallback(htim);
+#endif /* USE_HAL_TIM_REGISTER_CALLBACKS */
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief TIM DMA Trigger half complete callback.
+ * @param hdma pointer to DMA handle.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+static void TIM_DMATriggerHalfCplt(DMA_HandleTypeDef *hdma)
+{
+ TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim = (TIM_HandleTypeDef *)((DMA_HandleTypeDef *)hdma)->Parent;
+
+ htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_READY;
+
+#if (USE_HAL_TIM_REGISTER_CALLBACKS == 1)
+ htim->TriggerHalfCpltCallback(htim);
+#else
+ HAL_TIM_TriggerHalfCpltCallback(htim);
+#endif /* USE_HAL_TIM_REGISTER_CALLBACKS */
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Time Base configuration
+ * @param TIMx TIM peripheral
+ * @param Structure TIM Base configuration structure
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void TIM_Base_SetConfig(TIM_TypeDef *TIMx, TIM_Base_InitTypeDef *Structure)
+{
+ uint32_t tmpcr1;
+ tmpcr1 = TIMx->CR1;
+
+ /* Set TIM Time Base Unit parameters ---------------------------------------*/
+ if (IS_TIM_COUNTER_MODE_SELECT_INSTANCE(TIMx))
+ {
+ /* Select the Counter Mode */
+ tmpcr1 &= ~(TIM_CR1_DIR | TIM_CR1_CMS);
+ tmpcr1 |= Structure->CounterMode;
+ }
+
+ if (IS_TIM_CLOCK_DIVISION_INSTANCE(TIMx))
+ {
+ /* Set the clock division */
+ tmpcr1 &= ~TIM_CR1_CKD;
+ tmpcr1 |= (uint32_t)Structure->ClockDivision;
+ }
+
+ /* Set the auto-reload preload */
+ MODIFY_REG(tmpcr1, TIM_CR1_ARPE, Structure->AutoReloadPreload);
+
+ TIMx->CR1 = tmpcr1;
+
+ /* Set the Autoreload value */
+ TIMx->ARR = (uint32_t)Structure->Period ;
+
+ /* Set the Prescaler value */
+ TIMx->PSC = Structure->Prescaler;
+
+ /* Generate an update event to reload the Prescaler
+ and the repetition counter (only for advanced timer) value immediately */
+ TIMx->EGR = TIM_EGR_UG;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Timer Output Compare 1 configuration
+ * @param TIMx to select the TIM peripheral
+ * @param OC_Config The ouput configuration structure
+ * @retval None
+ */
+static void TIM_OC1_SetConfig(TIM_TypeDef *TIMx, TIM_OC_InitTypeDef *OC_Config)
+{
+ uint32_t tmpccmrx;
+ uint32_t tmpccer;
+ uint32_t tmpcr2;
+
+ /* Disable the Channel 1: Reset the CC1E Bit */
+ TIMx->CCER &= ~TIM_CCER_CC1E;
+
+ /* Get the TIMx CCER register value */
+ tmpccer = TIMx->CCER;
+ /* Get the TIMx CR2 register value */
+ tmpcr2 = TIMx->CR2;
+
+ /* Get the TIMx CCMR1 register value */
+ tmpccmrx = TIMx->CCMR1;
+
+ /* Reset the Output Compare Mode Bits */
+ tmpccmrx &= ~TIM_CCMR1_OC1M;
+ tmpccmrx &= ~TIM_CCMR1_CC1S;
+ /* Select the Output Compare Mode */
+ tmpccmrx |= OC_Config->OCMode;
+
+ /* Reset the Output Polarity level */
+ tmpccer &= ~TIM_CCER_CC1P;
+ /* Set the Output Compare Polarity */
+ tmpccer |= OC_Config->OCPolarity;
+
+ /* Write to TIMx CR2 */
+ TIMx->CR2 = tmpcr2;
+
+ /* Write to TIMx CCMR1 */
+ TIMx->CCMR1 = tmpccmrx;
+
+ /* Set the Capture Compare Register value */
+ TIMx->CCR1 = OC_Config->Pulse;
+
+ /* Write to TIMx CCER */
+ TIMx->CCER = tmpccer;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Timer Output Compare 2 configuration
+ * @param TIMx to select the TIM peripheral
+ * @param OC_Config The ouput configuration structure
+ * @retval None
+ */
+static void TIM_OC2_SetConfig(TIM_TypeDef *TIMx, TIM_OC_InitTypeDef *OC_Config)
+{
+ uint32_t tmpccmrx;
+ uint32_t tmpccer;
+ uint32_t tmpcr2;
+
+ /* Disable the Channel 2: Reset the CC2E Bit */
+ TIMx->CCER &= ~TIM_CCER_CC2E;
+
+ /* Get the TIMx CCER register value */
+ tmpccer = TIMx->CCER;
+ /* Get the TIMx CR2 register value */
+ tmpcr2 = TIMx->CR2;
+
+ /* Get the TIMx CCMR1 register value */
+ tmpccmrx = TIMx->CCMR1;
+
+ /* Reset the Output Compare mode and Capture/Compare selection Bits */
+ tmpccmrx &= ~TIM_CCMR1_OC2M;
+ tmpccmrx &= ~TIM_CCMR1_CC2S;
+
+ /* Select the Output Compare Mode */
+ tmpccmrx |= (OC_Config->OCMode << 8U);
+
+ /* Reset the Output Polarity level */
+ tmpccer &= ~TIM_CCER_CC2P;
+ /* Set the Output Compare Polarity */
+ tmpccer |= (OC_Config->OCPolarity << 4U);
+
+ /* Write to TIMx CR2 */
+ TIMx->CR2 = tmpcr2;
+
+ /* Write to TIMx CCMR1 */
+ TIMx->CCMR1 = tmpccmrx;
+
+ /* Set the Capture Compare Register value */
+ TIMx->CCR2 = OC_Config->Pulse;
+
+ /* Write to TIMx CCER */
+ TIMx->CCER = tmpccer;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Timer Output Compare 3 configuration
+ * @param TIMx to select the TIM peripheral
+ * @param OC_Config The ouput configuration structure
+ * @retval None
+ */
+static void TIM_OC3_SetConfig(TIM_TypeDef *TIMx, TIM_OC_InitTypeDef *OC_Config)
+{
+ uint32_t tmpccmrx;
+ uint32_t tmpccer;
+ uint32_t tmpcr2;
+
+ /* Disable the Channel 3: Reset the CC2E Bit */
+ TIMx->CCER &= ~TIM_CCER_CC3E;
+
+ /* Get the TIMx CCER register value */
+ tmpccer = TIMx->CCER;
+ /* Get the TIMx CR2 register value */
+ tmpcr2 = TIMx->CR2;
+
+ /* Get the TIMx CCMR2 register value */
+ tmpccmrx = TIMx->CCMR2;
+
+ /* Reset the Output Compare mode and Capture/Compare selection Bits */
+ tmpccmrx &= ~TIM_CCMR2_OC3M;
+ tmpccmrx &= ~TIM_CCMR2_CC3S;
+ /* Select the Output Compare Mode */
+ tmpccmrx |= OC_Config->OCMode;
+
+ /* Reset the Output Polarity level */
+ tmpccer &= ~TIM_CCER_CC3P;
+ /* Set the Output Compare Polarity */
+ tmpccer |= (OC_Config->OCPolarity << 8U);
+
+ /* Write to TIMx CR2 */
+ TIMx->CR2 = tmpcr2;
+
+ /* Write to TIMx CCMR2 */
+ TIMx->CCMR2 = tmpccmrx;
+
+ /* Set the Capture Compare Register value */
+ TIMx->CCR3 = OC_Config->Pulse;
+
+ /* Write to TIMx CCER */
+ TIMx->CCER = tmpccer;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Timer Output Compare 4 configuration
+ * @param TIMx to select the TIM peripheral
+ * @param OC_Config The ouput configuration structure
+ * @retval None
+ */
+static void TIM_OC4_SetConfig(TIM_TypeDef *TIMx, TIM_OC_InitTypeDef *OC_Config)
+{
+ uint32_t tmpccmrx;
+ uint32_t tmpccer;
+ uint32_t tmpcr2;
+
+ /* Disable the Channel 4: Reset the CC4E Bit */
+ TIMx->CCER &= ~TIM_CCER_CC4E;
+
+ /* Get the TIMx CCER register value */
+ tmpccer = TIMx->CCER;
+ /* Get the TIMx CR2 register value */
+ tmpcr2 = TIMx->CR2;
+
+ /* Get the TIMx CCMR2 register value */
+ tmpccmrx = TIMx->CCMR2;
+
+ /* Reset the Output Compare mode and Capture/Compare selection Bits */
+ tmpccmrx &= ~TIM_CCMR2_OC4M;
+ tmpccmrx &= ~TIM_CCMR2_CC4S;
+
+ /* Select the Output Compare Mode */
+ tmpccmrx |= (OC_Config->OCMode << 8U);
+
+ /* Reset the Output Polarity level */
+ tmpccer &= ~TIM_CCER_CC4P;
+ /* Set the Output Compare Polarity */
+ tmpccer |= (OC_Config->OCPolarity << 12U);
+
+ /* Write to TIMx CR2 */
+ TIMx->CR2 = tmpcr2;
+
+ /* Write to TIMx CCMR2 */
+ TIMx->CCMR2 = tmpccmrx;
+
+ /* Set the Capture Compare Register value */
+ TIMx->CCR4 = OC_Config->Pulse;
+
+ /* Write to TIMx CCER */
+ TIMx->CCER = tmpccer;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Slave Timer configuration function
+ * @param htim TIM handle
+ * @param sSlaveConfig Slave timer configuration
+ * @retval None
+ */
+static HAL_StatusTypeDef TIM_SlaveTimer_SetConfig(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim,
+ TIM_SlaveConfigTypeDef *sSlaveConfig)
+{
+ uint32_t tmpsmcr;
+ uint32_t tmpccmr1;
+ uint32_t tmpccer;
+
+ /* Get the TIMx SMCR register value */
+ tmpsmcr = htim->Instance->SMCR;
+
+ /* Reset the Trigger Selection Bits */
+ tmpsmcr &= ~TIM_SMCR_TS;
+ /* Set the Input Trigger source */
+ tmpsmcr |= sSlaveConfig->InputTrigger;
+
+ /* Reset the slave mode Bits */
+ tmpsmcr &= ~TIM_SMCR_SMS;
+ /* Set the slave mode */
+ tmpsmcr |= sSlaveConfig->SlaveMode;
+
+ /* Write to TIMx SMCR */
+ htim->Instance->SMCR = tmpsmcr;
+
+ /* Configure the trigger prescaler, filter, and polarity */
+ switch (sSlaveConfig->InputTrigger)
+ {
+ case TIM_TS_ETRF:
+ {
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_CLOCKSOURCE_ETRMODE1_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_TRIGGERPRESCALER(sSlaveConfig->TriggerPrescaler));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_TRIGGERPOLARITY(sSlaveConfig->TriggerPolarity));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_TRIGGERFILTER(sSlaveConfig->TriggerFilter));
+ /* Configure the ETR Trigger source */
+ TIM_ETR_SetConfig(htim->Instance,
+ sSlaveConfig->TriggerPrescaler,
+ sSlaveConfig->TriggerPolarity,
+ sSlaveConfig->TriggerFilter);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ case TIM_TS_TI1F_ED:
+ {
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_CC1_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_TRIGGERFILTER(sSlaveConfig->TriggerFilter));
+
+ if(sSlaveConfig->SlaveMode == TIM_SLAVEMODE_GATED)
+ {
+ return HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+
+ /* Disable the Channel 1: Reset the CC1E Bit */
+ tmpccer = htim->Instance->CCER;
+ htim->Instance->CCER &= ~TIM_CCER_CC1E;
+ tmpccmr1 = htim->Instance->CCMR1;
+
+ /* Set the filter */
+ tmpccmr1 &= ~TIM_CCMR1_IC1F;
+ tmpccmr1 |= ((sSlaveConfig->TriggerFilter) << 4U);
+
+ /* Write to TIMx CCMR1 and CCER registers */
+ htim->Instance->CCMR1 = tmpccmr1;
+ htim->Instance->CCER = tmpccer;
+ break;
+ }
+
+ case TIM_TS_TI1FP1:
+ {
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_CC1_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_TRIGGERPOLARITY(sSlaveConfig->TriggerPolarity));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_TRIGGERFILTER(sSlaveConfig->TriggerFilter));
+
+ /* Configure TI1 Filter and Polarity */
+ TIM_TI1_ConfigInputStage(htim->Instance,
+ sSlaveConfig->TriggerPolarity,
+ sSlaveConfig->TriggerFilter);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ case TIM_TS_TI2FP2:
+ {
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_CC2_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_TRIGGERPOLARITY(sSlaveConfig->TriggerPolarity));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_TRIGGERFILTER(sSlaveConfig->TriggerFilter));
+
+ /* Configure TI2 Filter and Polarity */
+ TIM_TI2_ConfigInputStage(htim->Instance,
+ sSlaveConfig->TriggerPolarity,
+ sSlaveConfig->TriggerFilter);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ case TIM_TS_ITR0:
+ case TIM_TS_ITR1:
+ case TIM_TS_ITR2:
+ case TIM_TS_ITR3:
+ {
+ /* Check the parameter */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_CC2_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+ break;
+ }
+
+ default:
+ break;
+ }
+ return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Configure the TI1 as Input.
+ * @param TIMx to select the TIM peripheral.
+ * @param TIM_ICPolarity The Input Polarity.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_ICPOLARITY_RISING
+ * @arg TIM_ICPOLARITY_FALLING
+ * @arg TIM_ICPOLARITY_BOTHEDGE
+ * @param TIM_ICSelection specifies the input to be used.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_ICSELECTION_DIRECTTI: TIM Input 1 is selected to be connected to IC1.
+ * @arg TIM_ICSELECTION_INDIRECTTI: TIM Input 1 is selected to be connected to IC2.
+ * @arg TIM_ICSELECTION_TRC: TIM Input 1 is selected to be connected to TRC.
+ * @param TIM_ICFilter Specifies the Input Capture Filter.
+ * This parameter must be a value between 0x00 and 0x0F.
+ * @retval None
+ * @note TIM_ICFilter and TIM_ICPolarity are not used in INDIRECT mode as TI2FP1
+ * (on channel2 path) is used as the input signal. Therefore CCMR1 must be
+ * protected against un-initialized filter and polarity values.
+ */
+static void TIM_TI1_SetConfig(TIM_TypeDef *TIMx, uint32_t TIM_ICPolarity, uint32_t TIM_ICSelection,
+ uint32_t TIM_ICFilter)
+{
+ uint32_t tmpccmr1;
+ uint32_t tmpccer;
+
+ /* Disable the Channel 1: Reset the CC1E Bit */
+ TIMx->CCER &= ~TIM_CCER_CC1E;
+ tmpccmr1 = TIMx->CCMR1;
+ tmpccer = TIMx->CCER;
+
+ /* Select the Input */
+ if (IS_TIM_CC2_INSTANCE(TIMx) != RESET)
+ {
+ tmpccmr1 &= ~TIM_CCMR1_CC1S;
+ tmpccmr1 |= TIM_ICSelection;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ tmpccmr1 |= TIM_CCMR1_CC1S_0;
+ }
+
+ /* Set the filter */
+ tmpccmr1 &= ~TIM_CCMR1_IC1F;
+ tmpccmr1 |= ((TIM_ICFilter << 4U) & TIM_CCMR1_IC1F);
+
+ /* Select the Polarity and set the CC1E Bit */
+ tmpccer &= ~(TIM_CCER_CC1P | TIM_CCER_CC1NP);
+ tmpccer |= (TIM_ICPolarity & (TIM_CCER_CC1P | TIM_CCER_CC1NP));
+
+ /* Write to TIMx CCMR1 and CCER registers */
+ TIMx->CCMR1 = tmpccmr1;
+ TIMx->CCER = tmpccer;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Configure the Polarity and Filter for TI1.
+ * @param TIMx to select the TIM peripheral.
+ * @param TIM_ICPolarity The Input Polarity.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_ICPOLARITY_RISING
+ * @arg TIM_ICPOLARITY_FALLING
+ * @arg TIM_ICPOLARITY_BOTHEDGE
+ * @param TIM_ICFilter Specifies the Input Capture Filter.
+ * This parameter must be a value between 0x00 and 0x0F.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+static void TIM_TI1_ConfigInputStage(TIM_TypeDef *TIMx, uint32_t TIM_ICPolarity, uint32_t TIM_ICFilter)
+{
+ uint32_t tmpccmr1;
+ uint32_t tmpccer;
+
+ /* Disable the Channel 1: Reset the CC1E Bit */
+ tmpccer = TIMx->CCER;
+ TIMx->CCER &= ~TIM_CCER_CC1E;
+ tmpccmr1 = TIMx->CCMR1;
+
+ /* Set the filter */
+ tmpccmr1 &= ~TIM_CCMR1_IC1F;
+ tmpccmr1 |= (TIM_ICFilter << 4U);
+
+ /* Select the Polarity and set the CC1E Bit */
+ tmpccer &= ~(TIM_CCER_CC1P | TIM_CCER_CC1NP);
+ tmpccer |= TIM_ICPolarity;
+
+ /* Write to TIMx CCMR1 and CCER registers */
+ TIMx->CCMR1 = tmpccmr1;
+ TIMx->CCER = tmpccer;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Configure the TI2 as Input.
+ * @param TIMx to select the TIM peripheral
+ * @param TIM_ICPolarity The Input Polarity.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_ICPOLARITY_RISING
+ * @arg TIM_ICPOLARITY_FALLING
+ * @arg TIM_ICPOLARITY_BOTHEDGE
+ * @param TIM_ICSelection specifies the input to be used.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_ICSELECTION_DIRECTTI: TIM Input 2 is selected to be connected to IC2.
+ * @arg TIM_ICSELECTION_INDIRECTTI: TIM Input 2 is selected to be connected to IC1.
+ * @arg TIM_ICSELECTION_TRC: TIM Input 2 is selected to be connected to TRC.
+ * @param TIM_ICFilter Specifies the Input Capture Filter.
+ * This parameter must be a value between 0x00 and 0x0F.
+ * @retval None
+ * @note TIM_ICFilter and TIM_ICPolarity are not used in INDIRECT mode as TI1FP2
+ * (on channel1 path) is used as the input signal. Therefore CCMR1 must be
+ * protected against un-initialized filter and polarity values.
+ */
+static void TIM_TI2_SetConfig(TIM_TypeDef *TIMx, uint32_t TIM_ICPolarity, uint32_t TIM_ICSelection,
+ uint32_t TIM_ICFilter)
+{
+ uint32_t tmpccmr1;
+ uint32_t tmpccer;
+
+ /* Disable the Channel 2: Reset the CC2E Bit */
+ TIMx->CCER &= ~TIM_CCER_CC2E;
+ tmpccmr1 = TIMx->CCMR1;
+ tmpccer = TIMx->CCER;
+
+ /* Select the Input */
+ tmpccmr1 &= ~TIM_CCMR1_CC2S;
+ tmpccmr1 |= (TIM_ICSelection << 8U);
+
+ /* Set the filter */
+ tmpccmr1 &= ~TIM_CCMR1_IC2F;
+ tmpccmr1 |= ((TIM_ICFilter << 12U) & TIM_CCMR1_IC2F);
+
+ /* Select the Polarity and set the CC2E Bit */
+ tmpccer &= ~(TIM_CCER_CC2P | TIM_CCER_CC2NP);
+ tmpccer |= ((TIM_ICPolarity << 4U) & (TIM_CCER_CC2P | TIM_CCER_CC2NP));
+
+ /* Write to TIMx CCMR1 and CCER registers */
+ TIMx->CCMR1 = tmpccmr1 ;
+ TIMx->CCER = tmpccer;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Configure the Polarity and Filter for TI2.
+ * @param TIMx to select the TIM peripheral.
+ * @param TIM_ICPolarity The Input Polarity.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_ICPOLARITY_RISING
+ * @arg TIM_ICPOLARITY_FALLING
+ * @arg TIM_ICPOLARITY_BOTHEDGE
+ * @param TIM_ICFilter Specifies the Input Capture Filter.
+ * This parameter must be a value between 0x00 and 0x0F.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+static void TIM_TI2_ConfigInputStage(TIM_TypeDef *TIMx, uint32_t TIM_ICPolarity, uint32_t TIM_ICFilter)
+{
+ uint32_t tmpccmr1;
+ uint32_t tmpccer;
+
+ /* Disable the Channel 2: Reset the CC2E Bit */
+ TIMx->CCER &= ~TIM_CCER_CC2E;
+ tmpccmr1 = TIMx->CCMR1;
+ tmpccer = TIMx->CCER;
+
+ /* Set the filter */
+ tmpccmr1 &= ~TIM_CCMR1_IC2F;
+ tmpccmr1 |= (TIM_ICFilter << 12U);
+
+ /* Select the Polarity and set the CC2E Bit */
+ tmpccer &= ~(TIM_CCER_CC2P | TIM_CCER_CC2NP);
+ tmpccer |= (TIM_ICPolarity << 4U);
+
+ /* Write to TIMx CCMR1 and CCER registers */
+ TIMx->CCMR1 = tmpccmr1 ;
+ TIMx->CCER = tmpccer;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Configure the TI3 as Input.
+ * @param TIMx to select the TIM peripheral
+ * @param TIM_ICPolarity The Input Polarity.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_ICPOLARITY_RISING
+ * @arg TIM_ICPOLARITY_FALLING
+ * @arg TIM_ICPOLARITY_BOTHEDGE
+ * @param TIM_ICSelection specifies the input to be used.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_ICSELECTION_DIRECTTI: TIM Input 3 is selected to be connected to IC3.
+ * @arg TIM_ICSELECTION_INDIRECTTI: TIM Input 3 is selected to be connected to IC4.
+ * @arg TIM_ICSELECTION_TRC: TIM Input 3 is selected to be connected to TRC.
+ * @param TIM_ICFilter Specifies the Input Capture Filter.
+ * This parameter must be a value between 0x00 and 0x0F.
+ * @retval None
+ * @note TIM_ICFilter and TIM_ICPolarity are not used in INDIRECT mode as TI3FP4
+ * (on channel1 path) is used as the input signal. Therefore CCMR2 must be
+ * protected against un-initialized filter and polarity values.
+ */
+static void TIM_TI3_SetConfig(TIM_TypeDef *TIMx, uint32_t TIM_ICPolarity, uint32_t TIM_ICSelection,
+ uint32_t TIM_ICFilter)
+{
+ uint32_t tmpccmr2;
+ uint32_t tmpccer;
+
+ /* Disable the Channel 3: Reset the CC3E Bit */
+ TIMx->CCER &= ~TIM_CCER_CC3E;
+ tmpccmr2 = TIMx->CCMR2;
+ tmpccer = TIMx->CCER;
+
+ /* Select the Input */
+ tmpccmr2 &= ~TIM_CCMR2_CC3S;
+ tmpccmr2 |= TIM_ICSelection;
+
+ /* Set the filter */
+ tmpccmr2 &= ~TIM_CCMR2_IC3F;
+ tmpccmr2 |= ((TIM_ICFilter << 4U) & TIM_CCMR2_IC3F);
+
+ /* Select the Polarity and set the CC3E Bit */
+ tmpccer &= ~(TIM_CCER_CC3P | TIM_CCER_CC3NP);
+ tmpccer |= ((TIM_ICPolarity << 8U) & (TIM_CCER_CC3P | TIM_CCER_CC3NP));
+
+ /* Write to TIMx CCMR2 and CCER registers */
+ TIMx->CCMR2 = tmpccmr2;
+ TIMx->CCER = tmpccer;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Configure the TI4 as Input.
+ * @param TIMx to select the TIM peripheral
+ * @param TIM_ICPolarity The Input Polarity.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_ICPOLARITY_RISING
+ * @arg TIM_ICPOLARITY_FALLING
+ * @arg TIM_ICPOLARITY_BOTHEDGE
+ * @param TIM_ICSelection specifies the input to be used.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_ICSELECTION_DIRECTTI: TIM Input 4 is selected to be connected to IC4.
+ * @arg TIM_ICSELECTION_INDIRECTTI: TIM Input 4 is selected to be connected to IC3.
+ * @arg TIM_ICSELECTION_TRC: TIM Input 4 is selected to be connected to TRC.
+ * @param TIM_ICFilter Specifies the Input Capture Filter.
+ * This parameter must be a value between 0x00 and 0x0F.
+ * @note TIM_ICFilter and TIM_ICPolarity are not used in INDIRECT mode as TI4FP3
+ * (on channel1 path) is used as the input signal. Therefore CCMR2 must be
+ * protected against un-initialized filter and polarity values.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+static void TIM_TI4_SetConfig(TIM_TypeDef *TIMx, uint32_t TIM_ICPolarity, uint32_t TIM_ICSelection,
+ uint32_t TIM_ICFilter)
+{
+ uint32_t tmpccmr2;
+ uint32_t tmpccer;
+
+ /* Disable the Channel 4: Reset the CC4E Bit */
+ TIMx->CCER &= ~TIM_CCER_CC4E;
+ tmpccmr2 = TIMx->CCMR2;
+ tmpccer = TIMx->CCER;
+
+ /* Select the Input */
+ tmpccmr2 &= ~TIM_CCMR2_CC4S;
+ tmpccmr2 |= (TIM_ICSelection << 8U);
+
+ /* Set the filter */
+ tmpccmr2 &= ~TIM_CCMR2_IC4F;
+ tmpccmr2 |= ((TIM_ICFilter << 12U) & TIM_CCMR2_IC4F);
+
+ /* Select the Polarity and set the CC4E Bit */
+ tmpccer &= ~(TIM_CCER_CC4P | TIM_CCER_CC4NP);
+ tmpccer |= ((TIM_ICPolarity << 12U) & (TIM_CCER_CC4P | TIM_CCER_CC4NP));
+
+ /* Write to TIMx CCMR2 and CCER registers */
+ TIMx->CCMR2 = tmpccmr2;
+ TIMx->CCER = tmpccer ;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Selects the Input Trigger source
+ * @param TIMx to select the TIM peripheral
+ * @param InputTriggerSource The Input Trigger source.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_TS_ITR0: Internal Trigger 0
+ * @arg TIM_TS_ITR1: Internal Trigger 1
+ * @arg TIM_TS_ITR2: Internal Trigger 2
+ * @arg TIM_TS_ITR3: Internal Trigger 3
+ * @arg TIM_TS_TI1F_ED: TI1 Edge Detector
+ * @arg TIM_TS_TI1FP1: Filtered Timer Input 1
+ * @arg TIM_TS_TI2FP2: Filtered Timer Input 2
+ * @arg TIM_TS_ETRF: External Trigger input
+ * @retval None
+ */
+static void TIM_ITRx_SetConfig(TIM_TypeDef *TIMx, uint32_t InputTriggerSource)
+{
+ uint32_t tmpsmcr;
+
+ /* Get the TIMx SMCR register value */
+ tmpsmcr = TIMx->SMCR;
+ /* Reset the TS Bits */
+ tmpsmcr &= ~TIM_SMCR_TS;
+ /* Set the Input Trigger source and the slave mode*/
+ tmpsmcr |= (InputTriggerSource | TIM_SLAVEMODE_EXTERNAL1);
+ /* Write to TIMx SMCR */
+ TIMx->SMCR = tmpsmcr;
+}
+/**
+ * @brief Configures the TIMx External Trigger (ETR).
+ * @param TIMx to select the TIM peripheral
+ * @param TIM_ExtTRGPrescaler The external Trigger Prescaler.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_ETRPRESCALER_DIV1: ETRP Prescaler OFF.
+ * @arg TIM_ETRPRESCALER_DIV2: ETRP frequency divided by 2.
+ * @arg TIM_ETRPRESCALER_DIV4: ETRP frequency divided by 4.
+ * @arg TIM_ETRPRESCALER_DIV8: ETRP frequency divided by 8.
+ * @param TIM_ExtTRGPolarity The external Trigger Polarity.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_ETRPOLARITY_INVERTED: active low or falling edge active.
+ * @arg TIM_ETRPOLARITY_NONINVERTED: active high or rising edge active.
+ * @param ExtTRGFilter External Trigger Filter.
+ * This parameter must be a value between 0x00 and 0x0F
+ * @retval None
+ */
+static void TIM_ETR_SetConfig(TIM_TypeDef *TIMx, uint32_t TIM_ExtTRGPrescaler,
+ uint32_t TIM_ExtTRGPolarity, uint32_t ExtTRGFilter)
+{
+ uint32_t tmpsmcr;
+
+ tmpsmcr = TIMx->SMCR;
+
+ /* Reset the ETR Bits */
+ tmpsmcr &= ~(TIM_SMCR_ETF | TIM_SMCR_ETPS | TIM_SMCR_ECE | TIM_SMCR_ETP);
+
+ /* Set the Prescaler, the Filter value and the Polarity */
+ tmpsmcr |= (uint32_t)(TIM_ExtTRGPrescaler | (TIM_ExtTRGPolarity | (ExtTRGFilter << 8U)));
+
+ /* Write to TIMx SMCR */
+ TIMx->SMCR = tmpsmcr;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables or disables the TIM Capture Compare Channel x.
+ * @param TIMx to select the TIM peripheral
+ * @param Channel specifies the TIM Channel
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_1: TIM Channel 1
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_2: TIM Channel 2
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_3: TIM Channel 3
+ * @arg TIM_CHANNEL_4: TIM Channel 4
+ * @param ChannelState specifies the TIM Channel CCxE bit new state.
+ * This parameter can be: TIM_CCx_ENABLE or TIM_CCx_DISABLE.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+static void TIM_CCxChannelCmd(TIM_TypeDef *TIMx, uint32_t Channel, uint32_t ChannelState)
+{
+ uint32_t tmp;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_CC1_INSTANCE(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_CHANNELS(Channel));
+
+ tmp = TIM_CCER_CC1E << (Channel & 0x1FU); /* 0x1FU = 31 bits max shift */
+
+ /* Reset the CCxE Bit */
+ TIMx->CCER &= ~tmp;
+
+ /* Set or reset the CCxE Bit */
+ TIMx->CCER |= (uint32_t)(ChannelState << (Channel & 0x1FU)); /* 0x1FU = 31 bits max shift */
+}
+
+#if (USE_HAL_TIM_REGISTER_CALLBACKS == 1)
+/**
+ * @brief Reset interrupt callbacks to the legacy weak callbacks.
+ * @param htim pointer to a TIM_HandleTypeDef structure that contains
+ * the configuration information for TIM module.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void TIM_ResetCallback(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim)
+{
+ /* Reset the TIM callback to the legacy weak callbacks */
+ htim->PeriodElapsedCallback = HAL_TIM_PeriodElapsedCallback; /* Legacy weak PeriodElapsedCallback */
+ htim->PeriodElapsedHalfCpltCallback = HAL_TIM_PeriodElapsedHalfCpltCallback; /* Legacy weak PeriodElapsedHalfCpltCallback */
+ htim->TriggerCallback = HAL_TIM_TriggerCallback; /* Legacy weak TriggerCallback */
+ htim->TriggerHalfCpltCallback = HAL_TIM_TriggerHalfCpltCallback; /* Legacy weak TriggerHalfCpltCallback */
+ htim->IC_CaptureCallback = HAL_TIM_IC_CaptureCallback; /* Legacy weak IC_CaptureCallback */
+ htim->IC_CaptureHalfCpltCallback = HAL_TIM_IC_CaptureHalfCpltCallback; /* Legacy weak IC_CaptureHalfCpltCallback */
+ htim->OC_DelayElapsedCallback = HAL_TIM_OC_DelayElapsedCallback; /* Legacy weak OC_DelayElapsedCallback */
+ htim->PWM_PulseFinishedCallback = HAL_TIM_PWM_PulseFinishedCallback; /* Legacy weak PWM_PulseFinishedCallback */
+ htim->PWM_PulseFinishedHalfCpltCallback = HAL_TIM_PWM_PulseFinishedHalfCpltCallback; /* Legacy weak PWM_PulseFinishedHalfCpltCallback */
+ htim->ErrorCallback = HAL_TIM_ErrorCallback; /* Legacy weak ErrorCallback */
+}
+#endif /* USE_HAL_TIM_REGISTER_CALLBACKS */
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif /* HAL_TIM_MODULE_ENABLED */
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
diff --git a/FreeRTOS/Demo/CORTEX_MPU_M3_NUCLEO_L152RE_GCC/ST_Code/Drivers/STM32L1xx_HAL_Driver/Src/stm32l1xx_hal_tim_ex.c b/FreeRTOS/Demo/CORTEX_MPU_M3_NUCLEO_L152RE_GCC/ST_Code/Drivers/STM32L1xx_HAL_Driver/Src/stm32l1xx_hal_tim_ex.c new file mode 100644 index 000000000..470894b5d --- /dev/null +++ b/FreeRTOS/Demo/CORTEX_MPU_M3_NUCLEO_L152RE_GCC/ST_Code/Drivers/STM32L1xx_HAL_Driver/Src/stm32l1xx_hal_tim_ex.c @@ -0,0 +1,224 @@ +/**
+ ******************************************************************************
+ * @file stm32l1xx_hal_tim_ex.c
+ * @author MCD Application Team
+ * @brief TIM HAL module driver.
+ * This file provides firmware functions to manage the following
+ * functionalities of the Timer Extended peripheral:
+ * + Time Master and Slave synchronization configuration
+ * + Time OCRef clear configuration
+ * + Timer remapping capabilities configuration
+ @verbatim
+ ==============================================================================
+ ##### TIMER Extended features #####
+ ==============================================================================
+ [..]
+ The Timer Extended features include:
+ (#) Synchronization circuit to control the timer with external signals and to
+ interconnect several timers together.
+
+ @endverbatim
+ ******************************************************************************
+ * @attention
+ *
+ * <h2><center>© Copyright (c) 2016 STMicroelectronics.
+ * All rights reserved.</center></h2>
+ *
+ * This software component is licensed by ST under BSD 3-Clause license,
+ * the "License"; You may not use this file except in compliance with the
+ * License. You may obtain a copy of the License at:
+ * opensource.org/licenses/BSD-3-Clause
+ *
+ ******************************************************************************
+*/
+
+/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#include "stm32l1xx_hal.h"
+
+/** @addtogroup STM32L1xx_HAL_Driver
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup TIMEx TIMEx
+ * @brief TIM Extended HAL module driver
+ * @{
+ */
+
+#ifdef HAL_TIM_MODULE_ENABLED
+
+/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/
+
+/* Exported functions --------------------------------------------------------*/
+/** @defgroup TIMEx_Exported_Functions TIM Extended Exported Functions
+ * @{
+ */
+/** @defgroup TIMEx_Exported_Functions_Group5 Extended Peripheral Control functions
+ * @brief Peripheral Control functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ==============================================================================
+ ##### Peripheral Control functions #####
+ ==============================================================================
+ [..]
+ This section provides functions allowing to:
+ (+) Configure Master synchronization.
+ (+) Configure timer remapping capabilities.
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Configures the TIM in master mode.
+ * @param htim TIM handle.
+ * @param sMasterConfig pointer to a TIM_MasterConfigTypeDef structure that
+ * contains the selected trigger output (TRGO) and the Master/Slave
+ * mode.
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIMEx_MasterConfigSynchronization(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim,
+ TIM_MasterConfigTypeDef *sMasterConfig)
+{
+ uint32_t tmpcr2;
+ uint32_t tmpsmcr;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_SYNCHRO_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_TRGO_SOURCE(sMasterConfig->MasterOutputTrigger));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_MSM_STATE(sMasterConfig->MasterSlaveMode));
+
+ /* Check input state */
+ __HAL_LOCK(htim);
+
+ /* Change the handler state */
+ htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_BUSY;
+
+ /* Get the TIMx CR2 register value */
+ tmpcr2 = htim->Instance->CR2;
+
+ /* Get the TIMx SMCR register value */
+ tmpsmcr = htim->Instance->SMCR;
+
+ /* Reset the MMS Bits */
+ tmpcr2 &= ~TIM_CR2_MMS;
+ /* Select the TRGO source */
+ tmpcr2 |= sMasterConfig->MasterOutputTrigger;
+
+ /* Reset the MSM Bit */
+ tmpsmcr &= ~TIM_SMCR_MSM;
+ /* Set master mode */
+ tmpsmcr |= sMasterConfig->MasterSlaveMode;
+
+ /* Update TIMx CR2 */
+ htim->Instance->CR2 = tmpcr2;
+
+ /* Update TIMx SMCR */
+ htim->Instance->SMCR = tmpsmcr;
+
+ /* Change the htim state */
+ htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_READY;
+
+ __HAL_UNLOCK(htim);
+
+ return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Configures the TIMx Remapping input capabilities.
+ * @param htim TIM handle.
+ * @param Remap specifies the TIM remapping source.
+ *
+ * For TIM2, the parameter can have the following values:(see note)
+ * @arg TIM_TIM2_ITR1_TIM10_OC: TIM2 ITR1 input is connected to TIM10 OC
+ * @arg TIM_TIM2_ITR1_TIM5_TGO: TIM2 ITR1 input is connected to TIM5 TGO
+ *
+ * For TIM3, the parameter can have the following values:(see note)
+ * @arg TIM_TIM3_ITR2_TIM11_OC: TIM3 ITR2 input is connected to TIM11 OC
+ * @arg TIM_TIM3_ITR2_TIM5_TGO: TIM3 ITR2 input is connected to TIM5 TGO
+ *
+ * For TIM9, the parameter is a combination of 2 fields (field1 | field2):
+ *
+ * field1 can have the following values:(see note)
+ * @arg TIM_TIM9_ITR1_TIM3_TGO: TIM9 ITR1 input is connected to TIM3 TGO
+ * @arg TIM_TIM9_ITR1_TS: TIM9 ITR1 input is connected to touch sensing I/O
+ *
+ * field2 can have the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_TIM9_GPIO: TIM9 Channel1 is connected to GPIO
+ * @arg TIM_TIM9_LSE: TIM9 Channel1 is connected to LSE internal clock
+ * @arg TIM_TIM9_GPIO1: TIM9 Channel1 is connected to GPIO
+ * @arg TIM_TIM9_GPIO2: TIM9 Channel1 is connected to GPIO
+ *
+ * For TIM10, the parameter is a combination of 3 fields (field1 | field2 | field3):
+ *
+ * field1 can have the following values:(see note)
+ * @arg TIM_TIM10_TI1RMP: TIM10 Channel 1 depends on TI1_RMP
+ * @arg TIM_TIM10_RI: TIM10 Channel 1 is connected to RI
+ *
+ * field2 can have the following values:(see note)
+ * @arg TIM_TIM10_ETR_LSE: TIM10 ETR input is connected to LSE clock
+ * @arg TIM_TIM10_ETR_TIM9_TGO: TIM10 ETR input is connected to TIM9 TGO
+ *
+ * field3 can have the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_TIM10_GPIO: TIM10 Channel1 is connected to GPIO
+ * @arg TIM_TIM10_LSI: TIM10 Channel1 is connected to LSI internal clock
+ * @arg TIM_TIM10_LSE: TIM10 Channel1 is connected to LSE internal clock
+ * @arg TIM_TIM10_RTC: TIM10 Channel1 is connected to RTC wakeup interrupt
+ *
+ * For TIM11, the parameter is a combination of 3 fields (field1 | field2 | field3):
+ *
+ * field1 can have the following values:(see note)
+ * @arg TIM_TIM11_TI1RMP: TIM11 Channel 1 depends on TI1_RMP
+ * @arg TIM_TIM11_RI: TIM11 Channel 1 is connected to RI
+ *
+ * field2 can have the following values:(see note)
+ * @arg TIM_TIM11_ETR_LSE: TIM11 ETR input is connected to LSE clock
+ * @arg TIM_TIM11_ETR_TIM9_TGO: TIM11 ETR input is connected to TIM9 TGO
+ *
+ * field3 can have the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_TIM11_GPIO: TIM11 Channel1 is connected to GPIO
+ * @arg TIM_TIM11_MSI: TIM11 Channel1 is connected to MSI internal clock
+ * @arg TIM_TIM11_HSE_RTC: TIM11 Channel1 is connected to HSE_RTC clock
+ * @arg TIM_TIM11_GPIO1: TIM11 Channel1 is connected to GPIO
+ *
+ * @note Available only in Cat.3, Cat.4,Cat.5 and Cat.6 devices.
+ *
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIMEx_RemapConfig(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, uint32_t Remap)
+{
+ __HAL_LOCK(htim);
+
+ /* Check parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_REMAP(htim->Instance, Remap));
+
+ /* Set the Timer remapping configuration */
+ WRITE_REG(htim->Instance->OR, Remap);
+
+ __HAL_UNLOCK(htim);
+
+ return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+
+#endif /* HAL_TIM_MODULE_ENABLED */
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
diff --git a/FreeRTOS/Demo/CORTEX_MPU_M3_NUCLEO_L152RE_GCC/ST_Code/Drivers/STM32L1xx_HAL_Driver/Src/stm32l1xx_hal_uart.c b/FreeRTOS/Demo/CORTEX_MPU_M3_NUCLEO_L152RE_GCC/ST_Code/Drivers/STM32L1xx_HAL_Driver/Src/stm32l1xx_hal_uart.c new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2d6b9804b --- /dev/null +++ b/FreeRTOS/Demo/CORTEX_MPU_M3_NUCLEO_L152RE_GCC/ST_Code/Drivers/STM32L1xx_HAL_Driver/Src/stm32l1xx_hal_uart.c @@ -0,0 +1,3112 @@ +/**
+ ******************************************************************************
+ * @file stm32l1xx_hal_uart.c
+ * @author MCD Application Team
+ * @brief UART HAL module driver.
+ * This file provides firmware functions to manage the following
+ * functionalities of the Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter Peripheral (UART).
+ * + Initialization and de-initialization functions
+ * + IO operation functions
+ * + Peripheral Control functions
+ * + Peripheral State and Errors functions
+ @verbatim
+ ==============================================================================
+ ##### How to use this driver #####
+ ==============================================================================
+ [..]
+ The UART HAL driver can be used as follows:
+
+ (#) Declare a UART_HandleTypeDef handle structure (eg. UART_HandleTypeDef huart).
+ (#) Initialize the UART low level resources by implementing the HAL_UART_MspInit() API:
+ (##) Enable the USARTx interface clock.
+ (##) UART pins configuration:
+ (+++) Enable the clock for the UART GPIOs.
+ (+++) Configure these UART pins (TX as alternate function pull-up, RX as alternate function Input).
+ (##) NVIC configuration if you need to use interrupt process (HAL_UART_Transmit_IT()
+ and HAL_UART_Receive_IT() APIs):
+ (+++) Configure the USARTx interrupt priority.
+ (+++) Enable the NVIC USART IRQ handle.
+ (##) DMA Configuration if you need to use DMA process (HAL_UART_Transmit_DMA()
+ and HAL_UART_Receive_DMA() APIs):
+ (+++) Declare a DMA handle structure for the Tx/Rx channel.
+ (+++) Enable the DMAx interface clock.
+ (+++) Configure the declared DMA handle structure with the required
+ Tx/Rx parameters.
+ (+++) Configure the DMA Tx/Rx channel.
+ (+++) Associate the initialized DMA handle to the UART DMA Tx/Rx handle.
+ (+++) Configure the priority and enable the NVIC for the transfer complete
+ interrupt on the DMA Tx/Rx channel.
+ (+++) Configure the USARTx interrupt priority and enable the NVIC USART IRQ handle
+ (used for last byte sending completion detection in DMA non circular mode)
+
+ (#) Program the Baud Rate, Word Length, Stop Bit, Parity, Hardware
+ flow control and Mode(Receiver/Transmitter) in the huart Init structure.
+
+ (#) For the UART asynchronous mode, initialize the UART registers by calling
+ the HAL_UART_Init() API.
+
+ (#) For the UART Half duplex mode, initialize the UART registers by calling
+ the HAL_HalfDuplex_Init() API.
+
+ (#) For the LIN mode, initialize the UART registers by calling the HAL_LIN_Init() API.
+
+ (#) For the Multi-Processor mode, initialize the UART registers by calling
+ the HAL_MultiProcessor_Init() API.
+
+ [..]
+ (@) The specific UART interrupts (Transmission complete interrupt,
+ RXNE interrupt and Error Interrupts) will be managed using the macros
+ __HAL_UART_ENABLE_IT() and __HAL_UART_DISABLE_IT() inside the transmit
+ and receive process.
+
+ [..]
+ (@) These APIs (HAL_UART_Init() and HAL_HalfDuplex_Init()) configure also the
+ low level Hardware GPIO, CLOCK, CORTEX...etc) by calling the customized
+ HAL_UART_MspInit() API.
+
+ ##### Callback registration #####
+ ==================================
+
+ [..]
+ The compilation define USE_HAL_UART_REGISTER_CALLBACKS when set to 1
+ allows the user to configure dynamically the driver callbacks.
+
+ [..]
+ Use Function @ref HAL_UART_RegisterCallback() to register a user callback.
+ Function @ref HAL_UART_RegisterCallback() allows to register following callbacks:
+ (+) TxHalfCpltCallback : Tx Half Complete Callback.
+ (+) TxCpltCallback : Tx Complete Callback.
+ (+) RxHalfCpltCallback : Rx Half Complete Callback.
+ (+) RxCpltCallback : Rx Complete Callback.
+ (+) ErrorCallback : Error Callback.
+ (+) AbortCpltCallback : Abort Complete Callback.
+ (+) AbortTransmitCpltCallback : Abort Transmit Complete Callback.
+ (+) AbortReceiveCpltCallback : Abort Receive Complete Callback.
+ (+) MspInitCallback : UART MspInit.
+ (+) MspDeInitCallback : UART MspDeInit.
+ This function takes as parameters the HAL peripheral handle, the Callback ID
+ and a pointer to the user callback function.
+
+ [..]
+ Use function @ref HAL_UART_UnRegisterCallback() to reset a callback to the default
+ weak (surcharged) function.
+ @ref HAL_UART_UnRegisterCallback() takes as parameters the HAL peripheral handle,
+ and the Callback ID.
+ This function allows to reset following callbacks:
+ (+) TxHalfCpltCallback : Tx Half Complete Callback.
+ (+) TxCpltCallback : Tx Complete Callback.
+ (+) RxHalfCpltCallback : Rx Half Complete Callback.
+ (+) RxCpltCallback : Rx Complete Callback.
+ (+) ErrorCallback : Error Callback.
+ (+) AbortCpltCallback : Abort Complete Callback.
+ (+) AbortTransmitCpltCallback : Abort Transmit Complete Callback.
+ (+) AbortReceiveCpltCallback : Abort Receive Complete Callback.
+ (+) MspInitCallback : UART MspInit.
+ (+) MspDeInitCallback : UART MspDeInit.
+
+ [..]
+ By default, after the @ref HAL_UART_Init() and when the state is HAL_UART_STATE_RESET
+ all callbacks are set to the corresponding weak (surcharged) functions:
+ examples @ref HAL_UART_TxCpltCallback(), @ref HAL_UART_RxHalfCpltCallback().
+ Exception done for MspInit and MspDeInit functions that are respectively
+ reset to the legacy weak (surcharged) functions in the @ref HAL_UART_Init()
+ and @ref HAL_UART_DeInit() only when these callbacks are null (not registered beforehand).
+ If not, MspInit or MspDeInit are not null, the @ref HAL_UART_Init() and @ref HAL_UART_DeInit()
+ keep and use the user MspInit/MspDeInit callbacks (registered beforehand).
+
+ [..]
+ Callbacks can be registered/unregistered in HAL_UART_STATE_READY state only.
+ Exception done MspInit/MspDeInit that can be registered/unregistered
+ in HAL_UART_STATE_READY or HAL_UART_STATE_RESET state, thus registered (user)
+ MspInit/DeInit callbacks can be used during the Init/DeInit.
+ In that case first register the MspInit/MspDeInit user callbacks
+ using @ref HAL_UART_RegisterCallback() before calling @ref HAL_UART_DeInit()
+ or @ref HAL_UART_Init() function.
+
+ [..]
+ When The compilation define USE_HAL_UART_REGISTER_CALLBACKS is set to 0 or
+ not defined, the callback registration feature is not available
+ and weak (surcharged) callbacks are used.
+
+ [..]
+ Three operation modes are available within this driver :
+
+ *** Polling mode IO operation ***
+ =================================
+ [..]
+ (+) Send an amount of data in blocking mode using HAL_UART_Transmit()
+ (+) Receive an amount of data in blocking mode using HAL_UART_Receive()
+
+ *** Interrupt mode IO operation ***
+ ===================================
+ [..]
+ (+) Send an amount of data in non blocking mode using HAL_UART_Transmit_IT()
+ (+) At transmission end of transfer HAL_UART_TxCpltCallback is executed and user can
+ add his own code by customization of function pointer HAL_UART_TxCpltCallback
+ (+) Receive an amount of data in non blocking mode using HAL_UART_Receive_IT()
+ (+) At reception end of transfer HAL_UART_RxCpltCallback is executed and user can
+ add his own code by customization of function pointer HAL_UART_RxCpltCallback
+ (+) In case of transfer Error, HAL_UART_ErrorCallback() function is executed and user can
+ add his own code by customization of function pointer HAL_UART_ErrorCallback
+
+ *** DMA mode IO operation ***
+ ==============================
+ [..]
+ (+) Send an amount of data in non blocking mode (DMA) using HAL_UART_Transmit_DMA()
+ (+) At transmission end of half transfer HAL_UART_TxHalfCpltCallback is executed and user can
+ add his own code by customization of function pointer HAL_UART_TxHalfCpltCallback
+ (+) At transmission end of transfer HAL_UART_TxCpltCallback is executed and user can
+ add his own code by customization of function pointer HAL_UART_TxCpltCallback
+ (+) Receive an amount of data in non blocking mode (DMA) using HAL_UART_Receive_DMA()
+ (+) At reception end of half transfer HAL_UART_RxHalfCpltCallback is executed and user can
+ add his own code by customization of function pointer HAL_UART_RxHalfCpltCallback
+ (+) At reception end of transfer HAL_UART_RxCpltCallback is executed and user can
+ add his own code by customization of function pointer HAL_UART_RxCpltCallback
+ (+) In case of transfer Error, HAL_UART_ErrorCallback() function is executed and user can
+ add his own code by customization of function pointer HAL_UART_ErrorCallback
+ (+) Pause the DMA Transfer using HAL_UART_DMAPause()
+ (+) Resume the DMA Transfer using HAL_UART_DMAResume()
+ (+) Stop the DMA Transfer using HAL_UART_DMAStop()
+
+ *** UART HAL driver macros list ***
+ =============================================
+ [..]
+ Below the list of most used macros in UART HAL driver.
+
+ (+) __HAL_UART_ENABLE: Enable the UART peripheral
+ (+) __HAL_UART_DISABLE: Disable the UART peripheral
+ (+) __HAL_UART_GET_FLAG : Check whether the specified UART flag is set or not
+ (+) __HAL_UART_CLEAR_FLAG : Clear the specified UART pending flag
+ (+) __HAL_UART_ENABLE_IT: Enable the specified UART interrupt
+ (+) __HAL_UART_DISABLE_IT: Disable the specified UART interrupt
+ (+) __HAL_UART_GET_IT_SOURCE: Check whether the specified UART interrupt has occurred or not
+
+ [..]
+ (@) You can refer to the UART HAL driver header file for more useful macros
+
+ @endverbatim
+ [..]
+ (@) Additionnal remark: If the parity is enabled, then the MSB bit of the data written
+ in the data register is transmitted but is changed by the parity bit.
+ Depending on the frame length defined by the M bit (8-bits or 9-bits),
+ the possible UART frame formats are as listed in the following table:
+ +-------------------------------------------------------------+
+ | M bit | PCE bit | UART frame |
+ |---------------------|---------------------------------------|
+ | 0 | 0 | | SB | 8 bit data | STB | |
+ |---------|-----------|---------------------------------------|
+ | 0 | 1 | | SB | 7 bit data | PB | STB | |
+ |---------|-----------|---------------------------------------|
+ | 1 | 0 | | SB | 9 bit data | STB | |
+ |---------|-----------|---------------------------------------|
+ | 1 | 1 | | SB | 8 bit data | PB | STB | |
+ +-------------------------------------------------------------+
+ ******************************************************************************
+ * @attention
+ *
+ * <h2><center>© Copyright (c) 2016 STMicroelectronics.
+ * All rights reserved.</center></h2>
+ *
+ * This software component is licensed by ST under BSD 3-Clause license,
+ * the "License"; You may not use this file except in compliance with the
+ * License. You may obtain a copy of the License at:
+ * opensource.org/licenses/BSD-3-Clause
+ *
+ ******************************************************************************
+ */
+
+/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#include "stm32l1xx_hal.h"
+
+/** @addtogroup STM32L1xx_HAL_Driver
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup UART UART
+ * @brief HAL UART module driver
+ * @{
+ */
+#ifdef HAL_UART_MODULE_ENABLED
+
+/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/** @addtogroup UART_Private_Constants
+ * @{
+ */
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/
+/** @addtogroup UART_Private_Functions UART Private Functions
+ * @{
+ */
+
+#if (USE_HAL_UART_REGISTER_CALLBACKS == 1)
+void UART_InitCallbacksToDefault(UART_HandleTypeDef *huart);
+#endif /* USE_HAL_UART_REGISTER_CALLBACKS */
+static void UART_EndTxTransfer(UART_HandleTypeDef *huart);
+static void UART_EndRxTransfer(UART_HandleTypeDef *huart);
+static void UART_DMATransmitCplt(DMA_HandleTypeDef *hdma);
+static void UART_DMAReceiveCplt(DMA_HandleTypeDef *hdma);
+static void UART_DMATxHalfCplt(DMA_HandleTypeDef *hdma);
+static void UART_DMARxHalfCplt(DMA_HandleTypeDef *hdma);
+static void UART_DMAError(DMA_HandleTypeDef *hdma);
+static void UART_DMAAbortOnError(DMA_HandleTypeDef *hdma);
+static void UART_DMATxAbortCallback(DMA_HandleTypeDef *hdma);
+static void UART_DMARxAbortCallback(DMA_HandleTypeDef *hdma);
+static void UART_DMATxOnlyAbortCallback(DMA_HandleTypeDef *hdma);
+static void UART_DMARxOnlyAbortCallback(DMA_HandleTypeDef *hdma);
+static HAL_StatusTypeDef UART_Transmit_IT(UART_HandleTypeDef *huart);
+static HAL_StatusTypeDef UART_EndTransmit_IT(UART_HandleTypeDef *huart);
+static HAL_StatusTypeDef UART_Receive_IT(UART_HandleTypeDef *huart);
+static HAL_StatusTypeDef UART_WaitOnFlagUntilTimeout(UART_HandleTypeDef *huart, uint32_t Flag, FlagStatus Status, uint32_t Tickstart, uint32_t Timeout);
+static void UART_SetConfig(UART_HandleTypeDef *huart);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/* Exported functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+/** @defgroup UART_Exported_Functions UART Exported Functions
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup UART_Exported_Functions_Group1 Initialization and de-initialization functions
+ * @brief Initialization and Configuration functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ===============================================================================
+ ##### Initialization and Configuration functions #####
+ ===============================================================================
+ [..]
+ This subsection provides a set of functions allowing to initialize the USARTx or the UARTy
+ in asynchronous mode.
+ (+) For the asynchronous mode only these parameters can be configured:
+ (++) Baud Rate
+ (++) Word Length
+ (++) Stop Bit
+ (++) Parity: If the parity is enabled, then the MSB bit of the data written
+ in the data register is transmitted but is changed by the parity bit.
+ Depending on the frame length defined by the M bit (8-bits or 9-bits),
+ please refer to Reference manual for possible UART frame formats.
+ (++) Hardware flow control
+ (++) Receiver/transmitter modes
+ (++) Over Sampling Method
+ [..]
+ The HAL_UART_Init(), HAL_HalfDuplex_Init(), HAL_LIN_Init() and HAL_MultiProcessor_Init() APIs
+ follow respectively the UART asynchronous, UART Half duplex, LIN and Multi-Processor configuration
+ procedures (details for the procedures are available in reference manual (RM0038)).
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Initializes the UART mode according to the specified parameters in
+ * the UART_InitTypeDef and create the associated handle.
+ * @param huart Pointer to a UART_HandleTypeDef structure that contains
+ * the configuration information for the specified UART module.
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_UART_Init(UART_HandleTypeDef *huart)
+{
+ /* Check the UART handle allocation */
+ if (huart == NULL)
+ {
+ return HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ if (huart->Init.HwFlowCtl != UART_HWCONTROL_NONE)
+ {
+ /* The hardware flow control is available only for USART1, USART2 and USART3 */
+ assert_param(IS_UART_HWFLOW_INSTANCE(huart->Instance));
+ assert_param(IS_UART_HARDWARE_FLOW_CONTROL(huart->Init.HwFlowCtl));
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ assert_param(IS_UART_INSTANCE(huart->Instance));
+ }
+ assert_param(IS_UART_WORD_LENGTH(huart->Init.WordLength));
+ assert_param(IS_UART_OVERSAMPLING(huart->Init.OverSampling));
+
+ if (huart->gState == HAL_UART_STATE_RESET)
+ {
+ /* Allocate lock resource and initialize it */
+ huart->Lock = HAL_UNLOCKED;
+
+#if (USE_HAL_UART_REGISTER_CALLBACKS == 1)
+ UART_InitCallbacksToDefault(huart);
+
+ if (huart->MspInitCallback == NULL)
+ {
+ huart->MspInitCallback = HAL_UART_MspInit;
+ }
+
+ /* Init the low level hardware */
+ huart->MspInitCallback(huart);
+#else
+ /* Init the low level hardware : GPIO, CLOCK */
+ HAL_UART_MspInit(huart);
+#endif /* (USE_HAL_UART_REGISTER_CALLBACKS) */
+ }
+
+ huart->gState = HAL_UART_STATE_BUSY;
+
+ /* Disable the peripheral */
+ __HAL_UART_DISABLE(huart);
+
+ /* Set the UART Communication parameters */
+ UART_SetConfig(huart);
+
+ /* In asynchronous mode, the following bits must be kept cleared:
+ - LINEN and CLKEN bits in the USART_CR2 register,
+ - SCEN, HDSEL and IREN bits in the USART_CR3 register.*/
+ CLEAR_BIT(huart->Instance->CR2, (USART_CR2_LINEN | USART_CR2_CLKEN));
+ CLEAR_BIT(huart->Instance->CR3, (USART_CR3_SCEN | USART_CR3_HDSEL | USART_CR3_IREN));
+
+ /* Enable the peripheral */
+ __HAL_UART_ENABLE(huart);
+
+ /* Initialize the UART state */
+ huart->ErrorCode = HAL_UART_ERROR_NONE;
+ huart->gState = HAL_UART_STATE_READY;
+ huart->RxState = HAL_UART_STATE_READY;
+
+ return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Initializes the half-duplex mode according to the specified
+ * parameters in the UART_InitTypeDef and create the associated handle.
+ * @param huart Pointer to a UART_HandleTypeDef structure that contains
+ * the configuration information for the specified UART module.
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_HalfDuplex_Init(UART_HandleTypeDef *huart)
+{
+ /* Check the UART handle allocation */
+ if (huart == NULL)
+ {
+ return HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_UART_HALFDUPLEX_INSTANCE(huart->Instance));
+ assert_param(IS_UART_WORD_LENGTH(huart->Init.WordLength));
+ assert_param(IS_UART_OVERSAMPLING(huart->Init.OverSampling));
+
+ if (huart->gState == HAL_UART_STATE_RESET)
+ {
+ /* Allocate lock resource and initialize it */
+ huart->Lock = HAL_UNLOCKED;
+
+#if (USE_HAL_UART_REGISTER_CALLBACKS == 1)
+ UART_InitCallbacksToDefault(huart);
+
+ if (huart->MspInitCallback == NULL)
+ {
+ huart->MspInitCallback = HAL_UART_MspInit;
+ }
+
+ /* Init the low level hardware */
+ huart->MspInitCallback(huart);
+#else
+ /* Init the low level hardware : GPIO, CLOCK */
+ HAL_UART_MspInit(huart);
+#endif /* (USE_HAL_UART_REGISTER_CALLBACKS) */
+ }
+
+ huart->gState = HAL_UART_STATE_BUSY;
+
+ /* Disable the peripheral */
+ __HAL_UART_DISABLE(huart);
+
+ /* Set the UART Communication parameters */
+ UART_SetConfig(huart);
+
+ /* In half-duplex mode, the following bits must be kept cleared:
+ - LINEN and CLKEN bits in the USART_CR2 register,
+ - SCEN and IREN bits in the USART_CR3 register.*/
+ CLEAR_BIT(huart->Instance->CR2, (USART_CR2_LINEN | USART_CR2_CLKEN));
+ CLEAR_BIT(huart->Instance->CR3, (USART_CR3_IREN | USART_CR3_SCEN));
+
+ /* Enable the Half-Duplex mode by setting the HDSEL bit in the CR3 register */
+ SET_BIT(huart->Instance->CR3, USART_CR3_HDSEL);
+
+ /* Enable the peripheral */
+ __HAL_UART_ENABLE(huart);
+
+ /* Initialize the UART state*/
+ huart->ErrorCode = HAL_UART_ERROR_NONE;
+ huart->gState = HAL_UART_STATE_READY;
+ huart->RxState = HAL_UART_STATE_READY;
+
+ return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Initializes the LIN mode according to the specified
+ * parameters in the UART_InitTypeDef and create the associated handle.
+ * @param huart Pointer to a UART_HandleTypeDef structure that contains
+ * the configuration information for the specified UART module.
+ * @param BreakDetectLength Specifies the LIN break detection length.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg UART_LINBREAKDETECTLENGTH_10B: 10-bit break detection
+ * @arg UART_LINBREAKDETECTLENGTH_11B: 11-bit break detection
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_LIN_Init(UART_HandleTypeDef *huart, uint32_t BreakDetectLength)
+{
+ /* Check the UART handle allocation */
+ if (huart == NULL)
+ {
+ return HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+
+ /* Check the LIN UART instance */
+ assert_param(IS_UART_LIN_INSTANCE(huart->Instance));
+
+ /* Check the Break detection length parameter */
+ assert_param(IS_UART_LIN_BREAK_DETECT_LENGTH(BreakDetectLength));
+ assert_param(IS_UART_LIN_WORD_LENGTH(huart->Init.WordLength));
+ assert_param(IS_UART_LIN_OVERSAMPLING(huart->Init.OverSampling));
+
+ if (huart->gState == HAL_UART_STATE_RESET)
+ {
+ /* Allocate lock resource and initialize it */
+ huart->Lock = HAL_UNLOCKED;
+
+#if (USE_HAL_UART_REGISTER_CALLBACKS == 1)
+ UART_InitCallbacksToDefault(huart);
+
+ if (huart->MspInitCallback == NULL)
+ {
+ huart->MspInitCallback = HAL_UART_MspInit;
+ }
+
+ /* Init the low level hardware */
+ huart->MspInitCallback(huart);
+#else
+ /* Init the low level hardware : GPIO, CLOCK */
+ HAL_UART_MspInit(huart);
+#endif /* (USE_HAL_UART_REGISTER_CALLBACKS) */
+ }
+
+ huart->gState = HAL_UART_STATE_BUSY;
+
+ /* Disable the peripheral */
+ __HAL_UART_DISABLE(huart);
+
+ /* Set the UART Communication parameters */
+ UART_SetConfig(huart);
+
+ /* In LIN mode, the following bits must be kept cleared:
+ - CLKEN bits in the USART_CR2 register,
+ - SCEN, HDSEL and IREN bits in the USART_CR3 register.*/
+ CLEAR_BIT(huart->Instance->CR2, (USART_CR2_CLKEN));
+ CLEAR_BIT(huart->Instance->CR3, (USART_CR3_HDSEL | USART_CR3_IREN | USART_CR3_SCEN));
+
+ /* Enable the LIN mode by setting the LINEN bit in the CR2 register */
+ SET_BIT(huart->Instance->CR2, USART_CR2_LINEN);
+
+ /* Set the USART LIN Break detection length. */
+ CLEAR_BIT(huart->Instance->CR2, USART_CR2_LBDL);
+ SET_BIT(huart->Instance->CR2, BreakDetectLength);
+
+ /* Enable the peripheral */
+ __HAL_UART_ENABLE(huart);
+
+ /* Initialize the UART state*/
+ huart->ErrorCode = HAL_UART_ERROR_NONE;
+ huart->gState = HAL_UART_STATE_READY;
+ huart->RxState = HAL_UART_STATE_READY;
+
+ return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Initializes the Multi-Processor mode according to the specified
+ * parameters in the UART_InitTypeDef and create the associated handle.
+ * @param huart Pointer to a UART_HandleTypeDef structure that contains
+ * the configuration information for the specified UART module.
+ * @param Address USART address
+ * @param WakeUpMethod specifies the USART wake-up method.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg UART_WAKEUPMETHOD_IDLELINE: Wake-up by an idle line detection
+ * @arg UART_WAKEUPMETHOD_ADDRESSMARK: Wake-up by an address mark
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_MultiProcessor_Init(UART_HandleTypeDef *huart, uint8_t Address, uint32_t WakeUpMethod)
+{
+ /* Check the UART handle allocation */
+ if (huart == NULL)
+ {
+ return HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_UART_MULTIPROCESSOR_INSTANCE(huart->Instance));
+
+ /* Check the Address & wake up method parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_UART_WAKEUPMETHOD(WakeUpMethod));
+ assert_param(IS_UART_ADDRESS(Address));
+ assert_param(IS_UART_WORD_LENGTH(huart->Init.WordLength));
+ assert_param(IS_UART_OVERSAMPLING(huart->Init.OverSampling));
+
+ if (huart->gState == HAL_UART_STATE_RESET)
+ {
+ /* Allocate lock resource and initialize it */
+ huart->Lock = HAL_UNLOCKED;
+
+#if (USE_HAL_UART_REGISTER_CALLBACKS == 1)
+ UART_InitCallbacksToDefault(huart);
+
+ if (huart->MspInitCallback == NULL)
+ {
+ huart->MspInitCallback = HAL_UART_MspInit;
+ }
+
+ /* Init the low level hardware */
+ huart->MspInitCallback(huart);
+#else
+ /* Init the low level hardware : GPIO, CLOCK */
+ HAL_UART_MspInit(huart);
+#endif /* (USE_HAL_UART_REGISTER_CALLBACKS) */
+ }
+
+ huart->gState = HAL_UART_STATE_BUSY;
+
+ /* Disable the peripheral */
+ __HAL_UART_DISABLE(huart);
+
+ /* Set the UART Communication parameters */
+ UART_SetConfig(huart);
+
+ /* In Multi-Processor mode, the following bits must be kept cleared:
+ - LINEN and CLKEN bits in the USART_CR2 register,
+ - SCEN, HDSEL and IREN bits in the USART_CR3 register */
+ CLEAR_BIT(huart->Instance->CR2, (USART_CR2_LINEN | USART_CR2_CLKEN));
+ CLEAR_BIT(huart->Instance->CR3, (USART_CR3_SCEN | USART_CR3_HDSEL | USART_CR3_IREN));
+
+ /* Set the USART address node */
+ CLEAR_BIT(huart->Instance->CR2, USART_CR2_ADD);
+ SET_BIT(huart->Instance->CR2, Address);
+
+ /* Set the wake up method by setting the WAKE bit in the CR1 register */
+ CLEAR_BIT(huart->Instance->CR1, USART_CR1_WAKE);
+ SET_BIT(huart->Instance->CR1, WakeUpMethod);
+
+ /* Enable the peripheral */
+ __HAL_UART_ENABLE(huart);
+
+ /* Initialize the UART state */
+ huart->ErrorCode = HAL_UART_ERROR_NONE;
+ huart->gState = HAL_UART_STATE_READY;
+ huart->RxState = HAL_UART_STATE_READY;
+
+ return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief DeInitializes the UART peripheral.
+ * @param huart Pointer to a UART_HandleTypeDef structure that contains
+ * the configuration information for the specified UART module.
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_UART_DeInit(UART_HandleTypeDef *huart)
+{
+ /* Check the UART handle allocation */
+ if (huart == NULL)
+ {
+ return HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_UART_INSTANCE(huart->Instance));
+
+ huart->gState = HAL_UART_STATE_BUSY;
+
+ /* Disable the Peripheral */
+ __HAL_UART_DISABLE(huart);
+
+#if (USE_HAL_UART_REGISTER_CALLBACKS == 1)
+ if (huart->MspDeInitCallback == NULL)
+ {
+ huart->MspDeInitCallback = HAL_UART_MspDeInit;
+ }
+ /* DeInit the low level hardware */
+ huart->MspDeInitCallback(huart);
+#else
+ /* DeInit the low level hardware */
+ HAL_UART_MspDeInit(huart);
+#endif /* (USE_HAL_UART_REGISTER_CALLBACKS) */
+
+ huart->ErrorCode = HAL_UART_ERROR_NONE;
+ huart->gState = HAL_UART_STATE_RESET;
+ huart->RxState = HAL_UART_STATE_RESET;
+
+ /* Process Unlock */
+ __HAL_UNLOCK(huart);
+
+ return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief UART MSP Init.
+ * @param huart Pointer to a UART_HandleTypeDef structure that contains
+ * the configuration information for the specified UART module.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+__weak void HAL_UART_MspInit(UART_HandleTypeDef *huart)
+{
+ /* Prevent unused argument(s) compilation warning */
+ UNUSED(huart);
+ /* NOTE: This function should not be modified, when the callback is needed,
+ the HAL_UART_MspInit could be implemented in the user file
+ */
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief UART MSP DeInit.
+ * @param huart Pointer to a UART_HandleTypeDef structure that contains
+ * the configuration information for the specified UART module.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+__weak void HAL_UART_MspDeInit(UART_HandleTypeDef *huart)
+{
+ /* Prevent unused argument(s) compilation warning */
+ UNUSED(huart);
+ /* NOTE: This function should not be modified, when the callback is needed,
+ the HAL_UART_MspDeInit could be implemented in the user file
+ */
+}
+
+#if (USE_HAL_UART_REGISTER_CALLBACKS == 1)
+/**
+ * @brief Register a User UART Callback
+ * To be used instead of the weak predefined callback
+ * @param huart uart handle
+ * @param CallbackID ID of the callback to be registered
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg @ref HAL_UART_TX_HALFCOMPLETE_CB_ID Tx Half Complete Callback ID
+ * @arg @ref HAL_UART_TX_COMPLETE_CB_ID Tx Complete Callback ID
+ * @arg @ref HAL_UART_RX_HALFCOMPLETE_CB_ID Rx Half Complete Callback ID
+ * @arg @ref HAL_UART_RX_COMPLETE_CB_ID Rx Complete Callback ID
+ * @arg @ref HAL_UART_ERROR_CB_ID Error Callback ID
+ * @arg @ref HAL_UART_ABORT_COMPLETE_CB_ID Abort Complete Callback ID
+ * @arg @ref HAL_UART_ABORT_TRANSMIT_COMPLETE_CB_ID Abort Transmit Complete Callback ID
+ * @arg @ref HAL_UART_ABORT_RECEIVE_COMPLETE_CB_ID Abort Receive Complete Callback ID
+ * @arg @ref HAL_UART_MSPINIT_CB_ID MspInit Callback ID
+ * @arg @ref HAL_UART_MSPDEINIT_CB_ID MspDeInit Callback ID
+ * @param pCallback pointer to the Callback function
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_UART_RegisterCallback(UART_HandleTypeDef *huart, HAL_UART_CallbackIDTypeDef CallbackID, pUART_CallbackTypeDef pCallback)
+{
+ HAL_StatusTypeDef status = HAL_OK;
+
+ if (pCallback == NULL)
+ {
+ /* Update the error code */
+ huart->ErrorCode |= HAL_UART_ERROR_INVALID_CALLBACK;
+
+ return HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+ /* Process locked */
+ __HAL_LOCK(huart);
+
+ if (huart->gState == HAL_UART_STATE_READY)
+ {
+ switch (CallbackID)
+ {
+ case HAL_UART_TX_HALFCOMPLETE_CB_ID :
+ huart->TxHalfCpltCallback = pCallback;
+ break;
+
+ case HAL_UART_TX_COMPLETE_CB_ID :
+ huart->TxCpltCallback = pCallback;
+ break;
+
+ case HAL_UART_RX_HALFCOMPLETE_CB_ID :
+ huart->RxHalfCpltCallback = pCallback;
+ break;
+
+ case HAL_UART_RX_COMPLETE_CB_ID :
+ huart->RxCpltCallback = pCallback;
+ break;
+
+ case HAL_UART_ERROR_CB_ID :
+ huart->ErrorCallback = pCallback;
+ break;
+
+ case HAL_UART_ABORT_COMPLETE_CB_ID :
+ huart->AbortCpltCallback = pCallback;
+ break;
+
+ case HAL_UART_ABORT_TRANSMIT_COMPLETE_CB_ID :
+ huart->AbortTransmitCpltCallback = pCallback;
+ break;
+
+ case HAL_UART_ABORT_RECEIVE_COMPLETE_CB_ID :
+ huart->AbortReceiveCpltCallback = pCallback;
+ break;
+
+ case HAL_UART_MSPINIT_CB_ID :
+ huart->MspInitCallback = pCallback;
+ break;
+
+ case HAL_UART_MSPDEINIT_CB_ID :
+ huart->MspDeInitCallback = pCallback;
+ break;
+
+ default :
+ /* Update the error code */
+ huart->ErrorCode |= HAL_UART_ERROR_INVALID_CALLBACK;
+
+ /* Return error status */
+ status = HAL_ERROR;
+ break;
+ }
+ }
+ else if (huart->gState == HAL_UART_STATE_RESET)
+ {
+ switch (CallbackID)
+ {
+ case HAL_UART_MSPINIT_CB_ID :
+ huart->MspInitCallback = pCallback;
+ break;
+
+ case HAL_UART_MSPDEINIT_CB_ID :
+ huart->MspDeInitCallback = pCallback;
+ break;
+
+ default :
+ /* Update the error code */
+ huart->ErrorCode |= HAL_UART_ERROR_INVALID_CALLBACK;
+
+ /* Return error status */
+ status = HAL_ERROR;
+ break;
+ }
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Update the error code */
+ huart->ErrorCode |= HAL_UART_ERROR_INVALID_CALLBACK;
+
+ /* Return error status */
+ status = HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+
+ /* Release Lock */
+ __HAL_UNLOCK(huart);
+
+ return status;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Unregister an UART Callback
+ * UART callaback is redirected to the weak predefined callback
+ * @param huart uart handle
+ * @param CallbackID ID of the callback to be unregistered
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg @ref HAL_UART_TX_HALFCOMPLETE_CB_ID Tx Half Complete Callback ID
+ * @arg @ref HAL_UART_TX_COMPLETE_CB_ID Tx Complete Callback ID
+ * @arg @ref HAL_UART_RX_HALFCOMPLETE_CB_ID Rx Half Complete Callback ID
+ * @arg @ref HAL_UART_RX_COMPLETE_CB_ID Rx Complete Callback ID
+ * @arg @ref HAL_UART_ERROR_CB_ID Error Callback ID
+ * @arg @ref HAL_UART_ABORT_COMPLETE_CB_ID Abort Complete Callback ID
+ * @arg @ref HAL_UART_ABORT_TRANSMIT_COMPLETE_CB_ID Abort Transmit Complete Callback ID
+ * @arg @ref HAL_UART_ABORT_RECEIVE_COMPLETE_CB_ID Abort Receive Complete Callback ID
+ * @arg @ref HAL_UART_MSPINIT_CB_ID MspInit Callback ID
+ * @arg @ref HAL_UART_MSPDEINIT_CB_ID MspDeInit Callback ID
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_UART_UnRegisterCallback(UART_HandleTypeDef *huart, HAL_UART_CallbackIDTypeDef CallbackID)
+{
+ HAL_StatusTypeDef status = HAL_OK;
+
+ /* Process locked */
+ __HAL_LOCK(huart);
+
+ if (HAL_UART_STATE_READY == huart->gState)
+ {
+ switch (CallbackID)
+ {
+ case HAL_UART_TX_HALFCOMPLETE_CB_ID :
+ huart->TxHalfCpltCallback = HAL_UART_TxHalfCpltCallback; /* Legacy weak TxHalfCpltCallback */
+ break;
+
+ case HAL_UART_TX_COMPLETE_CB_ID :
+ huart->TxCpltCallback = HAL_UART_TxCpltCallback; /* Legacy weak TxCpltCallback */
+ break;
+
+ case HAL_UART_RX_HALFCOMPLETE_CB_ID :
+ huart->RxHalfCpltCallback = HAL_UART_RxHalfCpltCallback; /* Legacy weak RxHalfCpltCallback */
+ break;
+
+ case HAL_UART_RX_COMPLETE_CB_ID :
+ huart->RxCpltCallback = HAL_UART_RxCpltCallback; /* Legacy weak RxCpltCallback */
+ break;
+
+ case HAL_UART_ERROR_CB_ID :
+ huart->ErrorCallback = HAL_UART_ErrorCallback; /* Legacy weak ErrorCallback */
+ break;
+
+ case HAL_UART_ABORT_COMPLETE_CB_ID :
+ huart->AbortCpltCallback = HAL_UART_AbortCpltCallback; /* Legacy weak AbortCpltCallback */
+ break;
+
+ case HAL_UART_ABORT_TRANSMIT_COMPLETE_CB_ID :
+ huart->AbortTransmitCpltCallback = HAL_UART_AbortTransmitCpltCallback; /* Legacy weak AbortTransmitCpltCallback */
+ break;
+
+ case HAL_UART_ABORT_RECEIVE_COMPLETE_CB_ID :
+ huart->AbortReceiveCpltCallback = HAL_UART_AbortReceiveCpltCallback; /* Legacy weak AbortReceiveCpltCallback */
+ break;
+
+ case HAL_UART_MSPINIT_CB_ID :
+ huart->MspInitCallback = HAL_UART_MspInit; /* Legacy weak MspInitCallback */
+ break;
+
+ case HAL_UART_MSPDEINIT_CB_ID :
+ huart->MspDeInitCallback = HAL_UART_MspDeInit; /* Legacy weak MspDeInitCallback */
+ break;
+
+ default :
+ /* Update the error code */
+ huart->ErrorCode |= HAL_UART_ERROR_INVALID_CALLBACK;
+
+ /* Return error status */
+ status = HAL_ERROR;
+ break;
+ }
+ }
+ else if (HAL_UART_STATE_RESET == huart->gState)
+ {
+ switch (CallbackID)
+ {
+ case HAL_UART_MSPINIT_CB_ID :
+ huart->MspInitCallback = HAL_UART_MspInit;
+ break;
+
+ case HAL_UART_MSPDEINIT_CB_ID :
+ huart->MspDeInitCallback = HAL_UART_MspDeInit;
+ break;
+
+ default :
+ /* Update the error code */
+ huart->ErrorCode |= HAL_UART_ERROR_INVALID_CALLBACK;
+
+ /* Return error status */
+ status = HAL_ERROR;
+ break;
+ }
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Update the error code */
+ huart->ErrorCode |= HAL_UART_ERROR_INVALID_CALLBACK;
+
+ /* Return error status */
+ status = HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+
+ /* Release Lock */
+ __HAL_UNLOCK(huart);
+
+ return status;
+}
+#endif /* USE_HAL_UART_REGISTER_CALLBACKS */
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup UART_Exported_Functions_Group2 IO operation functions
+ * @brief UART Transmit and Receive functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ===============================================================================
+ ##### IO operation functions #####
+ ===============================================================================
+ This subsection provides a set of functions allowing to manage the UART asynchronous
+ and Half duplex data transfers.
+
+ (#) There are two modes of transfer:
+ (+) Blocking mode: The communication is performed in polling mode.
+ The HAL status of all data processing is returned by the same function
+ after finishing transfer.
+ (+) Non-Blocking mode: The communication is performed using Interrupts
+ or DMA, these API's return the HAL status.
+ The end of the data processing will be indicated through the
+ dedicated UART IRQ when using Interrupt mode or the DMA IRQ when
+ using DMA mode.
+ The HAL_UART_TxCpltCallback(), HAL_UART_RxCpltCallback() user callbacks
+ will be executed respectively at the end of the transmit or receive process
+ The HAL_UART_ErrorCallback()user callback will be executed when a communication error is detected.
+
+ (#) Blocking mode API's are :
+ (+) HAL_UART_Transmit()
+ (+) HAL_UART_Receive()
+
+ (#) Non-Blocking mode API's with Interrupt are :
+ (+) HAL_UART_Transmit_IT()
+ (+) HAL_UART_Receive_IT()
+ (+) HAL_UART_IRQHandler()
+
+ (#) Non-Blocking mode API's with DMA are :
+ (+) HAL_UART_Transmit_DMA()
+ (+) HAL_UART_Receive_DMA()
+ (+) HAL_UART_DMAPause()
+ (+) HAL_UART_DMAResume()
+ (+) HAL_UART_DMAStop()
+
+ (#) A set of Transfer Complete Callbacks are provided in Non_Blocking mode:
+ (+) HAL_UART_TxHalfCpltCallback()
+ (+) HAL_UART_TxCpltCallback()
+ (+) HAL_UART_RxHalfCpltCallback()
+ (+) HAL_UART_RxCpltCallback()
+ (+) HAL_UART_ErrorCallback()
+
+ (#) Non-Blocking mode transfers could be aborted using Abort API's :
+ (+) HAL_UART_Abort()
+ (+) HAL_UART_AbortTransmit()
+ (+) HAL_UART_AbortReceive()
+ (+) HAL_UART_Abort_IT()
+ (+) HAL_UART_AbortTransmit_IT()
+ (+) HAL_UART_AbortReceive_IT()
+
+ (#) For Abort services based on interrupts (HAL_UART_Abortxxx_IT), a set of Abort Complete Callbacks are provided:
+ (+) HAL_UART_AbortCpltCallback()
+ (+) HAL_UART_AbortTransmitCpltCallback()
+ (+) HAL_UART_AbortReceiveCpltCallback()
+
+ (#) In Non-Blocking mode transfers, possible errors are split into 2 categories.
+ Errors are handled as follows :
+ (+) Error is considered as Recoverable and non blocking : Transfer could go till end, but error severity is
+ to be evaluated by user : this concerns Frame Error, Parity Error or Noise Error in Interrupt mode reception .
+ Received character is then retrieved and stored in Rx buffer, Error code is set to allow user to identify error type,
+ and HAL_UART_ErrorCallback() user callback is executed. Transfer is kept ongoing on UART side.
+ If user wants to abort it, Abort services should be called by user.
+ (+) Error is considered as Blocking : Transfer could not be completed properly and is aborted.
+ This concerns Overrun Error In Interrupt mode reception and all errors in DMA mode.
+ Error code is set to allow user to identify error type, and HAL_UART_ErrorCallback() user callback is executed.
+
+ -@- In the Half duplex communication, it is forbidden to run the transmit
+ and receive process in parallel, the UART state HAL_UART_STATE_BUSY_TX_RX can't be useful.
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Sends an amount of data in blocking mode.
+ * @param huart Pointer to a UART_HandleTypeDef structure that contains
+ * the configuration information for the specified UART module.
+ * @param pData Pointer to data buffer
+ * @param Size Amount of data to be sent
+ * @param Timeout Timeout duration
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_UART_Transmit(UART_HandleTypeDef *huart, uint8_t *pData, uint16_t Size, uint32_t Timeout)
+{
+ uint16_t *tmp;
+ uint32_t tickstart = 0U;
+
+ /* Check that a Tx process is not already ongoing */
+ if (huart->gState == HAL_UART_STATE_READY)
+ {
+ if ((pData == NULL) || (Size == 0U))
+ {
+ return HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+
+ /* Process Locked */
+ __HAL_LOCK(huart);
+
+ huart->ErrorCode = HAL_UART_ERROR_NONE;
+ huart->gState = HAL_UART_STATE_BUSY_TX;
+
+ /* Init tickstart for timeout managment */
+ tickstart = HAL_GetTick();
+
+ huart->TxXferSize = Size;
+ huart->TxXferCount = Size;
+ while (huart->TxXferCount > 0U)
+ {
+ huart->TxXferCount--;
+ if (huart->Init.WordLength == UART_WORDLENGTH_9B)
+ {
+ if (UART_WaitOnFlagUntilTimeout(huart, UART_FLAG_TXE, RESET, tickstart, Timeout) != HAL_OK)
+ {
+ return HAL_TIMEOUT;
+ }
+ tmp = (uint16_t *) pData;
+ huart->Instance->DR = (*tmp & (uint16_t)0x01FF);
+ if (huart->Init.Parity == UART_PARITY_NONE)
+ {
+ pData += 2U;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ pData += 1U;
+ }
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ if (UART_WaitOnFlagUntilTimeout(huart, UART_FLAG_TXE, RESET, tickstart, Timeout) != HAL_OK)
+ {
+ return HAL_TIMEOUT;
+ }
+ huart->Instance->DR = (*pData++ & (uint8_t)0xFF);
+ }
+ }
+
+ if (UART_WaitOnFlagUntilTimeout(huart, UART_FLAG_TC, RESET, tickstart, Timeout) != HAL_OK)
+ {
+ return HAL_TIMEOUT;
+ }
+
+ /* At end of Tx process, restore huart->gState to Ready */
+ huart->gState = HAL_UART_STATE_READY;
+
+ /* Process Unlocked */
+ __HAL_UNLOCK(huart);
+
+ return HAL_OK;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ return HAL_BUSY;
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Receives an amount of data in blocking mode.
+ * @param huart Pointer to a UART_HandleTypeDef structure that contains
+ * the configuration information for the specified UART module.
+ * @param pData Pointer to data buffer
+ * @param Size Amount of data to be received
+ * @param Timeout Timeout duration
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_UART_Receive(UART_HandleTypeDef *huart, uint8_t *pData, uint16_t Size, uint32_t Timeout)
+{
+ uint16_t *tmp;
+ uint32_t tickstart = 0U;
+
+ /* Check that a Rx process is not already ongoing */
+ if (huart->RxState == HAL_UART_STATE_READY)
+ {
+ if ((pData == NULL) || (Size == 0U))
+ {
+ return HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+
+ /* Process Locked */
+ __HAL_LOCK(huart);
+
+ huart->ErrorCode = HAL_UART_ERROR_NONE;
+ huart->RxState = HAL_UART_STATE_BUSY_RX;
+
+ /* Init tickstart for timeout managment */
+ tickstart = HAL_GetTick();
+
+ huart->RxXferSize = Size;
+ huart->RxXferCount = Size;
+
+ /* Check the remain data to be received */
+ while (huart->RxXferCount > 0U)
+ {
+ huart->RxXferCount--;
+ if (huart->Init.WordLength == UART_WORDLENGTH_9B)
+ {
+ if (UART_WaitOnFlagUntilTimeout(huart, UART_FLAG_RXNE, RESET, tickstart, Timeout) != HAL_OK)
+ {
+ return HAL_TIMEOUT;
+ }
+ tmp = (uint16_t *) pData;
+ if (huart->Init.Parity == UART_PARITY_NONE)
+ {
+ *tmp = (uint16_t)(huart->Instance->DR & (uint16_t)0x01FF);
+ pData += 2U;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ *tmp = (uint16_t)(huart->Instance->DR & (uint16_t)0x00FF);
+ pData += 1U;
+ }
+
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ if (UART_WaitOnFlagUntilTimeout(huart, UART_FLAG_RXNE, RESET, tickstart, Timeout) != HAL_OK)
+ {
+ return HAL_TIMEOUT;
+ }
+ if (huart->Init.Parity == UART_PARITY_NONE)
+ {
+ *pData++ = (uint8_t)(huart->Instance->DR & (uint8_t)0x00FF);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ *pData++ = (uint8_t)(huart->Instance->DR & (uint8_t)0x007F);
+ }
+
+ }
+ }
+
+ /* At end of Rx process, restore huart->RxState to Ready */
+ huart->RxState = HAL_UART_STATE_READY;
+
+ /* Process Unlocked */
+ __HAL_UNLOCK(huart);
+
+ return HAL_OK;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ return HAL_BUSY;
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Sends an amount of data in non blocking mode.
+ * @param huart Pointer to a UART_HandleTypeDef structure that contains
+ * the configuration information for the specified UART module.
+ * @param pData Pointer to data buffer
+ * @param Size Amount of data to be sent
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_UART_Transmit_IT(UART_HandleTypeDef *huart, uint8_t *pData, uint16_t Size)
+{
+ /* Check that a Tx process is not already ongoing */
+ if (huart->gState == HAL_UART_STATE_READY)
+ {
+ if ((pData == NULL) || (Size == 0U))
+ {
+ return HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+
+ /* Process Locked */
+ __HAL_LOCK(huart);
+
+ huart->pTxBuffPtr = pData;
+ huart->TxXferSize = Size;
+ huart->TxXferCount = Size;
+
+ huart->ErrorCode = HAL_UART_ERROR_NONE;
+ huart->gState = HAL_UART_STATE_BUSY_TX;
+
+ /* Process Unlocked */
+ __HAL_UNLOCK(huart);
+
+ /* Enable the UART Transmit data register empty Interrupt */
+ __HAL_UART_ENABLE_IT(huart, UART_IT_TXE);
+
+ return HAL_OK;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ return HAL_BUSY;
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Receives an amount of data in non blocking mode.
+ * @param huart Pointer to a UART_HandleTypeDef structure that contains
+ * the configuration information for the specified UART module.
+ * @param pData Pointer to data buffer
+ * @param Size Amount of data to be received
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_UART_Receive_IT(UART_HandleTypeDef *huart, uint8_t *pData, uint16_t Size)
+{
+ /* Check that a Rx process is not already ongoing */
+ if (huart->RxState == HAL_UART_STATE_READY)
+ {
+ if ((pData == NULL) || (Size == 0U))
+ {
+ return HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+
+ /* Process Locked */
+ __HAL_LOCK(huart);
+
+ huart->pRxBuffPtr = pData;
+ huart->RxXferSize = Size;
+ huart->RxXferCount = Size;
+
+ huart->ErrorCode = HAL_UART_ERROR_NONE;
+ huart->RxState = HAL_UART_STATE_BUSY_RX;
+
+ /* Process Unlocked */
+ __HAL_UNLOCK(huart);
+
+ /* Enable the UART Parity Error Interrupt */
+ __HAL_UART_ENABLE_IT(huart, UART_IT_PE);
+
+ /* Enable the UART Error Interrupt: (Frame error, noise error, overrun error) */
+ __HAL_UART_ENABLE_IT(huart, UART_IT_ERR);
+
+ /* Enable the UART Data Register not empty Interrupt */
+ __HAL_UART_ENABLE_IT(huart, UART_IT_RXNE);
+
+ return HAL_OK;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ return HAL_BUSY;
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Sends an amount of data in non blocking mode.
+ * @param huart Pointer to a UART_HandleTypeDef structure that contains
+ * the configuration information for the specified UART module.
+ * @param pData Pointer to data buffer
+ * @param Size Amount of data to be sent
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_UART_Transmit_DMA(UART_HandleTypeDef *huart, uint8_t *pData, uint16_t Size)
+{
+ uint32_t *tmp;
+
+ /* Check that a Tx process is not already ongoing */
+ if (huart->gState == HAL_UART_STATE_READY)
+ {
+ if ((pData == NULL) || (Size == 0U))
+ {
+ return HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+
+ /* Process Locked */
+ __HAL_LOCK(huart);
+
+ huart->pTxBuffPtr = pData;
+ huart->TxXferSize = Size;
+ huart->TxXferCount = Size;
+
+ huart->ErrorCode = HAL_UART_ERROR_NONE;
+ huart->gState = HAL_UART_STATE_BUSY_TX;
+
+ /* Set the UART DMA transfer complete callback */
+ huart->hdmatx->XferCpltCallback = UART_DMATransmitCplt;
+
+ /* Set the UART DMA Half transfer complete callback */
+ huart->hdmatx->XferHalfCpltCallback = UART_DMATxHalfCplt;
+
+ /* Set the DMA error callback */
+ huart->hdmatx->XferErrorCallback = UART_DMAError;
+
+ /* Set the DMA abort callback */
+ huart->hdmatx->XferAbortCallback = NULL;
+
+ /* Enable the UART transmit DMA channel */
+ tmp = (uint32_t *)&pData;
+ HAL_DMA_Start_IT(huart->hdmatx, *(uint32_t *)tmp, (uint32_t)&huart->Instance->DR, Size);
+
+ /* Clear the TC flag in the SR register by writing 0 to it */
+ __HAL_UART_CLEAR_FLAG(huart, UART_FLAG_TC);
+
+ /* Process Unlocked */
+ __HAL_UNLOCK(huart);
+
+ /* Enable the DMA transfer for transmit request by setting the DMAT bit
+ in the UART CR3 register */
+ SET_BIT(huart->Instance->CR3, USART_CR3_DMAT);
+
+ return HAL_OK;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ return HAL_BUSY;
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Receives an amount of data in non blocking mode.
+ * @param huart Pointer to a UART_HandleTypeDef structure that contains
+ * the configuration information for the specified UART module.
+ * @param pData Pointer to data buffer
+ * @param Size Amount of data to be received
+ * @note When the UART parity is enabled (PCE = 1) the received data contains the parity bit.
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_UART_Receive_DMA(UART_HandleTypeDef *huart, uint8_t *pData, uint16_t Size)
+{
+ uint32_t *tmp;
+
+ /* Check that a Rx process is not already ongoing */
+ if (huart->RxState == HAL_UART_STATE_READY)
+ {
+ if ((pData == NULL) || (Size == 0U))
+ {
+ return HAL_ERROR;
+ }
+
+ /* Process Locked */
+ __HAL_LOCK(huart);
+
+ huart->pRxBuffPtr = pData;
+ huart->RxXferSize = Size;
+
+ huart->ErrorCode = HAL_UART_ERROR_NONE;
+ huart->RxState = HAL_UART_STATE_BUSY_RX;
+
+ /* Set the UART DMA transfer complete callback */
+ huart->hdmarx->XferCpltCallback = UART_DMAReceiveCplt;
+
+ /* Set the UART DMA Half transfer complete callback */
+ huart->hdmarx->XferHalfCpltCallback = UART_DMARxHalfCplt;
+
+ /* Set the DMA error callback */
+ huart->hdmarx->XferErrorCallback = UART_DMAError;
+
+ /* Set the DMA abort callback */
+ huart->hdmarx->XferAbortCallback = NULL;
+
+ /* Enable the DMA channel */
+ tmp = (uint32_t *)&pData;
+ HAL_DMA_Start_IT(huart->hdmarx, (uint32_t)&huart->Instance->DR, *(uint32_t *)tmp, Size);
+
+ /* Clear the Overrun flag just before enabling the DMA Rx request: can be mandatory for the second transfer */
+ __HAL_UART_CLEAR_OREFLAG(huart);
+
+ /* Process Unlocked */
+ __HAL_UNLOCK(huart);
+
+ /* Enable the UART Parity Error Interrupt */
+ SET_BIT(huart->Instance->CR1, USART_CR1_PEIE);
+
+ /* Enable the UART Error Interrupt: (Frame error, noise error, overrun error) */
+ SET_BIT(huart->Instance->CR3, USART_CR3_EIE);
+
+ /* Enable the DMA transfer for the receiver request by setting the DMAR bit
+ in the UART CR3 register */
+ SET_BIT(huart->Instance->CR3, USART_CR3_DMAR);
+
+ return HAL_OK;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ return HAL_BUSY;
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Pauses the DMA Transfer.
+ * @param huart Pointer to a UART_HandleTypeDef structure that contains
+ * the configuration information for the specified UART module.
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_UART_DMAPause(UART_HandleTypeDef *huart)
+{
+ uint32_t dmarequest = 0x00U;
+
+ /* Process Locked */
+ __HAL_LOCK(huart);
+
+ dmarequest = HAL_IS_BIT_SET(huart->Instance->CR3, USART_CR3_DMAT);
+ if ((huart->gState == HAL_UART_STATE_BUSY_TX) && dmarequest)
+ {
+ /* Disable the UART DMA Tx request */
+ CLEAR_BIT(huart->Instance->CR3, USART_CR3_DMAT);
+ }
+
+ dmarequest = HAL_IS_BIT_SET(huart->Instance->CR3, USART_CR3_DMAR);
+ if ((huart->RxState == HAL_UART_STATE_BUSY_RX) && dmarequest)
+ {
+ /* Disable RXNE, PE and ERR (Frame error, noise error, overrun error) interrupts */
+ CLEAR_BIT(huart->Instance->CR1, USART_CR1_PEIE);
+ CLEAR_BIT(huart->Instance->CR3, USART_CR3_EIE);
+
+ /* Disable the UART DMA Rx request */
+ CLEAR_BIT(huart->Instance->CR3, USART_CR3_DMAR);
+ }
+
+ /* Process Unlocked */
+ __HAL_UNLOCK(huart);
+
+ return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Resumes the DMA Transfer.
+ * @param huart Pointer to a UART_HandleTypeDef structure that contains
+ * the configuration information for the specified UART module.
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_UART_DMAResume(UART_HandleTypeDef *huart)
+{
+ /* Process Locked */
+ __HAL_LOCK(huart);
+
+ if (huart->gState == HAL_UART_STATE_BUSY_TX)
+ {
+ /* Enable the UART DMA Tx request */
+ SET_BIT(huart->Instance->CR3, USART_CR3_DMAT);
+ }
+
+ if (huart->RxState == HAL_UART_STATE_BUSY_RX)
+ {
+ /* Clear the Overrun flag before resuming the Rx transfer*/
+ __HAL_UART_CLEAR_OREFLAG(huart);
+
+ /* Reenable PE and ERR (Frame error, noise error, overrun error) interrupts */
+ SET_BIT(huart->Instance->CR1, USART_CR1_PEIE);
+ SET_BIT(huart->Instance->CR3, USART_CR3_EIE);
+
+ /* Enable the UART DMA Rx request */
+ SET_BIT(huart->Instance->CR3, USART_CR3_DMAR);
+ }
+
+ /* Process Unlocked */
+ __HAL_UNLOCK(huart);
+
+ return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Stops the DMA Transfer.
+ * @param huart Pointer to a UART_HandleTypeDef structure that contains
+ * the configuration information for the specified UART module.
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_UART_DMAStop(UART_HandleTypeDef *huart)
+{
+ uint32_t dmarequest = 0x00U;
+ /* The Lock is not implemented on this API to allow the user application
+ to call the HAL UART API under callbacks HAL_UART_TxCpltCallback() / HAL_UART_RxCpltCallback():
+ when calling HAL_DMA_Abort() API the DMA TX/RX Transfer complete interrupt is generated
+ and the correspond call back is executed HAL_UART_TxCpltCallback() / HAL_UART_RxCpltCallback()
+ */
+
+ /* Stop UART DMA Tx request if ongoing */
+ dmarequest = HAL_IS_BIT_SET(huart->Instance->CR3, USART_CR3_DMAT);
+ if ((huart->gState == HAL_UART_STATE_BUSY_TX) && dmarequest)
+ {
+ CLEAR_BIT(huart->Instance->CR3, USART_CR3_DMAT);
+
+ /* Abort the UART DMA Tx channel */
+ if (huart->hdmatx != NULL)
+ {
+ HAL_DMA_Abort(huart->hdmatx);
+ }
+ UART_EndTxTransfer(huart);
+ }
+
+ /* Stop UART DMA Rx request if ongoing */
+ dmarequest = HAL_IS_BIT_SET(huart->Instance->CR3, USART_CR3_DMAR);
+ if ((huart->RxState == HAL_UART_STATE_BUSY_RX) && dmarequest)
+ {
+ CLEAR_BIT(huart->Instance->CR3, USART_CR3_DMAR);
+
+ /* Abort the UART DMA Rx channel */
+ if (huart->hdmarx != NULL)
+ {
+ HAL_DMA_Abort(huart->hdmarx);
+ }
+ UART_EndRxTransfer(huart);
+ }
+
+ return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Abort ongoing transfers (blocking mode).
+ * @param huart UART handle.
+ * @note This procedure could be used for aborting any ongoing transfer started in Interrupt or DMA mode.
+ * This procedure performs following operations :
+ * - Disable UART Interrupts (Tx and Rx)
+ * - Disable the DMA transfer in the peripheral register (if enabled)
+ * - Abort DMA transfer by calling HAL_DMA_Abort (in case of transfer in DMA mode)
+ * - Set handle State to READY
+ * @note This procedure is executed in blocking mode : when exiting function, Abort is considered as completed.
+ * @retval HAL status
+*/
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_UART_Abort(UART_HandleTypeDef *huart)
+{
+ /* Disable TXEIE, TCIE, RXNE, PE and ERR (Frame error, noise error, overrun error) interrupts */
+ CLEAR_BIT(huart->Instance->CR1, (USART_CR1_RXNEIE | USART_CR1_PEIE | USART_CR1_TXEIE | USART_CR1_TCIE));
+ CLEAR_BIT(huart->Instance->CR3, USART_CR3_EIE);
+
+ /* Disable the UART DMA Tx request if enabled */
+ if (HAL_IS_BIT_SET(huart->Instance->CR3, USART_CR3_DMAT))
+ {
+ CLEAR_BIT(huart->Instance->CR3, USART_CR3_DMAT);
+
+ /* Abort the UART DMA Tx channel: use blocking DMA Abort API (no callback) */
+ if (huart->hdmatx != NULL)
+ {
+ /* Set the UART DMA Abort callback to Null.
+ No call back execution at end of DMA abort procedure */
+ huart->hdmatx->XferAbortCallback = NULL;
+
+ if (HAL_DMA_Abort(huart->hdmatx) != HAL_OK)
+ {
+ if (HAL_DMA_GetError(huart->hdmatx) == HAL_DMA_ERROR_TIMEOUT)
+ {
+ /* Set error code to DMA */
+ huart->ErrorCode = HAL_UART_ERROR_DMA;
+
+ return HAL_TIMEOUT;
+ }
+ }
+ }
+ }
+
+ /* Disable the UART DMA Rx request if enabled */
+ if (HAL_IS_BIT_SET(huart->Instance->CR3, USART_CR3_DMAR))
+ {
+ CLEAR_BIT(huart->Instance->CR3, USART_CR3_DMAR);
+
+ /* Abort the UART DMA Rx channel: use blocking DMA Abort API (no callback) */
+ if (huart->hdmarx != NULL)
+ {
+ /* Set the UART DMA Abort callback to Null.
+ No call back execution at end of DMA abort procedure */
+ huart->hdmarx->XferAbortCallback = NULL;
+
+ if (HAL_DMA_Abort(huart->hdmarx) != HAL_OK)
+ {
+ if (HAL_DMA_GetError(huart->hdmarx) == HAL_DMA_ERROR_TIMEOUT)
+ {
+ /* Set error code to DMA */
+ huart->ErrorCode = HAL_UART_ERROR_DMA;
+
+ return HAL_TIMEOUT;
+ }
+ }
+ }
+ }
+
+ /* Reset Tx and Rx transfer counters */
+ huart->TxXferCount = 0x00U;
+ huart->RxXferCount = 0x00U;
+
+ /* Reset ErrorCode */
+ huart->ErrorCode = HAL_UART_ERROR_NONE;
+
+ /* Restore huart->RxState and huart->gState to Ready */
+ huart->RxState = HAL_UART_STATE_READY;
+ huart->gState = HAL_UART_STATE_READY;
+
+ return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Abort ongoing Transmit transfer (blocking mode).
+ * @param huart UART handle.
+ * @note This procedure could be used for aborting any ongoing Tx transfer started in Interrupt or DMA mode.
+ * This procedure performs following operations :
+ * - Disable UART Interrupts (Tx)
+ * - Disable the DMA transfer in the peripheral register (if enabled)
+ * - Abort DMA transfer by calling HAL_DMA_Abort (in case of transfer in DMA mode)
+ * - Set handle State to READY
+ * @note This procedure is executed in blocking mode : when exiting function, Abort is considered as completed.
+ * @retval HAL status
+*/
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_UART_AbortTransmit(UART_HandleTypeDef *huart)
+{
+ /* Disable TXEIE and TCIE interrupts */
+ CLEAR_BIT(huart->Instance->CR1, (USART_CR1_TXEIE | USART_CR1_TCIE));
+
+ /* Disable the UART DMA Tx request if enabled */
+ if (HAL_IS_BIT_SET(huart->Instance->CR3, USART_CR3_DMAT))
+ {
+ CLEAR_BIT(huart->Instance->CR3, USART_CR3_DMAT);
+
+ /* Abort the UART DMA Tx channel : use blocking DMA Abort API (no callback) */
+ if (huart->hdmatx != NULL)
+ {
+ /* Set the UART DMA Abort callback to Null.
+ No call back execution at end of DMA abort procedure */
+ huart->hdmatx->XferAbortCallback = NULL;
+
+ if (HAL_DMA_Abort(huart->hdmatx) != HAL_OK)
+ {
+ if (HAL_DMA_GetError(huart->hdmatx) == HAL_DMA_ERROR_TIMEOUT)
+ {
+ /* Set error code to DMA */
+ huart->ErrorCode = HAL_UART_ERROR_DMA;
+
+ return HAL_TIMEOUT;
+ }
+ }
+ }
+ }
+
+ /* Reset Tx transfer counter */
+ huart->TxXferCount = 0x00U;
+
+ /* Restore huart->gState to Ready */
+ huart->gState = HAL_UART_STATE_READY;
+
+ return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Abort ongoing Receive transfer (blocking mode).
+ * @param huart UART handle.
+ * @note This procedure could be used for aborting any ongoing Rx transfer started in Interrupt or DMA mode.
+ * This procedure performs following operations :
+ * - Disable UART Interrupts (Rx)
+ * - Disable the DMA transfer in the peripheral register (if enabled)
+ * - Abort DMA transfer by calling HAL_DMA_Abort (in case of transfer in DMA mode)
+ * - Set handle State to READY
+ * @note This procedure is executed in blocking mode : when exiting function, Abort is considered as completed.
+ * @retval HAL status
+*/
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_UART_AbortReceive(UART_HandleTypeDef *huart)
+{
+ /* Disable RXNE, PE and ERR (Frame error, noise error, overrun error) interrupts */
+ CLEAR_BIT(huart->Instance->CR1, (USART_CR1_RXNEIE | USART_CR1_PEIE));
+ CLEAR_BIT(huart->Instance->CR3, USART_CR3_EIE);
+
+ /* Disable the UART DMA Rx request if enabled */
+ if (HAL_IS_BIT_SET(huart->Instance->CR3, USART_CR3_DMAR))
+ {
+ CLEAR_BIT(huart->Instance->CR3, USART_CR3_DMAR);
+
+ /* Abort the UART DMA Rx channel : use blocking DMA Abort API (no callback) */
+ if (huart->hdmarx != NULL)
+ {
+ /* Set the UART DMA Abort callback to Null.
+ No call back execution at end of DMA abort procedure */
+ huart->hdmarx->XferAbortCallback = NULL;
+
+ if (HAL_DMA_Abort(huart->hdmarx) != HAL_OK)
+ {
+ if (HAL_DMA_GetError(huart->hdmarx) == HAL_DMA_ERROR_TIMEOUT)
+ {
+ /* Set error code to DMA */
+ huart->ErrorCode = HAL_UART_ERROR_DMA;
+
+ return HAL_TIMEOUT;
+ }
+ }
+ }
+ }
+
+ /* Reset Rx transfer counter */
+ huart->RxXferCount = 0x00U;
+
+ /* Restore huart->RxState to Ready */
+ huart->RxState = HAL_UART_STATE_READY;
+
+ return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Abort ongoing transfers (Interrupt mode).
+ * @param huart UART handle.
+ * @note This procedure could be used for aborting any ongoing transfer started in Interrupt or DMA mode.
+ * This procedure performs following operations :
+ * - Disable UART Interrupts (Tx and Rx)
+ * - Disable the DMA transfer in the peripheral register (if enabled)
+ * - Abort DMA transfer by calling HAL_DMA_Abort_IT (in case of transfer in DMA mode)
+ * - Set handle State to READY
+ * - At abort completion, call user abort complete callback
+ * @note This procedure is executed in Interrupt mode, meaning that abort procedure could be
+ * considered as completed only when user abort complete callback is executed (not when exiting function).
+ * @retval HAL status
+*/
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_UART_Abort_IT(UART_HandleTypeDef *huart)
+{
+ uint32_t AbortCplt = 0x01U;
+
+ /* Disable TXEIE, TCIE, RXNE, PE and ERR (Frame error, noise error, overrun error) interrupts */
+ CLEAR_BIT(huart->Instance->CR1, (USART_CR1_RXNEIE | USART_CR1_PEIE | USART_CR1_TXEIE | USART_CR1_TCIE));
+ CLEAR_BIT(huart->Instance->CR3, USART_CR3_EIE);
+
+ /* If DMA Tx and/or DMA Rx Handles are associated to UART Handle, DMA Abort complete callbacks should be initialised
+ before any call to DMA Abort functions */
+ /* DMA Tx Handle is valid */
+ if (huart->hdmatx != NULL)
+ {
+ /* Set DMA Abort Complete callback if UART DMA Tx request if enabled.
+ Otherwise, set it to NULL */
+ if (HAL_IS_BIT_SET(huart->Instance->CR3, USART_CR3_DMAT))
+ {
+ huart->hdmatx->XferAbortCallback = UART_DMATxAbortCallback;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ huart->hdmatx->XferAbortCallback = NULL;
+ }
+ }
+ /* DMA Rx Handle is valid */
+ if (huart->hdmarx != NULL)
+ {
+ /* Set DMA Abort Complete callback if UART DMA Rx request if enabled.
+ Otherwise, set it to NULL */
+ if (HAL_IS_BIT_SET(huart->Instance->CR3, USART_CR3_DMAR))
+ {
+ huart->hdmarx->XferAbortCallback = UART_DMARxAbortCallback;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ huart->hdmarx->XferAbortCallback = NULL;
+ }
+ }
+
+ /* Disable the UART DMA Tx request if enabled */
+ if (HAL_IS_BIT_SET(huart->Instance->CR3, USART_CR3_DMAT))
+ {
+ /* Disable DMA Tx at UART level */
+ CLEAR_BIT(huart->Instance->CR3, USART_CR3_DMAT);
+
+ /* Abort the UART DMA Tx channel : use non blocking DMA Abort API (callback) */
+ if (huart->hdmatx != NULL)
+ {
+ /* UART Tx DMA Abort callback has already been initialised :
+ will lead to call HAL_UART_AbortCpltCallback() at end of DMA abort procedure */
+
+ /* Abort DMA TX */
+ if (HAL_DMA_Abort_IT(huart->hdmatx) != HAL_OK)
+ {
+ huart->hdmatx->XferAbortCallback = NULL;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ AbortCplt = 0x00U;
+ }
+ }
+ }
+
+ /* Disable the UART DMA Rx request if enabled */
+ if (HAL_IS_BIT_SET(huart->Instance->CR3, USART_CR3_DMAR))
+ {
+ CLEAR_BIT(huart->Instance->CR3, USART_CR3_DMAR);
+
+ /* Abort the UART DMA Rx channel : use non blocking DMA Abort API (callback) */
+ if (huart->hdmarx != NULL)
+ {
+ /* UART Rx DMA Abort callback has already been initialised :
+ will lead to call HAL_UART_AbortCpltCallback() at end of DMA abort procedure */
+
+ /* Abort DMA RX */
+ if (HAL_DMA_Abort_IT(huart->hdmarx) != HAL_OK)
+ {
+ huart->hdmarx->XferAbortCallback = NULL;
+ AbortCplt = 0x01U;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ AbortCplt = 0x00U;
+ }
+ }
+ }
+
+ /* if no DMA abort complete callback execution is required => call user Abort Complete callback */
+ if (AbortCplt == 0x01U)
+ {
+ /* Reset Tx and Rx transfer counters */
+ huart->TxXferCount = 0x00U;
+ huart->RxXferCount = 0x00U;
+
+ /* Reset ErrorCode */
+ huart->ErrorCode = HAL_UART_ERROR_NONE;
+
+ /* Restore huart->gState and huart->RxState to Ready */
+ huart->gState = HAL_UART_STATE_READY;
+ huart->RxState = HAL_UART_STATE_READY;
+
+ /* As no DMA to be aborted, call directly user Abort complete callback */
+#if (USE_HAL_UART_REGISTER_CALLBACKS == 1)
+ /* Call registered Abort complete callback */
+ huart->AbortCpltCallback(huart);
+#else
+ /* Call legacy weak Abort complete callback */
+ HAL_UART_AbortCpltCallback(huart);
+#endif /* USE_HAL_UART_REGISTER_CALLBACKS */
+ }
+
+ return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Abort ongoing Transmit transfer (Interrupt mode).
+ * @param huart UART handle.
+ * @note This procedure could be used for aborting any ongoing Tx transfer started in Interrupt or DMA mode.
+ * This procedure performs following operations :
+ * - Disable UART Interrupts (Tx)
+ * - Disable the DMA transfer in the peripheral register (if enabled)
+ * - Abort DMA transfer by calling HAL_DMA_Abort_IT (in case of transfer in DMA mode)
+ * - Set handle State to READY
+ * - At abort completion, call user abort complete callback
+ * @note This procedure is executed in Interrupt mode, meaning that abort procedure could be
+ * considered as completed only when user abort complete callback is executed (not when exiting function).
+ * @retval HAL status
+*/
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_UART_AbortTransmit_IT(UART_HandleTypeDef *huart)
+{
+ /* Disable TXEIE and TCIE interrupts */
+ CLEAR_BIT(huart->Instance->CR1, (USART_CR1_TXEIE | USART_CR1_TCIE));
+
+ /* Disable the UART DMA Tx request if enabled */
+ if (HAL_IS_BIT_SET(huart->Instance->CR3, USART_CR3_DMAT))
+ {
+ CLEAR_BIT(huart->Instance->CR3, USART_CR3_DMAT);
+
+ /* Abort the UART DMA Tx channel : use blocking DMA Abort API (no callback) */
+ if (huart->hdmatx != NULL)
+ {
+ /* Set the UART DMA Abort callback :
+ will lead to call HAL_UART_AbortCpltCallback() at end of DMA abort procedure */
+ huart->hdmatx->XferAbortCallback = UART_DMATxOnlyAbortCallback;
+
+ /* Abort DMA TX */
+ if (HAL_DMA_Abort_IT(huart->hdmatx) != HAL_OK)
+ {
+ /* Call Directly huart->hdmatx->XferAbortCallback function in case of error */
+ huart->hdmatx->XferAbortCallback(huart->hdmatx);
+ }
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Reset Tx transfer counter */
+ huart->TxXferCount = 0x00U;
+
+ /* Restore huart->gState to Ready */
+ huart->gState = HAL_UART_STATE_READY;
+
+ /* As no DMA to be aborted, call directly user Abort complete callback */
+#if (USE_HAL_UART_REGISTER_CALLBACKS == 1)
+ /* Call registered Abort Transmit Complete Callback */
+ huart->AbortTransmitCpltCallback(huart);
+#else
+ /* Call legacy weak Abort Transmit Complete Callback */
+ HAL_UART_AbortTransmitCpltCallback(huart);
+#endif /* USE_HAL_UART_REGISTER_CALLBACKS */
+ }
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Reset Tx transfer counter */
+ huart->TxXferCount = 0x00U;
+
+ /* Restore huart->gState to Ready */
+ huart->gState = HAL_UART_STATE_READY;
+
+ /* As no DMA to be aborted, call directly user Abort complete callback */
+#if (USE_HAL_UART_REGISTER_CALLBACKS == 1)
+ /* Call registered Abort Transmit Complete Callback */
+ huart->AbortTransmitCpltCallback(huart);
+#else
+ /* Call legacy weak Abort Transmit Complete Callback */
+ HAL_UART_AbortTransmitCpltCallback(huart);
+#endif /* USE_HAL_UART_REGISTER_CALLBACKS */
+ }
+
+ return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Abort ongoing Receive transfer (Interrupt mode).
+ * @param huart UART handle.
+ * @note This procedure could be used for aborting any ongoing Rx transfer started in Interrupt or DMA mode.
+ * This procedure performs following operations :
+ * - Disable UART Interrupts (Rx)
+ * - Disable the DMA transfer in the peripheral register (if enabled)
+ * - Abort DMA transfer by calling HAL_DMA_Abort_IT (in case of transfer in DMA mode)
+ * - Set handle State to READY
+ * - At abort completion, call user abort complete callback
+ * @note This procedure is executed in Interrupt mode, meaning that abort procedure could be
+ * considered as completed only when user abort complete callback is executed (not when exiting function).
+ * @retval HAL status
+*/
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_UART_AbortReceive_IT(UART_HandleTypeDef *huart)
+{
+ /* Disable RXNE, PE and ERR (Frame error, noise error, overrun error) interrupts */
+ CLEAR_BIT(huart->Instance->CR1, (USART_CR1_RXNEIE | USART_CR1_PEIE));
+ CLEAR_BIT(huart->Instance->CR3, USART_CR3_EIE);
+
+ /* Disable the UART DMA Rx request if enabled */
+ if (HAL_IS_BIT_SET(huart->Instance->CR3, USART_CR3_DMAR))
+ {
+ CLEAR_BIT(huart->Instance->CR3, USART_CR3_DMAR);
+
+ /* Abort the UART DMA Rx channel : use blocking DMA Abort API (no callback) */
+ if (huart->hdmarx != NULL)
+ {
+ /* Set the UART DMA Abort callback :
+ will lead to call HAL_UART_AbortCpltCallback() at end of DMA abort procedure */
+ huart->hdmarx->XferAbortCallback = UART_DMARxOnlyAbortCallback;
+
+ /* Abort DMA RX */
+ if (HAL_DMA_Abort_IT(huart->hdmarx) != HAL_OK)
+ {
+ /* Call Directly huart->hdmarx->XferAbortCallback function in case of error */
+ huart->hdmarx->XferAbortCallback(huart->hdmarx);
+ }
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Reset Rx transfer counter */
+ huart->RxXferCount = 0x00U;
+
+ /* Restore huart->RxState to Ready */
+ huart->RxState = HAL_UART_STATE_READY;
+
+ /* As no DMA to be aborted, call directly user Abort complete callback */
+#if (USE_HAL_UART_REGISTER_CALLBACKS == 1)
+ /* Call registered Abort Receive Complete Callback */
+ huart->AbortReceiveCpltCallback(huart);
+#else
+ /* Call legacy weak Abort Receive Complete Callback */
+ HAL_UART_AbortReceiveCpltCallback(huart);
+#endif /* USE_HAL_UART_REGISTER_CALLBACKS */
+ }
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Reset Rx transfer counter */
+ huart->RxXferCount = 0x00U;
+
+ /* Restore huart->RxState to Ready */
+ huart->RxState = HAL_UART_STATE_READY;
+
+ /* As no DMA to be aborted, call directly user Abort complete callback */
+#if (USE_HAL_UART_REGISTER_CALLBACKS == 1)
+ /* Call registered Abort Receive Complete Callback */
+ huart->AbortReceiveCpltCallback(huart);
+#else
+ /* Call legacy weak Abort Receive Complete Callback */
+ HAL_UART_AbortReceiveCpltCallback(huart);
+#endif /* USE_HAL_UART_REGISTER_CALLBACKS */
+ }
+
+ return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief This function handles UART interrupt request.
+ * @param huart Pointer to a UART_HandleTypeDef structure that contains
+ * the configuration information for the specified UART module.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void HAL_UART_IRQHandler(UART_HandleTypeDef *huart)
+{
+ uint32_t isrflags = READ_REG(huart->Instance->SR);
+ uint32_t cr1its = READ_REG(huart->Instance->CR1);
+ uint32_t cr3its = READ_REG(huart->Instance->CR3);
+ uint32_t errorflags = 0x00U;
+ uint32_t dmarequest = 0x00U;
+
+ /* If no error occurs */
+ errorflags = (isrflags & (uint32_t)(USART_SR_PE | USART_SR_FE | USART_SR_ORE | USART_SR_NE));
+ if (errorflags == RESET)
+ {
+ /* UART in mode Receiver -------------------------------------------------*/
+ if (((isrflags & USART_SR_RXNE) != RESET) && ((cr1its & USART_CR1_RXNEIE) != RESET))
+ {
+ UART_Receive_IT(huart);
+ return;
+ }
+ }
+
+ /* If some errors occur */
+ if ((errorflags != RESET) && (((cr3its & USART_CR3_EIE) != RESET) || ((cr1its & (USART_CR1_RXNEIE | USART_CR1_PEIE)) != RESET)))
+ {
+ /* UART parity error interrupt occurred ----------------------------------*/
+ if (((isrflags & USART_SR_PE) != RESET) && ((cr1its & USART_CR1_PEIE) != RESET))
+ {
+ huart->ErrorCode |= HAL_UART_ERROR_PE;
+ }
+
+ /* UART noise error interrupt occurred -----------------------------------*/
+ if (((isrflags & USART_SR_NE) != RESET) && ((cr3its & USART_CR3_EIE) != RESET))
+ {
+ huart->ErrorCode |= HAL_UART_ERROR_NE;
+ }
+
+ /* UART frame error interrupt occurred -----------------------------------*/
+ if (((isrflags & USART_SR_FE) != RESET) && ((cr3its & USART_CR3_EIE) != RESET))
+ {
+ huart->ErrorCode |= HAL_UART_ERROR_FE;
+ }
+
+ /* UART Over-Run interrupt occurred --------------------------------------*/
+ if (((isrflags & USART_SR_ORE) != RESET) && ((cr3its & USART_CR3_EIE) != RESET))
+ {
+ huart->ErrorCode |= HAL_UART_ERROR_ORE;
+ }
+
+ /* Call UART Error Call back function if need be --------------------------*/
+ if (huart->ErrorCode != HAL_UART_ERROR_NONE)
+ {
+ /* UART in mode Receiver -----------------------------------------------*/
+ if (((isrflags & USART_SR_RXNE) != RESET) && ((cr1its & USART_CR1_RXNEIE) != RESET))
+ {
+ UART_Receive_IT(huart);
+ }
+
+ /* If Overrun error occurs, or if any error occurs in DMA mode reception,
+ consider error as blocking */
+ dmarequest = HAL_IS_BIT_SET(huart->Instance->CR3, USART_CR3_DMAR);
+ if (((huart->ErrorCode & HAL_UART_ERROR_ORE) != RESET) || dmarequest)
+ {
+ /* Blocking error : transfer is aborted
+ Set the UART state ready to be able to start again the process,
+ Disable Rx Interrupts, and disable Rx DMA request, if ongoing */
+ UART_EndRxTransfer(huart);
+
+ /* Disable the UART DMA Rx request if enabled */
+ if (HAL_IS_BIT_SET(huart->Instance->CR3, USART_CR3_DMAR))
+ {
+ CLEAR_BIT(huart->Instance->CR3, USART_CR3_DMAR);
+
+ /* Abort the UART DMA Rx channel */
+ if (huart->hdmarx != NULL)
+ {
+ /* Set the UART DMA Abort callback :
+ will lead to call HAL_UART_ErrorCallback() at end of DMA abort procedure */
+ huart->hdmarx->XferAbortCallback = UART_DMAAbortOnError;
+ if (HAL_DMA_Abort_IT(huart->hdmarx) != HAL_OK)
+ {
+ /* Call Directly XferAbortCallback function in case of error */
+ huart->hdmarx->XferAbortCallback(huart->hdmarx);
+ }
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Call user error callback */
+#if (USE_HAL_UART_REGISTER_CALLBACKS == 1)
+ /*Call registered error callback*/
+ huart->ErrorCallback(huart);
+#else
+ /*Call legacy weak error callback*/
+ HAL_UART_ErrorCallback(huart);
+#endif /* USE_HAL_UART_REGISTER_CALLBACKS */
+ }
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Call user error callback */
+#if (USE_HAL_UART_REGISTER_CALLBACKS == 1)
+ /*Call registered error callback*/
+ huart->ErrorCallback(huart);
+#else
+ /*Call legacy weak error callback*/
+ HAL_UART_ErrorCallback(huart);
+#endif /* USE_HAL_UART_REGISTER_CALLBACKS */
+ }
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Non Blocking error : transfer could go on.
+ Error is notified to user through user error callback */
+#if (USE_HAL_UART_REGISTER_CALLBACKS == 1)
+ /*Call registered error callback*/
+ huart->ErrorCallback(huart);
+#else
+ /*Call legacy weak error callback*/
+ HAL_UART_ErrorCallback(huart);
+#endif /* USE_HAL_UART_REGISTER_CALLBACKS */
+
+ huart->ErrorCode = HAL_UART_ERROR_NONE;
+ }
+ }
+ return;
+ } /* End if some error occurs */
+
+ /* UART in mode Transmitter ------------------------------------------------*/
+ if (((isrflags & USART_SR_TXE) != RESET) && ((cr1its & USART_CR1_TXEIE) != RESET))
+ {
+ UART_Transmit_IT(huart);
+ return;
+ }
+
+ /* UART in mode Transmitter end --------------------------------------------*/
+ if (((isrflags & USART_SR_TC) != RESET) && ((cr1its & USART_CR1_TCIE) != RESET))
+ {
+ UART_EndTransmit_IT(huart);
+ return;
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Tx Transfer completed callbacks.
+ * @param huart Pointer to a UART_HandleTypeDef structure that contains
+ * the configuration information for the specified UART module.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+__weak void HAL_UART_TxCpltCallback(UART_HandleTypeDef *huart)
+{
+ /* Prevent unused argument(s) compilation warning */
+ UNUSED(huart);
+ /* NOTE: This function should not be modified, when the callback is needed,
+ the HAL_UART_TxCpltCallback could be implemented in the user file
+ */
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Tx Half Transfer completed callbacks.
+ * @param huart Pointer to a UART_HandleTypeDef structure that contains
+ * the configuration information for the specified UART module.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+__weak void HAL_UART_TxHalfCpltCallback(UART_HandleTypeDef *huart)
+{
+ /* Prevent unused argument(s) compilation warning */
+ UNUSED(huart);
+ /* NOTE: This function should not be modified, when the callback is needed,
+ the HAL_UART_TxHalfCpltCallback could be implemented in the user file
+ */
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Rx Transfer completed callbacks.
+ * @param huart Pointer to a UART_HandleTypeDef structure that contains
+ * the configuration information for the specified UART module.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+__weak void HAL_UART_RxCpltCallback(UART_HandleTypeDef *huart)
+{
+ /* Prevent unused argument(s) compilation warning */
+ UNUSED(huart);
+ /* NOTE: This function should not be modified, when the callback is needed,
+ the HAL_UART_RxCpltCallback could be implemented in the user file
+ */
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Rx Half Transfer completed callbacks.
+ * @param huart Pointer to a UART_HandleTypeDef structure that contains
+ * the configuration information for the specified UART module.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+__weak void HAL_UART_RxHalfCpltCallback(UART_HandleTypeDef *huart)
+{
+ /* Prevent unused argument(s) compilation warning */
+ UNUSED(huart);
+ /* NOTE: This function should not be modified, when the callback is needed,
+ the HAL_UART_RxHalfCpltCallback could be implemented in the user file
+ */
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief UART error callbacks.
+ * @param huart Pointer to a UART_HandleTypeDef structure that contains
+ * the configuration information for the specified UART module.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+__weak void HAL_UART_ErrorCallback(UART_HandleTypeDef *huart)
+{
+ /* Prevent unused argument(s) compilation warning */
+ UNUSED(huart);
+ /* NOTE: This function should not be modified, when the callback is needed,
+ the HAL_UART_ErrorCallback could be implemented in the user file
+ */
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief UART Abort Complete callback.
+ * @param huart UART handle.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+__weak void HAL_UART_AbortCpltCallback(UART_HandleTypeDef *huart)
+{
+ /* Prevent unused argument(s) compilation warning */
+ UNUSED(huart);
+
+ /* NOTE : This function should not be modified, when the callback is needed,
+ the HAL_UART_AbortCpltCallback can be implemented in the user file.
+ */
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief UART Abort Complete callback.
+ * @param huart UART handle.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+__weak void HAL_UART_AbortTransmitCpltCallback(UART_HandleTypeDef *huart)
+{
+ /* Prevent unused argument(s) compilation warning */
+ UNUSED(huart);
+
+ /* NOTE : This function should not be modified, when the callback is needed,
+ the HAL_UART_AbortTransmitCpltCallback can be implemented in the user file.
+ */
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief UART Abort Receive Complete callback.
+ * @param huart UART handle.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+__weak void HAL_UART_AbortReceiveCpltCallback(UART_HandleTypeDef *huart)
+{
+ /* Prevent unused argument(s) compilation warning */
+ UNUSED(huart);
+
+ /* NOTE : This function should not be modified, when the callback is needed,
+ the HAL_UART_AbortReceiveCpltCallback can be implemented in the user file.
+ */
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup UART_Exported_Functions_Group3 Peripheral Control functions
+ * @brief UART control functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ==============================================================================
+ ##### Peripheral Control functions #####
+ ==============================================================================
+ [..]
+ This subsection provides a set of functions allowing to control the UART:
+ (+) HAL_LIN_SendBreak() API can be helpful to transmit the break character.
+ (+) HAL_MultiProcessor_EnterMuteMode() API can be helpful to enter the UART in mute mode.
+ (+) HAL_MultiProcessor_ExitMuteMode() API can be helpful to exit the UART mute mode by software.
+ (+) HAL_HalfDuplex_EnableTransmitter() API to enable the UART transmitter and disables the UART receiver in Half Duplex mode
+ (+) HAL_HalfDuplex_EnableReceiver() API to enable the UART receiver and disables the UART transmitter in Half Duplex mode
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Transmits break characters.
+ * @param huart Pointer to a UART_HandleTypeDef structure that contains
+ * the configuration information for the specified UART module.
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_LIN_SendBreak(UART_HandleTypeDef *huart)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_UART_INSTANCE(huart->Instance));
+
+ /* Process Locked */
+ __HAL_LOCK(huart);
+
+ huart->gState = HAL_UART_STATE_BUSY;
+
+ /* Send break characters */
+ SET_BIT(huart->Instance->CR1, USART_CR1_SBK);
+
+ huart->gState = HAL_UART_STATE_READY;
+
+ /* Process Unlocked */
+ __HAL_UNLOCK(huart);
+
+ return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enters the UART in mute mode.
+ * @param huart Pointer to a UART_HandleTypeDef structure that contains
+ * the configuration information for the specified UART module.
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_MultiProcessor_EnterMuteMode(UART_HandleTypeDef *huart)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_UART_INSTANCE(huart->Instance));
+
+ /* Process Locked */
+ __HAL_LOCK(huart);
+
+ huart->gState = HAL_UART_STATE_BUSY;
+
+ /* Enable the USART mute mode by setting the RWU bit in the CR1 register */
+ SET_BIT(huart->Instance->CR1, USART_CR1_RWU);
+
+ huart->gState = HAL_UART_STATE_READY;
+
+ /* Process Unlocked */
+ __HAL_UNLOCK(huart);
+
+ return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Exits the UART mute mode: wake up software.
+ * @param huart Pointer to a UART_HandleTypeDef structure that contains
+ * the configuration information for the specified UART module.
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_MultiProcessor_ExitMuteMode(UART_HandleTypeDef *huart)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_UART_INSTANCE(huart->Instance));
+
+ /* Process Locked */
+ __HAL_LOCK(huart);
+
+ huart->gState = HAL_UART_STATE_BUSY;
+
+ /* Disable the USART mute mode by clearing the RWU bit in the CR1 register */
+ CLEAR_BIT(huart->Instance->CR1, USART_CR1_RWU);
+
+ huart->gState = HAL_UART_STATE_READY;
+
+ /* Process Unlocked */
+ __HAL_UNLOCK(huart);
+
+ return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables the UART transmitter and disables the UART receiver.
+ * @param huart Pointer to a UART_HandleTypeDef structure that contains
+ * the configuration information for the specified UART module.
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_HalfDuplex_EnableTransmitter(UART_HandleTypeDef *huart)
+{
+ uint32_t tmpreg = 0x00U;
+
+ /* Process Locked */
+ __HAL_LOCK(huart);
+
+ huart->gState = HAL_UART_STATE_BUSY;
+
+ /*-------------------------- USART CR1 Configuration -----------------------*/
+ tmpreg = huart->Instance->CR1;
+
+ /* Clear TE and RE bits */
+ tmpreg &= (uint32_t)~((uint32_t)(USART_CR1_TE | USART_CR1_RE));
+
+ /* Enable the USART's transmit interface by setting the TE bit in the USART CR1 register */
+ tmpreg |= (uint32_t)USART_CR1_TE;
+
+ /* Write to USART CR1 */
+ WRITE_REG(huart->Instance->CR1, (uint32_t)tmpreg);
+
+ huart->gState = HAL_UART_STATE_READY;
+
+ /* Process Unlocked */
+ __HAL_UNLOCK(huart);
+
+ return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables the UART receiver and disables the UART transmitter.
+ * @param huart Pointer to a UART_HandleTypeDef structure that contains
+ * the configuration information for the specified UART module.
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_HalfDuplex_EnableReceiver(UART_HandleTypeDef *huart)
+{
+ uint32_t tmpreg = 0x00U;
+
+ /* Process Locked */
+ __HAL_LOCK(huart);
+
+ huart->gState = HAL_UART_STATE_BUSY;
+
+ /*-------------------------- USART CR1 Configuration -----------------------*/
+ tmpreg = huart->Instance->CR1;
+
+ /* Clear TE and RE bits */
+ tmpreg &= (uint32_t)~((uint32_t)(USART_CR1_TE | USART_CR1_RE));
+
+ /* Enable the USART's receive interface by setting the RE bit in the USART CR1 register */
+ tmpreg |= (uint32_t)USART_CR1_RE;
+
+ /* Write to USART CR1 */
+ WRITE_REG(huart->Instance->CR1, (uint32_t)tmpreg);
+
+ huart->gState = HAL_UART_STATE_READY;
+
+ /* Process Unlocked */
+ __HAL_UNLOCK(huart);
+
+ return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup UART_Exported_Functions_Group4 Peripheral State and Errors functions
+ * @brief UART State and Errors functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ==============================================================================
+ ##### Peripheral State and Errors functions #####
+ ==============================================================================
+ [..]
+ This subsection provides a set of functions allowing to return the State of
+ UART communication process, return Peripheral Errors occurred during communication
+ process
+ (+) HAL_UART_GetState() API can be helpful to check in run-time the state of the UART peripheral.
+ (+) HAL_UART_GetError() check in run-time errors that could be occurred during communication.
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Returns the UART state.
+ * @param huart Pointer to a UART_HandleTypeDef structure that contains
+ * the configuration information for the specified UART module.
+ * @retval HAL state
+ */
+HAL_UART_StateTypeDef HAL_UART_GetState(UART_HandleTypeDef *huart)
+{
+ uint32_t temp1 = 0x00U, temp2 = 0x00U;
+ temp1 = huart->gState;
+ temp2 = huart->RxState;
+
+ return (HAL_UART_StateTypeDef)(temp1 | temp2);
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Return the UART error code
+ * @param huart Pointer to a UART_HandleTypeDef structure that contains
+ * the configuration information for the specified UART.
+ * @retval UART Error Code
+ */
+uint32_t HAL_UART_GetError(UART_HandleTypeDef *huart)
+{
+ return huart->ErrorCode;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup UART_Private_Functions UART Private Functions
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Initialize the callbacks to their default values.
+ * @param huart UART handle.
+ * @retval none
+ */
+#if (USE_HAL_UART_REGISTER_CALLBACKS == 1)
+void UART_InitCallbacksToDefault(UART_HandleTypeDef *huart)
+{
+ /* Init the UART Callback settings */
+ huart->TxHalfCpltCallback = HAL_UART_TxHalfCpltCallback; /* Legacy weak TxHalfCpltCallback */
+ huart->TxCpltCallback = HAL_UART_TxCpltCallback; /* Legacy weak TxCpltCallback */
+ huart->RxHalfCpltCallback = HAL_UART_RxHalfCpltCallback; /* Legacy weak RxHalfCpltCallback */
+ huart->RxCpltCallback = HAL_UART_RxCpltCallback; /* Legacy weak RxCpltCallback */
+ huart->ErrorCallback = HAL_UART_ErrorCallback; /* Legacy weak ErrorCallback */
+ huart->AbortCpltCallback = HAL_UART_AbortCpltCallback; /* Legacy weak AbortCpltCallback */
+ huart->AbortTransmitCpltCallback = HAL_UART_AbortTransmitCpltCallback; /* Legacy weak AbortTransmitCpltCallback */
+ huart->AbortReceiveCpltCallback = HAL_UART_AbortReceiveCpltCallback; /* Legacy weak AbortReceiveCpltCallback */
+
+}
+#endif /* USE_HAL_UART_REGISTER_CALLBACKS */
+
+/**
+ * @brief DMA UART transmit process complete callback.
+ * @param hdma Pointer to a DMA_HandleTypeDef structure that contains
+ * the configuration information for the specified DMA module.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+static void UART_DMATransmitCplt(DMA_HandleTypeDef *hdma)
+{
+ UART_HandleTypeDef *huart = (UART_HandleTypeDef *)((DMA_HandleTypeDef *)hdma)->Parent;
+ /* DMA Normal mode*/
+ if ((hdma->Instance->CCR & DMA_CCR_CIRC) == 0U)
+ {
+ huart->TxXferCount = 0x00U;
+
+ /* Disable the DMA transfer for transmit request by setting the DMAT bit
+ in the UART CR3 register */
+ CLEAR_BIT(huart->Instance->CR3, USART_CR3_DMAT);
+
+ /* Enable the UART Transmit Complete Interrupt */
+ SET_BIT(huart->Instance->CR1, USART_CR1_TCIE);
+
+ }
+ /* DMA Circular mode */
+ else
+ {
+#if (USE_HAL_UART_REGISTER_CALLBACKS == 1)
+ /*Call registered Tx complete callback*/
+ huart->TxCpltCallback(huart);
+#else
+ /*Call legacy weak Tx complete callback*/
+ HAL_UART_TxCpltCallback(huart);
+#endif /* USE_HAL_UART_REGISTER_CALLBACKS */
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief DMA UART transmit process half complete callback
+ * @param hdma Pointer to a DMA_HandleTypeDef structure that contains
+ * the configuration information for the specified DMA module.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+static void UART_DMATxHalfCplt(DMA_HandleTypeDef *hdma)
+{
+ UART_HandleTypeDef *huart = (UART_HandleTypeDef *)((DMA_HandleTypeDef *)hdma)->Parent;
+
+#if (USE_HAL_UART_REGISTER_CALLBACKS == 1)
+ /*Call registered Tx complete callback*/
+ huart->TxHalfCpltCallback(huart);
+#else
+ /*Call legacy weak Tx complete callback*/
+ HAL_UART_TxHalfCpltCallback(huart);
+#endif /* USE_HAL_UART_REGISTER_CALLBACKS */
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief DMA UART receive process complete callback.
+ * @param hdma Pointer to a DMA_HandleTypeDef structure that contains
+ * the configuration information for the specified DMA module.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+static void UART_DMAReceiveCplt(DMA_HandleTypeDef *hdma)
+{
+ UART_HandleTypeDef *huart = (UART_HandleTypeDef *)((DMA_HandleTypeDef *)hdma)->Parent;
+ /* DMA Normal mode*/
+ if ((hdma->Instance->CCR & DMA_CCR_CIRC) == 0U)
+ {
+ huart->RxXferCount = 0U;
+
+ /* Disable RXNE, PE and ERR (Frame error, noise error, overrun error) interrupts */
+ CLEAR_BIT(huart->Instance->CR1, USART_CR1_PEIE);
+ CLEAR_BIT(huart->Instance->CR3, USART_CR3_EIE);
+
+ /* Disable the DMA transfer for the receiver request by setting the DMAR bit
+ in the UART CR3 register */
+ CLEAR_BIT(huart->Instance->CR3, USART_CR3_DMAR);
+
+ /* At end of Rx process, restore huart->RxState to Ready */
+ huart->RxState = HAL_UART_STATE_READY;
+ }
+#if (USE_HAL_UART_REGISTER_CALLBACKS == 1)
+ /*Call registered Rx complete callback*/
+ huart->RxCpltCallback(huart);
+#else
+ /*Call legacy weak Rx complete callback*/
+ HAL_UART_RxCpltCallback(huart);
+#endif /* USE_HAL_UART_REGISTER_CALLBACKS */
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief DMA UART receive process half complete callback
+ * @param hdma Pointer to a DMA_HandleTypeDef structure that contains
+ * the configuration information for the specified DMA module.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+static void UART_DMARxHalfCplt(DMA_HandleTypeDef *hdma)
+{
+ UART_HandleTypeDef *huart = (UART_HandleTypeDef *)((DMA_HandleTypeDef *)hdma)->Parent;
+
+#if (USE_HAL_UART_REGISTER_CALLBACKS == 1)
+ /*Call registered Rx Half complete callback*/
+ huart->RxHalfCpltCallback(huart);
+#else
+ /*Call legacy weak Rx Half complete callback*/
+ HAL_UART_RxHalfCpltCallback(huart);
+#endif /* USE_HAL_UART_REGISTER_CALLBACKS */
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief DMA UART communication error callback.
+ * @param hdma Pointer to a DMA_HandleTypeDef structure that contains
+ * the configuration information for the specified DMA module.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+static void UART_DMAError(DMA_HandleTypeDef *hdma)
+{
+ uint32_t dmarequest = 0x00U;
+ UART_HandleTypeDef *huart = (UART_HandleTypeDef *)((DMA_HandleTypeDef *)hdma)->Parent;
+
+ /* Stop UART DMA Tx request if ongoing */
+ dmarequest = HAL_IS_BIT_SET(huart->Instance->CR3, USART_CR3_DMAT);
+ if ((huart->gState == HAL_UART_STATE_BUSY_TX) && dmarequest)
+ {
+ huart->TxXferCount = 0x00U;
+ UART_EndTxTransfer(huart);
+ }
+
+ /* Stop UART DMA Rx request if ongoing */
+ dmarequest = HAL_IS_BIT_SET(huart->Instance->CR3, USART_CR3_DMAR);
+ if ((huart->RxState == HAL_UART_STATE_BUSY_RX) && dmarequest)
+ {
+ huart->RxXferCount = 0x00U;
+ UART_EndRxTransfer(huart);
+ }
+
+ huart->ErrorCode |= HAL_UART_ERROR_DMA;
+#if (USE_HAL_UART_REGISTER_CALLBACKS == 1)
+ /*Call registered error callback*/
+ huart->ErrorCallback(huart);
+#else
+ /*Call legacy weak error callback*/
+ HAL_UART_ErrorCallback(huart);
+#endif /* USE_HAL_UART_REGISTER_CALLBACKS */
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief This function handles UART Communication Timeout.
+ * @param huart Pointer to a UART_HandleTypeDef structure that contains
+ * the configuration information for the specified UART module.
+ * @param Flag specifies the UART flag to check.
+ * @param Status The new Flag status (SET or RESET).
+ * @param Tickstart Tick start value
+ * @param Timeout Timeout duration
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+static HAL_StatusTypeDef UART_WaitOnFlagUntilTimeout(UART_HandleTypeDef *huart, uint32_t Flag, FlagStatus Status, uint32_t Tickstart, uint32_t Timeout)
+{
+ /* Wait until flag is set */
+ while ((__HAL_UART_GET_FLAG(huart, Flag) ? SET : RESET) == Status)
+ {
+ /* Check for the Timeout */
+ if (Timeout != HAL_MAX_DELAY)
+ {
+ if ((Timeout == 0U) || ((HAL_GetTick() - Tickstart) > Timeout))
+ {
+ /* Disable TXE, RXNE, PE and ERR (Frame error, noise error, overrun error) interrupts for the interrupt process */
+ CLEAR_BIT(huart->Instance->CR1, (USART_CR1_RXNEIE | USART_CR1_PEIE | USART_CR1_TXEIE));
+ CLEAR_BIT(huart->Instance->CR3, USART_CR3_EIE);
+
+ huart->gState = HAL_UART_STATE_READY;
+ huart->RxState = HAL_UART_STATE_READY;
+
+ /* Process Unlocked */
+ __HAL_UNLOCK(huart);
+
+ return HAL_TIMEOUT;
+ }
+ }
+ }
+ return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief End ongoing Tx transfer on UART peripheral (following error detection or Transmit completion).
+ * @param huart UART handle.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+static void UART_EndTxTransfer(UART_HandleTypeDef *huart)
+{
+ /* Disable TXEIE and TCIE interrupts */
+ CLEAR_BIT(huart->Instance->CR1, (USART_CR1_TXEIE | USART_CR1_TCIE));
+
+ /* At end of Tx process, restore huart->gState to Ready */
+ huart->gState = HAL_UART_STATE_READY;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief End ongoing Rx transfer on UART peripheral (following error detection or Reception completion).
+ * @param huart UART handle.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+static void UART_EndRxTransfer(UART_HandleTypeDef *huart)
+{
+ /* Disable RXNE, PE and ERR (Frame error, noise error, overrun error) interrupts */
+ CLEAR_BIT(huart->Instance->CR1, (USART_CR1_RXNEIE | USART_CR1_PEIE));
+ CLEAR_BIT(huart->Instance->CR3, USART_CR3_EIE);
+
+ /* At end of Rx process, restore huart->RxState to Ready */
+ huart->RxState = HAL_UART_STATE_READY;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief DMA UART communication abort callback, when initiated by HAL services on Error
+ * (To be called at end of DMA Abort procedure following error occurrence).
+ * @param hdma Pointer to a DMA_HandleTypeDef structure that contains
+ * the configuration information for the specified DMA module.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+static void UART_DMAAbortOnError(DMA_HandleTypeDef *hdma)
+{
+ UART_HandleTypeDef *huart = (UART_HandleTypeDef *)((DMA_HandleTypeDef *)hdma)->Parent;
+ huart->RxXferCount = 0x00U;
+ huart->TxXferCount = 0x00U;
+
+#if (USE_HAL_UART_REGISTER_CALLBACKS == 1)
+ /*Call registered error callback*/
+ huart->ErrorCallback(huart);
+#else
+ /*Call legacy weak error callback*/
+ HAL_UART_ErrorCallback(huart);
+#endif /* USE_HAL_UART_REGISTER_CALLBACKS */
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief DMA UART Tx communication abort callback, when initiated by user
+ * (To be called at end of DMA Tx Abort procedure following user abort request).
+ * @note When this callback is executed, User Abort complete call back is called only if no
+ * Abort still ongoing for Rx DMA Handle.
+ * @param hdma Pointer to a DMA_HandleTypeDef structure that contains
+ * the configuration information for the specified DMA module.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+static void UART_DMATxAbortCallback(DMA_HandleTypeDef *hdma)
+{
+ UART_HandleTypeDef *huart = (UART_HandleTypeDef *)((DMA_HandleTypeDef *)hdma)->Parent;
+
+ huart->hdmatx->XferAbortCallback = NULL;
+
+ /* Check if an Abort process is still ongoing */
+ if (huart->hdmarx != NULL)
+ {
+ if (huart->hdmarx->XferAbortCallback != NULL)
+ {
+ return;
+ }
+ }
+
+ /* No Abort process still ongoing : All DMA channels are aborted, call user Abort Complete callback */
+ huart->TxXferCount = 0x00U;
+ huart->RxXferCount = 0x00U;
+
+ /* Reset ErrorCode */
+ huart->ErrorCode = HAL_UART_ERROR_NONE;
+
+ /* Restore huart->gState and huart->RxState to Ready */
+ huart->gState = HAL_UART_STATE_READY;
+ huart->RxState = HAL_UART_STATE_READY;
+
+ /* Call user Abort complete callback */
+#if (USE_HAL_UART_REGISTER_CALLBACKS == 1)
+ /* Call registered Abort complete callback */
+ huart->AbortCpltCallback(huart);
+#else
+ /* Call legacy weak Abort complete callback */
+ HAL_UART_AbortCpltCallback(huart);
+#endif /* USE_HAL_UART_REGISTER_CALLBACKS */
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief DMA UART Rx communication abort callback, when initiated by user
+ * (To be called at end of DMA Rx Abort procedure following user abort request).
+ * @note When this callback is executed, User Abort complete call back is called only if no
+ * Abort still ongoing for Tx DMA Handle.
+ * @param hdma Pointer to a DMA_HandleTypeDef structure that contains
+ * the configuration information for the specified DMA module.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+static void UART_DMARxAbortCallback(DMA_HandleTypeDef *hdma)
+{
+ UART_HandleTypeDef *huart = (UART_HandleTypeDef *)((DMA_HandleTypeDef *)hdma)->Parent;
+
+ huart->hdmarx->XferAbortCallback = NULL;
+
+ /* Check if an Abort process is still ongoing */
+ if (huart->hdmatx != NULL)
+ {
+ if (huart->hdmatx->XferAbortCallback != NULL)
+ {
+ return;
+ }
+ }
+
+ /* No Abort process still ongoing : All DMA channels are aborted, call user Abort Complete callback */
+ huart->TxXferCount = 0x00U;
+ huart->RxXferCount = 0x00U;
+
+ /* Reset ErrorCode */
+ huart->ErrorCode = HAL_UART_ERROR_NONE;
+
+ /* Restore huart->gState and huart->RxState to Ready */
+ huart->gState = HAL_UART_STATE_READY;
+ huart->RxState = HAL_UART_STATE_READY;
+
+ /* Call user Abort complete callback */
+#if (USE_HAL_UART_REGISTER_CALLBACKS == 1)
+ /* Call registered Abort complete callback */
+ huart->AbortCpltCallback(huart);
+#else
+ /* Call legacy weak Abort complete callback */
+ HAL_UART_AbortCpltCallback(huart);
+#endif /* USE_HAL_UART_REGISTER_CALLBACKS */
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief DMA UART Tx communication abort callback, when initiated by user by a call to
+ * HAL_UART_AbortTransmit_IT API (Abort only Tx transfer)
+ * (This callback is executed at end of DMA Tx Abort procedure following user abort request,
+ * and leads to user Tx Abort Complete callback execution).
+ * @param hdma Pointer to a DMA_HandleTypeDef structure that contains
+ * the configuration information for the specified DMA module.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+static void UART_DMATxOnlyAbortCallback(DMA_HandleTypeDef *hdma)
+{
+ UART_HandleTypeDef *huart = (UART_HandleTypeDef *)((DMA_HandleTypeDef *)hdma)->Parent;
+
+ huart->TxXferCount = 0x00U;
+
+ /* Restore huart->gState to Ready */
+ huart->gState = HAL_UART_STATE_READY;
+
+ /* Call user Abort complete callback */
+#if (USE_HAL_UART_REGISTER_CALLBACKS == 1)
+ /* Call registered Abort Transmit Complete Callback */
+ huart->AbortTransmitCpltCallback(huart);
+#else
+ /* Call legacy weak Abort Transmit Complete Callback */
+ HAL_UART_AbortTransmitCpltCallback(huart);
+#endif /* USE_HAL_UART_REGISTER_CALLBACKS */
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief DMA UART Rx communication abort callback, when initiated by user by a call to
+ * HAL_UART_AbortReceive_IT API (Abort only Rx transfer)
+ * (This callback is executed at end of DMA Rx Abort procedure following user abort request,
+ * and leads to user Rx Abort Complete callback execution).
+ * @param hdma Pointer to a DMA_HandleTypeDef structure that contains
+ * the configuration information for the specified DMA module.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+static void UART_DMARxOnlyAbortCallback(DMA_HandleTypeDef *hdma)
+{
+ UART_HandleTypeDef *huart = (UART_HandleTypeDef *)((DMA_HandleTypeDef *)hdma)->Parent;
+
+ huart->RxXferCount = 0x00U;
+
+ /* Restore huart->RxState to Ready */
+ huart->RxState = HAL_UART_STATE_READY;
+
+ /* Call user Abort complete callback */
+#if (USE_HAL_UART_REGISTER_CALLBACKS == 1)
+ /* Call registered Abort Receive Complete Callback */
+ huart->AbortReceiveCpltCallback(huart);
+#else
+ /* Call legacy weak Abort Receive Complete Callback */
+ HAL_UART_AbortReceiveCpltCallback(huart);
+#endif /* USE_HAL_UART_REGISTER_CALLBACKS */
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Sends an amount of data in non blocking mode.
+ * @param huart Pointer to a UART_HandleTypeDef structure that contains
+ * the configuration information for the specified UART module.
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+static HAL_StatusTypeDef UART_Transmit_IT(UART_HandleTypeDef *huart)
+{
+ uint16_t *tmp;
+
+ /* Check that a Tx process is ongoing */
+ if (huart->gState == HAL_UART_STATE_BUSY_TX)
+ {
+ if (huart->Init.WordLength == UART_WORDLENGTH_9B)
+ {
+ tmp = (uint16_t *) huart->pTxBuffPtr;
+ huart->Instance->DR = (uint16_t)(*tmp & (uint16_t)0x01FF);
+ if (huart->Init.Parity == UART_PARITY_NONE)
+ {
+ huart->pTxBuffPtr += 2U;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ huart->pTxBuffPtr += 1U;
+ }
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ huart->Instance->DR = (uint8_t)(*huart->pTxBuffPtr++ & (uint8_t)0x00FF);
+ }
+
+ if (--huart->TxXferCount == 0U)
+ {
+ /* Disable the UART Transmit Complete Interrupt */
+ __HAL_UART_DISABLE_IT(huart, UART_IT_TXE);
+
+ /* Enable the UART Transmit Complete Interrupt */
+ __HAL_UART_ENABLE_IT(huart, UART_IT_TC);
+ }
+ return HAL_OK;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ return HAL_BUSY;
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Wraps up transmission in non blocking mode.
+ * @param huart Pointer to a UART_HandleTypeDef structure that contains
+ * the configuration information for the specified UART module.
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+static HAL_StatusTypeDef UART_EndTransmit_IT(UART_HandleTypeDef *huart)
+{
+ /* Disable the UART Transmit Complete Interrupt */
+ __HAL_UART_DISABLE_IT(huart, UART_IT_TC);
+
+ /* Tx process is ended, restore huart->gState to Ready */
+ huart->gState = HAL_UART_STATE_READY;
+
+#if (USE_HAL_UART_REGISTER_CALLBACKS == 1)
+ /*Call registered Tx complete callback*/
+ huart->TxCpltCallback(huart);
+#else
+ /*Call legacy weak Tx complete callback*/
+ HAL_UART_TxCpltCallback(huart);
+#endif /* USE_HAL_UART_REGISTER_CALLBACKS */
+
+ return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Receives an amount of data in non blocking mode
+ * @param huart Pointer to a UART_HandleTypeDef structure that contains
+ * the configuration information for the specified UART module.
+ * @retval HAL status
+ */
+static HAL_StatusTypeDef UART_Receive_IT(UART_HandleTypeDef *huart)
+{
+ uint16_t *tmp;
+
+ /* Check that a Rx process is ongoing */
+ if (huart->RxState == HAL_UART_STATE_BUSY_RX)
+ {
+ if (huart->Init.WordLength == UART_WORDLENGTH_9B)
+ {
+ tmp = (uint16_t *) huart->pRxBuffPtr;
+ if (huart->Init.Parity == UART_PARITY_NONE)
+ {
+ *tmp = (uint16_t)(huart->Instance->DR & (uint16_t)0x01FF);
+ huart->pRxBuffPtr += 2U;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ *tmp = (uint16_t)(huart->Instance->DR & (uint16_t)0x00FF);
+ huart->pRxBuffPtr += 1U;
+ }
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ if (huart->Init.Parity == UART_PARITY_NONE)
+ {
+ *huart->pRxBuffPtr++ = (uint8_t)(huart->Instance->DR & (uint8_t)0x00FF);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ *huart->pRxBuffPtr++ = (uint8_t)(huart->Instance->DR & (uint8_t)0x007F);
+ }
+ }
+
+ if (--huart->RxXferCount == 0U)
+ {
+ /* Disable the UART Data Register not empty Interrupt */
+ __HAL_UART_DISABLE_IT(huart, UART_IT_RXNE);
+
+ /* Disable the UART Parity Error Interrupt */
+ __HAL_UART_DISABLE_IT(huart, UART_IT_PE);
+
+ /* Disable the UART Error Interrupt: (Frame error, noise error, overrun error) */
+ __HAL_UART_DISABLE_IT(huart, UART_IT_ERR);
+
+ /* Rx process is completed, restore huart->RxState to Ready */
+ huart->RxState = HAL_UART_STATE_READY;
+
+#if (USE_HAL_UART_REGISTER_CALLBACKS == 1)
+ /*Call registered Rx complete callback*/
+ huart->RxCpltCallback(huart);
+#else
+ /*Call legacy weak Rx complete callback*/
+ HAL_UART_RxCpltCallback(huart);
+#endif /* USE_HAL_UART_REGISTER_CALLBACKS */
+
+ return HAL_OK;
+ }
+ return HAL_OK;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ return HAL_BUSY;
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Configures the UART peripheral.
+ * @param huart Pointer to a UART_HandleTypeDef structure that contains
+ * the configuration information for the specified UART module.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+static void UART_SetConfig(UART_HandleTypeDef *huart)
+{
+ uint32_t tmpreg;
+ uint32_t pclk;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_UART_BAUDRATE(huart->Init.BaudRate));
+ assert_param(IS_UART_STOPBITS(huart->Init.StopBits));
+ assert_param(IS_UART_PARITY(huart->Init.Parity));
+ assert_param(IS_UART_MODE(huart->Init.Mode));
+
+ /*-------------------------- USART CR2 Configuration -----------------------*/
+ /* Configure the UART Stop Bits: Set STOP[13:12] bits
+ according to huart->Init.StopBits value */
+ MODIFY_REG(huart->Instance->CR2, USART_CR2_STOP, huart->Init.StopBits);
+
+ /*-------------------------- USART CR1 Configuration -----------------------*/
+ /* Configure the UART Word Length, Parity and mode:
+ Set the M bits according to huart->Init.WordLength value
+ Set PCE and PS bits according to huart->Init.Parity value
+ Set TE and RE bits according to huart->Init.Mode value
+ Set OVER8 bit according to huart->Init.OverSampling value */
+
+ tmpreg = (uint32_t)huart->Init.WordLength | huart->Init.Parity | huart->Init.Mode | huart->Init.OverSampling;
+ MODIFY_REG(huart->Instance->CR1,
+ (uint32_t)(USART_CR1_M | USART_CR1_PCE | USART_CR1_PS | USART_CR1_TE | USART_CR1_RE | USART_CR1_OVER8),
+ tmpreg);
+
+ /*-------------------------- USART CR3 Configuration -----------------------*/
+ /* Configure the UART HFC: Set CTSE and RTSE bits according to huart->Init.HwFlowCtl value */
+ MODIFY_REG(huart->Instance->CR3, (USART_CR3_RTSE | USART_CR3_CTSE), huart->Init.HwFlowCtl);
+
+ /* Check the Over Sampling */
+ if(huart->Init.OverSampling == UART_OVERSAMPLING_8)
+ {
+ /*------- UART-associated USART registers setting : BRR Configuration ------*/
+ if((huart->Instance == USART1))
+ {
+ pclk = HAL_RCC_GetPCLK2Freq();
+ huart->Instance->BRR = UART_BRR_SAMPLING8(pclk, huart->Init.BaudRate);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ pclk = HAL_RCC_GetPCLK1Freq();
+ huart->Instance->BRR = UART_BRR_SAMPLING8(pclk, huart->Init.BaudRate);
+ }
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /*------- UART-associated USART registers setting : BRR Configuration ------*/
+ if((huart->Instance == USART1))
+ {
+ pclk = HAL_RCC_GetPCLK2Freq();
+ huart->Instance->BRR = UART_BRR_SAMPLING16(pclk, huart->Init.BaudRate);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ pclk = HAL_RCC_GetPCLK1Freq();
+ huart->Instance->BRR = UART_BRR_SAMPLING16(pclk, huart->Init.BaudRate);
+ }
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif /* HAL_UART_MODULE_ENABLED */
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
|